Responses are stored securely, and the app implements Shopify's mandatory privacy webhooks — customer data requests and erasure requests (GDPR) are honored automatically. For anything specific, reach us via the in-app chat.

","heading","Is customer data handled safely?","faq-languages","

The admin interface is available in English, French, German, Spanish, Japanese, and Italian. Survey content is shown to customers exactly as you write it — author your questions in your storefront's language.

","What languages does the app support?","faq-reward","

Yes — add a Promo Code question as the final step, showing a discount code on screen or delivering it by email (\"Get coupon\"). Create the discount itself in Shopify first. See Reward Customers with Discount Codes.

","Can I reward customers for answering?","faq-tags","

Straight onto the customer (or order) record in your Shopify admin, like any other Shopify tag — usable in segments, discounts, and Shopify Flow. They're added by the survey's logic actions (see Branching Logic & Actions).

","Where do the customer tags from surveys go?","faq-duplicate-survey","

Yes — the duplicate row action in the survey list. The standard A/B pattern: duplicate, change one thing (wording, reward, timing), give each half the audience via targeting, and compare response rates in Analytics.

","Can I duplicate a survey?","faq-repeat","

Use the recurrence setting — Show only once, or When the answer is not completed (stops once they finish) — plus max responses per customer to cap submissions. For email surveys, the block duplicate window prevents re-sending to the same customer.

","How do I stop asking customers who already answered?","faq-realtime","

Individual responses appear on the Responses page (and sync to Google Sheets) in real time. Aggregated analytics refresh every few minutes, and very recent figures may adjust for up to two days as late events are counted.

","How quickly do responses appear?","faq-channels","

Yes — enable any combination of the six channels on the same survey. Each keeps its own targeting, timing, and styling, and all responses land in the same analytics. Review targeting per channel so the same customer isn't asked twice in two places.

","Can one survey run on several channels at once?","cf0e34053d1b2220bef9fab85","Survey Not Showing on Storefront","Symptom-based diagnosis — from the most common cause down.",[261,262,263,264,265],"Oct 16, 2026","2026-10-16T03:53:05.048Z",[259,260],"installing-ego-surveys","targeting-rules",{"_189":278,"_227":279,"_229":280},{"_189":275,"_227":276,"_229":277},{"_189":272,"_227":273,"_229":274},{"_189":269,"_227":270,"_229":271},{"_189":266,"_227":267,"_229":268},"still-not-showing","

Clear your browser cache and try another browser. If the survey still doesn't appear, contact us through the in-app chat with your store URL, the survey name and the page where you expect it to appear.

","Still not showing","4-check-targeting-and-timing","

The survey may be set up to skip you:

User targeting — for example, the survey is only for new customers, or for another country.
Timing — if the survey shows X seconds after load, wait for the delay.
Widget recurrence — if you already answered or closed the survey, it may not show again, for example with Show only one or Stop after X attempts.

Tip: Test in an incognito window, so you visit the store as a new customer. If the survey still doesn't show, remove the targeting conditions, test again, then add them back one at a time.

","4. Check targeting and timing","3-thank-you-page-check-the-block","

A survey on the Order Status/Thankyou page channel only appears after you add the Ego Surveys block to your Thank you page in the checkout editor. See Thank You & Order Status Page Surveys.

","3. Thank you page: check the block","2-check-the-survey-status-and-channel","

In Surveys, check that:

The survey Status is Active.
The channel you want is turned on in the survey's Channels tab.
For Onsite Survey, the page you are testing is selected in Page targeting — for example, the survey targets Product Pages but you are testing on the home page.

","2. Check the survey status and channel","1-check-the-app-embed","

Surveys on your store pages (Onsite Survey and Exit Intent) need the Ego Surveys app embed.

Open the app Dashboard. If the App embed card shows Inactive, click Activate app embed.
In the Theme Editor, turn on Ego Surveys and click Save.

If you recently published a new theme, turn the app embed on again for that theme.

See Installing & Activating Ego Surveys.

","1. Check the app embed","c9200646a65414066225417a7","shopify-flow-integration","Shopify Flow Integration","Trigger Flow automations the moment a customer submits a survey.",[292,293,294,295],"Oct 8, 2026","2026-10-08T03:15:41.415Z",[290,291],"Analytics & Integrations","branching-logic","google-sheets-integration",{"_189":305,"_227":306,"_229":307},{"_189":302,"_227":303,"_229":304},{"_189":299,"_227":300,"_229":301},{"_189":296,"_227":297,"_229":298},"use-survey-answers-in-flow","

To start a workflow based on a specific answer, combine Flow with survey logic:

In the survey's Workflow tab, add a logic rule that adds a customer tag or order tag for that answer — for example, tag customers who say Yes to \"Would you like a discount?\". See Branching Logic & Actions.
In Shopify Flow, build a workflow that reacts to that tag.

","Use survey answers in Flow","step-2-create-a-flow","

On the same page, under Integrate with any apps, click Create a flow. Shopify Flow opens
Click Select a trigger and choose Ego Post Purchase Survey. The flow runs every time a customer submits a survey response

You can also describe what you want in the Tell me what you want to create... box or click Browse templates to start from a ready-made flow

Add the conditions and actions you need - for example, send an email to your team or add the customer to a segment
Turn on the flow

Tip: Need help setting a flow? Click Let us sync to ask our team

","Step 2 - Create a flow","step-1-connect-shopify-flow","

In the app menu, click Integrations
On the Shopify Flow card, click Try now
In Connect to Shopify Flow, click Connect

","Step 1 - Connect Shopify Flow","overview","

Shopify Flow (powered by Shopify) lets you automate tasks and build workflows with a low-code editor. With Ego Surveys, you can start a workflow when a customer submits a survey - for example, notify your team about low ratings or add customers to a marketing segment

","Overview","c8206300f1ee253bd079244eb","Google Sheets Integration","Real-time response sync to Sheets, two organization modes, and scheduled email digests.",[315,316,317],"2026-10-16T03:52:38.575Z",[314,282],"viewing-exporting-responses",{"_189":305,"_227":324,"_229":307},{"_189":321,"_227":322,"_229":323},{"_189":318,"_227":319,"_229":320},"step-2-sync-a-survey","

Open the survey in the builder
Click the Connect tab in the top bar
Set up the sync for this survey, then click Save

If your Google account isn't connected yet, the Connect tab shows Google Sheets Not Connected. Click Go to Settings to connect it

New responses are added to your sheet automatically

","Step 2 - Sync a survey","step-1-connect-your-google-account","

In the app menu, click Integrations
On the Google Sheet card, click Settings. The card shows Disconnected until you connect
Click Connect
Sign in to your Google account and allows Ego Contact Form Survey to access Google Sheets

When the connection is complete, your Google account and allow Ego Surveys to access Google Sheets

","Step 1 - Connect your Google account","

With the Google Sheets integration, Ego Surveys sends survey results and responses to your Google Sheet as they come in - no manual export needed. This makes it easy to analyze the data and share it with your team

","c3c65a33052ed625a60eec51f","Viewing & Exporting Responses","Browse individual answers, archive noise, and export to Excel — with the full column list.",[331,332,333],"2026-10-08T02:29:30.936Z",[291,217],{"_189":340,"_227":341,"_229":342},{"_189":337,"_227":338,"_229":339},{"_189":334,"_227":335,"_229":336},"export-responses","

Choose a survey with Select survey and set the date range. The Export responses button is available after you select a survey.
Click Export responses in the top right corner.
The file with the responses downloads to your computer.

Tip: To keep a live copy of your responses, connect Google Sheets. See Google Sheets Integration.

","Export responses","find-the-responses-you-need","

Select survey - choose which survey to show
Date range - choose the period, for example Yesterday
Active/ Archived - switch between current responses and the ones you have archived
Search, filter and sort - use the icons on the right of the list
Show Row - choose how many responses to show per page

","Find the responses you need","open-your-responses","

In the app menu, click Responses
Click the Survey tab. The page opens the Forms tab by default

","Open your responses","c281e61e3f757d8d53e501939","Understanding Survey Analytics","Every metric defined, per-question charts, and how to read the numbers.",[351,352,353],"2026-10-08T02:18:13.278Z","3 min",true,[314,291],{"_189":360,"_227":361,"_229":362},{"_189":357,"_227":358,"_229":359},{"_189":354,"_227":355,"_229":356},"results-for-each-question","

Below the metrics, each screen of the survey has its own card, in the same order as your survey. Each question card shows its Responses, Displays and Response rate, followed by the answers:

Choice and rating questions - see how often each answer was picked. Switch between Bar, Pie and Table views
Text questions and Promo Code - see the list of answers. Use Search responses to find a specific answer

To see each customer's full set of answers, go to Responses. See Viewing & Exporting Responses.

","Results for each question","metrics-explained","

Metric	Meaning	What a bad number tells you
Total impressions	How many times the survey was displayed.	Low → targeting too narrow, or channel/embed off.
Response rate	Share of impressions where the customer started answering.	Low → first question or placement isn't compelling; try a reward or a better opening question.
Completion rate	Share of impressions that ended in a completed survey.	High responses but low completions → survey too long; cut questions.
Survey reach	Distinct visitors who saw the survey (unique people, not views).	—
Close survey	How many times (and what share) the survey was dismissed.	High → placement or timing feels intrusive; add a delay or move the position.
Average completion time	Average time from first interaction to completion.	Long → questions are hard to parse; simplify wording.

","Metrics explained","the-analytics-page","

In the app menu, click Analytics
Click the Survey tab
Choose a survey with Select survey
Choose a date range: Today, Last 3 days, Last 7 days, Last 14 days or Last 30 days

","The Analytics page","cmv91tfbo00212upac7mj5m2b","Targeting Rules","Show your survey only to the customers you want to hear from",[373,374,375],"2026-10-15T04:38:30.613Z","2026-10-16T03:16:43.026Z",[371,372],"Surveys","onsite-widget-exit-intent","email-surveys",{"_189":305,"_227":382,"_229":307},{"_189":379,"_227":380,"_229":381},{"_189":376,"_227":377,"_229":378},"available-conditions","

The conditions you can use depend on the channel

Condition	Shows the survey to…	Channels
Customer	Customers by type or history: All customer, New customer, Return customer, Customer tags, Order count or Customer total spent.	Onsite Survey, Order Status/Thankyou page, Email
Product	Customers who bought certain products. Choose Product Id or Variant Id, then click Select to pick the products.	Order Status/Thankyou page
Product on cart	Visitors who have products in their cart.	Exit Intent
Number of and frequency of site visits	Visitors who have visited your store a certain number of times.	Onsite Survey, Exit Intent
Number of page views in current session	Visitors who have viewed a certain number of pages in this visit.	Onsite Survey, Exit Intent
Have visited X page Y times	Visitors who have visited a certain page a number of times.	Onsite Survey, Exit Intent
Login state	Visitors who are logged in, or not logged in.	Onsite Survey, Exit Intent, Order Status/Thankyou page
Country	Visitors from the country you choose.	Onsite Survey, Exit Intent

","Available conditions","set-up-targeting","

Open your survey and click the Channels tab
Click the arrow next to a channel to open its settings
Under User targeting, tick the conditions you want to use and fill in their details
Click Save

","Set up targeting","

By default, a survey is shown to everyone who reaches the channel. With User targeting, you can limit it to certain customers - for example, only new customers, or only visitors from a certain country

Targeting is set per channel, so the same survey can target different customers on each channel

","cmv91rt2j001z2upaez4da2z6","Email Surveys","Send a survey to customers by email after they place an order",[391,392,393,394,395],"2026-10-15T04:37:15.115Z","2026-10-16T03:11:17.798Z",[260,390],"survey-channels-overview",{"_189":305,"_227":408,"_229":307},{"_189":405,"_227":406,"_229":407},{"_189":402,"_227":403,"_229":404},{"_189":399,"_227":400,"_229":401},{"_189":396,"_227":397,"_229":398},"step-4-send-a-test-email-and-save","

Scroll to Send test email at the bottom of the settings panel
Enter your email address and click the send icon
Check the email in your inbox, then click Save

","Step 4 - Send a test email and save","step-3-customize-the-email","

In the settings panel on the right (Post-purchase email):

Content - edit the Subject, the email content and the Text button, for example Start your survey
Color theme, Header logo, Background page, Widget, Button and Side logo - change the look of the email to match your brand

The preview in the center shows the email as customers will see it

","Step 3 - Customize the email","step-2-choose-when-the-email-is-sent","

Setting	What it does
Trigger settings	When to send the email — for example, Send 1 Hours After Order Fulfilled.
User targeting	Tick Customer to send the email only to certain customers — for example new customers, returning customers, or customers with a certain tag. See Targeting Rules.
Block duplicate email send in	Prevents the same customer from getting the survey email again within the time you set, for example 1 hour. Useful when a customer places several orders in a short time.

Tip: For product feedback, send the email a few days after the order is fulfilled, so customers have time to use the product.

","Step 2 - Choose when the email is sent","step-1-turn-on-the-email","

Open your survey and click the Channels tab
Turn on Email and click the arrow next to it to open its settings

","Step 1 - Turn on the email","

With the Email channel, customers receive an email with a button the opens your survey. You choose when the email is sent, and you can customize its text and design

","cmv91qixc001v2upaqvfmgep4","post-purchase-surveys","Thank You & Order Status Page Surveys","Show a survey on the Thank you page, right after customers complete checkout",[417,418,419,420],"2026-10-15T04:36:15.312Z","2026-10-16T03:02:43.670Z",[],{"_189":305,"_227":430,"_229":307},{"_189":427,"_227":428,"_229":429},{"_189":424,"_227":425,"_229":426},{"_189":421,"_227":422,"_229":423},"step-3-save-and-test","

Back in the survey builder, change the Button labels (Back, Next, Submit) in the settings panel if needed. Leave a field empty to use the default label.
Click Save.
Place a test order in your store. The survey appears on the Thank you page.

Tips:

Keep it short - one to three questions work best, because customers are about to leave.
Use only one active survey on this channel. If several active surveys use it, they all appear on the Thank you page.
The Post-purchase Survey template is a good starting point. See Survey Templates.

","Step 3 - Save and test","step-2-add-the-ego-contact-form-survey-block-to-your-thank-you-page","

In the settings panel on the right, click Add to Thank you page. The checkout editor opens on the Thank you page
In the Apps panel on the left, search for Ego
Under Ego Contact Form Survey, click the block to add it. The survey appears below the \"Thank you\" message
Optional: use the arrows on the block to move it up or down the page
Click Save in the top right corner

Important: turning on the channel alone is not enough - the survey only appears after you add and save the block. If you need help, click Contact us in the settings panel

","Step 2 - Add the Ego Contact Form Survey block to your Thank you page","step-1-turn-on-the-channel","

Open your survey and click the Channels tab
Turn on Order Status/ Thankyou page
Click the arrow next to the channel to set:

Timing - when the survey appears
User targeting - show the survey only to certain customers, for example new customers. See Targeting Rules
Widget recurrence - how often the same customer sees the survey

","Step 1 - Turn on the channel","

The Thank you page is a great place to ask questions such as \"How did you hear about us?\" - customers have just placed an order and are happy to answer a quick question

To show a survey on the Thank you page, you need to:

Turn on the Order Status/ Thankyou page channel in your survey
Add the Ego Contact Form Survey block to your Thank you page

This channel doesn't use the theme app embed. Instead, the survey is shown through a block that you add in the checkout editor

","cmv91osxl001t2upagkrr7tfe","On-site Widget & Exit-Intent Surveys","Show a survey on your store pages, or when visitors are about to leave",[439,440,441,442,443,444],"2026-10-15T04:34:54.969Z","2026-10-16T02:50:30.209Z",[260,438],"survey-appearance",{"_189":305,"_227":458,"_229":307},{"_189":427,"_227":457,"_229":429},{"_189":454,"_227":455,"_229":456},{"_189":451,"_227":452,"_229":453},{"_189":448,"_227":449,"_229":450},{"_189":445,"_227":446,"_229":447},"exit-intent-settings","

Exit Intent has the same settings as Onsite Survey, with two differences:

There is no Page targeting - the survey can appear on any page when the visitor is about to leave
User targeting has Product on cart instead of Customer, so you can show the survey only to visitors who have products in their cart. This is useful for asking why they didn't check out

","Exit Intent settings","step-4-save","

Click Save. Visit one of the selected pages in your store to see the survey

Testing tip: If you have already answered or closed the survey, it may not show again because of Widget recurrence. Use an incognito window to test as a new visitot

","Step 4 - Save","step-3-customize-the-widget","

In the settings panel on the right, choose the widget Position (bottom left, center, or bottom right), a Color theme, and the style of the widget, answers and buttons. See Customizing Survey Appearance

","Step 3 - Customize the widget","step-2-choose-where-and-when-the-survey-appears","

Setting	What it does
Page targeting	The pages where the survey appears: Home Page, Product Pages, Collection Pages, Cart Page and Blog Pages.
Timing	When the survey appears: Show immediately or X seconds after load.
User targeting	Show the survey only to certain visitors — for example by customer type, login state, country or how often they visit. See Targeting Rules
Widget recurrence	How often the same visitor sees the survey. See the options below.

Widget recurrence options:

When the answer is not completed - keep showing the survey until the visitor finishes it
Show only one - show the survey once per visitor
Always show - show the survey on every visit to a selected page
Stop after X attempts - wait a set time, for example 1 day, before showing it again
Delay before reappearing - wait a set time, for example 1 day, before showing it again

","Step 2 - Choose where and when the survey appears","

Open your survey and click the Channels tab
Turn on Onsite Survey or Exit Intent
Click the arrow next to the channel to open its settings

","

Onsite Survey shows the survey as a widget on the store pages you choose, such as the home page or product pages
Exit Intent shows the survey when a visitor is about to leave your store - a good moment to ask why they didn't buy

Both channels need the app embed to be turned on. See Installing & Activating Ego Contact Form Survey.

","cmv91jxwu001o2upavyl5bhy1","Survey Channels Overview","The six places a survey can appear, and how to choose the right one",[466,467,468,469],"2026-10-15T04:31:08.142Z","2026-10-16T02:30:42.430Z",[371,410,372],{"_189":305,"_227":479,"_229":307},{"_189":476,"_227":477,"_229":478},{"_189":473,"_227":474,"_229":475},{"_189":470,"_227":471,"_229":472},"which-channel-should-i-use","

Learn how customers found you → Order Status/Thankyou page. Customers have just bought and are happy to answer a quick question.
Get feedback while customers browse → Onsite Survey.
Find out why visitors leave → Exit Intent.
Ask for feedback after delivery → Email.
Share a survey on social media or in a newsletter → Standalone Page.

Tip: Start with one channel per survey. If you turn on several channels, check their settings so the same customer isn't asked twice.

","Which channel should I use?","set-up-a-channel","

Open your survey and click the Channels tab.
Turn on the toggle next to the channel you want to use.
Click the arrow next to the channel to see its settings, such as which pages the survey appears on, when it appears, and who sees it.
Use the settings panel on the right to adjust the look of the survey and any extra setup for that channel.
Click Save.

Before you start:
Onsite Survey and Exit Intent need the app embed to be turned on. See Installing & Activating Ego Contact Form Survey.
Order Status/Thankyou page needs the Ego Contact Form Survey block added to your Thank you page. See Thank You & Order Status Page Surveys

","Set up a channel","available-channels","

Channel	Where customers see it
Order Status/Thankyou page	On the Thank you page, right after checkout.
Onsite Survey	A widget on the store pages you choose, such as the home page or product pages.
Exit Intent	A widget shown when a visitor is about to leave your store.
Standalone Page	A survey page with its own link that you can share.
Email	An email sent to customers after they place an order.
Embed Survey	Inside a section of your store's theme.

","Available channels","

A channel is where customers see your survey. One survey can run on several channels at the same time, and all responses are collected in the same place.

You turn channels on and set them up in the Channels tab of the survey builder.

","c3fa31577caf28eb966dfcf89","Customizing Survey Appearance","Colors, backgrounds, logos, positions — styled per channel, with a live preview.",[487,488,489,490],"Oct 15, 2026","2026-10-15T04:32:43.016Z",[390,371],{"_189":305,"_227":500,"_229":307},{"_189":497,"_227":498,"_229":499},{"_189":494,"_227":495,"_229":496},{"_189":491,"_227":492,"_229":493},"step-3-style-the-survey-widget","

The look of the survey widget is set per channel, so the same survey can look different on each channel

Click the Channels tab and click the arrow next to a channel, for example Onsite Survey.
In the settings panel on the right, customize:

Position - where the widget appears on the page: bottom left, center or bottim right
Color theme - pick a present color to style the whole widget at once
Widget - the corner shape, border, colors of the heading, description and progress bar, and the background (Solid or Gradient). Tick Open glass effect background for a frosted-glass look
Answer - the corner shape, border and text color of the answer options
Button - the button labels (Back, Next, Submit), shape, border, and colors for the default and active states
Side logo - turn on and click Browse File to show your logo next to the survey

","Step 3 - Style the survey widget","step-2-set-up-the-welcome-screen","

In the Question tab, click Welcome Screen. Make sure its toggle is on
Edit the Heading, Description and Button text
Optional: click Browse File to add an image (.svg, .jpg, .jpeg or .png), for example your logo or a banner.

","Step 2 - Set up the Welcome Screen","step-1-style-the-survey-banner","

In the Questions tab, click Survey Banner. Make sure its toggle is on
In the settings panel on the right, edit:

Heading and Description - the text in the banner
Position - where the banner sits, for example Outside the survey
Shape - square or rounded corners, and the corner size in px
Border thickness - the width of the border
Colors - for the heading, description and border
Background page - a Solid color, a Gradient or an Image

","Step 1 - Style the Survey Banner","

You can customize how your survey looks in the survey builder. Every change shows right, away in the preview, so you can check it before saving

The main places to customize are:

Survey Banner - the colored bar at the top of the survey
Welcome Screen - the intro screen before the first question
Channel settings - the position, colors, buttons and logo of the survey widget on each channel

","c2a071216925d40ca941f2b25","discount-rewards","Reward Customers with Discount Codes","Set up the Promo Code question — on-screen or email-gated — step by step.",[509,510,511,512,513],"2026-10-15T04:32:20.110Z",[508,372],"question-types",{"_189":305,"_227":526,"_229":307},{"_189":523,"_227":524,"_229":525},{"_189":520,"_227":521,"_229":522},{"_189":517,"_227":518,"_229":519},{"_189":514,"_227":515,"_229":516},"step-4-save-and-check","

Click Save. Use the preview to check how the code looks on desktop and mobile

","Step 4 - Save and check","step-3-set-up-the-promo-code","

Heading and Description - the title and message customers see, for example \"Thank you! Here's 10% off you next order.\"
Discount code - enter the code you created in Step 1. Customers see it in a box with a copy icon
Show button - turn on to show a button below the code. Enter its text in Button, for example Get coupon

","Step 3 - Set up the Promo Code","step-2-add-a-promo-code-to-your-survey","

Open your survey in the builder
in the Questions tab, click Add content below the question list
In the Page group, click Promo Code, It is added at the end of your questions, so customers see it after they answer

Use the Add content button below the question list. The one under End screen only offers Thank You and Redirect URL

","Step 2 - Add a Promo Code to your survey","step-1-create-the-discount-in-shopify","

From your Shopify admin, go to the Discounts and click Create discount
Choose a discount type, for example Amount off order for 10% off the whole order
Enter the discount code, for example THANKS10, and set the discount value
Click Save

The survey only shows the code. Setting such as usage limits, minimum purchase and end date are controlled in Shopify

","Step 1 - Create the discount in Shopify","

You can reward customers with a discount code at the end of your survey. The code is shown with the Promo Code content type, so customers can copy it and use it at checkout.

To offer a reward, you need to:

Create the discount in Shopify
Add a Promo Code to your survey
Save the survey

","ce9546080d1bf3799cce581e9","Branching Logic & Actions","Route customers by their answers — and trigger emails and tags — with worked examples.",[533,534,535],"2026-10-15T04:32:07.780Z",[282,508],{"_189":542,"_227":543,"_229":544},{"_189":539,"_227":540,"_229":541},{"_189":536,"_227":537,"_229":538},"what-a-logic-rule-has","

Part	What it does
Conditions	When the rule runs — for example, when the rating is Less than 3.
Navigation Action	Where the customer goes next: Continue to next question, Go to specific question or End survey.
Additional Actions	Optional: Add customer tag or Add order tag to tag the customer or order in Shopify.

The available conditions depend on the question type.

Click Save when you're done

","What a logic rule has","where-to-find-it","

In the survey builder, click the Workflow tab. Each question appears as a card. Click a card, then click Add new logic

","Where to find it","how-logic-works","

Branching logic makes the survey react to each answer. A rule = a condition about the answer + an action that fires when it matches. Rules are built visually in the survey's workflow tab, per question. Without rules, the survey simply runs page by page.

","How logic works","cacd97e7743438e31fcc27f7c","Question Types & Settings","Add questions to your survey, choose the right type, and set up each question.",[553,554,555,556],"2026-10-15T04:26:31.638Z","4 min",[552,290,502],"create-your-first-survey",{"_189":566,"_227":567,"_229":568},{"_189":563,"_227":564,"_229":565},{"_189":560,"_227":561,"_229":562},{"_189":557,"_227":558,"_229":559},"use-the-advance-settings","

Under Advance settings, turn on the options you need. The options depend on the question type.

Setting	What it does	Available for
Required	Customers must answer to continue.	All types except Statement and Promo Code
Randomize	Shuffles the answer order for each customer.	Single Choice, Multiple Choice, Dropdown, Button List, Image Choice, Ranked Choice, Like/Dislike
Alphabetical order	Sorts answers from A to Z.	Dropdown
\"Other\" option	Adds an Other answer customers can type in.	Single Choice, Multiple Choice, Dropdown, Button List
Show label	Shows the answer text below each image.	Image Choice
Multiple selection	Lets customers pick more than one answer.	Button List, Image Choice
Change layout	Changes how answers are arranged, for example two images per row instead of three.	Single Choice, Multiple Choice, Button List, Image Choice

Tips:

Turn on Required only for questions you really need - it can lower completion rates.
Use Randomize for questions like \"How did you hear about us?\" so customers don't just pick the first answer.
Check the preview on desktop and mobile after each change.

","Use the advance settings","set-up-the-queston","

Click a question in the Questions tab. Its settings open in the panel on the right.

[Image: Settings panel of a question (ảnh 20)]

Every question has a Heading, an optional Description and an optional Image. Other fields depend on the type:

Question type	Extra fields
Single Choice, Multiple Choice, Dropdown, Button List, Ranked Choice	Answer(s) — add, edit, reorder or remove answers.
Image Choice	Answer(s), with Upload Image for each answer.
Like/Dislike	Answer(s) — the items customers rate with a thumbs up or thumbs down.
Binary Choice	Two answers (Yes / No). You can change their text only.
Consent	One answer — the text customers tick to agree.
Star Rating	Values range (number of stars), Icon, ratingText (text shown after rating).
NPS	Values range, Left / Center / Right label.
Slider	Left / Right (lowest and highest value), Increments, Start position, Left / Center / Right label.
Single-line Answer, Multi-line Answer	Placeholder, Max characters.
Number, Email, Website	Placeholder.
Phone Number	Phone code — let customers choose their country code.
Address	No extra fields. Customers fill in street, city, state, ZIP code and country.
Date	Date format, minimum and maximum date, Format display.
Statement	Button text.
Promo Code	Discount code, Button, Send email.

","Set up the queston","choose-the-question-type","

Group	Types	Use them to…
Choice	Single Choice, Multiple Choice, Binary Choice, Dropdown, Button List, Image Choice, Consent, Like/Dislike	Let customers pick from answers you set — for example \"How did you hear about us?\"
Rating & Ranking	NPS, Star Rating, Ranked Choice, Slider	Measure satisfaction, loyalty or preferences on a scale.
Text	Single-line Answer, Multi-line Answer, Number, Date	Collect open answers, numbers or dates.
Contact info	Email, Phone Number, Address, Website	Collect contact details, for example to follow up or send a discount code.
Page	Statement, Promo Code	Show text without a question, or show a discount code. See Reward Customers with Discount Codes.

End screen - the screen customers see after the last question. Click Add content under End screen to choose Thank You (a thank-you message) or Redirect To URL (send customers to another page).

The Welcome Screen is not in the Add content menu. Turn it on or off with its toggle at the top of the Questions tab.

Tip: Choice and rating questions are quicker to answer and show as charts in Analytics. Start with them and end with one optional text question.

","Choose the question type","add-a-question","

In the survey builder, open the Question tab
Click Add content below the question list
Hover over a question type to see an example in the center of the screen, then click it to add it to your survey

After adding a question, click it in the list to edit its text, answers and settings. To change the type of an existing question, use the dropdown at the top of its settings panel

","Add a question","cf173a62869782b1fc4d81908","publish-a-form","Triggers & Publishing","Choose when the form appears, which pages it shows on, and switch on the theme app embed.",[581,582,583,584,585],"Oct 9, 2026","2026-10-05T03:40:00.000Z","2026-10-09T03:42:53.508Z",[579,580],"Form Builder","create-your-first-form","form-design",{"_189":598,"_227":599,"_229":571},{"_189":595,"_227":596,"_229":597},{"_189":592,"_227":593,"_229":594},{"_189":589,"_227":590,"_229":591},{"_189":586,"_227":587,"_229":588},"turn-on-a-form-on-or-off","

In the Form builder list, change the form's Status to Active or Inactive — no need to open the builder. This is the quickest way to pause a form or bring it back.

","Turn on a form on or off","step-3-publish-the-form","

Click Publish in the top right corner of the builder.
In Publish your form, set:
- Customer visibility — who sees the form, for example All customer.
- Show in page — where the form appears. Keep All pages, or choose a page and click Add more page to add others.
Click Save.

The Form type in this window shows the type you chose in Design and can't be changed here.

$\"Publish$

","Step 3 - Publish the form","step-2-set-up-the-trigger-buttons-float-forms","

A Float form opens from a round button in the corner of the screen. In the Triggers panel, you can:

Turn the button on or off with Display trigger button, and choose whether to Hide trigger button when the form is open.
Choose the Button alignment — bottom left, bottom center or bottom right.
Style the button for the Open and Close states: label, icon, border, colors and size.
Set the Bottom spacing and Right spacing from the edge of the screen.
Choose an Effect and an Animation style, for example Slide in from bottom.

","Step 2 - Set up the trigger buttons (Float forms)","step-1-choose-when-the-form-appears","

In the form builder, click the Triggers icon in the icon rail on the left

In When to show the form, choose:
- When user enters the page
- When user scrolls the page
- When user stays for a while
- When user intends to leave the page
- When user clicks the trigger button
In When to reopen the form after it is closed, choose Do not show again, After page reload, After specific time delay or On new browser tab.
Optional: click Reset form visibility to show the form again to everyone, including customers who have already closed it.

Triggers apply to Pop-up, Float and Side-in forms. An On Page form is shown where it is placed on the page.

","Step 1 - Choose when the form appears","triggers-publishing","

Choose when your form appears, publish it to your store, and turn it on or off

","cf805aec0f1d4283d47d95ced","form-email-notifications","Email Notifications","Get an email when a form is submitted and send the customer an automatic acknowledgement.",[609,610,611,612],"2026-10-09T03:27:00.124Z",[607,608],"form-after-submit","form-responses",{"_189":622,"_227":623,"_229":624},{"_189":619,"_227":620,"_229":621},{"_189":616,"_227":617,"_229":618},{"_189":613,"_227":614,"_229":615},"step-3-send-customers-an-automatic-reply","

Expand Auto-response email to customer to send customers a confirmation after they submit the form - for example, to thank them and tell them what happens next.

Tick Send confirmation email to customer.
In To, choose the form's Email field. The reply is sent to the address the customer entered. If the form has several email fields, use the main one.
Optional: add addresses in BCC, and enter a Reply to address for customer replies. Leave Reply to empty to use your store email.
Edit the Subject and Content. Click Add variables to insert details such as your store name.

The form must include an Email field, so the reply has an address to go to

Click Save when you're done

","Step 3 - Send customers an automatic reply","step-2-get-notified-about-new-submissions","

Expand Admin notification email and set it up:

Tick Send notification email to admin.
In To, enter the email addresses that should receive the notification. By default, it's your store email.
Optional: add more addresses in BCC, separated by commas.
Edit the Subject and Content of the email. Click Add variables to insert details from the submission, such as the form name, the submission date or all of the customer's answers.

","Step 2 - Get notified about new submissions","step-1-open-the-email-panel","

In the form builder, click the Email icon (envelope) in the icon rail on the left

","Step 1 - Open the Email panel","what-email-notifications","

Get an email when a form is submitted, and send customers an automatic reply

","What Email Notifications","c4c3aeed4a6834e030e26e1bf","What Happens After Submit","Configure the thank-you message or redirect the customer once the form is sent.",[631,632,633,634],"2026-10-09T03:15:52.093Z",[601,608],{"_189":644,"_227":645,"_229":626},{"_189":641,"_227":642,"_229":643},{"_189":638,"_227":639,"_229":640},{"_189":635,"_227":636,"_229":637},"step-3-set-up-the-message","

If you show a message:

Write it in Message content. Use the toolbar to change the font, size, alignment, color and style, or to add lists and links.
Choose the Message position:
- Inside form (above fields)
- Inside form (below submit button)
- Outside form (above page content)
- Outside form (footer)
- Floating toast message - a small pop-up message.
Optional: set Hide after (seconds) to hide the message after a few seconds. Leave it empty or set it to 0 to keep the message on screen.
Optional: tick Hide form after submit to hide the form once it has been sent

Click Save when you're done

","Step 3 - Set up the message","step-2-choose-the-behavior","

Under After submission behavior, choose one of the following:

Option	What customers see
Show successful message	A success message, while the form stays on the page.
Show Thank You page (replace form)	A thank-you page that replaces the form.
Redirect to URL	Another page, at the link you enter.
Close form	The form closes.

","Step 2 - Choose the behavior","step-1-open-after-submit","

In the form builder, click the After submit icon in the rail on the left

$\"After$

","Step 1 - Open After Submit","what-happens-after-submit","

Choose what customers see after submit the form

","ccef1f8cfa5798597eaaf241b","Design & Style Your Form","Change the display type, width, spacing, colours and fonts — or drop in your own CSS and JavaScript.",[653,654,655,656,657],"2026-10-09T03:06:13.719Z",[652,570],"form-builder-overview",{"_189":670,"_227":671,"_229":672},{"_189":667,"_227":668,"_229":669},{"_189":664,"_227":665,"_229":666},{"_189":661,"_227":662,"_229":663},{"_189":658,"_227":659,"_229":660},"advanced-custom-code-and-schedule","

Click the Settings icon (gear) in the icon rail for more options:

$\"Settings$

Custom CSS — add a Form container class (a CSS class name added to the form) and your own CSS for this form.
Custom JavaScript — run your own JavaScript when the form loads or is submitted. This is for advanced users.
Display schedule — set a Start date and Start time for the form. Tick Set end date and time to stop showing it after a certain date.

","Advanced: Custom code and schedule","step-4-preview-and-save","

Use the device icons in the toolbar to check the form on desktop and mobile, and Test forms to try a real submission. Then click Save.

","Step 4 - Preview and save","step-3-style-the-text-fields-and-buttons","

Typography - choose one Font for the whole form, then set the size, style and color of the Label, Description, Placeholder, Options and Button text.
Form Image - add an image to the form.
Input Field and Button - change the look of the fields and buttons.

","Step 3 - Style the text, fields and buttons","step-2-choose-the-form-type-and-layout"," $\"Form$

Click Form Design to set up the form container:

Form Type - how the form appears: On Page, Pop-up, Float or Side-in. Click a type to switch - the preview updates right away.
Form width - the maximum width of the form.
Spacing - the space around the content. Click the link icon to set all four sides at once.
Corner, Border thickness and Border color - the shape and border of the form.
Background - a Color (single color or gradient) or an Image.

","Step 2 - Choose the form type and layout","step-1-open-the-design-panel","

In the form builder, click the Design icon (brush) in the icon rail on the left.

The panel has six sections: Form Design, Typography, Form Image, Input Field, Button and CSS Custom. Click a section to open it, and click the back arrow to return to the list.

","Step 1 - Open The Design panel","cfa8e2060d0901145e2da379b","multi-step-forms","Multi-step Forms & Conditional Display","Split a long form over several pages, style the step indicator, and show or hide fields based on earlier answers.",[681,682,683,684],"2026-10-09T02:48:22.600Z",[680,580],"form-elements",{"_189":305,"_227":694,"_229":307},{"_189":691,"_227":692,"_229":693},{"_189":688,"_227":689,"_229":690},{"_189":685,"_227":686,"_229":687},"step-3-show-a-field-or-page-only-when-it-s-needed","

Click the filed or page you want to show or hide
Under Conditional display, turn on Settings
Build the rule:

If - choose an earlier field
is - choose the condition, for example Empty
Do - choose what happens, for example Show page

Click + And or + Or to add more conditions. Click the bin icon to remove on

$\"Conditional$

A rule can only use fields that come before the field or page you are setting up.

Click Save when you're done.

","Step 3 - Show a field or page only when it's needed","step-2-style-the-step-indicator","

The page settings open when you click Add pages:

Label - the name of the step
Icon - an optional icon for the step
Color - choose Enable to set your own colors for the text, icon and background
Layout - how the steps are shown: Progress Dots, Tab Steps or Chevron Steps

$\"Step$

","Step 2 - Style the step indicator","step-1-add-a-page","

In the Elements panel, click Add pages at the bottom of the structure. A new page, for example Page 2, is added to the structure, and the page settings open
Add fields to the new page with Add element

The preview now shows a step indicator ad a Back button, so customers can move between pages

","Step 1 - Add a page","

Multi-step forms split a long form into pages. Customers fill in one page at a time, which makes long forms feel shorter.
Conditional display shows or hides a field or a page depending on how the customer answered an earlier field.

","cd60812393c72a6cb00cafc1e","Add & Configure Form Fields","The element library, how rows and columns work, and the settings every field shares.",[701,702,703,704],"2026-10-09T02:22:42.106Z",[674,580],{"_189":305,"_227":714,"_229":307},{"_189":711,"_227":712,"_229":713},{"_189":708,"_227":709,"_229":710},{"_189":705,"_227":706,"_229":707},"step-3-edit-the-header-and-footer","

Click Header at the top of the structure to edit the top of the form:

Show Header - untick to hide the header
Title and Sub-title - the text, font, font size, style, alignment and color of each line
Animation (under Advanced settings) - animate the header when the form appears

Click Footer at the bottom of the structure to edit the content below the form in the same way

Click Save when you're done

","Step 3 - Edit the header and footer","step-2-set-up-an-element","

Click an element in the structure or in the preview to open its settings. The settings depend on the element. For example, a Name field has:

Label - the text shown above the field. It is also the column name in Responses
Required - customers must fill in the field before they can submit
Placeholder - example text shown in the empty field
Description - optional help text below the field
Use customer name as default value - fills in the name of logged in customers
Limit characters - sets a minimum and maximum length
Column width - Full, Half or Third. Use Half or Third to place two or three fields side by side in one row

To show or hide an element based on earlier answers, use Conditional display. See Multi-step Forms & Condtitional Display

","Step 2 - Set up an element","step-1-add-an-element","

In the structure on the left, click Add element:

Inside a Row - to add the element to that row, next to the existing fields
below a Rows - to add the element in a new row

The Add content library opens. Click an element to add it

To add an empty row first, click Add row at the top of the library

","Step 1 - Add an element","

A form is made of elements - fields, text, images, and more - arranged in rows on one or more pages. You add and edit elements in the Elements panel of the form builder

","c2fb7e5d67f86f19534669428","Form Builder Overview","What the Form Builder does, the four ways a form can appear on your storefront, and how to read the form list.",[721,722,723],"2026-10-16T03:49:16.424Z",[579,570],{"_189":730,"_227":731,"_229":732},{"_189":727,"_227":728,"_229":729},{"_189":724,"_227":725,"_229":726},"how-a-form-goes-live","

Create a form from a template or from scratch.
Add fields and customize the design.
Set when the form appears and publish it to the pages you want.
Make sure the Ego Contact Form Survey app embed is turned on in your theme. Without it, forms don't appear on your storefront. See Installing & Activating Ego Contact Form Survey.

","How a form goes live","the-form-list","

In the app menu, click Forms. The Forms builder list shows all your forms. To create a new one, click Create new form

$\"Form$

Column	What it shows
Form name	The name of the form. Click it to open the builder
Status	Active or Inactive. Switch it straight from the list — inactive forms never render on the storefront.
Created	When the form was created.
Publish	Where the form is shown, e.g. All pages. Empty until you publish it.
Responses	Number of submissions received.
Actions	Icon to edit, duplicate, see the analytics of, or delete the form

Use the All/ Active/ Inactive tabs to filter the list, and the icon on the right to search and filter

","The form list","what-is-the-form-builder","

The Form Builder lets you build any customer-facing form — contact, quote request, custom order, wholesale or warranty registration, appointment booking — and show it on your storefront without touching your theme code.

A form is built from elements (fields, text, images, ratings, file upload…) arranged in rows across one or more pages. You choose how it appears:

On Page — inside the page content
Pop-up — in a window over the page
Float — as a floating button in the corner of the screen
Side-in — sliding in from the side of the screen

Submissions are saved in Responses, and you can get an email each time a form is submitted

","What is the Form Builder?","c71fc4284941292fe12905d0f","Create Your First Survey","A full walkthrough of the builder — from template to live survey, with a worked example.",[740,741,742,743,744],"2026-10-16T03:48:18.019Z",[508,390,410],"Getting Started",{"_189":757,"_227":758,"_229":759},{"_189":754,"_227":755,"_229":756},{"_189":751,"_227":752,"_229":753},{"_189":748,"_227":749,"_229":750},{"_189":745,"_227":746,"_229":747},"step-5-preview-and-save-test","

Check the survey in the preview. Use the channel dropdown to see it on each channel, and the device icons to switch to the mobile view
Click Save in the top bar

Once saved, an Active survey starts showing on the channels you turned on

To test, place a small test order in your store — the survey appears right on the Thank you page. Your answer shows up under Responses within moments.

","Step 5 —Preview and save/test","step-4-choose-where-the-survey-appears","

Click the Channels tab in the left panel.
Turn on the toggle of each channel where you want to show the survey. A survey can run on several channels at once.
Click the arrow next to a channel to expand its settings, such as Timing, User targeting and Widget recurrence.
Check the other channels. Templates turn some channels on by default - turn off the ones you don't need.
Complete any extra setup shown in the settings panel on the right. For example, the Order Status/Thankyou page channel asks you to click Add to Thank you page to add the Survey block to your checkout.

Channel	Where customers see it
Order Status/Thankyou page	After checkout, on the Thank you page.
Onsite Survey	A widget on the storefront pages you choose.
Exit Intent	When a visitor is about to leave the store.
Standalone Page	A page with its own link you can share anywhere.
Email	An email sent automatically after an order.
Embed Survey	Inside a section of your theme.

A survey on the Order Status/ Thank you page channel only appears after you add the Ego Surveys block to your Thank you page. Turning on the toggle alone is not enough. Click Add to Thank you page, then in the checkout editor search for Ego Surveys, click (+) next to the block, and click Save. See Thank You & Order Status Page Surveys for details.

","Step 4 — Choose where the survey appears","step-3-edit-the-survey-content","

In the Question tab, items are listed in the order customers see them. Click any item to edit it in the settings panel on the right

Welcome Screen - an optional intro screen with a heading, description, button and image. Turn it on or off with the toggle
Survey Banner - an optional banner shown above the survey. Turn it on or off with the toggle
Question - each row shows the question and its type, for example Sigle Choice
End screen - the message customers see after the finish, for example Thank You

To work with questons:

Click a questions to select it
Drag the handle on the left to change its order
Click the bin icon to delete it
Click Add content below the list to add a new question
Edit the selected question in the settings panel on the right:

Question type - change the type with the dropdown at the top of the panel (for example Single Choice)
Heading and Description - the question and an optional hint shown below it
Answer(s) - edit, reorder or remove the answer options. Click Add new answer to add one
Advance settings - Required (customers must answer to continue), Randomize (shuffle the answer order), \"Other\" option (adds an Other answer with your own label) and Change layout.

The preview updates as you edit, so you can check each change right away.

","Step 3 — Edit the survey content","step-2-name-the-survey-and-set-its-status","

Enter a Survey name. It is only used inside the app to identify the survey - customers don't see it
Check the Status next to the name:

Active - the survey is shown to customers as soon as you save
Inactive - the survey is save but not shown

New surveys are set to Active by default. Switch to Inactive if you want to keep working on the survey before customers see it

","Step 2 — Name the survey and set its status","step-1-choose-a-template","

Go to Surveys and click Create new survey. The Template survey page opens.

Choose the template closet to your goal:

Blank template - Start from an empty survey and add your own questions
Post-purchase Survey - Understand purchase behavior and traffic sources
Exit-Intent Survey - Understand why visitors leave wothout purchasing
NPS (Net Promoter Score) Survey - Measure customer satisfaction and brand loyalty
Product Feedback Survey - Gather product quality feedback and improvement ideas
Abandoned Checkout Survey - Discover reasons behind abandoned carts and recover sales

Each card shows the number of questions, the estimated time to complete and the default audience. Click the eye icon to preview a template, then click Select template to open it in the builder. To start with an empty survey, choose Blank template or click Create form scratch in the top right.

The survey builder at a glance

Top bar - the survey name, the status, and three tabs: Survey (content and channels), Workflow (branching logic) and Connect (send this survey's responses to Google Sheets)
Left panel - the Question tab (the content of your survey) and the Channels tab (where it appears)
Preview - shows the survey as customers will see it
Settings panel - edit the item you selected in the left panel

","Step 1 - Choose a template","c64cb4b476c900d47aeeed702","Create Your First Form","Step by step: pick a template, open the builder and save your first form.",[766,767,768,769],"2026-10-15T03:58:35.195Z",[680,570],{"_189":779,"_227":780,"_229":781},{"_189":776,"_227":777,"_229":778},{"_189":773,"_227":774,"_229":775},{"_189":770,"_227":771,"_229":772},"step-4-name-and-save-the-form","

Enter a name for the form in the field at the top. This name is used in the form list and in notification emails.
Edit the fields and the design as you need.
When you make a change, the Unsaved changes bar appears at the top. Click Save to keep your changes, or Discard to undo them.

When the form is ready, click Publish to show it on your storefront. See Triggers & Publishing.

","Step 4 — Name and save the form","step-3-get-to-know-the-builder","

The template opens in the form builder

Icon rail (far left) - switches between panels: Elements, Design, After submit, Trigger, Email, Integration and Settings. Hover over an icon to see its name
Structure - lists the Header, each Page with its rows and fields, and the Footer. Click any item to edit it. Use Add element to add a field and Add pages to add a page
Preview - shows the form as customers will sê it
Toolbar (top) - the form name, its status (for example Draft), the desktop and mobile preview, the language, Test forms and undo/ redo

","Step 3 — Get to know the builder","step-2-choose-a-template","

The Template from builder page opens

Use the tabs to filter templates by use case: Contact, Quote request, Custom order, Wholesale registration, Warranty registration or Booking appointment.
Click the eye icon to preview a template. For forms with several pages, use the arrows under the preview to see each page
Click Select on the template you want

To start with an empty form, click Create form scratch in the top right

","Step 2 — Choose a template","step-1-open-forms","

In your Shopify admin open the app and click Forms in the left menu, then Create new form in the top right.

$\"Create$

","Step 1 — Open Forms","c7a63227323055f994b4aeb28","installing-ego-contact-form-survey","Installing & Activating Ego Contact Form Survey","Install the app, enable the app embed, and verify surveys can reach your customers.",[790,791,792,793],"2026-10-16T03:44:55.273Z",[552,789,216],"survey-templates",{"_189":305,"_227":803,"_229":307},{"_189":800,"_227":801,"_229":802},{"_189":797,"_227":798,"_229":799},{"_189":794,"_227":795,"_229":796},"step-3-set-up-and-activate-a-survey","

After the app embed is enable, create and configure your first survey.

To set up a survey:

Go to Surveys and click Create new survey.
On the Template survey page, click Select template on the template closest to your goal or choose Blank template.
In the builder, edit the questions in the Questions tab and choose where the survey appears in the Channels tab.
Enter a Survey name, check that Status is set to Active, then click Save.

","Step 3 — Set up and Activate a Survey","step-2-activate-the-app-embed","

The app embed allows Ego Contact Form Survey to display surveys and forms on your storefront pages.

The quick way: on the Dashboard, the App embed card shows Inactive while the embed is off. Click Activate app embed to open the Theme Editor directly on the App embeds panel.

Or enable it manually:

From you Shopify admin, go to Online Store > Themes.
On your current theme (the large card at the top of the page), click Edit theme.
In the Theme Editor, click the App embeds icon in the left sidebar.
Find Ego Surveys in the list. You can type Ego Surveys in the Search app embeds box to find it faster.
Turn on the Ego Surveys toggle.
Click Save in the top-right corner.

Go back to the app Dashboard: the App embed card shows Active and the message \"App embed is currently enabled. Surveys are now able to display on your store.\" The Side guide tracks the rest of your setup: Activate app -> Create your first survey -> Visualize how it appears.

","Step 2 — Activate the app embed","step-1-install-the-app","

To install Ego Contact Form Survey:

Go to the Ego Contact Form Survey listing on the Shopify App Store.
Click Install.
Review the permissions requested by the app.
Click Install again to confirm.

After the installation is complete, Shopify will redirect you to the app Dashboard.

","Step 1 — Install the app","

Ego Contact Form Survey helps you collect customer feedback with post-purchase, on-site, exit-intent and email surveys, build storefront forms, and analyze every response in one place.

Before your surveys can appear on the storefront, you need to follow the core steps:

Install the app from the Shopify App Store.
Enable the app embed in your Shopify theme.
Create and activate a survey inside the app.

","cmv8zq6d200012upatakbimhl","what-is-ego-contact-form-survey","What is Ego Contact Form Survey?","Get an introduction to Ego Contact Form Survey and its main form and survey features",[814,815,816,817],"2026-10-15T03:39:59.798Z","2026-10-16T03:42:07.444Z",[813,579,552],"About Ego Contact Form Survey","installing-ego-survey",{"_189":305,"_227":827,"_229":307},{"_189":824,"_227":825,"_229":826},{"_189":821,"_227":822,"_229":823},{"_189":818,"_227":819,"_229":820},"get-started","

Launch your first form or survey in a few steps:

Install the app and turn on the app embed.
Create a form or a survey from a template.
Publish it to your store.

Use these guides to get up and running:

Installing & Activating Ego Contact Form Survey
Create Your First Form
Create Your First Survey

","Get started","what-sets-ego-contact-form-survey-apart","

Forms and surveys in one app - no need to install separate tools.
No coding needed - build and style everything with a visual builder.
Flexible display - show forms and surveys exactly where and when you want.
24/7 support - get help with setup and customization whenever you need it.

","What sets Ego Contact Form Survey apart?","main-features","

Forms

Create customer-facing forms from ready-made templates or from scratch:

Templates for contact, quote request, custom order, wholesale registration, warranty registration and appointment booking
Four display types - On Page, Pop-up, Float and Side-in.
Multi-step forms - split a long form into several pages.
Conditional display - show or hide a field or page based on the customer's earlier answers.
Email notifications to your team, and automatic replies to customers.

Surveys

Ask customers for feedback at the right moment:

Templates such as Post-purchase, Exit-Intent, NPS, Product Feedback and Abandoned Checkout surveys.
Channels - the Thank you page, store pages, exit intent, a shareable page, email and theme sections.
Logic and rewards - show different questions based on answers, and thank customers with a discount code.

3. Responses, analytics and integrations

See every form submission and survey answer in Responses, and export them to a file.
Track survey performance in Analytics.
Connect Google Sheets and Shopify Flow to use your data in other tools.

","Main features","

Ego Contact Form Survey is a Shopify app that helps you build forms and surveys for your store - without editing your theme code.

Use forms to collect contact requests, quotes, custom orders, registrations and bookings. Use surveys to learn what your customers think. All submissions and answers are saved in one place, so you can review, export and act on them.

","cmv8z6mjj00014usbzy691qau","judge-me-reviews","Add Judge.me reviews","Show the reviews you already collect in Judge.me inside your mobile app. Copy your private API key, connect the integration, place the review blocks on your screens, and publish.",[842,843,844,845,846,847,848,849,850],"2026-10-15T03:24:47.647Z","2026-10-15T03:30:41.588Z",[839,840,841],"mobile-app-builder","Ego Mobile App Builder","Integrations","kiwi-size-chart","customize-app-design","preview-app",{"_189":305,"_227":873,"_229":307},{"_189":870,"_227":871,"_229":872},{"_189":867,"_227":868,"_229":869},{"_189":864,"_227":865,"_229":866},{"_189":861,"_227":862,"_229":863},{"_189":858,"_227":859,"_229":860},{"_189":855,"_227":856,"_229":857},{"_189":852,"_227":853,"_229":854},{"_189":192,"_227":851,"_229":194},"

1. Can customers write reviews inside the app?
Yes. The app has its own review form — five steps: the star rating, the review text, the reviewer's name and email (or posting anonymously), an optional photo or video, and a thank-you. Media can be shot with the camera or picked from the gallery.

It opens two ways: a write a review action on the order in the customer's profile, and an automatic prompt on the product screen. You do not place or configure it in App Design — it comes with the integration, and the timing of the automatic prompt follows your Judge.me review-request settings: which event it waits on, how long it waits, how often it may ask again, with separate values for domestic and international orders.

2. Can I edit or hide a single review from here?
No. Moderation lives in Judge.me, and the app follows it.

3. Can I use more than one review block on the same screen?
Yes. A carousel near the top and the full widget further down is a common pairing — just watch the screen length.

4. Can I show reviews outside the product screen?
Yes, with Review widget on a Custom page. The other three are product-screen only, because they read the reviews of the product being shown.

5. Do I have to re-import my old reviews?
No. Import them once in Judge.me and the app shows them like any other.

6. What happens if I disconnect?
The blocks stay on your screens but stop serving reviews, and come back as soon as you reconnect.

","troubleshooting","

The block is greyed out in the editor

Judge.me is not connected. Open Integrations → Judge.me Product Reviews App and connect it. The configuration panel of a dimmed block links straight there.

Connect does nothing, or the key is rejected

Check you copied the Private API key from Settings → Integrations → Developers in Judge.me, with no stray spaces. The public key will not work.

The block is empty on every product

Judge.me has no published reviews yet, or they are still in moderation. Check the review list in Judge.me first.

The video carousel shows nothing

It only displays reviews that include a video. Text and photo reviews are not shown there — use one of the other three blocks.

The review prompt never appears after an order

Usually the wait has not elapsed yet. The app follows your Judge.me review-request settings, so check the trigger event and the wait time there — and remember international orders use their own values. The prompt also stays away once that customer has reviewed or dismissed it, and when the order has no date for the chosen trigger (an order never marked delivered, with \"delivered\" as the trigger, will never qualify).

Reviews show on my online store but not in the app

The app reads Judge.me through the key you connected. Disconnect and reconnect with a freshly copied key; if you rotated it in Judge.me, the old one stops working.

I cannot find Judge.me under Integrations

It is available on the Growth plan and above. Check your plan under Pricing, or contact support.

","Troubleshooting","step-5-preview-and-publish","

Changes appear immediately in the mobile preview while you configure the block.

Before publishing, check:

A product with many reviews and one with none — the block should not leave an empty gap.
The headline wording matches the rest of your app.
Long review text and tall review photos still read well at phone width.

When ready:

Click Save.
Test on a device with Ego Live Preview.
Click Publish to make the changes available in your app.

","Step 5: Preview and publish","step-4-customize-a-block","

Select a block to open its configuration panel. You are styling the frame around the reviews — the review text, ratings, author names, photos and videos come from Judge.me and are not editable here.

Every block has a Text section for the headline above the reviews (\"Customer Reviews\" by default), its style and colour. What sits next to it depends on the block:

Reviews — how the rating and the review count are shown. On Review widget and Review slide.
Button — the action under the list, such as \"View more reviews\". On Review widget and Review slide.
Media — size and shape of review photos. On Review Carousel.
Videos — the video tiles. On Review Video Carousel.

The Advanced tab opens the rest: full typography (font, size, weight, case), the star colours — Filled and Empty — a Review Style switch between Condensed and Expanded, and a Padding section for background, corners, borders and spacing.

On Review Video Carousel, Advanced also holds the two settings worth deciding deliberately:

Video resizing — Fill crops the video to the tile, Fit keeps all of it and leaves bars. Fill looks tidier when reviewers shoot in mixed orientations.
Mute sound by default — leave it on unless you expect shoppers to want audio immediately.

$\"\"$

","Step 4: Customize a block","step-3-add-the-review-blocks","

Go to App Design and open the design you want to edit.
Select the screen. All four blocks work on Product Detail; Review widget also works on a Custom page.
Open Sections Library and filter by the Social Proof tag, or search the block by name.
Drag the block to the preferred position.

Which to use where:

Product screen — one compact block below the description. Review slide or Review Carousel reads better here than the full widget, which is long.
Video reviews — add Review Video Carousel only for catalogues that actually get them; it renders nothing on products without video.
A dedicated reviews screen — build a Custom page and put Review widget on it, then link to it from your menu.

You can drag the blocks in before connecting Judge.me. They stay dimmed and their configuration panel shows a Connect Judge.me card until the integration is connected.

$\"\"$

","Step 3: Add the review blocks","step-2-connect-judge-me-in-ego-mobile-builder","

From Shopify Admin, open Ego Mobile Builder.
Go to Integrations.
Open Judge.me Product Reviews App.
Paste the key into Private API key and click Connect.

Once connected the header turns Connected, the key is masked and the button becomes Disconnect — that is the screen below. To change the key, disconnect first, then connect again with the new one.

$\"\"$

","Step 2: Connect Judge.me in Ego Mobile Builder","step-1-get-your-private-api-key","

Unlike most integrations, Judge.me connects with a key you copy yourself.

Open Judge.me from your Shopify admin.
In the left menu, under Integrations, open Integrations.
Click View API token, top right.
Copy the Private API token — the second one. The public token will not work here.

Keep it private: it reads your review data. If you ever rotate it in Judge.me, come back and reconnect with the new one.

$\"\"$

","Step 1: Get your private API key","before-you-start","

Judge.me is installed in your Shopify store.
You have reviews. Collected, or imported from your previous review app — a connected integration with an empty catalogue shows empty blocks.
Those reviews are published in Judge.me. Anything held in moderation is not served to the app.
For the video carousel, at least one review with a video. Text and photo reviews do not appear there.

Judge.me is available on the Growth plan and above.

","Before you start","

Judge.me puts the reviews you already collect on your storefront into your mobile app. Connect it once, then place the review blocks on the screens where they help shoppers decide.

There are four blocks, all tagged Social Proof in the Sections Library:

Review widget — the full review list with the star summary. The only one you can also use on a Custom page, which is how stores build an \"all reviews\" screen.
Review slide — a compact list for the product screen.
Review Carousel — reviews swiped sideways, with their photos.
Review Video Carousel — only the reviews that came with a video.

Shoppers can also write reviews without leaving the app: after an order arrives they get a prompt for the star rating, the review, their name and an optional photo or video. Moderating, replying and importing stay in Judge.me.

","cmv8xry7p0000yxsbr3q8dl9o","Add a Kiwi Size Chart","Show the size charts you already built in Kiwi on the product screen of your mobile app. Connect the integration, drag the component onto the product screen, style the row, and publish.",[881,882,883,884,885,886,887,888,889],"2026-10-15T02:45:23.317Z","2026-10-15T02:49:21.571Z",[840,841],{"_189":305,"_227":906,"_229":307},{"_189":870,"_227":905,"_229":872},{"_189":902,"_227":903,"_229":904},{"_189":899,"_227":900,"_229":901},{"_189":896,"_227":897,"_229":898},{"_189":893,"_227":894,"_229":895},{"_189":855,"_227":892,"_229":857},{"_189":852,"_227":891,"_229":854},{"_189":192,"_227":890,"_229":194},"

1. Do I have to rebuild my size charts for the app?
No. The app opens the charts you already built in Kiwi. Editing a chart in Kiwi updates the app with no change on this side.

2. Do I need an API key?
No. Kiwi does not issue per-store keys. Clicking Connect Integration is the whole setup.

3. Can I put the size chart on another screen?
No. It is tied to the product screen, because the chart it opens depends on which product is shown.

4. Can I add more than one on a product screen?
No. Both would open the same chart, so the Sections Library locks the component once one is placed.

5. Does the Kiwi fit recommender work in the app?
Yes, where you have it enabled in Kiwi. It is part of what Kiwi renders, so it appears alongside the chart.

6. Why does the row disappear on some products?
That is intended. Kiwi hides it on products it has no chart for, so shoppers never open an empty chart.

","

The component is greyed out in the editor

Kiwi is not connected. Open Integrations → Kiwi Size Chart and click Connect. You can still place the component while disconnected — it stays inactive until you connect.

The row does not appear in the app on any product

Confirm the design was saved and published, and that the component is on the Product Detail screen rather than another screen.

The row does not appear on one specific product

Kiwi found no chart for it. Set that product under Selected for preview in the editor — the preview will say so — then check in Kiwi which collection, tag, vendor or type the chart is assigned to, and that the product matches.

The chart works on my online store but not in the app

This is almost always an unpublished collection. The chart is assigned to a collection that is not published to your mobile app's sales channel, so the app cannot see the product is in it. Publish the collection to that channel and check again.

I cannot find Kiwi Size Chart under Integrations

It is available on the Growth plan and above. Check your plan under Pricing, or contact support.

The chart opens but is empty

The chart exists but is not published in Kiwi. Publish it there, then reopen the product in the app.

","

Changes appear immediately in the mobile preview while you configure the component, and the preview loads the real Kiwi chart for whichever product is set in Selected for preview above the phone. Switch that product to check the matching on several of them before you publish.

If Kiwi has nothing for the selected product, the preview says Kiwi has no size chart for this product instead of showing a chart. That is the fastest way to tell a matching problem from a styling one.

Before publishing, check:

The row is readable against the product screen background.
Its position relative to the variant selector and Add to cart.
The label wording matches the rest of your app.
A product that should have a chart, and one that should not.

When ready:

Click Save.
Test on a device with Ego Live Preview, where the chart opens the way shoppers will see it.
Click Publish to make the changes available in your app.

","step-4-customize-the-row","

Everything you can style here belongs to the row, not the chart. The chart itself is rendered by Kiwi and follows what you set up in the Kiwi app.

On the Basic tab, under Text:

Label — the wording on the row. \"Size chart\" by default.
Icon — the ruler icon, its colour and size. Turn it off for a text-only row.
Arrow — off by default. Turn it on to signal that the row opens something.

The Advanced tab adds font, text size, weight and letter case, plus a Padding section for the background colour, corner radius, borders and spacing around the row.

The row is left-aligned by design: the label sits on the left and the arrow stays pinned to the right edge, so alignment is not configurable.

$\"\"$

","Step 4: Customize the row","step-3-choose-how-the-chart-opens","

Select the component to open its configuration panel, then set Layout under Display.

Bottom sheet (default) — the product screen shows a compact row, and the chart slides up over it when tapped. Recommended: Kiwi charts are full pages, and this keeps Add to cart in reach.
Inline — the chart is rendered in the page itself. Use it only for short charts; a long one pushes everything below it far down the screen.

Whichever you pick, the editor preview always lays the chart out flat under the row, so you can check Kiwi matched the right one without opening anything.

$\"\"$

","Step 3: Choose how the chart opens","step-2-add-the-component","

Go to App Design and open the design you want to edit.
Select the Product Detail screen. Kiwi Size Chart is only available there.
Open Sections Library.
Search for Kiwi Size Chart, or filter by the Product Option tag.
Drag the component to the preferred position.

Most stores place it directly under the variant selector, above Add to cart — that is where shoppers look for it before they commit to a size.

You can add one Kiwi Size Chart per product screen. A second one would open the same chart, so the library locks the component once the screen already has it.

$\"\"$

","Step 2: Add the component","step-1-connect-kiwi-in-ego-mobile-builder","

From Shopify Admin, open Ego Mobile Builder.
Go to Integrations.
Open Kiwi Size Chart.
Click Connect Integration.

There is no API key to paste. Kiwi does not issue per-store tokens — connecting is the whole setup, and it is what tells the app it may serve your charts.

The Open Kiwi Size Chart button next to it takes you to the Kiwi app, where you install it, build your charts and assign them to collections.

$\"\"$

","Step 1: Connect Kiwi in Ego Mobile Builder","

Check all four, in this order. Most \"the button never appears\" cases are one of them.

Kiwi Size Chart & Recommender is installed in your Shopify store.
Your charts are published in Kiwi. A draft chart is not served to the app.
Each chart is assigned to the products that need it. Kiwi matches a chart by collection, tag, vendor or product type — assignment by collection is the default.
Those collections are published to your mobile app's sales channel. The app reads a product's collections through the sales channel it is published on; a collection that is not published there is invisible to the app, so Kiwi never finds a match — even though the chart shows correctly on your online store.

Kiwi Size Chart is available on the Growth plan and above.

","

The Kiwi Size Chart component shows the size charts you already built in Kiwi Size Chart & Recommender on the product screen of your mobile app.

Shoppers tap a Size chart row on the product screen and the chart Kiwi matched to that product opens — the same chart your online store uses. You do not re-enter any sizing data in Ego Mobile Builder.

Use this component for:

Apparel and footwear
Jewellery and accessories with sizes
Any catalogue where returns come from the wrong fit

Kiwi also decides when the row is useful: a product with no matching chart hides the row automatically, so you do not maintain a second set of rules here.

","cmrx178tp02x92umpl02nel2f","analytics-retention","Analytics Retention","The Retention tab helps you understand how customers continue engaging with your mobile app after their first visit or first purchase.",[917,918,919,920,921,922,923],"Sep 14, 2026","2026-07-23T04:48:54.637Z","2026-09-14T03:19:46.893Z",[],"Analytics",{"_189":305,"_227":940,"_229":307},{"_189":937,"_227":938,"_229":939},{"_189":934,"_227":935,"_229":936},{"_189":931,"_227":932,"_229":933},{"_189":928,"_227":929,"_229":930},{"_189":925,"_227":926,"_229":927},{"_189":192,"_227":924,"_229":194},"

1. What does Repeat Purchase Rate tell me?
Repeat Purchase Rate shows the percentage of customers who place more than one order through your mobile app. A higher rate generally means more customers are returning to buy again.

2. What is Customer Lifetime Value (CLV)?
CLV measures the total value customers generate through your mobile app over time. Use it together with Repeat Purchase Rate and Order Frequency to understand whether retained customers are returning and spending more.

3. What does Sessions Per User measure?
Sessions Per User shows how often users open or use your mobile app during the selected period. It helps you understand how frequently customers return to browse, search, or shop.

4. What does an increase in Inactive Users mean?
An increasing number of inactive users may indicate that fewer customers are returning to the app. You can use this metric to identify when re-engagement campaigns, fresh content, or app-only offers may be needed.

5. What is the difference between Repeat Purchase Rate and Order Frequency?
Repeat Purchase Rate shows how many customers come back to purchase again, while Order Frequency shows how often customers place orders over time. Together, they help you understand both customer retention and purchasing regularity.

","order-frequency","

Purpose

Measure how often customers place orders through your mobile app over time.

Order Frequency helps you understand purchase behavior and how regularly customers are buying from your app.

How to read

The chart shows average purchase frequency by device type over time.
You can compare order frequency between iOS and Android users.
A higher order frequency means customers are purchasing more often.
A lower order frequency may indicate that customers are browsing but not returning to buy regularly.

Use case

Understand how often app customers place orders.
Compare purchase behavior across iOS and Android.
Measure whether promotions or push campaigns increase purchase frequency.
Evaluate whether your app is becoming a regular shopping channel for customers.

Recommended actions

Use push notifications to remind customers about new arrivals, restocks, or limited-time campaigns.
Create repeat purchase campaigns for products that customers buy regularly.
Promote subscription products or replenishment-based products if your store supports them.
Compare Order Frequency with AOV and CLV to understand whether customers are buying more often, spending more, or both.
Review product assortment and campaign timing if order frequency stays low.

","Order Frequency","inactive-users","

Purpose

Track the percentage or number of users who are no longer actively using your mobile app.

This metric helps you identify whether users are becoming inactive after installing or using the app.

How to read

The chart shows inactive users over the selected time period.
An increasing trend means more users are becoming inactive.
A decreasing trend means more users are staying engaged or returning to the app.
If inactive users increase sharply, it may indicate that users are not finding enough value to return, or that engagement campaigns are not reaching them effectively.

Use case

Monitor user retention health.
Identify when users start dropping off.
Measure the effectiveness of re-engagement campaigns.
Understand whether app content, promotions, or push notifications are keeping users active.

Recommended actions

Create re-engagement push notification campaigns for inactive users.
Offer app-only discounts or limited-time promotions to bring users back.
Refresh app content with new products, banners, collections, or seasonal campaigns.
Review inactive user trends after major app updates or marketing campaigns.
Check whether users have enabled push notifications, since users without notifications may be harder to re-engage.

","Inactive Users","sessions-per-user","

Purpose

Track how often each user opens or uses your mobile app during the selected time period.

This metric helps you understand app engagement and whether users are returning to browse, search, or shop.

How to read

The chart shows the average number of sessions per user over time.
The current value shows the average sessions per user during the selected reporting period.
You can compare sessions across platforms such as iOS and Android.
A higher value means users are opening the app more frequently.
A lower value may indicate that users are not returning often after installing or visiting the app.

Use case

Measure app engagement.
Compare engagement between iOS and Android users.
Understand whether campaigns, push notifications, or new content increase app visits.
Identify periods when users are more or less active.

Recommended actions

Send push notifications to bring users back to the app.
Refresh homepage content regularly with new arrivals, campaigns, or featured collections.
Use app-only promotions to encourage users to open the app more often.
Compare iOS and Android performance to identify platform-specific engagement issues.
Review app performance and loading experience if sessions per user drops suddenly.

","Sessions Per User","customer-lifetime-value-clv","

Purpose

Measure the total value customers generate through your mobile app over time.

CLV helps you understand how valuable your app customers are and whether your retention strategy is increasing long-term revenue.

How to read

The card displays the current Customer Lifetime Value for the selected reporting period.

The chart shows how customer value changes over time.

A higher CLV means customers are spending more with your store through the mobile app.

If CLV increases over time, it may indicate stronger customer loyalty, better product engagement, or more effective retention campaigns.
If CLV decreases, customers may be purchasing less frequently or spending less per order.

Use case

Evaluate long-term revenue from app customers.
Understand the quality of retained customers.
Compare customer value before and after campaigns.
Measure the impact of loyalty programs, app-only offers, bundles, subscriptions, and personalized promotions.

Recommended actions

Increase CLV by encouraging repeat purchases through push notifications and targeted campaigns.
Promote bundles, upsell offers, and app-only deals to increase order value.
Use personalized product recommendations to encourage customers to discover more products.
Monitor CLV together with Repeat Purchase Rate and Order Frequency to understand whether customers are returning and spending more.

","Customer Lifetime Value (CLV)","repeat-purchase-rate","

Purpose

Track the percentage of customers who make more than one purchase through your mobile app.

This metric helps you understand how effectively your app encourages customers to return and buy again.

How to read

The chart shows the repeat purchase rate over the selected time period.
The current value shows the repeat purchase rate for the selected reporting period.
A higher repeat purchase rate means more customers are coming back to place additional orders.
A low repeat purchase rate may indicate that customers are purchasing once but not returning to buy again.

Use case

Measure customer loyalty.
Evaluate repeat purchase behavior.
Understand whether your mobile app is helping turn first-time buyers into returning customers.
Track the impact of retention campaigns, loyalty programs, push notifications, or app-only promotions.

Recommended actions

Use push notifications to bring previous customers back to the app.
Promote repeat-purchase products through homepage sections or featured collections.
Offer app-only discounts for returning customers.
Review product quality, delivery experience, and post-purchase communication if repeat purchase rate is low.
Create campaigns for customers who purchased once but have not returned.

","Repeat Purchase Rate","

The Retention tab helps you understand how customers continue engaging with your mobile app after their first visit or first purchase.

This dashboard focuses on repeat purchase behavior, customer value, user activity, and inactive users. It helps you evaluate whether customers are coming back, purchasing again, and staying engaged with your mobile app over time.

You can:

Select a reporting period.
Compare the selected period with a previous period.
Analyze repeat purchase rate, customer lifetime value, user sessions, inactive users, and order frequency.

","cmrx0ws4t02x62ump1pz5u06v","analytics-sale-performance","Analytics Sale Performance","The Sale Performance tab provides insights into your app's sales performance, top-selling products, order sources, and checkout behavior. It helps you understand what drives revenue and identify opportunities to optimize the purchasing experience.",[949,950,951,952,953,954,955,956],"2026-07-23T04:40:46.445Z","2026-09-14T03:17:55.536Z",[],{"_189":305,"_227":976,"_229":307},{"_189":973,"_227":974,"_229":975},{"_189":970,"_227":971,"_229":972},{"_189":967,"_227":968,"_229":969},{"_189":964,"_227":965,"_229":966},{"_189":961,"_227":962,"_229":963},{"_189":958,"_227":959,"_229":960},{"_189":192,"_227":957,"_229":194},"

1. Does Total Revenue include sales from my Shopify online store?
No. Total Revenue in Sale Performance tracks revenue generated from orders placed through your mobile app during the selected reporting period.

2. How is Average Order Value (AOV) useful for evaluating sales performance?
AOV shows the average amount customers spend per order. You can use it to evaluate the impact of bundles, upsells, cross-sells, promotions, and product recommendations.

3. What can I learn from Best Selling Products?
Best Selling Products helps you compare products based on Quantity Sold, Revenue, and Conversion Rate, so you can identify strong performers and products that may need optimization.

4. What does Order Sources show?
Order Sources shows where completed mobile app orders originate, such as Direct, Notifications, Deep Link, or Other, helping you understand which channels contribute most to sales.

","abandon-checkout-rate","

Purpose

Measure the percentage of users who leave the checkout process before completing a purchase.

How to read

The chart displays the checkout abandonment rate over the selected time period.

A higher abandonment rate indicates that more users leave before completing payment.

Use case

Evaluate the effectiveness of the checkout process.
Identify periods with unusually high checkout abandonment.

Recommended actions

Simplify the checkout process.
Offer additional payment methods.
Review shipping fees and unexpected charges.
Enable abandoned checkout recovery campaigns or push notifications.

","Abandon Checkout Rate","order-sources","

Purpose

Identify where completed orders originate.

How to read

The donut chart displays the percentage of orders by acquisition source.

Examples may include:

Direct
Notifications
Deep link
Other

Use case

Understand which channels generate the most sales.
Measure marketing channel effectiveness.

Recommended actions

Increase investment in high-performing channels.
Optimize or discontinue channels with low conversion performance.

","Order Sources","best-selling-products","

Purpose

Identify the products generating the highest sales during the selected time period.

Available metrics

Product
Quantity Sold
Revenue
Conversion Rate

How to read

The table ranks products based on their sales performance and displays the quantity sold, revenue generated, and conversion rate for each product.

Use case

Identify your best-performing products.
Compare product performance.
Measure product conversion efficiency.

Recommended actions

Promote top-selling products through featured collections or marketing campaigns.
Review low-performing products and optimize their pricing, images, or descriptions.
Increase inventory for products with consistently high demand.

","Best Selling Products","average-order-value-aov","

Purpose

Measure the average amount customers spend per order.

How to read

Displays the average order value during the selected reporting period.

Use case

Measure the effectiveness of upselling and cross-selling strategies.
Evaluate the impact of bundles, promotions, and product recommendations.

Recommended actions

Introduce product bundles or upsell offers if AOV is low.
Monitor changes after promotional campaigns.

","Average Order Value (AOV)","total-orders","

Purpose

Track the total number of completed orders placed through your mobile app.

How to read

Displays the total number of completed orders during the selected time period.
The percentage indicates the increase or decrease compared to the selected comparison period.
The sparkline chart shows order trends over time.

Use case

Monitor order volume.
Compare with revenue to evaluate sales performance.

Recommended actions

Track order trends after marketing campaigns.
Compare with AOV to understand customer purchasing behavior.

","Total Orders","total-revenue","

Purpose

Track the total revenue generated from orders placed through your mobile app.

How to read

Displays the total revenue during the selected time period.
The percentage indicates the increase or decrease compared to the selected comparison period.
The sparkline chart shows revenue trends over time.

Use case

Monitor overall sales performance.
Measure the impact of marketing campaigns or promotions.
Identify revenue trends.

Recommended actions

Compare revenue with business targets.
Investigate unexpected increases or decreases.
Review Top Selling Products and Order Sources to understand revenue drivers.

","Total Revenue","

The Sale Performance tab provides insights into your app's sales performance, top-selling products, order sources, and checkout behavior. It helps you understand what drives revenue and identify opportunities to optimize the purchasing experience.

You can:

Select a reporting period.
Compare the selected period with a previous period.
Analyze revenue, orders, product performance, traffic sources, and checkout abandonment.

","cmrx0iveq02x12umppag3puto","analytics-aquisition","Analytics Acquisition","The Acquisition tab provides insights into how users discover, install, and start using your mobile app. It helps you evaluate user acquisition performance, monitor installation trends, and understand the effectiveness of your acquisition channels.",[985,986,987,988,989,990,991,992,993,994],"2026-07-23T04:29:57.506Z","2026-09-14T03:16:12.506Z",[],{"_189":305,"_227":1020,"_229":307},{"_189":1017,"_227":1018,"_229":1019},{"_189":1014,"_227":1015,"_229":1016},{"_189":1011,"_227":1012,"_229":1013},{"_189":1008,"_227":1009,"_229":1010},{"_189":1005,"_227":1006,"_229":1007},{"_189":1002,"_227":1003,"_229":1004},{"_189":999,"_227":1000,"_229":1001},{"_189":996,"_227":997,"_229":998},{"_189":192,"_227":995,"_229":194},"

1. What is the difference between App Installs and Sign Ups?
App Installs show how many times your mobile app was installed, while Sign Ups show how many users successfully created an account. Comparing these metrics can help you identify drop-offs during onboarding.

2. How can I compare acquisition performance between iOS and Android?
Use App Install Breakdown to compare installation trends between iOS and Android over the selected reporting period.

3. What does Source of Opens show?
Source of Opens shows how users enter your app, such as Direct, Push Notification, or Deep Link, helping you understand which channels drive users back into the app.

4. How can I evaluate the visibility of my app promotion placements?
Use Impressions to compare how often promotion placements such as Banner, App Install Bar, Popup, and Footer are displayed. Low impressions may indicate that a placement needs to be adjusted.

5. What does Time to First Purchase tell me?
Time to First Purchase measures the average time between a user’s first app session and their first completed purchase. A shorter time generally indicates a smoother onboarding and purchasing experience.

","time-to-first-purchase","

Purpose

Measure how quickly newly acquired users complete their first purchase.

How to read

The chart displays the average time between a user's first app session and their first completed purchase.

A shorter time generally indicates a more effective onboarding and purchasing experience.

Use case

Evaluate the effectiveness of your onboarding flow.
Measure how quickly new users become paying customers.

Recommended actions

Simplify onboarding and product discovery if the time to first purchase is increasing.
Improve first-time buyer incentives, such as welcome discounts or free shipping offers.
Monitor changes after optimizing the onboarding or checkout experience.

","Time to First Purchase","source-of-opens","

Purpose

Identify where users launch or open your mobile app.

How to read

The donut chart shows the percentage of app opens by acquisition source.

Examples may include:

Direct
Push Notification
Deep Link

Use case

Understand which acquisition channels drive users into the app.
Measure the effectiveness of marketing campaigns.

Recommended actions

Invest more in high-performing acquisition channels.
Improve underperforming campaigns based on channel performance.

","Source of Opens","signed-up-users","

Purpose

Track the number of users who registered or logged in to the app each day.

How to read

The chart displays daily user signups and returning logins over the selected time period.

Use case

Monitor user onboarding activity.
Identify trends in new and returning user engagement.

Recommended actions

Optimize the registration process if signup activity declines.
Launch onboarding campaigns to encourage new user activation.

","Signed Up Users","impressions","

Purpose

Monitor the delivery of impressions from promotional widgets displayed throughout the app.

Available metrics

Banner
App Install Bar
Popup
Footer

How to read

The chart displays impression trends for each widget type during the selected time period.

Use case

Evaluate the visibility of in-app promotional components.
Compare the performance of different widget placements.

Recommended actions

Optimize widget placement if impressions are consistently low.
Compare impressions with clicks or signups to evaluate engagement.

","Impressions","app-install-breakdown","

Purpose

Compare app installations between iOS and Android platforms.

How to read

The line chart displays the number of app installs on each platform over the selected time period.

Use case

Understand platform adoption.
Compare installation trends between iOS and Android users.

Recommended actions

Prioritize marketing efforts for the platform with stronger growth potential.
Investigate unexpected changes on either platform.

","App Install Breakdown","total-sign-ups","

Purpose

Track the total number of users who created a new account during the selected period.

How to read

Displays the number of successfully completed signups.
The percentage indicates the increase or decrease compared to the previous period.
The sparkline chart shows signup trends over time.

Use case

Measure user acquisition performance.
Evaluate the effectiveness of onboarding and registration flows.

Recommended actions

Improve the signup experience if registrations decline.
Compare Signups with App Installs to identify onboarding drop-offs.

","Total Sign ups","total-impressions","

Purpose

Track the total number of times in-app promotional widgets were displayed to users.

How to read

Displays the total number of impressions generated by in-app promotional widgets.
The percentage indicates the increase or decrease compared to the selected comparison period.
The sparkline chart shows impression trends over time.

Use case

Measure the visibility of promotional widgets.
Evaluate whether banners or popups are reaching users as expected.

Recommended actions

Review widget placement if impressions are lower than expected.
Compare Impressions with Signups to measure campaign effectiveness.

","Total Impressions","total-app-installs","

Purpose

Track the total number of app installations during the selected time period.

How to read

Displays the total number of app installs.
The percentage indicates the increase or decrease compared to the selected comparison period.
The sparkline chart shows the installation trend over time.

Use case

Measure app growth.
Evaluate the effectiveness of app promotion campaigns.
Monitor installation trends after product launches or marketing activities.

Recommended actions

Compare installation trends across different marketing campaigns.
Investigate sudden decreases in app installs.
Monitor App Install Breakdown to understand platform distribution.

","Total App Installs","

The Acquisition tab provides insights into how users discover, install, and start using your mobile app. It helps you evaluate user acquisition performance, monitor installation trends, and understand the effectiveness of your acquisition channels.

You can:

Select a reporting period.
Compare the selected period with a previous period.
Monitor acquisition metrics and user growth over time.

","cmrwxq3t102wk2umpj7tynv6q","analyticsoverview","Analytics Overview","The Overview tab gives you a quick summary of your mobile app’s performance during a selected reporting period.",[1029,1030,1031,1032,1033,1034,1035,1036,1037,1038,1039,1040,1041],"2026-07-23T03:11:36.133Z","2026-09-14T03:14:27.114Z",[],{"_189":305,"_227":1072,"_229":307},{"_189":1069,"_227":1070,"_229":1071},{"_189":970,"_227":1068,"_229":972},{"_189":1065,"_227":1066,"_229":1067},{"_189":1062,"_227":1063,"_229":1064},{"_189":937,"_227":1061,"_229":939},{"_189":1058,"_227":1059,"_229":1060},{"_189":1055,"_227":1056,"_229":1057},{"_189":1052,"_227":1053,"_229":1054},{"_189":1049,"_227":1050,"_229":1051},{"_189":1046,"_227":1047,"_229":1048},{"_189":1043,"_227":1044,"_229":1045},{"_189":192,"_227":1042,"_229":194},"

1. What can I monitor from the Analytics Overview?
You can monitor key mobile app metrics including sales, orders, AOV, conversion rate, repeat purchases, traffic, installs, active users, user locations, app activity, and the conversion funnel.

2. Can I compare performance between different periods?
Yes. You can select a reporting period and compare its performance with the previous period to identify changes and trends.

3. Do Total Sales and Total Orders include purchases from my online store?
No. These metrics track completed orders and revenue generated through your mobile app.

4. How can I identify where customers drop off during the purchase journey?
Use the Conversion Funnel to compare users across Session Start, Product View, Add to Cart, and Checkout Completed and identify the stage with the highest drop-off.

","conversion-funnel","

Purpose

Visualize user conversion throughout the shopping journey.

Funnel stages

Session Start
Product View
Add to Cart
Checkout Completed

How to read

Each stage represents the number of users who remain in the purchase journey. The conversion rate between stages helps identify where users drop off.

Use case

Analyze the customer purchase journey.
Identify the stage with the highest drop-off rate.

Recommended actions

If users drop off after Product View, improve product images, descriptions, pricing, or product information.
If users drop off after Add to Cart, review shipping costs, promotions, or checkout incentives.
If users drop off during Checkout, simplify the checkout flow and provide more payment options.
Monitor the funnel after UI updates or marketing campaigns to measure optimization results.

","Conversion Funnel","app-activity","

Purpose

Track when users are most active in your mobile app.

How to read

The heatmap displays user activity based on:

Day of the week
Hour of the day

Darker colors indicate higher levels of user activity.

Use case

Identify peak engagement times.
Determine the best time to send Push Notifications.

Recommended actions

Schedule Push Notifications during peak activity hours.
Launch Flash Sales or live events when user activity is highest.

","App Activity","geo-location","

Purpose

Analyze the geographic distribution of your app users.

How to read

The donut chart displays the percentage of users by country or region.

Use case

Identify key markets.
Analyze where your users are located.

Recommended actions

Localize content for different regions.
Launch region-specific marketing campaigns.
Customize promotions based on user location.

","Geo-Location","active-users","

Purpose

Track the number of users actively using your mobile app.

Metrics

iOS Users
Android Users

How to read

The bar chart displays the number of active users on each platform during the selected time period.

Use case

Compare user activity between iOS and Android.
Monitor platform usage trends.

Recommended actions

Investigate platform-specific issues if active users decrease unexpectedly.
Prioritize improvements for the platform with the largest active user base.

","Active Users","app-installs","

Purpose

Track the number of new app installations.

How to read

The chart displays daily app installs during the selected reporting period.

Use case

Evaluate the effectiveness of app promotion campaigns.
Monitor user growth over time.

Recommended actions

Compare App Installs with Traffic to evaluate acquisition performance.
Measure the effectiveness of App Store Optimization (ASO) or advertising campaigns.

","App Installs","traffic","

Purpose

Track visitor activity within your mobile app.

Metrics

Total Sessions
New Users
Returning Users

How to read

The chart displays traffic trends for new and returning users during the selected time period.

Use case

Measure user acquisition performance.
Monitor customer retention over time.

Recommended actions

Increase marketing efforts if New Users are declining.
Improve user engagement if Returning Users are decreasing.

","Traffic","

Purpose

Measure the percentage of customers who make more than one purchase.

How to read

The chart displays the trend of repeat purchase rates over the selected time period.

Use case

Evaluate customer loyalty.
Measure the effectiveness of Loyalty Programs or Push Notifications.

Recommended actions

Launch customer loyalty programs.
Send push notifications to existing customers.
Offer exclusive discounts to encourage repeat purchases.

","conversion-rate-purchase","

Purpose

Measure the percentage of users who complete a purchase after visiting your app.

How to read

Displays the percentage of users who successfully complete a purchase.
A higher conversion rate generally indicates a more effective shopping experience.

Use case

Evaluate the overall effectiveness of the customer purchase journey.
Measure the impact of UI/UX improvements or marketing campaigns.

Recommended actions

Review the Conversion Funnel if the conversion rate is low.
Optimize the product page or checkout experience.
Reduce unnecessary steps during the purchase process.

","Conversion Rate (Purchase)","aov-average-order-value","

Purpose

Track the average amount customers spend per order.

How to read

Displays the average value of each completed order during the selected time period.

Use case

Evaluate the effectiveness of upselling and cross-selling strategies.
Measure the impact of Bundle offers, Cart Upsell, or Free Gift campaigns.

Recommended actions

Introduce Bundle or Upsell offers if the AOV is low.
Monitor AOV after launching promotions or discount campaigns.

","AOV (Average Order Value)","

Purpose

Track the total number of completed orders placed through your mobile app.

How to read

Displays the total number of completed orders within the selected time period.
Includes all successfully completed orders generated through the mobile app.
The sparkline chart shows the order trend over time.

Use case

Measure overall order volume.
Compare with Total Sales to understand purchasing performance.

Recommended actions

Monitor order volume after marketing campaigns.
If Total Sales decreases while Total Orders remain stable, review the Average Order Value (AOV).

","total-sales","

Purpose

Track the total revenue generated from orders placed through your mobile app.

Use case

Evaluate your app's sales performance.
Identify peak sales periods.
Measure the impact of marketing campaigns or promotions.

Recommended actions

Compare sales performance against your business targets.
Investigate unexpected increases or decreases.
Review Traffic and Conversion Rate together to better understand changes in revenue.

","Total Sales","

The Overview tab provides a high-level summary of your mobile app's performance within the selected time period. It helps you track revenue, user behavior, conversion metrics, and engagement to support business decisions.

You can:

Select a reporting period.
Compare the selected period with a previous period.
Monitor performance trends across all available metrics.

","mob-art-developer-account-access","developer-account-access","Developer Account Access","If you choose to submit your mobile app using your own Apple Developer or Google Play Developer account, you will need to grant access to the Ego Mobile…",[1082,1083,1084,1085,1086,1087],"2026-06-30T03:43:00.000Z","2026-09-14T03:13:53.427Z",[],"App Submission",{"_189":305,"_227":1101,"_229":307},{"_189":1098,"_227":1099,"_229":1100},{"_189":1095,"_227":1096,"_229":1097},{"_189":1092,"_227":1093,"_229":1094},{"_189":1089,"_227":1090,"_229":1091},{"_189":192,"_227":1088,"_229":194},"

1. Why does Ego Mobile Builder need access to my developer account?
Ego needs access to prepare, configure, and submit your mobile app to the Apple App Store and Google Play on your behalf.

2. Why do I need to grant these permissions to Ego Mobile Builder?
These permissions allow the Ego team to complete the app submission process, including managing app information, uploading builds, configuring store listings, setting up testing, and releasing approved versions to production. Without the required permissions, we may not be able to submit or update your app successfully.

3. What permissions should I grant to the Ego Mobile Builder team?
For Apple App Store Connect, grant the role requested in this guide. For Google Play Console, provide the permissions required for app management, store listings, testing, and production releases.

4. Will Ego own my Apple Developer or Google Play Developer account after I grant access?
No. You remain the owner of your developer accounts. Ego only receives the permissions you grant and uses them to support app submission and management.

5. Can I remove or change Ego’s access later?
Yes. You can update or revoke Ego’s permissions at any time from App Store Connect or Google Play Console. However, removing required access may prevent Ego from submitting future updates or assisting with app releases.

6. What should I do if my invitation has not been accepted?
Check that you invited the correct email address provided by Ego Mobile Builder, then resend the invitation if necessary.

","important-notes","

You retain full ownership of your developer accounts.
Access granted through invitations can be modified or removed anytime.
Always ensure the email address you invite is provided by the official Ego Mobile Builder team.

If the invitation has not been accepted yet, you can resend it from the Users and Access or Users and Permissions section of your developer account.

","Important Notes","after-sending-the-invitations","

Once both invitations are accepted:

The Ego Mobile Builder team will be able to:
Configure your app listing
Upload app builds
Manage store metadata
Submit the app for review

You can continue managing your account and revoke or modify permissions at any time.

","After Sending the Invitations","2-invite-access-to-google-play-console","

Before You Start

Make sure that:

You have an active Google Play Developer account
You have Owner or Admin access
You have the email address provided by the Ego Mobile Builder team

Google Play uses the Play Console to manage apps and permissions.

Step 1: Log in to Google Play Console

Go to https://play.google.com/console
Sign in with your Google Play Developer account

Step 2: Open Users and Permissions

In the left navigation menu, open Users and Permissions
This page displays all users who have access to your developer account

$\"\"$

Step 3: Invite a New User

Click Invite New User
Enter the email address provided by the Ego Mobile Builder team: <supportopusecom@gmail.com>

$\"\"$

Step 4: Assign Permissions

Grant the necessary permissions for app submission and management.

Common permissions include:

Release Manager
App Manager
Store Listing management
Production releases
Testing management

Depending on the platform requirements, you may grant broader access such as Admin, or limited access specifically for app release tasks.

$\"\"$

Step 5: Send the Invitation

Review the selected permissions
Click Invite User

The invited user will receive an email invitation and can access your Play Console once they accept the invitation.

$\"\"$

","2. Invite Access to Google Play Console","1-invite-access-to-apple-app-store-connect","

Before You Start

Make sure that:

You have an active Apple Developer account
You have Admin or Account Holder permissions
You know the email address provided by the Ego Mobile Builder team

Apple manages app publishing through App Store Connect, where collaborators can be invited.

Step 1: Log in to App Store Connect

Go to https://appstoreconnect.apple.com
Sign in using your Apple Developer account

Step 2: Open Users and Access

From the dashboard, click Users and Access
You will see the list of current users with access to your account

Step 3: Add a New User

Click the + (Add User) button
Enter the following information:

First Name
Last Name
Email Address (the email provided by the Ego Mobile Builder team): <support@opusecom.co>

$\"\"$

Step 4: Assign Roles

Assign the appropriate role so the team can manage submission tasks.

Recommended roles typically include:

Admin (full access - recommended for submission tasks)

If requested by the platform, also ensure access is granted to:

App management
TestFlight
App submission and metadata editing

$\"\"$

Step 5: Send the Invitation

Review the role permissions
Click Invite

Apple will send an invitation email to the provided address. Once accepted, the invited user will be able to access your App Store Connect account according to the assigned permissions.

$\"\"$

","1. Invite Access to Apple App Store Connect","

Overview

If you choose to submit your mobile app using your own Apple Developer or Google Play Developer account, you will need to grant access to the Ego Mobile Builder team so they can help configure and submit the app on your behalf.

This access is granted by inviting an email address to your developer account with the appropriate permissions.

This guide explains how to invite a collaborator to:

Apple App Store Connect: <support@opusecom.co>
Google Play Console: <supportopusecom@gmail.com>

","mob-art-app-submission-guide","app-submission","The Submission section guides you through the process of publishing your mobile app after your design is ready. This flow starts after you have created at…",[1109,1110,1111,1112,1113,1114,1115,1116,1117,1118,1119],"2026-09-14T03:12:11.161Z","8 min",[],{"_189":305,"_227":1148,"_229":307},{"_189":1145,"_227":1146,"_229":1147},{"_189":1142,"_227":1143,"_229":1144},{"_189":1139,"_227":1140,"_229":1141},{"_189":1136,"_227":1137,"_229":1138},{"_189":1133,"_227":1134,"_229":1135},{"_189":1130,"_227":1131,"_229":1132},{"_189":1127,"_227":1128,"_229":1129},{"_189":1124,"_227":1125,"_229":1126},{"_189":1121,"_227":1122,"_229":1123},{"_189":192,"_227":1120,"_229":194},"

1. What is the difference between Brand-new app and Migrate an existing app?
Choose Brand-new app if you are publishing a new app. Choose Migrate an existing app if you want the Ego-built app to replace an app that is already live on the App Store or Google Play.

2. What information do I need to prepare before submitting my app?
Prepare your app name, descriptions, categories, Privacy Policy URL, support information, app icon, screenshots, and other required store listing assets.

3. Can I submit my app to only one platform?
Yes. You can choose to publish to the App Store, Google Play, or both.

4. Does clicking “Submit for review” make my app live immediately?
No. Ego first reviews your information and prepares the app build before submitting it to Apple or Google for store review.

5. What happens if Apple or Google rejects my app?
Egohub team will review the store feedback and handle supported changes and resubmission. If additional information or action is required from you, our team will contact you with the next steps.

","common-issues","

I cannot continue to the next step

Check whether all required fields marked with * are complete and whether all required assets have been uploaded.

My migration information is rejected

Confirm that the Bundle ID or Package name matches the existing app currently published on that platform.

Ego cannot access my developer account

Check that the invitation was sent to the exact email shown in Ego Mobile Builder and that the requested permissions were granted.

My listing image cannot be uploaded

Check the dimensions, file format, and other requirements displayed below the upload area.

I need to change something after submitting

Contact Ego support before making major changes. Depending on the submission stage, the build or store information may need to be updated and resubmitted.

Apple or Google rejects my app

Ego reviews the store feedback and handles supported changes and resubmission. If Apple or Google requires business verification, policy updates, developer-account actions, or information only you can provide, Ego will contact you with the next steps.

","Common issues","recommended-checklist-before-submitting","

Before clicking Submit for review, confirm that:

Your latest mobile app design has been tested.
The correct submission type is selected.
The correct platforms are selected.
App name and descriptions are final.
Privacy Policy and Support URLs work.
App icon and screenshots match the current app.
Store categories and keywords are relevant.
Migration identifiers match your existing app, if applicable.
The correct developer account option is selected.
Ego has been invited to your developer accounts when required.

","Recommended checklist before submitting","submit-your-app-for-review","

Once everything is correct, click Submit for review.

Submitting here does not immediately make your app public on the App Store or Google Play.

First, Ego reviews the information you provided and prepares the store builds. The app then enters the store submission and review process. The current Ego submission workflow includes build preparation, store submission, status tracking, and handling supported review feedback.

","Submit your app for review","step-5-review-your-information","

The Summary & next steps page gives you one final opportunity to review everything before submission.

Review each section carefully.

Submission type

Confirm whether you selected:

Brand-new app
Migrate an existing app

For migration, make sure the existing app information is correct.

App detail & listing

Review:

App name
Store categories
Keywords
Support information
Privacy policy
Selected platforms
Listing assets

Account

Confirm:

The correct developer account option
App Store and Google Play platforms
Ego's developer-account access, when using your own accounts

If something is incorrect, click Edit beside the relevant section.

","Step 5: Review your information","step-4-choose-your-developer-account","

In Account, choose which developer account will be used to publish your app.

Ego Builder Account

Choose this option if you want Ego to publish the app using our managed developer accounts.

No developer account setup is required from you.

Your own accounts

Choose this option if you want the app published under your own Apple Developer and/or Google Play accounts.

You will need to invite Ego to the selected developer accounts so our team can prepare, upload, and submit the app.

You do not need to share your password or verification codes.

For step-by-step instructions, see How to Invite Ego to Your Developer Accounts.

Once your account option and required access are ready, click Continue.

","Step 4: Choose your developer account","step-3-complete-app-detail-listing","

In App detail & listing, select where you want to publish your app:

App Store
Google Play
Or both

Then complete the required store information.

Shared basics

This information is used across the selected stores:

App name
Primary and secondary category
Privacy Policy URL
Support email and URL
App description
App icon
App screenshots

App Store

If you select App Store, also provide:

Subtitle
Promotional text
Keywords
Marketing URL

Google Play

If you select Google Play, also provide:

Short description
Feature graphic

Make sure all text, screenshots, and images accurately represent your current app.

When all required fields are complete, click Continue.

","Step 3: Complete App detail & listing","step-2-choose-your-submission-type","

Under How are you submitting?, choose how your app should be published.

Brand-new app

Select Brand-new app when your business does not currently have an app published on the selected store.

Ego will prepare a new app and create new store listings for the App Store and/or Google Play.

Choose this option when:

This is your first mobile app.
Your previous app is no longer being reused.
You want to publish under a completely new app identity.

Migrate an existing app

Select Migrate an existing app when your app is already live on the App Store or Google Play and you want the Ego-built version to replace it as an update.

Migration helps preserve the existing app identity where supported instead of publishing a separate new app.

When you select migration, additional information is required.

For iOS

Provide:

Access to the current App Store Connect account
iOS Bundle ID
Current App Store listing URL

The Bundle ID must match the app that is currently published.

For Android

Provide:

Access to the current Google Play Console account
Package name / Application ID
Current Google Play listing URL
Existing app-signing information

If you still have your Android keystore or upload key, upload it and provide the required signing information.

If the key is unavailable, select No keystore / lost upload key and Ego will guide you through the available recovery or reset process.

Make sure the Bundle ID and Android Package name belong to the existing live app. Incorrect identifiers may prevent the new build from being submitted as an update.

When the required information is ready, click Continue.

","Step 2: Choose your submission type","step-1-start-app-submission","

From Shopify Admin:

Open Ego Mobile Builder.
Go to App Design.
Click Publish
Click Get started.

The overview explains what you need to provide and what Ego will handle after you submit.

","Step 1: Start App Submission","before-you-begin","

Before starting the submission, make sure:

Your app design is complete and has been tested.
Your branding and navigation are ready.
You know whether this is a new app or an existing app migration.
Your store listing content and images are prepared.
You have an accessible Privacy Policy URL and support information.
If you plan to use your own developer accounts, those accounts are active and accessible.

You can save your progress and return to the submission flow later.

","Before you begin","

Once your mobile app design is ready, use App Submission to prepare and submit your app to the Apple App Store, Google Play, or both.

Ego guides you through the information required by each store and handles the technical submission work after you complete the setup.

During the submission process, you will:

Choose whether you are publishing a brand-new app or migrating an existing one.
Complete your App Store and Google Play listing information.
Choose which developer account will publish the app.
Review all information.
Submit your app to Ego for preparation and store review.

Ego then prepares and signs your app builds, uploads them to the selected stores, handles supported review feedback, and keeps you updated as the submission progresses.

","cmrygp7tj03802umpmtpibepa","segments","Customer Segments","Learn how to create and manage customer segments based on attributes and behaviors. Use segments to target the right audience for push notifications and marketing campaigns.",[1158,1159,1160,1161,1162,1163,1164,1165,1166,1167,1168],"2026-07-24T04:50:33.559Z","2026-09-14T03:11:26.679Z",[],"Notifications",{"_189":305,"_227":1195,"_229":307},{"_189":1192,"_227":1193,"_229":1194},{"_189":1189,"_227":1190,"_229":1191},{"_189":1186,"_227":1187,"_229":1188},{"_189":1183,"_227":1184,"_229":1185},{"_189":1180,"_227":1181,"_229":1182},{"_189":1177,"_227":1178,"_229":1179},{"_189":1174,"_227":1175,"_229":1176},{"_189":1171,"_227":1172,"_229":1173},{"_189":852,"_227":1170,"_229":854},{"_189":192,"_227":1169,"_229":194},"

1. What is the difference between All conditions and Any condition?
With All conditions, users must match every condition. With Any condition, users only need to match at least one condition.

2. What types of conditions can I use to create a segment?
You can use User fields such as location, customer tags, purchase history, and app usage, as well as Activity fields such as added to cart, added to wishlist, viewed product, or viewed collection.

3. Can I combine multiple conditions in one segment?
Yes. You can add multiple conditions and control how they are matched using All conditions or Any condition.

4. Can I use the same segment for both Manual and Automated Notifications?
Yes. A saved segment can be selected for both Manual and Automated Notifications.

5. Why should I avoid adding too many conditions to a segment?
Too many restrictive conditions can significantly reduce the number of users who match the segment.

","

The segment contains fewer users than expected

Review whether All conditions is selected. Users must meet every condition when this option is used.

The segment contains too many users

Add another relevant condition or use a more specific comparison value.

A condition does not return the expected users

Check the selected field, comparison rule, and entered value.

The segment does not appear in a notification

Confirm that the segment was saved successfully, then refresh the notification editor.

Some segment users do not receive the notification

Users must also have the app installed and allow push notification permission. Automated notifications may require additional trigger conditions.

","recommended-practices","

Give every segment a clear and descriptive name.
Use All conditions when every rule is required.
Use Any condition when one matching rule is enough.
Keep conditions relevant to the notification goal.
Review date-based segments regularly.
Avoid creating multiple segments with nearly identical conditions.
Confirm the selected segment before sending a notification.

","Recommended practices","use-a-segment-in-notifications","

After saving the segment, you can select it when creating a notification.

Manual Notification

The selected segment defines the audience for that one-time campaign.

For example, you can send a promotion only to inactive users or customers in a selected country.

Automated Notification

The selected segment limits which users are eligible to receive the automation.

A user must meet both:

The automated notification trigger
The selected segment conditions

The user must also have installed the app and allowed push notifications.

","Use a segment in notifications","step-6-review-and-save","

Use the Detail panel to review:

Segment name
Matching rule
Selected fields
Comparison rules
Entered values

When everything is correct, click Save.

","Step 6: Review and save","step-5-add-more-conditions","

Click Add more to include another condition.

Conditions are connected using AND when All conditions is selected. This means users must meet every condition in the segment.

Use the Delete action to remove a condition that is no longer needed.

Avoid adding too many conditions unless they are necessary. A highly restrictive segment may contain very few eligible users.

","Step 5: Add more conditions","step-4-configure-each-condition","

After selecting a field:

Choose the comparison rule, such as Equals, After, or another available option.
Enter or select the required value.
Review the condition in the Detail panel.

The available comparison rules depend on the selected field.

For example:

Location Postal code → Equals → 10001
Last session date → Before → Selected date
Total orders → Greater than → 2

","Step 4: Configure each condition","step-3-add-segment-conditions","

Under Conditions, choose between:

User fields

Use customer profile, purchase, location, and app usage information.

Available conditions include:

Customer tags
Language
Last order date
Last session date
Location City
Location Country
Location Postal code
Location State/Province
Logged in
Operating system
Total orders
Total spend in the app
Total spend across all channels
New user
Has purchased before
Has not purchased before
Clicked a notification before
Last login

Activity fields

Use actions customers performed in the app.

Available conditions include:

Added to cart
Added to wishlist
Viewed collection
Viewed product

","Step 3: Add segment conditions","step-2-choose-how-conditions-are-matched","

Under the segment name, select how subscribers should match the conditions.

All conditions

Users must meet every condition added to the segment.

Example:

Location Country equals United States
Last session date is before the selected date

Only users who meet both conditions are included.

Any condition

Users only need to meet one of the added conditions.

Example:

Added to cart
Added to wishlist

Users who performed either action can be included.

","Step 2: Choose how conditions are matched","step-1-create-a-segment","

Open Ego Mobile Builder.
Go to Notifications → Segments.
Click Create segment.
Enter a clear segment name.

Use a name that helps you quickly understand the audience, such as:

Inactive users — 30 days
Customers in the United States
New users — last 7 days
Added to cart but not purchased

","Step 1: Create a segment","

A Segment is a group of app users who match selected conditions.

Use segments to send notifications to a more relevant audience instead of targeting every app user. You can create segments based on customer information, shopping activity, location, purchase history, and app engagement.

For example, you can target:

Customers in a specific country
Users who have not opened the app recently
Customers who added products to their cart
New users
Returning customers
Customers who previously viewed a notification

","cmrygagqo037u2umprrwvvbhw","automated-notification","Automated Notifications","Learn how to set up automated push notifications that are triggered by customer events and behaviors. Configure triggers, customize notification content, and activate the workflow to engage customers automatically",[1204,1205,1206,1207,1208,1209,1210,1211,1212,1213,1214,1215,1216],"2026-07-24T04:39:05.280Z","2026-09-14T03:10:59.187Z",[],{"_189":305,"_227":1247,"_229":307},{"_189":1244,"_227":1245,"_229":1246},{"_189":1241,"_227":1242,"_229":1243},{"_189":1238,"_227":1239,"_229":1240},{"_189":1235,"_227":1236,"_229":1237},{"_189":1232,"_227":1233,"_229":1234},{"_189":1229,"_227":1230,"_229":1231},{"_189":1226,"_227":1227,"_229":1228},{"_189":1223,"_227":1224,"_229":1225},{"_189":1220,"_227":1221,"_229":1222},{"_189":1171,"_227":1219,"_229":1173},{"_189":852,"_227":1218,"_229":854},{"_189":192,"_227":1217,"_229":194},"

1. What types of Automated Notifications can I create?
You can create automations for Abandoned Cart, Back in Stock, Welcome Offer, Order Update, Inactive User, Low Stock Alert, Price Drop Alert, and Thank You & Exclusive Offer.

2. How does the sending delay work?
The delay determines how long Ego Mobile Builder waits after the automation condition is met before sending the notification. Available conditions and timing options depend on the automation type.

3. Do I need to recreate an Automated Notification each time it is triggered?
No. Once activated, the automation continues running and automatically sends notifications whenever eligible customers meet its configured conditions.

4. Can I stop an Automated Notification after activating it?
Yes. You can disable an automation when you no longer want it to run. We recommend reviewing active automations regularly and disabling outdated campaigns.

","

The notification is not sent

Confirm that the automation is active and the customer meets its condition, delay, and segment requirements.

Customers do not receive the notification

Check that they installed the app and allowed push notifications.

The notification opens the wrong page

Review Navigation to, update the destination, and send another test.

The image does not appear

Confirm that the image is supported and does not exceed 5 MB.

","

Match the message with the automation trigger.
Avoid setting the delay too short.
Select a relevant customer segment.
Direct customers to the most relevant app destination.
Send a test before activation.
Review active automations regularly and disable outdated campaigns.

","step-8-activate-the-automation","

Review the condition, content, destination, and segment.

Set the automation status to Active when it is ready to run.

Once active, Ego Mobile Builder automatically sends the notification to eligible customers who meet the configured conditions.

","Step 8: Activate the automation","step-7-preview-and-test","

Use the Preview panel to review how the notification may appear on a mobile device.

Click Send test to send it to the connected Ego App Preview.

Check:

Title and message
Image display
Personalization
Redirect destination
Overall readability

","Step 7: Preview and test","step-6-select-a-segment","

Under Segments, click Select segment and choose which users are eligible to receive the notification.

A notification is sent only when the customer:

Meets the automation condition.
Belongs to the selected segment.
Has installed the app.
Has allowed push notifications.

","Step 6: Select a segment","step-5-choose-a-destination","

Under Navigation to, select where customers should go after tapping the notification:

Product
Collection
URL
Screen

Then select the relevant destination.

For example, an abandoned-cart notification should direct customers to the Cart or another relevant recovery screen.

","Step 5: Choose a destination","step-4-upload-an-image","

Click Browse File to add an optional image.

Recommended settings:

Image size: 1440 × 720 px
Maximum file size: 5 MB

Use an image that matches the notification message and destination.

","Step 4: Upload an image","step-3-add-the-notification-content","

Under Content, configure:

Title

Enter a short title of up to 50 characters.

Example:

You left something behind

Message

Enter the main message of up to 200 characters.

Example:

Your selected items are still waiting in your cart.

You can also use available emojis and customer shortcodes.

","Step 3: Add the notification content","step-2-configure-the-sending-condition","

Configure when the notification should be sent.

The available condition depends on the selected automation. For example, an Abandoned cart notification lets you set how long Ego should wait after products are added to the cart but not checked out.

Enter the delay and select the relevant time unit.

Choose a delay that gives customers enough time to complete the action before sending a reminder.

","Step 2: Configure the sending condition","step-1-select-an-automation","

Open Ego Mobile Builder.
Go to Notifications.
Click Create notification.
Under Automated, find the notification you want to use.
Click Create.

","Step 1: Select an automation","available-automation-types","

Ego Mobile Builder provides the following automated notifications:

Abandoned cart
Remind customers about products left in their cart.

Back in stock
Notify customers when a product they are interested in becomes available again.

Welcome offer
Send a welcome message or offer after a new customer signs up.

Order update
Notify customers when their order status changes, such as when an order is processed, shipped, or delivered.

Inactive user
Encourage customers who have not used the app for a period of time to return.

Low stock alert
Create urgency by notifying customers when a product is almost sold out.

Price drop alert
Notify customers when a product in their wishlist or cart is available at a lower price.

Thank you & exclusive offer
Send a thank-you message or exclusive offer after a customer completes their first purchase.

","Available automation types","

An Automated Notification is sent automatically when a customer meets a predefined condition, such as abandoning a cart, returning to an in-stock product, or completing an order.

Once activated, the notification continues running without requiring you to create a new campaign each time.

","cmryfex8v037o2umptu0ip5qh","manual-notification","Manual Notifications","Learn how to create and send a manual push notification. Compose your message, select the target audience, schedule or send it immediately, and track its delivery.",[1256,1257,1258,1259,1260,1261,1262,1263,1264,1265,1266,1267,1268],"2026-07-24T04:14:33.679Z","2026-09-14T03:10:25.074Z",[],{"_189":305,"_227":1291,"_229":307},{"_189":1145,"_227":1290,"_229":1147},{"_189":1287,"_227":1288,"_229":1289},{"_189":1284,"_227":1285,"_229":1286},{"_189":1281,"_227":1282,"_229":1283},{"_189":1278,"_227":1279,"_229":1280},{"_189":1229,"_227":1277,"_229":1231},{"_189":1226,"_227":1276,"_229":1228},{"_189":1223,"_227":1275,"_229":1225},{"_189":1272,"_227":1273,"_229":1274},{"_189":1171,"_227":1271,"_229":1173},{"_189":852,"_227":1270,"_229":854},{"_189":192,"_227":1269,"_229":194},"

1. Can I schedule a Manual Notification for later?
Yes. You can send it immediately or schedule it for a specific date and time.

2. Which customer variables can I use to personalize a notification?
You can personalize notification content using five supported customer variables: First Name, Last Name, Email, Phone, and Store URL. The variable will display the corresponding customer information when that data is available.

3. Where can customers be redirected after tapping a notification?
You can direct customers to a Product, Collection, URL, or supported app Screen.

4. Can I test a Manual Notification before sending it?
Yes. Use Send test to check the notification content and destination on your connected Ego App Preview before sending it to customers.

","

The test notification is not received

Confirm that Ego App Preview is connected and notifications are allowed on the test device.

Customers do not receive the notification

Check that they belong to the selected segment, installed the app, and allowed push notifications.

The notification opens the wrong destination

Review Navigation to, update the destination, and send another test.

The image does not appear

Confirm that the file is supported and does not exceed 5 MB.

A shortcode does not display correctly

Confirm that the related customer information is available for the recipient.

","

Keep the title and message concise.
Focus on one campaign and one action.
Select a relevant segment.
Match the destination with the notification content.
Avoid sending multiple notifications too close together.
Always send a test before delivering the campaign.

","step-8-review-and-send","

Before confirming, review:

Content
Image
Send time
Navigation destination
Selected segment
Test result

Then complete the notification to send it immediately or add it to the scheduled notification list.

","Step 8: Review and send","

Use the Preview panel to check how the notification may appear on a mobile device.

Review:

Title and message
Image
Personalization
Overall readability

Click Send test to send the notification to the connected Ego App Preview.

Test that the notification opens the correct destination before sending it to customers.

","

Under Segments, click Select segment and choose the audience that should receive the notification.

The final number of recipients may be lower than the segment size because users must also allow push notifications.

","

Under Navigation to, select where customers should go after tapping the notification.

Available options include:

Product
Collection
URL
Screen

Then select the related product, collection, URL, or app screen.

Make sure the selected destination matches the notification message.

","step-4-choose-the-send-time","

Under Send time, select:

Send now to deliver the notification immediately.
Schedule for other time to select a future date and time.

Check the campaign timing and timezone before scheduling.

","Step 4: Choose the send time","step-3-upload-an-image","

Click Browse File to add a campaign image.

Recommended settings:

Image size: 1440 × 720 px
Maximum file size: 5 MB

Use a clear image that matches the notification content.

","Step 3: Upload an image","step-2-add-the-content","

Under Content, configure:

Title

Enter a short notification title of up to 50 characters.

Example:

New arrivals are here ✨

Message

Enter the main message of up to 200 characters.

Example:

Explore our latest collection and find your new favorites.

You can also use available emojis and customer shortcodes, such as:

firstName
lastName
storeUrl
email
phone

Only use a shortcode when the related customer information is available.

","Step 2: Add the content","step-1-create-a-notification","

Open Ego Mobile Builder.
Go to Notifications.
Click Create notification.
Under Manual, select New.
Click Create.

","Step 1: Create a notification","

Prepare:

A short title and message
A campaign image, if needed
The target customer segment
The destination customers should open
The preferred send time

Customers must have installed your app and allowed push notifications to receive your message.

","

A Manual Notification is a one-time push notification that you can send immediately or schedule for later.

Use it for:

Flash sales
Product launches
Collection announcements
App-only promotions
Store updates

You can customize the content, choose the target audience, and direct customers to a specific destination in your app.

","mob-art-notification-configuration","otifications-overview","Notification Overview","Learn the basics of Push Notifications and how they help you engage customers. Discover notification types, key features, and how to use them to increase app engagement and drive sales.",[1299,1300,1301,1302,1303,1304,1305,1306,1307,1308],"2026-09-14T03:08:41.332Z",[],{"_189":305,"_227":1325,"_229":307},{"_189":1145,"_227":1324,"_229":1147},{"_189":1322,"_227":1323,"_229":1250},{"_189":1320,"_227":1321,"_229":1198},{"_189":1150,"_227":1318,"_229":1319},{"_189":1315,"_227":1316,"_229":1317},{"_189":1312,"_227":1313,"_229":1314},{"_189":1171,"_227":1311,"_229":1173},{"_189":852,"_227":1310,"_229":854},{"_189":192,"_227":1309,"_229":194},"

1. What is the difference between Manual and Automated Notifications?
Manual Notifications are one-time campaigns that you send immediately or schedule for later, while Automated Notifications are triggered automatically when customers meet predefined conditions.

2. Does enabling notifications automatically give the app notification permission?
No. Customers must grant push notification permission on their own device.

3. Can I choose where customers go after tapping a notification?
Yes. You can redirect customers to supported destinations such as Home, Product, Collection, Cart, Custom Screen, or another available in-app destination.

4. Why is an Automated Notification not being sent?
Check that the automation is active and that the customer meets the trigger, segment, delay, permission, and any exclusion conditions.

5. Should I send a test notification before launching a campaign?
Yes. We recommend testing the notification first to verify the content, image, appearance, delivery, and redirect destination.

","

Customers do not receive a notification

Confirm that they installed the correct app, allowed notifications, belong to the selected segment, and meet all sending conditions.

The audience is smaller than expected

Review the segment conditions. Users without push permission may not be eligible for delivery.

The notification opens the wrong screen

Review the redirect destination and send another test.

An automated notification is not sent

Confirm that the automation is active and that the user meets the trigger, segment, delay, and exclusion conditions.

A scheduled notification is delivered at the wrong time

Review the selected date, time, and timezone.

","

Send notifications only when they provide clear customer value.
Use segments to improve message relevance.
Keep the title and message short.
Focus each notification on one main action.
Match the redirect destination with the campaign.
Avoid sending multiple notifications too close together.
Check the date, time, and timezone before scheduling.
Test every notification before sending.
Review active automations regularly and pause outdated campaigns.

","send-a-test-notification","

Before sending a campaign to customers, send a test notification to your test device.

Check:

Title and message
Image display
Text length
Redirect destination
Customer-facing appearance
Notification delivery

A successful test confirms that the content and destination are configured correctly. Final customer delivery still depends on segment eligibility, device permission, operating-system settings, and internet connection.

","Send a test notification","redirect-destinations","

You can choose where customers are taken after they tap a notification.

Supported destinations may include:

Home
Product
Collection
Cart
Custom screen
Another supported in-app destination

Choose a destination that directly matches the notification message.

For example, a notification promoting a new collection should open that collection rather than the app home screen.

","Redirect destinations","

A Segment is a group of app users who match selected conditions.

Segments help you send relevant messages to the right audience instead of sending every notification to all users.

Depending on the available conditions, segments may be used to target groups such as:

All eligible users
New users
Returning customers
Inactive users
Customers in a specific location
Users with selected shopping behaviors

How segments are applied

For a Manual Notification, the segment determines who is included when the campaign is sent.

For an Automated Notification, the user must:

Meet the automation trigger.
Belong to the selected segment.
Have push notification permission.
Meet any additional timing or exclusion conditions.

The number of users in a segment may be higher than the final delivery count because some users may not have notification permission or may no longer meet the sending conditions.

For complete instructions, see:

How to Create and Use Segments

","Segments","automated-notifications","

An Automated Notification is sent when an eligible customer meets a predefined trigger.

Use Automated Notifications for recurring customer journeys such as:

Welcome messages
Abandoned cart recovery
Abandoned checkout recovery
Customer re-engagement
Other supported behavioral triggers

When creating an Automated Notification, you can configure:

Trigger
Target segment
Delay and sending conditions
Notification content
Redirect destination
Automation status

For complete instructions, see:

How to Set Up an Automated Notification

","manual-notifications","

A Manual Notification is a one-time campaign that you can send immediately or schedule for later.

Use Manual Notifications for:

Flash sales
New product launches
Seasonal promotions
New collection announcements
App-only offers
Store updates

When creating a Manual Notification, you can configure:

Notification title and message
Campaign image
Target segment
Redirect destination
Send time
Test notification

For complete instructions, see:

How to Create a Manual Notification

","

A customer can receive a push notification only when they:

Have installed your mobile app.
Have opened the app at least once.
Have allowed push notification permission on their device.
Belong to the selected segment.
Meet the notification conditions, if applicable.

Enabling notifications in Ego Mobile Builder does not automatically grant device permission. Customers must approve notification access themselves.

","

Push Notifications help you communicate directly with customers who have installed your mobile app.

You can use notifications to announce promotions, introduce new products, recover unfinished purchases, and encourage users to return to your app.

Ego Mobile Builder supports:

Manual Notifications for one-time campaigns.
Automated Notifications triggered by customer actions.
Segments for targeting specific groups of app users.

","cmrx9tbdd02z02umphzhwtgts","multi-currency","Multi-Currency Settings","The Multi Currency setting allows your mobile app to display product prices in different currencies based on your Shopify Markets setup.",[1335,1336,1337,1338,1339,1340,1341,1342,1343,1344,1345],"2026-07-23T08:50:01.297Z","2026-09-14T03:07:16.728Z",[],"Settings",{"_189":305,"_227":1369,"_229":307},{"_189":870,"_227":1368,"_229":872},{"_189":1365,"_227":1366,"_229":1367},{"_189":1362,"_227":1363,"_229":1364},{"_189":1359,"_227":1360,"_229":1361},{"_189":1356,"_227":1357,"_229":1358},{"_189":1353,"_227":1354,"_229":1355},{"_189":1350,"_227":1351,"_229":1352},{"_189":1089,"_227":1348,"_229":1349},{"_189":852,"_227":1347,"_229":854},{"_189":192,"_227":1346,"_229":194},"

1. Does enabling Multi Currency automatically create currencies in Shopify?
No. You still need to create and configure the required markets and currencies in Shopify Markets.

2. What is required before enabling Multi Currency?
Your store must support Shopify Markets, and the markets you want to use should already be configured in Shopify Admin.

3. Why is a currency or market not appearing in my mobile app?
Make sure Multi Currency is enabled in Ego Mobile Builder and that the corresponding market is active in Shopify Markets.

4. Where can customers change their market or currency in the app?
Customers can change their preferred market or currency from the Account screen.

5. Does changing the market only change the currency symbol?
No. The app can also reflect market-specific pricing and regional settings configured in Shopify Markets.

6. Why is the product price correct but checkout shows a different currency?
Review your Shopify Markets and checkout configuration, as checkout currency behavior is controlled by Shopify.

7. What should I check after enabling Multi Currency?
Test the selected market across the homepage, product listings, product details, cart, and checkout to confirm prices and currencies display correctly.

","

If the currency option does not appear in the mobile app, check whether Multi Currency is enabled in Settings → Localization.

If Multi Currency is enabled but the expected option still does not appear, check whether the market has been added in Shopify Markets.

If a market does not appear in the app, make sure the market is active in Shopify.

If prices do not change after selecting a different market or currency, refresh the mobile app preview and test again.

If the product price looks correct but checkout does not use the expected currency, review your Shopify Markets and checkout settings.

If you recently changed your Shopify Markets setup, wait a short time, then reopen the app preview and check again.

","

Multi Currency in Ego Mobile Builder depends on Shopify Markets.

You need to enable Multi Currency in Settings → Localization and also configure the required markets in Shopify Admin.

If Multi Currency is enabled in Ego Mobile Builder but no additional market is configured in Shopify, customers may not see additional currency options in the mobile app.

If a market is not active in Shopify, it may not appear as an available option in the app.

The currency shown in the mobile app may depend on your Shopify Markets setup, customer location, selected market, and checkout configuration.

After customers change their market or currency from the Account screen, the app should display prices based on the selected option.

","Important notes","step-6-check-currency-display-in-the-app","

After changing the market or currency in the app, review the main shopping screens.

You should check the homepage, product listing pages, product detail pages, cart, and checkout flow.

Make sure product prices are displayed in the expected currency.

If your market setup includes different pricing or regional rules, confirm that the app reflects the correct experience for that market.

","Step 6: Check currency display in the app","step-5-preview-your-mobile-app","

After enabling Multi Currency and setting up Shopify Markets, open the mobile app preview.

Go to the Account screen in the app.

You should see a setting option that allows customers to change their market or currency preference.

Open this setting and choose the market or currency you want to test.

After selecting the preferred option, the app should update and display prices based on the selected market or currency.

","Step 5: Preview your mobile app","step-4-make-sure-the-market-is-active","

After creating or updating a market, make sure the market status is Active.

Only active markets should be available for customers to use.

If a market is still in draft or not fully configured, customers may not see the expected currency option in the mobile app.

","Step 4: Make sure the market is active","step-3-add-a-new-market","

In Shopify Markets, click Create market.

Add the market you want to support.

For example, if you want to support customers in Canada, you can create or enable a Canada market. If you want to support customers in the United States, you can create or enable a United States market.

Choose the countries or regions that should be included in the market.

Configure the currency and market settings based on your selling needs.

Save the market after finishing the setup.

Repeat this process if you want to support more than one market.

","Step 3: Add a new market","step-2-go-to-shopify-markets","

After enabling Multi Currency in Ego Mobile Builder, go back to your Shopify Admin.

Open Markets from the Shopify sidebar.

This is where you manage the countries, regions, currencies, and localized selling setup for your Shopify store.

","Step 2: Go to Shopify Markets","step-1-enable-multi-currency-in-ego-mobile-builder","

From your Shopify Admin, open Ego Mobile Builder.

Go to Settings → Localization.

Find Multi Currency and turn it on.

After enabling this setting, your mobile app will be able to support multiple currencies based on your Shopify Markets configuration.

","Step 1: Enable Multi Currency in Ego Mobile Builder","

Before enabling Multi Currency, make sure your Shopify store already supports Shopify Markets.

You should also decide which countries, regions, and currencies you want to support in your mobile app.

Multi Currency in Ego Mobile Builder works together with Shopify Markets. Turning on Multi Currency in Ego Mobile Builder does not automatically create new markets in Shopify. You still need to add and configure the target markets in Shopify Admin.

","

The Multi Currency setting allows your mobile app to display product prices in different currencies based on your Shopify Markets setup.

After enabling Multi Currency in Ego Mobile App Builder, you need to configure the markets you want to support in Shopify. Once the setup is completed, customers can open the mobile app, go to the Account screen, and select the market or currency they want to use.

This helps create a localized shopping experience for customers from different countries or regions.

","cmrx96k0w02yw2umpn9hs8i5i","setup-multi-language","Multi-Language Settings","Ego Mobile Builder supports multi-language setup to help you provide a localized mobile app experience for customers in different regions.",[1378,1379,1380,1381,1382,1383,1384,1385,1386,1387,1388,1389,1390,1391],"2026-07-23T08:32:19.424Z","2026-09-14T03:06:50.393Z",[],{"_189":305,"_227":1423,"_229":307},{"_189":870,"_227":1422,"_229":872},{"_189":1419,"_227":1420,"_229":1421},{"_189":1416,"_227":1417,"_229":1418},{"_189":1413,"_227":1414,"_229":1415},{"_189":1410,"_227":1411,"_229":1412},{"_189":1407,"_227":1408,"_229":1409},{"_189":1404,"_227":1405,"_229":1406},{"_189":1401,"_227":1402,"_229":1403},{"_189":1398,"_227":1399,"_229":1400},{"_189":1395,"_227":1396,"_229":1397},{"_189":1089,"_227":1394,"_229":1349},{"_189":852,"_227":1393,"_229":854},{"_189":192,"_227":1392,"_229":194},"

1. Can I add multiple languages to my mobile app?
Yes. You can add and manage multiple languages for your app design after Multi-language is enabled.

2. Can Ego Mobile Builder translate my app content automatically?
Yes. Ego Mobile Builder supports AI translation for supported text in the App Editor. To translate the content, click the translation icon and select the language you want to translate. We recommend reviewing and adjusting the result before publishing.

3. Does AI translation also translate my Shopify products and collections?
No. AI translation currently does not translate product names or collection names.

4. Do I need to publish a language in Shopify as well?
Yes. Publishing translations in Ego Mobile Builder is not enough. The language must also be published in Shopify → Settings → Languages before customers can use it.

5. Why is a published language not available in my mobile app?
Check that the language is published in Shopify and, if applicable, assigned to the correct domain or language path.

6. Why is some content still showing in the default language?
The component may not have translated content yet, or the content may come from Shopify or a third-party integration that manages translations separately.

7. Can I preview each language before making it available to customers?
Yes. Use Preview to switch between languages and review key screens, navigation, components, and translated content before releasing the update.

","

If you cannot find Multi-language in the App Editor, make sure Multi-language has been activated in the Settings area first.

If a language does not appear after being added, refresh the App Editor and check the language list again.

If the translated content has been published from Ego Mobile Builder but the language is still unavailable, check the following:

Make sure the language has been published in Shopify → Settings → Languages.
Verify that the language is assigned to the correct domain or language path in Shopify → Settings → Domains.
Refresh the mobile app or preview again after updating the Shopify language settings.

If some text is still displayed in the default language, that component may not have translated content yet. Switch to the target language and update the text for that component.

If AI translation does not generate the expected wording, edit the translated text manually before saving.

If the translated text does not fit well on mobile, shorten the wording or adjust the component layout.

If the language update does not appear in preview, save the changes again, publish the language update, then refresh or reopen the preview app.

","

AI translation helps you generate translated content faster, but the final content should still be reviewed before publishing.

Multi-language setup in Ego Mobile Builder applies to the content configured inside the App Editor.

Content that comes directly from Shopify, such as product names, product descriptions, collection names, or other Shopify-managed data, may need to be translated from Shopify or another translation source.

Content from third-party integrations may depend on how that integration manages languages.

If a component still shows the default language, open the App Editor, switch to the target language, and check whether that component has translated content.

If your app is already live, preview the translated version carefully before publishing updates.

If a language has been translated and published in Ego Mobile Builder but is not yet published in Shopify, customers will not be able to access that language. Make sure each language is published in Shopify and, if applicable, assigned to the correct domain or language path before making it available to customers.

","step-9-preview-your-mobile-app","

After publishing the language updates, open Preview to check the result on your mobile app.

Switch between languages and review important screens, including homepage, product sections, collection sections, banners, navigation, and custom components.

Make sure each language version displays correctly before sharing the app with customers or publishing app updates.

","Step 9: Preview your mobile app","step-8-activate-the-language-in-shopify-and-assign-a-domain","

After publishing the translated content from Ego Mobile Builder, you also need to activate the language in Shopify so customers can access it.

In your Shopify Admin, go to Settings → Languages.
Find the language you want to use and click Publish if it has not been published yet.
If you use multiple domains or subfolders for different languages, go to Settings → Domains.
Assign the published language to the appropriate domain or language path according to your store configuration.
Save your changes.

Publishing translations in Ego Mobile Builder only makes the translated content available inside your mobile app design. The language must also be published in Shopify before customers can use it.

","Step 8: Activate the language in Shopify and assign a domain","step-7-save-and-publish-the-language-updates","

After finishing the translation, click Save to save your changes.

Then click Publish to publish the language updates to your mobile app.

The translated content will be applied to the selected app design after publishing.

","Step 7: Save and publish the language updates","step-6-review-translated-content-for-each-component","

After translating your components, review the selected language version inside the App Editor.

Make sure all customer-facing content has been translated, including banners, section titles, descriptions, button labels, promotional text, navigation labels, and other text displayed in your mobile app.

For the best result, check each component carefully instead of only translating the main homepage content. This helps avoid mixed-language experiences where some parts of the app are translated while other parts still show the default language.

You should also check whether the translated text fits the mobile layout. Some languages may require longer wording, so you may need to shorten the text or adjust the component layout to keep the app clean and easy to read.

","Step 6: Review translated content for each component","step-5-translate-content-with-ai-support","

After adding a language, select that language in the App Editor.

Go through each component in your app design and update the translated content for that language.

Ego Mobile Builder supports AI translation to help you translate supported text fields faster. You can use AI to generate translations for component content, such as banners, headings, descriptions, button labels, promotional messages, custom sections, and other editable text inside the App Editor.

After AI generates the translation, review the result carefully before saving. You can edit the AI-generated translation to make sure the wording matches your brand tone, product context, and customer expectations.

This helps reduce manual translation work while still giving you full control over the final content shown in your mobile app.

Repeat this process for each language you add.

","Step 5: Translate content with AI support","step-4-add-additional-languages","

Click Add language and select the language you want to add to your mobile app.

After the language is added, it will appear in the language list inside the App Editor.

You can add multiple languages if your app needs to support customers from different regions.

If your setup includes a default language option, choose the main language that should be used as the default experience for your mobile app.

","Step 4: Add additional languages","step-3-open-multi-language-settings-in-app-editor","

Inside the App Editor, open the Multi-language setting.

This area allows you to manage the languages available for your mobile app design.

From here, you can review the current language setup, add more languages, and switch between languages to update translated content.

","Step 3: Open Multi-language settings in App Editor","step-2-go-to-app-design","

In Ego Mobile Builder, open App Design.

Choose the app design you want to configure multi-language for.

Click Edit Theme to open the App Editor.

The App Editor is where you manage your mobile app layout, components, and translated content for each language.

","Step 2: Go to App Design","step-1-activate-multi-language","

From your Shopify Admin, open Ego Mobile Builder.

Go to the Settings area and find Multi-language.

Turn on Multi-language to enable language support for your mobile app.

After multi-language is activated, you can go to the App Editor to add and manage language content for your app design.

","Step 1: Activate Multi-language","

Before setting up multi-language, make sure Ego Mobile Builder is installed on your Shopify store.

You should already have an app design created in App Design.

You should also prepare the languages you want to support. Although Ego Mobile Builder can help generate translations with AI, we still recommend reviewing the translated content to make sure it is accurate, natural, and suitable for your brand voice.

Some content may come from Shopify products, collections, or third-party integrations. If the content is managed outside Ego Mobile Builder, you may need to manage its translation from the original source.

","

Ego Mobile Builder supports multi-language setup to help you provide a localized mobile app experience for customers in different regions.

After multi-language is activated, you can add the languages you want to support, translate app content for each component, and publish the translated version to your mobile app.

To make the translation process faster, Ego Mobile Builder also supports AI translation. Instead of manually translating every text field from scratch, you can use AI to generate translations for supported content, then review and adjust the result before publishing.

This feature is useful if your store serves customers from multiple countries or if you want your mobile app content to match different customer languages.

","cmrx8c2gc02yn2ump39rnaf6k","customer-account","Customer Account Settings","The Customer Account settings help you manage how customers create accounts, sign in, save wishlist items, and recover account access in your mobile app.",[1432,1433,1434,1435,1436,1437,1438,1439,1440],"2026-07-23T08:08:36.972Z","2026-09-14T03:06:24.254Z",[],{"_189":305,"_227":1461,"_229":307},{"_189":1458,"_227":1459,"_229":1460},{"_189":1455,"_227":1456,"_229":1457},{"_189":1452,"_227":1453,"_229":1454},{"_189":1449,"_227":1450,"_229":1451},{"_189":1446,"_227":1447,"_229":1448},{"_189":1443,"_227":1444,"_229":1445},{"_189":852,"_227":1442,"_229":854},{"_189":192,"_227":1441,"_229":194},"

1. What does Login to Use Wishlist do?
When enabled, customers must sign in before saving products to their wishlist.

2. What is required to enable No-password Login?
You need to configure Shopify Headless and provide valid Customer Account API credentials, including the Client ID and Client Secret.

3. Why is No-password Login not working?
Check that the Client ID, Client Secret, and Shopify Headless configuration are correct, then test the login flow again.

4. Why is the Forgot Password flow not working correctly?
Make sure the code provided by Ego Mobile Builder has been added correctly to the Shopify password reset notification template.

","

Checkout Account Creation

If an account is not created, confirm the setting is enabled and review your Shopify checkout configuration.

Login to Use Wishlist

If customers can still save items without signing in, confirm the setting is enabled and reopen the app.

No-password Login

If login fails, review the Client ID, Client secret, and Headless setup in the detailed guide.

Forgot Password Notification

If password reset does not work correctly, confirm the provided code was added to the Shopify notification template.

","recommended-setup","

Enable Checkout Account Creation if customer accounts support your retention strategy.
Require login for wishlist when saved items should persist across devices.
Use No-password Login to reduce sign-in friction.
Test account creation, login, wishlist, and password reset after making changes.
Keep Customer Account settings aligned with your Shopify configuration.

","Recommended setup","forgot-password-notification","

Forgot Password Notification helps customers receive the correct password reset experience when requesting a new password from the mobile app.

This setup requires updating the Shopify password reset notification template with the code provided by Ego Mobile Builder.

For complete setup instructions, see:

Forgot Password Notification Setup Guide

Complete the notification template setup before testing the forgot password flow in the app.

","Forgot Password Notification","no-password-login","

No-password Login allows customers to sign in without entering a password.

This creates a faster login experience and reduces issues caused by forgotten passwords.

The feature requires Customer Account API credentials and Shopify Headless configuration.

For complete setup instructions, see:

Headless Configuration Guide

Use the detailed guide to configure the Client ID, Client secret, and Shopify Headless setup correctly.

","No-password Login","login-to-use-wishlist","

Login to Use Wishlist requires customers to sign in before saving products to their wishlist.

Use this setting when you want wishlist items to stay connected to a customer account and remain available across sessions or devices.

Enable the setting

Find Login to Use Wishlist.
Turn on the toggle.
Save your changes if required.
Test wishlist with both a signed-in and signed-out customer.

When disabled, customers may be able to use wishlist without signing in, depending on your app setup.

","Login to Use Wishlist","checkout-account-creation","

Checkout Account Creation automatically creates a customer account during checkout.

Use this setting when you want to:

Grow your customer account base.
Make repeat purchases easier.
Allow customers to access order information later.
Reduce the need for customers to register separately.

Enable the setting

Find Checkout Account Creation.
Turn on the toggle.
Save your changes if required.
Complete a test checkout.

When disabled, Ego Mobile Builder will not automatically create an account through this setting.

Make sure this behavior matches your Shopify customer account and checkout configuration.

","Checkout Account Creation","how-to-access-customer-account-settings","

From your Shopify Admin, open Ego Mobile Builder.
Go to Settings → Customer Account.
Select the setting you want to enable or configure.

","How to access Customer Account settings","

The Customer Account settings help you manage how customers create accounts, sign in, save wishlist items, and recover account access in your mobile app.

You can use these settings to:

Create customer accounts during checkout.
Require login before customers use wishlist.
Enable passwordless login.
Configure the password reset experience.

","cmrx819ui02yd2ump0wv7ncgk","product-discovery","Product Discovery Settings","Product discovery settings help customers understand product availability and identify important products while browsing your mobile app.",[1470,1471,1472,1473,1474,1475],"2026-07-23T08:00:13.338Z","2026-09-14T03:05:58.788Z",[],{"_189":305,"_227":1487,"_229":307},{"_189":1484,"_227":1485,"_229":1486},{"_189":1481,"_227":1482,"_229":1483},{"_189":1478,"_227":1479,"_229":1480},{"_189":852,"_227":1477,"_229":854},{"_189":192,"_227":1476,"_229":194},"

1. What can I use Product Badges for?
You can use badges to highlight products such as new arrivals, sale items, best sellers, limited editions, or seasonal products.

2. Does creating a Product Badge create a Shopify discount or product tag?
No. Product Badges only change how products are visually displayed in your mobile app. They do not create Shopify discounts, tags, or collections.

4. What happens when I enable Out of Stock Hiding?
Sold-out products are automatically hidden from supported product discovery areas so customers can focus on products that are currently available.

5. Should I enable Out of Stock Hiding if I use back-in-stock features?
Not necessarily. Keep it disabled if you want customers to view sold-out products, check their details, or use back-in-stock features.

6. Why is a badge or sold-out product not updating correctly?
For badges, make sure the badge is saved and assigned to the correct product. For sold-out products, confirm that Out of Stock Hiding is enabled and the product has no available inventory.

","

Product badges

If a badge does not appear, confirm it is saved and assigned to the correct product.

Out of stock hiding

If sold-out products remain visible, confirm the toggle is enabled and the products have no available inventory.

","out-of-stock-hiding","

Out of stock hiding automatically removes sold-out products from product discovery areas in the app.

Enable it when you want customers to browse only products that are currently available.

Keep it disabled when you still want customers to:

View sold-out products
Read product details
Wait for restocks
Use back-in-stock features

Enable the setting

Find Out of stock hiding.
Turn on the toggle.
Save your changes if required.
Refresh the app and review the visible products.

Enabling this setting may significantly reduce the number of visible products if many items are sold out.

Recommended setup

Use a small number of clear badges.
Keep stock data updated in Shopify.
Review the app after enabling out-of-stock hiding.

","Out of stock hiding","product-badges","

Product badges let you add visual labels such as New, Sale, or Best Seller to selected products.

Use badges to highlight:

New arrivals
Discounted products
Popular items
Limited or seasonal products

Create a badge

Open Product badges.
Click Create badge.
Enter an internal badge name.
Create the badge in the editor or upload an image.
Select up to 10 products.
Review the preview and click Save.

For uploaded badges:

Recommended size: 40 × 18 px
Supported formats: SVG, JPG, JPEG, PNG
Maximum size: 5 MB

You can reopen an existing badge to edit its design or assigned products. Deleting a badge removes it from all assigned products.

Product badges only change the visual display. They do not create Shopify discounts, tags, or collections.

","Product badges","how-to-access-product-discovery","

From your Shopify Admin, open Ego Mobile Builder.
Go to Settings → Product discovery.
Select the setting you want to configure.

","How to access Product discovery","

Product discovery settings help customers understand product availability and identify important products while browsing your mobile app.

You can use these settings to:

Add badges to selected products.
Hide out-of-stock products.

","cmrx7oenb02yb2umpqby968x6","cart-checkout-setting","Cart & Checkout Settings","The Cart & Checkout settings help you control how customers move from product selection to order completion in your mobile app.",[1496,1497,1498,1499,1500,1501,1502,1503,1504,1505,1506,1507],"2026-07-23T07:50:13.031Z","2026-09-14T03:05:22.207Z",[],{"_189":305,"_227":1533,"_229":307},{"_189":1145,"_227":1532,"_229":1147},{"_189":1529,"_227":1530,"_229":1531},{"_189":1526,"_227":1527,"_229":1528},{"_189":1523,"_227":1524,"_229":1525},{"_189":1520,"_227":1521,"_229":1522},{"_189":1517,"_227":1518,"_229":1519},{"_189":1514,"_227":1515,"_229":1516},{"_189":1511,"_227":1512,"_229":1513},{"_189":852,"_227":1510,"_229":854},{"_189":1089,"_227":1509,"_229":1349},{"_189":192,"_227":1508,"_229":194},"

1. What does Fast Checkout do?
Fast Checkout sends customers directly to checkout after they add a product, reducing the number of steps before payment.

2. Should I enable Fast Checkout if I use cart upsells or free gifts?
Use it carefully. Fast Checkout may cause customers to skip cart-based upsells, free gifts, banners, discount fields, and other cart features.

3. Does the Cart Banner automatically create a discount or promotion?
No. The Cart Banner only displays promotional content. Any discount or offer must be configured separately.

4. What is the difference between abandoned cart and abandoned checkout recovery?
Abandoned cart recovery targets customers who leave products in their cart, while abandoned checkout recovery targets customers who started checkout but did not complete their order.

5. Why are some customers not receiving recovery reminders?
Recovery reminders depend on customer eligibility, the enabled recovery setting, and notification permissions.

6. Can I enable subscription checkout without configuring subscriptions in Shopify first?
No. Subscription products, selling plans, and the related Shopify subscription setup must already be active and valid.

7. What should I do after changing Cart & Checkout settings?
Test the complete purchase flow, including add to cart, promotions, discounts, checkout, and subscription products if applicable.

","

Fast Checkout may cause customers to skip cart-based promotions.
Cart Banner does not create a promotion or discount.
Abandoned cart and abandoned checkout recovery target different customer stages.
Recovery notifications depend on customer eligibility and notification permissions.
Subscription checkout requires an existing and valid Shopify subscription setup.
Always test the complete cart and checkout flow after changing a setting.
Confirm whether settings take effect immediately or require an app publish before documenting the final process.

","

Require phone number at checkout

If the phone number is not required, confirm the setting is enabled and review the related Shopify Checkout configuration.

Fast Checkout

If customers skip the cart unexpectedly, turn off Fast Checkout and test the add-to-cart flow again.

Cart Banner

If the banner does not appear or opens the wrong page, check that it is enabled, saved, and linked to the correct destination.

Recovery reminders

If reminders are not sent, confirm the correct recovery setting is enabled and that the customer meets its eligibility conditions.

Subscription checkout

If subscription checkout does not work, confirm that the subscription product, selling plan, and Shopify subscription setup are active.

","enable-subscriptions-checkout","

What this setting does

Enable subscriptions checkout allows eligible subscription products and recurring purchase options to work in the mobile app checkout flow.

This may support use cases such as:

Recurring product deliveries.
Product replenishment.
Memberships.
Subscribe-and-save offers.
Repeat purchase plans.

Before enabling it

Confirm that:

Subscription products are already configured in Shopify.
Your subscription app or selling plan is active.
Products are available to the mobile app sales channel.
The subscription checkout flow has been tested.
Pricing, billing frequency, and customer terms are correct.

How to enable it

Go to Settings → Cart & Checkout.
Find Enable subscriptions checkout.
Turn on the toggle.
Save your changes if required.
Test an eligible subscription product in the app.

What customers will experience

Customers can select and purchase supported subscription options through the mobile app checkout flow.

","Enable subscriptions checkout","recover-abandoned-cart","

What this setting does

Recover abandoned cart reminds customers about products left in their cart before they start checkout.

When should you enable it?

Enable this setting when you want to:

Bring customers back to unfinished carts.
Remind customers about products they previously selected.
Increase the chance that customers continue to checkout.
Recover shopping sessions that ended before purchase.

How to enable it

Go to Settings → Cart & Checkout.
Find Recover abandoned cart.
Turn on the toggle.
Save your changes if required.

What customers will experience

Eligible customers may receive a reminder about the products left in their cart.

","Recover abandoned cart","abandoned-checkout-recovery","

What this setting does

Abandoned checkout recovery reminds customers who started checkout but did not complete their order.

These customers have already shown strong purchase intent by entering the checkout flow.

When should you enable it?

Enable this setting when you want to:

Recover incomplete checkouts.
Remind customers about an unfinished purchase.
Reduce checkout drop-off.
Bring high-intent customers back to complete payment.

How to enable it

Go to Settings → Cart & Checkout.
Find Abandoned checkout recovery.
Turn on the toggle.
Save your changes if required.

What customers will experience

Eligible customers may receive a reminder encouraging them to return and complete checkout.

","Abandoned checkout recovery","cart-banner","

What is Cart Banner?

Cart Banner displays a clickable promotional image at the top of the cart page.

You can use it to highlight:

Sales and discounts.
Free shipping campaigns.
Seasonal collections.
App-only promotions.
New product launches.
Important store announcements.

When should you use it?

Use Cart Banner when you want to show customers a relevant message while they review their cart.

The banner works best when it supports the current purchase journey, such as:

Promoting a collection related to the cart.
Showing a limited-time offer.
Directing customers to products that qualify for free shipping.
Highlighting a campaign before checkout.

Configure the banner image

Go to Settings → Cart & Checkout.
Open Cart Banner.
Upload the banner image.
Review the image in the mobile preview.

","Cart Banner","fast-checkout","

What this setting does

Fast Checkout sends customers directly to checkout after they add a product to the cart.

This reduces the number of steps between product selection and payment.

When should you enable it?

Enable Fast Checkout when:

Most customers purchase one product at a time.
Your store has a simple purchase flow.
You want to reduce the time required to reach checkout.
Cart-page promotions are not essential to your sales strategy.

When should you avoid it?

Use Fast Checkout carefully if your cart page includes:

Cart upsells.
Free gift offers.
Add-ons.
Cart banners.
Discount fields.
Order notes.
Trust badges.
Shipping or reward progress bars.

Customers may reach checkout before viewing or interacting with these features.

How to enable it

Go to Settings → Cart & Checkout.
Find Fast Checkout.
Turn on the toggle.
Save your changes if required.
Add a product from the mobile app and test the flow.

What customers will experience

When enabled, customers are redirected to checkout immediately after adding an item.

When disabled, customers can continue browsing or open the cart before checkout.

Recommended practice

Compare conversion rate, Average Order Value, and cart offer performance before and after enabling Fast Checkout.

Warning: Fast Checkout may reduce exposure to cart-based promotions and may lower Average Order Value for stores that rely on upselling.

","Fast Checkout","require-phone-number-at-checkout","

What this setting does

Require phone number at checkout asks customers to provide a phone number before completing their order.

When should you enable it?

Enable this setting when phone numbers are required for your store’s fulfillment or communication process.

It may be especially useful for stores that:

Use local delivery.
Need couriers to contact customers.
Sell high-value or customized products.
Require phone verification for order processing.

How to enable it

Go to Settings → Cart & Checkout.
Find Require phone number at checkout.
Turn on the toggle.
Save your changes if required.
Complete a test checkout.

Recommended practice

Only require a phone number when it is operationally necessary. Additional required fields may increase checkout friction.

","Require phone number at checkout","how-to-access-cart-checkout-settings","

From your Shopify Admin, open Ego Mobile Builder.
Go to Settings.
Select Cart & Checkout.
Enable or configure the setting you want to use.

","How to access Cart & Checkout settings","

Cart and checkout settings directly affect the customer purchase journey.

Before enabling a setting:

Review whether your store uses cart upsells, free gifts, add-ons, discounts, or cart notes.
Confirm that related Shopify settings and campaigns are already configured.
Test the complete purchase flow after saving.
Check the experience on both iOS and Android where possible.
Avoid changing multiple checkout settings at the same time without testing each one.

Important: Some settings may shorten or change the purchase journey. Always verify that customers can still access the promotions and information you want them to see.

","

The Cart & Checkout settings help you control how customers move from product selection to order completion in your mobile app.

You can use these settings to:

Require a phone number during checkout.
Send customers directly to checkout after adding a product.
Display a promotional banner on the cart page.
Remind customers about abandoned carts or checkouts.
Support eligible subscription products in the app checkout flow.

","cmrx78ymj02y32umpgqulgpjc","app-settings","App Settings","App Settings lets you manage general behaviors that affect how customers discover products, receive notification reminders, and access your mobile app.",[1542,1543,1544,1545,1546,1547,1548,1549],"2026-07-23T07:38:12.427Z","2026-09-14T03:04:52.389Z",[],{"_189":305,"_227":1565,"_229":307},{"_189":1562,"_227":1563,"_229":1564},{"_189":1559,"_227":1560,"_229":1561},{"_189":1556,"_227":1557,"_229":1558},{"_189":1553,"_227":1554,"_229":1555},{"_189":852,"_227":1552,"_229":854},{"_189":1089,"_227":1551,"_229":1349},{"_189":192,"_227":1550,"_229":194},"

1. Does showing sold-out products allow customers to purchase them?
No. This setting only controls whether sold-out products appear in search results. It does not restore inventory or make them available for purchase.

2. Does the sold-out product setting affect collections and other app sections?
No. This setting only applies to app search results unless another section has its own visibility settings.

3. Does enabling the push notification reminder automatically turn on notifications for customers?
No. Customers must still approve notification permission on their device.

4. Why doesn’t the notification permission reminder appear for some users?
Users who have already enabled notifications should not see the reminder. Device-level notification settings may also affect whether the prompt appears.

5. What happens when I enable Inactive Mode?
Customers will see your custom inactive screen and will not be able to browse products, add items to cart, or complete checkout through the mobile app.

6. Does Inactive Mode turn off automatically after maintenance?
No. You need to manually disable Inactive Mode and save the changes when your app is ready to go live again.

","

Showing a sold-out product does not make it available for purchase.
Notification permission always requires customer approval.
Device-level notification settings may override the app prompt.
Inactive Mode prevents customers from using the normal mobile shopping experience.
Inactive Mode must be turned off manually after maintenance.
Always verify customer-facing settings after saving.
Avoid activating Inactive Mode during active campaigns unless campaign links and messaging have also been updated.

","

Show sold-out items in search results

If sold-out products do not display as expected, save the setting, refresh the app, and confirm the products are active and correctly marked as sold out.

Re-engage users to enable push notification

If the prompt does not appear, test with a user who has not enabled notifications and confirm notifications are not blocked in the device settings.

Inactive Mode

If the inactive screen does not update correctly, save the settings and reopen the app. After maintenance, remember to turn off Inactive Mode and save again.

","inactive-mode","

What is Inactive Mode?

Inactive Mode temporarily makes your mobile app unavailable to customers.

When enabled, customers see a custom inactive screen instead of the normal shopping experience.

While the app is inactive, customers cannot:

Browse products.
Search the catalog.
Add products to the cart.
Access the normal shopping flow.
Complete checkout through the mobile app.

When should you use Inactive Mode?

Use Inactive Mode when:

The mobile app is undergoing maintenance.
You are resolving a critical issue.
You are preparing a major app update.
Important product, pricing, or checkout data is temporarily unavailable.
You need to prevent customers from using the app for a limited period.

Do not use Inactive Mode for normal design edits or minor content updates if the app can remain available safely.

Warning: Enabling Inactive Mode prevents customers from shopping in the mobile app and may reduce app revenue. Use it only when necessary.

Configure the inactive screen

Go to Settings → App Settings.
Select Inactive Mode.
Upload an image for the inactive screen.
Enter a title.
Add a description explaining why the app is unavailable.
Review the screen in the mobile preview.
Save your changes.
Enable Inactive Mode when you are ready to make the app unavailable.

Turn off Inactive Mode

After maintenance is complete:

Return to Settings → App Settings → Inactive Mode.
Turn off Inactive Mode.
Save your changes.
Close and reopen the mobile app.
Confirm that customers can browse products, add items to the cart, and check out normally.

Important: Inactive Mode does not turn off automatically. Remember to disable it after maintenance.

","Inactive Mode","re-engage-users-to-enable-push-notification","

What this setting does

Re-engage users to enable push notification reminds eligible app users to allow push notifications.

When enabled, the app may display a permission reminder to users who have not allowed notifications.

Users who have already enabled push notifications should not be asked to opt in again.

Why push notification permission matters

Customers must allow push notifications before they can receive messages such as:

Product and collection announcements
App-only promotions
Flash Sale reminders
Back-in-stock updates
Abandoned cart reminders
Order-related or engagement messages supported by your setup

Enabling this setting can help increase the number of customers who are eligible to receive your campaigns.

When should you enable it?

Enable the setting when:

You regularly send push notification campaigns.
Many app users have not granted notification permission.
You want to improve campaign reach.
You have a clear reason for customers to enable notifications.

Avoid repeatedly prompting users without explaining the value they receive.

How to configure it

Go to Settings → App Settings.
Find Re-engage users to enable push notification.
Turn on the toggle.
Save your changes if required.

What customers will see

Eligible users may see a prompt encouraging them to allow notifications.

The final system permission message may vary between iOS and Android.

Users can still decline the request. Enabling this setting does not automatically grant notification permission.

Platform note: Notification permissions are controlled by the customer’s device and operating system. Ego Mobile Builder cannot enable them without the customer’s approval.

","Re-engage users to enable push notification","show-sold-out-items-in-search-results","

What this setting does

Show sold-out items in search results controls whether unavailable products appear when customers search inside your mobile app.

When enabled, sold-out products remain visible in search results.

When disabled, sold-out products are removed from app search results.

This setting does not restore inventory or allow customers to purchase an unavailable product.

When should you enable it?

Enable this setting when you want customers to:

Discover your complete product range.
View product information even when an item is unavailable.
Return later when a product is restocked.
Find products that may support back-in-stock or restock campaigns.

This option may be useful for stores with popular products that frequently return to stock.

When should you disable it?

Disable this setting when you want to:

Keep search results focused on products that customers can purchase immediately.
Reduce frustration caused by unavailable products.
Improve product discovery for stores with many discontinued or long-term sold-out items.

How to configure it

Go to Settings → App Settings.
Find Show sold-out items in search results.
Turn on the toggle to display sold-out products.
Turn off the toggle to hide sold-out products.
Save your changes if a Save button is displayed.

What customers will see

When enabled, sold-out products may appear alongside available products in search results.

The product remains unavailable for purchase and should display the appropriate sold-out status inside the app.

Scope note: This setting only affects search results. It does not change product visibility in collections, product recommendations, or other app sections unless those areas have separate settings.

","Show sold-out items in search results","how-to-access-app-settings","

From your Shopify Admin, open Ego Mobile Builder.
Go to Settings.

Select App Settings.
Enable or configure the setting you want to use.

","How to access App Settings","

App Settings lets you manage general behaviors that affect how customers discover products, receive notification reminders, and access your mobile app.

From this page, you can:

Decide whether sold-out products appear in app search results.
Encourage users who have not enabled push notifications to opt in.
Temporarily make the mobile app unavailable during maintenance.

","cmrx6zpe302y02umpd1lnbkzn","app-promotion","App Promotion Settings","Learn how to set up app promotions to engage customers and increase conversions. Configure promotional banners, popups, and campaigns to showcase offers directly in your mobile app.",[1574,1575,1576,1577,1578,1579,1580,1581,1582,1583,1584,1585,1586,1587],"2026-07-23T07:31:00.555Z","2026-09-14T03:04:12.494Z",[],{"_189":305,"_227":1619,"_229":307},{"_189":1145,"_227":1618,"_229":1147},{"_189":1615,"_227":1616,"_229":1617},{"_189":1612,"_227":1613,"_229":1614},{"_189":1609,"_227":1610,"_229":1611},{"_189":1606,"_227":1607,"_229":1608},{"_189":1603,"_227":1604,"_229":1605},{"_189":1600,"_227":1601,"_229":1602},{"_189":1597,"_227":1598,"_229":1599},{"_189":1594,"_227":1595,"_229":1596},{"_189":1591,"_227":1592,"_229":1593},{"_189":852,"_227":1590,"_229":854},{"_189":1089,"_227":1589,"_229":1349},{"_189":192,"_227":1588,"_229":194},"

1. When should I enable app promotion features?
Enable them when your mobile app is published or ready for customers to download from the App Store or Google Play.

2. Do all promotion features work immediately after I enable them?
No. Some features only require a toggle, while others also require an app block to be added and saved in the Shopify Theme Editor.

3. Can I use multiple app promotion placements at the same time?
Yes. However, avoid enabling multiple intrusive placements, such as overlapping popups, at the same time.

4. Why doesn’t my app promotion appear on the storefront?
Check that the feature is enabled, all changes are saved, any required app block has been added to the published theme, and the promotion supports the device or page you are testing.

5. Why does the storefront promotion look different from the preview?
The final appearance may be affected by your Shopify theme’s fonts, colors, spacing, container width, responsive breakpoints, or custom theme code.

","

App Promotion does not publish your mobile app to the App Store or Google Play.
Promotion features only direct customers to the app marketplace links you have configured.
Some placements only require enabling a toggle.
Other placements require both configuration in Ego Mobile Builder and an app block in the Shopify Theme Editor.
Avoid displaying download CTAs before the mobile app is publicly available.
Test each promotion after making changes to your Shopify theme.
Avoid enabling multiple intrusive placements that appear at the same time.

","

The promotion does not appear

Check that:

The feature is enabled in Ego Mobile Builder.
Your changes have been saved.
The required app block has been added to the Shopify theme.
The Shopify theme changes have also been saved.
You are viewing the correct published theme.
The promotion supports the device or page you are testing.
Your app marketplace links are available.

The promotion appears in the wrong position

For configurable placements:

Reopen the promotion settings.
Review the selected position.
Check the app block position in the Shopify Theme Editor.
Confirm that another theme element is not affecting the layout.

The storefront looks different from the preview

The final appearance may be affected by:

Shopify theme fonts
Theme colors
Container width
Section spacing
Desktop and mobile breakpoints
Custom theme code

Test the promotion in the published theme and adjust the content if necessary.

The app block is not available in Theme Editor

Check that:

Ego Mobile Builder is installed on the store.
The related feature has been enabled.
You are adding an App block or App section, depending on the theme.
Your Shopify theme supports app blocks in the selected location.

","verify-your-promotion","

After enabling a promotion, check the customer-facing experience.

Confirm that:

The promotion appears in the expected location.
The content is readable on mobile.
The image loads correctly.
The selected App Store or Google Play buttons appear.
Each download button opens the correct app listing.
The promotion does not overlap another popup, banner or storefront component.
The Shopify theme and Ego Mobile Builder settings have both been saved.

Use a private or incognito browser when testing to reduce the effect of cached storefront content.

","Verify your promotion","in-app-review-prompt","

What is In-App Review Prompt?

In-App Review Prompt asks mobile app users to leave a review on the App Store or Google Play.

Positive reviews can help:

Build trust with potential users.
Improve your app marketplace presence.
Provide feedback about the app experience.
Support app discovery.

Before enabling the prompt

Enable this feature only when:

Your app is live.
The App Store or Google Play listing is available.
Customers have had enough time to experience the app.
Important launch issues have been resolved.

Avoid asking for a review immediately after the first app open or before users have completed a meaningful action.

Enable the review prompt

Go to Settings → App Promotion.
Find In-App Review Prompt.
Turn on the toggle.
Save the change if required.
Test the prompt in the mobile app.

","In-App Review Prompt","app-install-cta-on-thank-you-page","

What is App Install CTA on Thank You Page?

App Install CTA on Thank You Page displays an app download call-to-action immediately after a customer completes an order.

This placement helps convert customers who already know and trust your store into app users.

Enable the CTA

Go to Settings → App Promotion.
Find App Install CTA on Thank You Page.
Turn on the toggle.
Save the change if required.
Place a test order and check the Thank You page.

","App Install CTA on Thank You Page","post-checkout-download-block","

What is Post-Checkout Download Block?

Post-Checkout Download Block promotes your mobile app on the order status page after a customer completes checkout.

Customers at this stage have already purchased from your store and may be more interested in downloading the app for:

Future purchases
Order updates
App-only offers
Faster access to your store
Reorder convenience

When should you use it?

Use this placement when you want to convert recent buyers into mobile app users.

Enable the block

Go to Settings → App Promotion.
Find Post-Checkout Download Block.
Turn on the toggle.
Save your changes if required.
Complete a test order and review the order status page.

","Post-Checkout Download Block","footer-download-cta-block","

What is Footer Download CTA Block?

Footer Download CTA Block adds a download call-to-action to your Shopify storefront footer.

Because the footer appears across many storefront pages, this option provides consistent app visibility without interrupting customers while they browse.

When should you use it?

Use the footer CTA when you want:

Long-term app promotion.
A stable placement across the storefront.
A less intrusive alternative to a popup.
Customers to find the app download link whenever they reach the footer.

Set up the footer CTA

Open Footer Download CTA Block.
Enable the feature.
Configure its title, description, image or marketplace buttons, depending on the available settings.
Save your changes.
Open the Shopify Theme Editor.
Navigate to the Footer section.
Add the related Ego Mobile Builder app block.
Move it to the preferred footer position.
Save the theme.

","Footer Download CTA Block","custom-install-popup","

What is Custom Install Popup?

Custom Install Popup displays a prominent popup encouraging storefront visitors to download your mobile app.

When should you use it?

Use the popup when app installation is an important campaign objective and you want the promotion to receive more attention.

Avoid using it together with other intrusive storefront popups unless their timing and visibility are carefully controlled.

Enable the popup

Go to Settings → App Promotion.
Open Custom Install Popup.
Enable the feature.
Add the related UI block to your Shopify theme.
Return to Ego Mobile Builder to configure the popup content.

Important: Both steps may be required. Enabling the feature without adding its Shopify theme block may prevent the popup from appearing.

Choose the popup position

Select where the popup should appear:

Left Bottom
Center
Right Bottom

Use Center for the strongest visual emphasis. Use a bottom position when you want the popup to be less disruptive.

Customize the popup

Configure the following content:

Upload image

Upload an image that supports the promotion message.

Recommended image examples include:

App interface preview
Product promotion
App icon
App-only benefit illustration

Title

Add a short and clear headline.

","Custom Install Popup","storefront-app-download","

What is Storefront App Download?

Storefront App Download lets you add a dedicated app promotion section to your Shopify storefront.

The block can include:

An image
A background style
A title
A description
App Store and Google Play download buttons

When should you use it?

Use this feature when you want to create a branded app promotion section on your home page or another storefront page.

It is suitable for stores that want to explain the benefits of their mobile app without interrupting the shopping experience.

Configure the content

From App Promotion, open Storefront App Download.
Enable the feature.
Upload an image representing your mobile app or app benefits.
Select a solid or gradient background.
Enter a short title.
Add a description explaining why customers should download the app.
Select the platforms you want to display:
- iOS
- Android
- Both platforms
Save the configuration.

","Storefront App Download","app-install-bar","

What is the App Install Bar?

The App Install Bar displays a persistent app download call-to-action while customers browse your storefront on a mobile device.

It provides a visible reminder without covering the main storefront content.

When should you use it?

Use the App Install Bar when you want to:

Promote your app to mobile storefront visitors.
Keep the app download CTA visible while customers browse.
Use a simple promotion that does not require a large content block or popup.

Set up the App Install Bar

Go to Settings → App Promotion.
Find App Install Bar.
Turn on the toggle.
Save your changes if a Save button is displayed.
Open your storefront on a mobile device and confirm that the install bar appears.

","App Install Bar","how-to-access-app-promotion","

From your Shopify Admin, open Ego Mobile Builder.
Go to Settings.

Select App Promotion.
Choose the promotion feature you want to enable or configure.

","How to access App Promotion","

Before enabling an app promotion, make sure:

Your mobile app has been published or is ready for customers to download.
The promotion message accurately describes the benefits of downloading your app.
You have access to the Shopify Theme Editor if the promotion requires an app block.

Important: Avoid displaying public download buttons before your app is available on the selected app marketplace. Customers may otherwise be directed to an unavailable or incomplete app listing.

","

App Promotion helps you encourage storefront visitors and existing customers to download your mobile app.

You can promote your app across different stages of the customer journey, including:

While customers browse your storefront.
Inside your storefront content or footer.
After customers complete checkout.
On the Thank You page.
Inside the mobile app after customers have used it.

Available promotion options include:

App Install Bar
Storefront App Download
Custom Install Popup
Footer Download CTA Block
Post-Checkout Download Block
App Install CTA on Thank You Page
In-App Review Prompt

","mob-art-promote-your-app","promote-your-app","Promote Your App","Our platform offers several promotion methods that allow you to showcase your app across different touchpoints in your store. These tools are designed to…",[1627,1628,1629,1630,1631,1632],"2026-09-14T03:03:31.543Z",[],{"_189":305,"_227":1646,"_229":307},{"_189":1643,"_227":1644,"_229":1645},{"_189":1640,"_227":1641,"_229":1642},{"_189":1637,"_227":1638,"_229":1639},{"_189":1634,"_227":1635,"_229":1636},{"_189":192,"_227":1633,"_229":194},"

1. What promotion methods can I use to promote my mobile app?
You can promote your app across different customer touchpoints using App Install Bar, Storefront App Download, Custom Install Popup, Footer Download CTA, Post-Checkout Download Block, Thank You Page CTA, and other supported promotion methods.

2. Do all promotion methods require setup?
No. Some promotions can be enabled immediately, while others require additional content, display settings, or a Shopify theme app block before they can appear.

3. Can I use multiple promotion methods at the same time?
Yes. You can combine different placements to reach customers at different stages of their journey. For example, use App Install Bar + Footer Download CTA for continuous storefront visibility, or combine Custom Install Popup + Thank You Page CTA to promote the app both while customers browse and after they complete a purchase.

4. Is the Download Popup enabled by default?
Yes. The Download Popup is enabled by default. You can preview it and customize its content or display conditions at any time.

5. Why isn’t my app promotion appearing on the storefront?
Make sure the promotion is enabled and saved in Ego Mobile Builder. If the feature requires a Shopify app block, confirm that the block has also been added and saved in your published theme.

","best-practices","

For long-term effectiveness:

Regularly test and optimize different promotion formats
Track user engagement and adjust your strategy accordingly
Keep your app store links updated and functional
Align promotions with campaigns, sales, or special events

Note

The Download Popup is already activated for you. You can preview how it appears to users and customize its content or display conditions anytime in the settings.

","Best Practices","recommended","

To get the best initial results:

Keep the Download Popup enabled to capture new visitors
Use at least 2 promotion methods simultaneously
Ensure your messaging is consistent across all touchpoints

Tip for better performance

Improve conversion rates with these tips:

Use strong and clear call-to-action (e.g., Download now, Get the app)
Highlight key benefits such as exclusive deals or faster checkout
Control display frequency to avoid overwhelming users

","Recommended","available-promotion-methods","

You can leverage multiple channels to promote your app:

In-app Review Prompt
Footer Download CTA Block
Storefront App Download
App Install Bar
Post-Checkout Download Block
App Install CTA on Thank You Page
Custom Install Popup
Smart banners
In-app messages
Embedded promotional sections in your storefront

","Available promotion methods","how-it-works","

Follow these steps to manage and optimize your app promotion:

Step 1: Access the Ego Mobile Builder

Step 2: Navigate to Settings

Step 3: Enable or customize the features you want to use

3.1. Quick enable promotions (no setup required)

These features are pre-configured and ready to use
Simply toggle Enable to activate

Example: App Install Bar

3.2. Customizable promotions (require setup)

These features require content or display rule configuration
You can edit text, images, timing, and targeting conditions

Example: Footer Download CTA Block

","How it works","

Our platform offers several promotion methods that allow you to showcase your app across different touchpoints in your store. These tools are designed to help you maximize visibility with minimal setup effort.

Promoting your mobile app effectively is key to increasing installs and engaging your customers. We provide multiple built-in tools to help you bring your app directly to users at the right moments.

","mob-art-activate-app-embed","activate-app-embed","Activate App Embed","This feature allows you to activate the Ego Mobile Builder app embed within your theme settings. Once enabled and saved, your mobile app will be properly…",[1655,1656,1657,1658],"2026-09-14T03:00:46.209Z","1 min",[],{"_189":305,"_227":1664,"_229":307},{"_189":1661,"_227":1662,"_229":1663},{"_189":1634,"_227":1660,"_229":1636},{"_189":192,"_227":1659,"_229":194},"

1. Why do I need to activate the Ego Mobile Builder app embed?
Activating the app embed connects Ego Mobile Builder with your Shopify theme and allows app promotion features to work properly.

2. What do I need before activating the app embed?
Your mobile app must already be set up, and you need permission to access and edit your Shopify theme settings.

3. Where can I activate the Ego Mobile Builder app embed?
Open your Shopify theme settings, locate the Ego Mobile Builder app embed, and turn the toggle on.

4. Why isn’t the app embed working after I enable it?
Make sure you click Save after turning it on. Unsaved theme changes will not be applied.

5. Can I turn the app embed off later?
Yes. However, disabling it may affect features that rely on the theme connection, so only turn it off when necessary.

","

Always click Save after making any changes—unsaved settings will not be applied
Avoid frequent toggling ON/OFF as it may affect user experience
Monitor app performance and customer engagement after activation
Plan a soft launch before promoting widely to customers

","setup-instructions","

Step 1: Access Ego Mobile Builder

Go to Ego Mobile Builder from your admin dashboard

Step 2: Activate Ego Mobile Builder

Locate the Ego Mobile Builder toggle
Turn it ON to enable the app embed

Step 3: Save Changes

Click Save to apply the changes
The app embed is now activated and ready for use

","Setup Instructions","

This feature allows you to activate the Ego Mobile Builder app embed within your theme settings. Once enabled and saved, your mobile app will be properly connected and ready to be promoted to customers.

Prerequisites

Before activating the app embed, make sure:

Your mobile app has been set up in the Ego Mobile Builder
You have access to your store’s theme settings
Required permissions to edit and save theme configurations

","mob-art-forgot-password-notification","The Forgot Password Notification feature allows you to update your Shopify forgot password email so customers are directed to the correct password reset…",[1670,1671,1672,1673,1674],"2026-09-14T03:00:14.694Z",[],{"_189":305,"_227":1683,"_229":307},{"_189":1680,"_227":1681,"_229":1682},{"_189":1677,"_227":1678,"_229":1679},{"_189":1634,"_227":1676,"_229":1636},{"_189":192,"_227":1675,"_229":194},"

1. Why do I need to configure the Forgot Password Notification?
This configuration ensures customers are directed to the correct password reset flow when they request a password reset from your mobile app.

2. Where do I configure the Forgot Password Notification?
You need to get the required code or URL from Ego Mobile Builder, then update the corresponding email template in Shopify Notifications.

3. Do I need to replace my entire Shopify email template?
No. If your email template has already been customized, you only need to replace the existing reset password URL and keep the rest of the template unchanged.

4. Will this affect my existing email branding and layout?
Not if you only replace the required reset password URL. Your existing branding, layout, and custom content can remain unchanged.

5. What should I check after updating the email template?
Preview the email and verify that the content displays correctly, the reset password link works, and the layout is not broken.

6. What should I do if the reset password link does not work?
Check that the full URL was copied correctly without missing characters or extra spaces, then test the flow again.

","

Back up your template before editing

Before making any changes:

Copy your current email template
Save it in a note or backup file

This makes it easier to restore the original version if needed.

Replace only what is necessary

If your email template is already customized:

Only replace the reset password URL
Do not replace the full template unless necessary

This helps preserve:

Branding
Layout
Existing custom content

Verify the link carefully

After updating the template:

Double-check that the URL was pasted correctly
Make sure there are no extra spaces
Make sure no characters are missing

Even a small error in the URL can break the password reset flow.

Always test with Preview

After saving:

Always preview the email
Check both the email content and the reset password link

If possible, send a test email to verify the full end-to-end flow.

Expected Outcome

After the setup is completed:

Forgot password emails will use the correct reset link for your mobile app
Customers will be guided through the correct password recovery flow
The risk of incorrect redirects or broken reset flows will be reduced

","special-case-if-the-email-template-has-already-been-customized","

If you have already customized the email template in Shopify Notifications, you do not need to replace the entire template.

Instead, only update the reset password link by following these steps:

Step 1: Find this text in your existing email template and copy it:

Find the current reset password text or URL in your existing email template.

Step 2: Replace it with the URL below:

Replace the existing reset password URL with the URL provided in the Forgot Password Notification setting in Ego Mobile Builder.

Step 3: Save

Click Save to apply the changes

Notes:

Only replace the required URL
Keep the rest of your customized email template unchanged to preserve your branding and existing content

","Special Case: If the email template has already been customized","standard-setup-flow","

Step 1: Open Forgot Password Notification settings in Ego Mobile Builder

Go to Ego Mobile Builder
Open Settings
Select Forgot Password Notification

The system will display the code or URL you need for the email template.

Step 2: Copy the code shown in the settings

Copy the full code snippet displayed in the setting screen

Notes:

Make sure to copy the entire content

Step 3: Open Shopify Notifications

Click “Open Shopify Notifications” in settings and find the email notification related to Forgot password or Customer account reset

Step 4: Paste the code and save

Open the corresponding email template
Paste the code copied from Ego Mobile Builder into the required location
Click Save

$\"\"$

Notes:

Make sure you do not accidentally remove other important parts of the email template
After saving, the updated template will be used for forgot password emails

Step 5: Preview

Use the Preview function in Shopify Notifications

$\"\"$

Check that:
The email content displays correctly
The reset password link is correct
The layout is not broken

","Standard Setup Flow","

The Forgot Password Notification feature allows you to update your Shopify forgot password email so customers are directed to the correct password reset flow for your mobile app.

This setup helps ensure that the password recovery experience works properly between Shopify and your mobile app.

Where to Set It Up

You will need to configure this in 2 places:

Ego Mobile Builder: to get the code or URL you need
Shopify Notifications: to update the forgot password email template

","mob-art-headless-configuration","headless-configuration","Headless Configuration","Headless configuration allows your mobile app to connect directly with Shopify Customer Account API, enabling passwordless login (OTP / magic link). This…",[1691,1692,1693,1694],"2026-09-14T02:59:41.138Z",[],{"_189":1702,"_227":1703,"_229":1704},{"_189":1699,"_227":1700,"_229":1701},{"_189":1696,"_227":1697,"_229":1698},{"_189":192,"_227":1695,"_229":194},"

1. What is Headless in Shopify?
Headless is a Shopify setup that allows external applications, such as your mobile app, to securely connect with Shopify APIs and customer account services.

2. How does Headless login work with Ego Mobile Builder?
Ego Mobile Builder connects to Shopify Customer Account API through Headless. When customers log in, Shopify verifies their identity through passwordless authentication, such as OTP or a magic link, and then securely returns the login result to the mobile app.

3. Why can’t I find or enable Headless in Shopify?
Your store may not support Headless yet, or the new version of Shopify Customer Accounts may not be enabled. Make sure your store meets the prerequisites before continuing.

4. Where can I find the Client ID and Client Secret?
After you save the Customer Account API configuration in Shopify, the Client ID and Client Secret will be generated. Save the Client Secret immediately because Shopify only displays it once.

5. Where do I enter the Client ID and Client Secret in Ego Mobile Builder?
Go to Settings → Customer Account → No-password Login, enter the Client ID and Client Secret, then click Save.

","3-setup-instructions","

Step 1: Enable Headless in Shopify

Go to Shopify App Store
Install Headless

$\"\"$

👉 If you don’t see this option, your store may not support it or Customer Accounts (new version) is not enabled.

Step 2: Create Storefront API

In the Headless page
Click Create Storefront

$\"\"$

✅ Result:

A Storefront API is created for your mobile app connection

Step 3: Access Customer Account API

In the Headless page
Locate Customer Account API
Click Manage

$\"\"$

Step 4: Configure Client Type

In the Customer Account API settings:
Select Client type = Confidential

$\"\"$

In Application setup, locate Callback URI(s) (required)
Add the following URL:

https://mobile.opusecom.co/api/v1/auth-store/callback

$\"\"$

Ensure the URL is entered correctly (no extra spaces or typos)

📌 Explanation:

A Confidential client allows the use of a Client Secret, which is required for secure authentication in mobile apps

Step 5: Save & Retrieve Credentials

Click Save
The system will display:
Client ID
Client Secret

$\"\"$

⚠️ Important:

The Client Secret is shown only once
Save it immediately (recommended: password manager or secure vault)

Step 6: Configure in Ego Mobile Builder

Go to Ego Mobile Builder Dashboard
Navigate to Settings → Customer Account → No-password Login
Enter:
Client ID
Client Secret
Click Save

$\"\"$

","3. Setup Instructions","2-prerequisites","

Before getting started, make sure:

Your store is using Customer Accounts (New version)
You have Admin access to the Shopify store
You can access the Ego Mobile Builder Dashboard

","2. Prerequisites","1-overview","

Headless configuration allows your mobile app to connect directly with Shopify Customer Account API, enabling passwordless login (OTP / magic link). This helps reduce friction and improve conversion rates.

","1. Overview","cmryd96ox03732umpo6j2559q","product-image-hotspot","Add a Product Image Hotspot","Learn how to create a Product Image Hotspot to highlight products with interactive touchpoints. Add hotspots to images, link products, and customize their appearance to create a more engaging shopping experience.",[1714,1715,1716,1717,1718,1719,1720,1721,1722,1723],"2026-07-24T03:14:06.753Z","2026-09-14T02:55:48.147Z",[],"Design & Customize",{"_189":305,"_227":1745,"_229":307},{"_189":1742,"_227":1743,"_229":1744},{"_189":1739,"_227":1740,"_229":1741},{"_189":1736,"_227":1737,"_229":1738},{"_189":1733,"_227":1734,"_229":1735},{"_189":1730,"_227":1731,"_229":1732},{"_189":1727,"_227":1728,"_229":1729},{"_189":1171,"_227":1726,"_229":1173},{"_189":852,"_227":1725,"_229":854},{"_189":192,"_227":1724,"_229":194},"

1. What products can I add to a Product Image Hotspot?
You can add active Shopify products that are available to your mobile app and clearly shown in the uploaded image.

2. Can I move hotspots to match the product position in the image?
Yes. You can reposition each hotspot and place it close to the corresponding product.

3. Can I customize the appearance of the hotspot tags?
Yes. You can customize supported settings such as font, text style, colors, product dots, background, and borders.

4. Why doesn’t my Product Image Hotspot appear in the live app?
Make sure the image is uploaded successfully and the design has been saved and published. Then reopen the app and check again.

","

The image does not appear

Confirm that the upload completed successfully, then save and refresh the editor.

A product cannot be added

Check that the product is active and available to the mobile app.

A hotspot appears in the wrong position

Select the related product and reposition its hotspot in the image.

Hotspot tags are difficult to read

Adjust the text, background, dot, or border colors to improve contrast.

Changes do not appear in the app

Confirm that the design has been saved and published, then reopen the app.

","

Use one image with a clear visual focus.
Limit the number of hotspots to avoid clutter.
Match each hotspot with the exact product shown.
Keep tags away from important image details.
Use contrasting colors for better readability.
Test all product links before publishing.

","step-6-preview-and-publish","

Changes appear immediately in the mobile preview while you configure the component.

Before publishing, check:

Image quality and cropping
Product selection
Hotspot positions
Tag readability
Spacing between hotspots
Product navigation
Overall mobile appearance

When ready:

Click Save.
Test the component using Ego Live Preview.
Tap every hotspot and confirm that it opens the correct product.
Click Publish to make the changes available in your app.

","Step 6: Preview and publish","step-5-customize-the-hotspot-style","

Under Tag Style, configure how product hotspots appear.

Available settings may include:

Font
Text size and weight
Text case
Product dot visibility
Text color
Dot color
Background color
Border corners
Border color and thickness

Use the eye icon to show or hide supported elements.

Keep the hotspot style consistent with your app branding and ensure the text remains readable over the image.

","Step 5: Customize the hotspot style","step-4-position-the-product-hotspots","

After adding products, place each hotspot over the corresponding product in the image.

Select the product you want to position.
Move its hotspot dot or product tag to the matching location.
Repeat the process for each selected product.
Review the result in the mobile preview.

Place hotspots close to the related products without covering important visual details.

Recommended placement

Keep enough space between nearby hotspots.
Avoid placing tags over faces or important product details.
Check that hotspots remain easy to tap on mobile.
Use the product dots when several products are positioned close together.
Review the image at mobile size rather than only on a large screen.

","Step 4: Position the product hotspots","step-3-add-products","

Under Hotspots, click Add Product and select the products shown in the image.

Before adding a product, confirm that it is:

Active in Shopify.
Available to the mobile app.
Using the correct product image and price.
Clearly visible in the uploaded image.

Only add products that customers can clearly recognize in the image.

","Step 3: Add products","step-2-upload-an-image","

Select the component to open its configuration panel.

Upload the image you want to make shoppable. You can also select Add More to create additional hotspot images when supported.

For the best result:

Use a clear, high-quality image.
Make sure featured products are easy to identify.
Avoid placing important products too close to the image edges.
Use images with enough space for product tags.
Limit text inside the image.

","Step 2: Upload an image","step-1-add-the-component","

From Shopify Admin, open Ego Mobile Builder.
Go to App Design and open the design you want to edit.
Select the screen where you want the component to appear.
Open Sections Library.
Search for Product Image Hotspot.
Drag the component to the preferred position.

","Step 1: Add the component","

The Product Image Hotspot component turns a lifestyle or campaign image into a shoppable experience.

You can upload an image, connect products, and place product hotspots directly over the items shown in the image. Customers can tap a hotspot to view the related product information and continue shopping.

Use this component for:

Shop-the-look images
Outfit inspiration
Room or home décor setups
Product collections
Seasonal campaigns
Lifestyle photography

","cmrybgpov036r2umpxiq3zwwt","shoppable-video","Add a Shoppable Video Section","Learn how to create a Shoppable Video section to showcase engaging videos with featured products. Add videos, link products, and customize the layout to create an interactive shopping experience.",[1754,1755,1756,1757,1758,1759,1760,1761,1762,1763,1764],"2026-07-24T02:23:58.735Z","2026-09-14T02:55:15.445Z",[],{"_189":305,"_227":1787,"_229":307},{"_189":1784,"_227":1785,"_229":1786},{"_189":1781,"_227":1782,"_229":1783},{"_189":1736,"_227":1780,"_229":1738},{"_189":1777,"_227":1778,"_229":1779},{"_189":1774,"_227":1775,"_229":1776},{"_189":1771,"_227":1772,"_229":1773},{"_189":1768,"_227":1769,"_229":1770},{"_189":1171,"_227":1767,"_229":1173},{"_189":852,"_227":1766,"_229":854},{"_189":192,"_227":1765,"_229":194},"

1. What products can I add to a Shoppable Video?
You can add active Shopify products that are available to your mobile app.

2. Can I customize how product information appears with the video?
Yes. You can customize the layout, product details, text styles, colors, visibility, and shopping buttons.

3. Why doesn’t my Shoppable Video appear in the live app?
Make sure the video is uploaded successfully and the design has been saved and published. Then reopen the mobile app to check again.

","

The video does not appear

Confirm that the upload completed successfully, then save and refresh the editor.

A product does not appear

Check that the product is active, available to the app and successfully added to the component.

Product information covers the video

Try another layout or reduce the number of visible product details.

A shopping button does not work

Review the selected button action and test the related product in Ego Live Preview.

Changes do not appear in the app

Confirm that the design has been saved and published, then reopen the mobile app.

","

Feature products that are clearly visible in the video.
Keep each video focused on one campaign or product group.
Use vertical video where possible for a better mobile experience.
Avoid attaching unrelated products.
Keep product names and buttons readable against the video.
Test Add to Cart and Buy Now actions before publishing.
Place the component near relevant product or campaign content.

","step-7-preview-and-publish","

Changes appear immediately in the mobile preview while you configure the component.

Review:

Video quality and cropping
Product information
Product selection
Button actions
Text readability
Overall layout

When the component is ready:

Click Save.
Open Ego Live Preview and test the design on a mobile device.
Confirm that the video plays and each product action works correctly.
Click Publish to make the changes available in your app.

","Step 7: Preview and publish","step-6-customize-shopping-buttons","

Configure the primary and secondary actions shown with the product.

Depending on the available settings, you can customize:

Button action, such as Add to Cart or Buy Now
Background color
Icon color
Button icon
Icon size

Use consistent button styles across your app so customers can easily recognize the main shopping action.

","Step 6: Customize shopping buttons","step-5-customize-product-information","

You can configure the appearance of the product card, including:

Product name
Price
First price
Text styles
Text colors
Visibility of supported elements

Use the eye icon beside an element to control whether it appears in the component.

Keep the product card simple so it does not cover important parts of the video.

","Step 5: Customize product information","step-4-choose-a-layout","

Under Layout, select how the product card should appear with the video.

For example, the Inline layout displays the product information directly within the video experience.

Use the mobile preview to check:

How much of the video remains visible.
Whether product information is easy to read.
Whether the shopping buttons are easy to access.
Whether the layout works with the number of selected products.

","Step 4: Choose a layout","

Click Add Product, then search for and select the products featured in the video.

Make sure:

The products shown in the video match the selected products.
Each product is active and available in Shopify.
Product images, prices and variants are up to date.
Products are available to your mobile app.

Customers will see the selected product information together with the video and can use the available shopping actions.

","step-2-upload-your-video","

Select the Shoppable Video component to open its configuration panel.

Upload the video you want customers to see, then check the result in the mobile preview.

For the best mobile experience:

Use a clear, high-quality video.
Keep the video focused on the featured products.
Avoid placing important content too close to the edges.
Keep text inside the video short and readable.
Preview the video on a mobile device before publishing.

Supported file formats, file size and video duration should follow the requirements shown in the upload field.

","Step 2: Upload your video","step-1-add-the-shoppable-video-component","

From Shopify Admin, open Ego Mobile Builder.
Go to App Design and open the design you want to edit.
Select the screen where you want the video to appear.
Open Sections Library.
Search for Shoppable Video.
Drag the component to the preferred position on the screen.

","Step 1: Add the Shoppable Video component","

The Shoppable Video component lets you combine video content with selected products, allowing customers to discover and shop products while watching the video.

Use this component to showcase:

Product demonstrations
Styling inspiration
Tutorials and how-to content
New arrivals
Campaign or creator videos

You can upload a video, attach products, select a layout, and customize how product information and shopping actions appear.

","cmrx6gwh702xy2ump08wizic4","apply-theme","Apply a Theme","Learn how to apply a theme to your app design. Choose a theme from the Theme Library and apply it to quickly update your app's appearance while keeping your content intact.",[1796,1797,1798,1799,1800,1801,1802],"2026-07-23T07:16:23.275Z","2026-09-14T02:54:32.437Z",[],{"_189":305,"_227":1817,"_229":307},{"_189":1814,"_227":1815,"_229":1816},{"_189":1811,"_227":1812,"_229":1813},{"_189":1808,"_227":1809,"_229":1810},{"_189":852,"_227":1807,"_229":854},{"_189":1804,"_227":1805,"_229":1806},{"_189":192,"_227":1803,"_229":194},"

1. Will applying a theme affect my Shopify store data?
No. Applying a theme only updates your app design and does not change your Shopify products, collections, orders, or store settings.

2. Can I customize a theme after applying it?
Yes. You can customize images, text, products, collections, colors, fonts, navigation, and component settings after applying a theme.

3. Does applying a theme automatically publish my app?
No. After applying and customizing the theme, you still need to save, preview, and publish the design before customers can see the changes.

4. Can I preview a theme before applying it?
Yes. Preview the theme to review its layout and design before applying it to your app.

5. Can I change to another theme later?
Yes. You can apply another theme at any time. However, review the new theme carefully, as applying it may replace the current design and customizations.

","need-a-custom-design","

When the available themes do not match your brand, select Contact us in the Themes Library.

Our team can help tailor the app design to your brand style, product category, and customer experience.

","Need a custom design?","

The theme does not apply

Refresh App Design and try again. Confirm that you selected the correct design.

The old design still appears

Save the applied theme, refresh the preview, and confirm that Ego Live Preview is connected to the correct store and design.

Demo content still appears

Open the relevant component in the editor and replace its images, text, products, or collections.

Changes do not appear in the live app

Confirm that the design has been saved and published. Some native changes may require a new app submission.

","recommended-checks-before-publishing","

Confirm that:

Demo content has been replaced.
Images display clearly on mobile.
Products and collections open correctly.
Buttons and banners lead to the correct destinations.
Navigation works across all screens.
Text is readable and consistent with your brand.
The design has been tested in Ego Live Preview.

","Recommended checks before publishing","apply-the-theme","

Step 1: Open the Themes Library

From Shopify Admin, open Ego Mobile Builder.
Go to App Design.
Scroll to Themes Library.

Step 2: Preview a theme

Find the theme you want to use and click View Detail.

Review its:

Visual style
Screen layouts
Component arrangement
Recommended store category

Return to the Themes Library when you are ready to apply it.

Step 3: Apply the theme

Click Apply Theme.
Confirm the action if prompted.
Wait for the theme to be added to your app design.
Click Edit Theme to open the design editor.

After the theme is applied, its layouts and components will appear in the selected design.

Step 4: Customize the applied theme

Replace the demo content with your own store content before publishing.

You can update:

Images and banners
Text and buttons
Products and collections
Brand colors and fonts
Navigation
Component settings
Section order and visibility

Make sure all demo images, products, links, and text have been replaced with your own content.

Step 5: Preview the design

Use the editor preview to quickly check the layout while making changes.

For a more accurate mobile experience:

Save your changes.
Open Ego Live Preview on your mobile device.
Scan the QR code provided by Ego Mobile Builder.
Review the screens, navigation, links, scrolling, and product data.

Step 6: Publish your changes

After testing the theme:

Click Save to keep your latest edits.
Click Publish to apply supported design changes to your app.
Use Submit App when launching a new app or when an update requires Apple or Google review.

Applying a theme does not automatically publish the app or submit it to the App Store and Google Play.

","Apply the theme","available-themes","

Aera Home — Minimal Furniture Theme

Designed for furniture, home décor, lifestyle, and minimalist stores. It provides a clean and premium shopping experience.

Bloom Care — Beauty & Wellness Theme

Designed for beauty, skincare, cosmetics, wellness, and personal care stores. It focuses on visual storytelling and product discovery.

Open the Themes Library to view the latest available themes.

Before applying a theme

Applying a theme updates the layout and components of the selected app design.

Before continuing:

Review your current design.
Prepare your brand images, banners, products, and collections.
Confirm that the theme matches your store category and brand style.
Save any important changes in your current design.

Important: Applying a theme may replace parts of your current layout. Review the theme details before applying it.

","Available themes","

Ego Mobile Builder provides ready-made themes that help you create a professional mobile app design without starting from scratch.

Each theme includes pre-built layouts, components, and visual styles for a specific store category. After applying a theme, you can replace the demo content and customize the design to match your brand.

Applying a theme does not change your Shopify products, collections, orders, or store settings.

","mob-art-preview-app","Preview Your Mobile App","The Ego Mobile Preview allows you to view your app design on a real mobile device before submitting your app to the App Store or Google Play.",[1824,1825,1826,1827,1828,1829,1830,1831,1832,1833,1834,1835,1836],"2026-09-14T02:53:45.124Z",[],{"_189":305,"_227":1868,"_229":307},{"_189":870,"_227":1866,"_229":1867},{"_189":1863,"_227":1864,"_229":1865},{"_189":1860,"_227":1861,"_229":1862},{"_189":1857,"_227":1858,"_229":1859},{"_189":1854,"_227":1855,"_229":1856},{"_189":1851,"_227":1852,"_229":1853},{"_189":1848,"_227":1849,"_229":1850},{"_189":1845,"_227":1846,"_229":1847},{"_189":1842,"_227":1843,"_229":1844},{"_189":1089,"_227":1841,"_229":1091},{"_189":1838,"_227":1839,"_229":1840},{"_189":192,"_227":1837,"_229":194},"

1. Do I need to publish my app before using Ego Live Preview?
No. You can preview any saved app design before submitting or publishing your app.

2. Why doesn’t the preview show my latest changes?
Make sure your changes are saved, then refresh the preview. If needed, scan the QR code again.

3. Is Ego Live Preview exactly the same as the published app?
Not completely. It is designed for testing your app experience, but some features that require live integrations may behave differently in preview mode.

","recommended-workflow","

A typical workflow when building your app is:

Create your app design
Configure branding and navigation
Open Ego Live Preview
Scan the QR code with the preview app
Test your design on a real device
Make adjustments if needed
Proceed to App Submission

Using the preview app regularly during development helps ensure your mobile app delivers a smooth and polished experience.

","Recommended Workflow","

The preview app is intended for testing and reviewing design only.
It does not represent the final published app version.
Some features that require live integrations may behave differently in preview mode.
Always review your app thoroughly before moving to the Submission step.

","common-issues-and-solutions","

QR Code Cannot Be Scanned

Check the following:

Your device camera has permission enabled
The QR code is clearly visible
The device has internet access
The preview app is updated to the latest version

Try scanning the QR code again if the connection fails.

Preview Does Not Load the Latest Design

If your preview shows an older design:

Confirm that your changes were saved
Refresh the preview in the preview app
Re-scan the QR code if necessary

Preview App Cannot Connect

Possible causes include:

Internet connectivity issues
Expired QR code session
Builder session timeout

Generate a new QR code and scan again.

","Common Issues and Solutions","best-practices-for-testing","

To get the most accurate preview experience:

Test on a real mobile device
Navigate through multiple screens
Check button interactions and scrolling behavior
Verify images and banners load correctly
Ensure text and typography are readable
Review navigation menus and tabs

Testing your design thoroughly helps avoid issues before app submission.

","Best Practices for Testing","when-to-use-the-ego-live-preview","

You should use the preview app during these stages:

After creating your initial app design
After updating branding or navigation
When testing layout or UI changes
Before starting the app submission process

Previewing your design helps ensure the final app experience matches your expectations.

","When to Use the Ego Live Preview","step-5-update-and-refresh-your-design","

If you make changes to your design in the Ego Mobile Builder, you can refresh the preview to see the updated version.

Typical workflow:

Update the design in the builder
Save your changes
Refresh the preview inside the preview app

Your preview will update to reflect the latest design.

","Step 5: Update and Refresh Your Design","step-4-explore-your-app-design","

After scanning the QR code, your app will open in preview mode.

You can now interact with the app just like a real user would.

Things you can review include:

Home screen layout
Navigation flow
Product listing pages
Product detail pages
Branding elements (colors, typography, icons)
Banners and promotional sections
Menu and navigation components

This preview allows you to test the real mobile experience before submitting your app.

","Step 4: Explore Your App Design","step-3-scan-the-qr-code","

Now use your mobile device to connect to the design.

Open the Ego Live Preview on your phone
Tap Scan QR Code
Use your device camera to scan the QR code displayed in the builder

Once the QR code is scanned successfully, the preview app will load your app design automatically.

","Step 3: Scan the QR Code","step-2-open-the-preview-section-in-the-builder","

Next, return to the Ego Mobile Builder on your computer.

Go to Preview App inside the platform
Select the design you want to preview
The system will generate a QR code

This QR code connects your preview app to your current app design.

","Step 2: Open the Preview Section in the Builder","step-1-download-the-ego-live-preview","

To view your app preview, you first need to install the Ego Live Preview on your mobile device.

For iOS Devices

Open the Apple App Store
Search for Ego Live Preview
Install the preview app on your device

For Android Devices

Open Google Play
Search for Ego Live Preview
Install the preview app

Once the app is installed, open it on your mobile device.

","Step 1: Download the Ego Live Preview","

Before using the preview app, make sure that:

You have created at least one app design
Your design has been saved in the Ego Mobile Builder
You have access to a mobile device (iOS or Android)
Your device has internet access

","Before You Start","

The Ego Mobile Preview allows you to view your app design on a real mobile device before submitting your app to the App Store or Google Play.

After creating your app design in the Ego Mobile Builder, you can use the Ego Live Preview to:

Experience your app layout on a real device
Test navigation and UI behavior
Review branding, colors, and typography
Check product display and content structure
Validate the overall mobile shopping experience

The preview app connects to your design through a QR code, making it quick and easy to test your app anytime during development.

","mob-art-navigation-configuration","navigation-configuration","Navigation Configuration","Navigation defines how users move between different areas of your mobile app. A clear navigation structure improves usability and helps customers easily…",[1876,1877,1878,1879,1880,1881],"2026-09-14T02:53:17.238Z",[],{"_189":305,"_227":1895,"_229":307},{"_189":1892,"_227":1893,"_229":1894},{"_189":1889,"_227":1890,"_229":1891},{"_189":1886,"_227":1887,"_229":1888},{"_189":1883,"_227":1884,"_229":1885},{"_189":192,"_227":1882,"_229":194},"

1. What navigation areas can I customize?
You can customize the Header, Side Menu, and Bottom Navigation Bar of your mobile app.

2. Can I hide icons from the Header?
Yes. You can enable or disable supported Header elements based on your app’s navigation needs.

3. Can I change the order of items in the Side Menu?
Yes. You can add, remove, and reorder menu items to prioritize the most important destinations.

4. Can I create a three-level Side Menu?
Yes. You can organize supported menu items into up to three levels, creating a clear hierarchy with parent categories, subcategories, and nested items.

5. How many items should I add to the Bottom Navigation Bar?
We recommend using 3–5 tabs so key destinations remain easy to access.

6. Where can a Bottom Navigation tab redirect users?
Each tab can be configured to navigate users to a supported destination, such as a specific screen, product listing, product detail page, or other available app page. This allows you to place frequently used areas—such as Home, Categories, Search, Cart, or Account—within easy reach from the Bottom Navigation Bar.

7. How can I test my navigation before publishing?
Use Ego Live Preview to test the navigation flow and make sure each menu item leads to the correct destination.

","preview-your-navigation","

After updating navigation settings:

Open Ego Live Preview
Test the app flow
Check how the navigation works
Confirm typography readability
Verify splash screen appearance

This helps ensure your design and navigation work smoothly before submitting your app.

","Preview Your Navigation","bottom-navigation-bar","

The Bottom Bar provides persistent access to the most important parts of your app.

Most mobile apps use it for destinations customers visit frequently, such as Home, Products, Notifications, or Account.

To configure it:

Go to App Design → Navigation.
Select Bottom Bar.
Choose a layout style.
Add and configure menu items.
Review the result in the app preview.

Choose a Bottom Bar layout

Under Layout Style, select how the Bottom Bar should appear.

Available styles include:

Default
A standard bottom navigation layout.

Glass Full
A full-width glass-style navigation bar.

Floating Capsule
A compact floating navigation bar separated from the bottom edge.

Choose the style that best fits your app design and branding.

Add and organize Bottom Bar items

Under Menu Items, you can:

Drag items to reorder them.
Delete items.
Click Add more to create additional items.

For each item, configure:

Icon
Icon size
Label
Navigation destination

Keep the most frequently used destinations in the Bottom Bar.

Choose a navigation destination

Each Bottom Bar item can navigate to:

None
Product
Collection
URL
Screen

For example:

Home → Home screen
Products → Product or collection screen
Notifications → Notifications screen
My Account → Account screen

Use an item as Chat

Enable Use as Chat when the Bottom Bar item should open your configured customer chat experience instead of a standard destination.

Complete the related chat configuration before enabling this option.

Open a screen when the app launches

Enable Open on Launch when you want the selected destination to be the first screen customers see when they open the app.

Use this option carefully and select a destination that makes sense as the starting point of the customer journey.

","Bottom Navigation Bar","side-menu","

The Side Menu gives customers access to additional pages, features, and grouped navigation items.

It supports multi-level menus, so you can organize related destinations under a parent menu instead of displaying every item at the same level.

For example:

Loyalty
- Rewards & Loyalty
- Earn Points
- Redeem Rewards
- My Rewards
- Refer a Friend
- VIP Status

Add and organize menu items

Under Menu Items, you can:

Click Add more to add a new menu item.
Drag items to reorder them.
Add child items under a parent item to create a multi-level menu.
Expand or collapse parent menus.
Delete items you no longer need.

Use parent menus to group related destinations and keep the Side Menu easier to scan.

Configure each menu item

Select a menu item to configure:

Icon
Icon size
Label
Navigation destination

Available navigation types include:

None
Product
Collection
URL
Screen

For a parent menu, you can use it mainly as a group for its child items, while each child item can link to its own destination.

Recommended practices

Use the Side Menu for secondary navigation or larger groups of related pages.

Keep labels short and clear, and group related items under a parent menu when needed.

Avoid creating an overly complex hierarchy that makes customers open too many levels before reaching their destination.

","Side Menu","header-configuration","

The Header appears at the top of your app and provides quick access to important actions.

To configure it:

Go to App Design → Navigation.
Select Header.
Configure the header appearance and actions.
Review the result in the preview.

Set up a transparent header

Enable Transparent header when you want the header to blend into the content behind it.

Choose a transparent mode:

Only on scroll down
The header becomes transparent based on the customer's scrolling behavior.

Always transparent
The header remains transparent.

You can also adjust Dimming to control how much the content behind the header is darkened.

Customize the header overlay

Use Overlay to improve the visibility of icons and text over the content behind the header.

Choose:

Solid for a single-color overlay.
Gradient for a gradual transition between colors.

For a gradient, you can customize:

Direction
Color 1
Color 2
Overlay opacity

Use the app preview to make sure your header remains readable over different banners and images.

Configure Header Actions

Under Header Actions, choose which shortcuts appear in the header.

Available actions may include:

Side Menu
Logo & Store Name
Navigation
Multi-language
Cart

You can:

Drag actions to change their order.
Use the eye icon to show or hide an action.
Remove actions that are not needed.
Configure each action individually.

A maximum of 5 actions can be displayed in the mobile header at the same time.

Keep only the actions customers need most often. Too many header actions can make the interface harder to scan.

","Header Configuration","

Navigation controls how customers move between key areas of your mobile app.

Ego Mobile Builder lets you configure three main navigation areas:

Header — quick actions at the top of the app.
Side Menu — a larger menu for additional pages and destinations.
Bottom Bar — quick access to the most important app screens.

A clear navigation structure helps customers find products, content, their account, and other important features more easily

","mob-art-branding-configuration","branding-configuration","Branding Configuration","The Branding section allows you to configure key visual elements that define the identity of your mobile app. These settings help ensure your app reflects…",[1903,1904,1905,1906,1907],"2026-09-14T02:52:47.459Z",[],{"_189":305,"_227":1918,"_229":307},{"_189":1915,"_227":1916,"_229":1917},{"_189":1912,"_227":1913,"_229":1914},{"_189":1909,"_227":1910,"_229":1911},{"_189":192,"_227":1908,"_229":194},"

1. What branding elements can I customize?
You can customize your app’s typography and splash screen to match your brand identity.

2. Does typography apply to the entire app?
Yes. Typography settings are applied globally to maintain a consistent look across your app.

3. How can I preview my branding changes?
Use Ego Live Preview to check your typography, splash screen, and overall branding before publishing or submitting your app.

","preview-your-branding","

After updating your branding settings:

Open Ego Live Preview
Review how your branding appears in the app
Check typography readability
Verify splash screen appearance
Confirm that brand elements look consistent across the app

This helps ensure your branding is displayed correctly and consistently before submitting your app.

","Preview Your Branding","splash-screen","

The Splash Screen is the first screen users see when opening your mobile app. It usually displays your brand identity while the app loads.

A well-designed splash screen creates a strong first impression and reinforces brand recognition.

What You Can Customize

You can upload a splash screen image that will be displayed when the app launches.

Recommended Design

For the best experience:

Use a high-resolution splash screen image
Use PNG or SVG format for better quality
Ensure transparent backgrounds when needed
Keep the design clean and centered
Avoid placing too many elements on the splash screen
Avoid small or pixelated images
Ensure the design matches your brand identity

How to Configure Splash Screen

Navigate to App Design
Open Branding
Select Splash Screen
Upload your brand logo
Save the configuration

","Splash Screen","typography","

Typography controls how text appears throughout your mobile app. Setting consistent typography helps improve readability and create a professional user experience.

What You Can Configure

You can typically customize the following:

Primary font – the main font used across the app
Heading styles – fonts used for titles and section headers
Font sizes – adjust text hierarchy across headings and body text
Font weight – control boldness of text elements

These settings apply globally across your app to maintain visual consistency.

How to Configure Typography

Go to App Design
Open Branding
Select Typography
Choose the font family for your app
Adjust heading and body text settings
Save your changes

Best Practices

Use one primary font family for a consistent design.
Ensure text contrast is strong enough against background colors.
Avoid using too many font weights to keep the UI clean.
Test readability on smaller mobile screens.

","Typography","

Branding Settings

The Branding section allows you to configure key visual elements that define the identity of your mobile app. These settings help ensure your app reflects your brand consistently across all screens.

Branding configuration typically includes:

Typography
Splash Screen

","mob-art-customize-app-design","Customize Your App Design","Go to App Design and choose the screen or section you want to customize.",[1925,1926,1927,1928,1929,1930,1931,1932,1933,1934,1935],"2026-09-14T02:52:19.436Z",[],{"_189":305,"_227":1962,"_229":307},{"_189":1959,"_227":1960,"_229":1961},{"_189":1956,"_227":1957,"_229":1958},{"_189":1953,"_227":1954,"_229":1955},{"_189":1950,"_227":1951,"_229":1952},{"_189":1947,"_227":1948,"_229":1949},{"_189":1944,"_227":1945,"_229":1946},{"_189":1941,"_227":1942,"_229":1943},{"_189":1938,"_227":1939,"_229":1940},{"_189":852,"_227":1937,"_229":854},{"_189":192,"_227":1936,"_229":194},"

1. Which app screens can I customize?
You can customize supported screens such as Home, Product List, Product Detail, Collection List, Search, Cart, Wishlist, and custom screens.

2. Can I add or reorder components on a screen?
Yes. You can add supported components and drag and drop them to change their order.

3. Why is a component unavailable on some screens?
Component availability depends on the selected screen, your plan, enabled features, and supported integrations.

4. Can I preview changes while editing my design?
Yes. Changes are reflected immediately in the editor preview for quick visual checks.

5. What is the difference between the editor preview and Ego Live Preview?
The editor preview is designed for quick visual checks, while Ego Live Preview lets you test the full app experience on a mobile device.

6. What is the difference between Save and Publish?
Save lets you preview your latest changes in Ego Live Preview, while Publish makes the changes available for users in your mobile app.

7. Do I need to resubmit my app after every design change?
It depends on the type of change. Some design and content updates can be published directly, while changes that affect the app binary or require platform review must be resubmitted to the App Store or Google Play.

","

Changes do not appear

Save the design, refresh the editor, and confirm that the component is visible. If checking the live app, make sure the changes have also been published.

A component is unavailable

Confirm that the component supports the selected screen and that any required integration is enabled.

Images appear cropped or blurry

Use high-quality images with the recommended dimensions and avoid placing important content near the edges.

Changes do not appear in Ego Live Preview

Confirm that the latest design is saved and that Ego Live Preview is connected to the correct store and design.

","design-tips","

Keep each screen focused and easy to scan.
Use consistent colors, typography, and button styles.
Place important content near the top of the screen.
Avoid adding too many sections to one page.
Keep banner text short and readable on mobile.
Test important screens before publishing.
Prioritize usability over decorative elements.

","Design tips","recommended-design-workflow","

For the best results:

Apply a theme or start with an existing design.
Configure your branding.
Customize the essential screens.
Set up navigation.
Review changes in the editor preview.
Test the complete experience with Ego Live Preview.
Save and publish the design.
Submit the app when it is ready for launch.

","Recommended design workflow","step-6-publish-or-submit-your-app","

After testing your design, choose the appropriate next step:

Save keeps the latest changes in the editor.
Publish makes supported design and content updates available in your app.
Submit App sends a new app or app version to Apple and Google when marketplace review is required.

Not every design update requires a new App Store or Google Play submission.

","Step 6: Publish or submit your app","step-5-save-and-test-with-ego-live-preview","

Click Save after completing your changes.

For a more accurate mobile experience, use Ego Live Preview:

Install Ego Live Preview on your mobile device.
Open the app preview section in Ego Mobile Builder.
Select the design you want to test.
Scan the QR code.
Review the screens, navigation, scrolling, and interactive elements on your device.

Don’t have Ego Live Preview yet? Download Ego Live Preview.

","Step 5: Save and test with Ego Live Preview","step-4-preview-your-changes","

Changes are reflected immediately in the mobile preview while you edit the settings.

Use the editor preview to check:

Text readability
Image proportions
Component order
Button placement
Spacing
Overall visual balance

The editor preview is intended for quick visual checks. The final display may vary slightly depending on the device size and available store data.

","Step 4: Preview your changes","step-3-customize-the-layout","

For each screen, you can:

Add supported components.
Drag and drop components to reorder them.
Edit images, videos, text, products, and collections.
Configure layout, spacing, buttons, and navigation.
Show, hide, or remove components.

Common components include banners, image carousels, product grids, product sliders, shoppable videos, countdown timers, search elements, product details, cart sections, and review widgets.

Some components may require a supported plan, feature, or integration.

","Step 3: Customize the layout","step-2-select-a-screen","

Choose the screen you want to customize.

Supported screens may include:

Home
Product List
Product Detail
Collection List
Search
Cart
Wishlist
Custom screens

Available components depend on the selected screen.

","Step 2: Select a screen","step-1-choose-how-to-start","

Go to Ego Mobile Builder → App Design.

You can start in one of two ways:

Apply a theme template

Open the Themes Library and select a ready-made design that matches your store.

Browse the available themes.
Click View Detail to preview a theme.
Click Apply Theme.
Customize the applied design with your own branding and store content.

Theme templates provide pre-built layouts and component arrangements, so you do not need to design every screen from scratch.

Start with your current design

Open an existing design when you only need to update its content, layout, or branding.

Applying a new theme may replace the current layout. Review your existing design before confirming.

","Step 1: Choose how to start","

The App Design section helps you create and customize the customer-facing experience of your mobile app without coding.

You can:

Apply a ready-made design from the Themes Library.
Customize essential and custom app screens.
Add, remove, and reorder supported components.
Update images, text, products, collections, colors, and display settings.
Preview changes instantly in the editor.
Test the complete experience on a mobile device using Ego Live Preview.

","mob-art-overview","The App Design Customization section allows you to control the visual appearance of your mobile app and align it with your brand. In this area, you can…",[1968,1969,1970,1971,1972,1973,1974,1975],"2026-09-14T02:51:35.725Z",[],{"_189":305,"_227":1993,"_229":307},{"_189":1990,"_227":1991,"_229":1992},{"_189":1987,"_227":1988,"_229":1989},{"_189":1984,"_227":1985,"_229":1986},{"_189":1981,"_227":1982,"_229":1983},{"_189":1978,"_227":1979,"_229":1980},{"_189":1089,"_227":1977,"_229":1349},{"_189":192,"_227":1976,"_229":194},"

1. Can I create my own app design without using a theme template?
Yes. You can build your app based on your own design ideas by adding, arranging, and customizing the available components on each supported screen. A theme template is optional and can be used as a starting point if you prefer.

2. Will applying a new theme replace my current design?
No. If your plan supports multiple designs, applying a new theme creates a separate design without affecting your current one. You can then customize the new design independently.

3. Can I customize a theme after applying it?
Yes. You can continue editing the layout, branding, content, navigation, and components after applying a theme.

4. What is a Custom Screen?
A Custom Screen is an additional screen you create beyond the standard app screens such as Home, Product Detail, or Cart. You can use it for campaigns, landing pages, curated collections, or other dedicated content, then link it from navigation, banners, or supported components.

5. Can I create and manage multiple app designs?
Yes, if your plan supports multiple designs. You can create and customize different designs in parallel while keeping your current published design unchanged until you are ready to publish another one.

6. How can I preview my app before publishing it?
You can preview changes directly in the editor or use Ego Live Preview to test the latest saved design on a mobile device.

7. When will customers see my design changes?
Customers will see the updated design only after you publish the changes.

","

Applying a theme replaces the current design layout, so review your existing design before confirming.
Theme templates can still be fully customized after being applied.
Components are configured separately for each screen.
Custom screens must be linked from navigation, a banner, or another supported component.
Integrated components require the related integration to be enabled.
Customers only see the updated design after it is published.

","preview-your-design","

Changes appear in the editor preview while you customize the screen.

For a more accurate mobile experience:

Save your changes.
Open Ego Live Preview.
Connect to your store.
Review the updated screens and interactions on your device.

","Preview your design","customize-your-layout","

For each screen, you can:

Add supported components.
Drag and drop components to reorder them.
Edit images, text, products, collections, and display settings.
Hide or remove components.
Review changes in the preview.

","Customize your layout","supported-components","

Available components depend on the selected screen.

Home

Search Box, Announcement Bar, Hero Banner, Image, Hero Carousel, Image Carousel, Shoppable Video, Shoppable Story, Image Collection, Image Magazine, Product Image Hotspot, Countdown Timer, Product Slider, Product Grid, Recommended Products, Recently Viewed Products, Trust Badge, Image Grid, and Before & After Image.

Product List

Product Result Grid and Sort & Filter.

Product Detail

Product Media, Product Detail, Variant Selector, Product Description, Add to Cart Button, Product Policy, and Review Component.

Collection List

Collection Result List.

Search

Trending Search, Trending Collections, Search Result Grid, and Search Empty State.

Cart

Cart Items, Cart Summary, Cart Note, and Cart Promo Code.

Review integrations

Review Widget, Review Slider, Review Carousel, and Review Video Carousel.

Component availability may depend on your app plan and enabled integrations.

","Supported components","supported-screens","

You can customize these essential screens:

Home
Product List
Product Detail
Collection List
Search: Search Start, Search Result, Search Empty
Cart: Cart Page, Cart Empty
Wishlist: Wishlist Detail, Wishlist Empty

You can also create Custom screens for campaigns, collections, or other dedicated content.

","Supported screens","start-with-a-theme-template","

The Themes Library provides ready-made app designs that you can apply immediately.

Each theme includes a pre-built layout, visual style, and component arrangement designed for a specific store type, such as furniture, beauty, or wellness.

To use a theme:

Open App Design.
Browse the available themes.
Click View Detail to preview the theme.
Click Apply Theme to use it for your app.
Customize the content, branding, and layout to match your store.

Applying a theme gives you a complete starting layout, so you do not need to build every screen from scratch.

If you need a more tailored design, you can also select Contact us for custom app design support.

","Start with a theme template","

The App Design section helps you quickly build and customize the customer-facing experience of your mobile app.

You can:

Apply a ready-made theme template from the Themes Library.
Customize supported app screens and components.
Add, remove, and reorder sections.
Preview changes immediately in the editor.
Test the latest design on a mobile device using Ego Live Preview.

","cmuao2xqm03uh2uqg0jd8ge4n","pricing-plan","Pricing Plan","Explore Ego Mobile App Builder pricing plans, features, publishing options, billing, free trials, and plan changes.",[2003,2004,2005,2006,2007,2008,2009,2010,2011],"Sep 21, 2026","2026-09-21T03:09:49.774Z",[],"About Ego Mobile App Builder",{"_189":305,"_227":2034,"_229":307},{"_189":2031,"_227":2032,"_229":2033},{"_189":2028,"_227":2029,"_229":2030},{"_189":2025,"_227":2026,"_229":2027},{"_189":2022,"_227":2023,"_229":2024},{"_189":2019,"_227":2020,"_229":2021},{"_189":2016,"_227":2017,"_229":2018},{"_189":2013,"_227":2014,"_229":2015},{"_189":192,"_227":2012,"_229":194},"

Where can I change my plan?

Go to Ego Mobile Builder → Pricing, choose the plan you want, and confirm the subscription change through Shopify.

Are there any hidden fees?

Ego Mobile Builder does not charge success fees, revenue-share fees, or per-order usage fees.

Developer account fees and subscriptions for third-party services are separate and are charged directly by those providers.

Can I publish my app on the Free plan?

No.

The Free plan is designed for building and previewing your mobile app.

To publish your app to the App Store or Google Play, upgrade to Growth, Scale, or Enterprise.

Do I need to submit my app again when I upgrade?

No. Upgrading your subscription alone does not require a new App Store or Google Play submission.

Some future changes to your mobile app may still require a new store version depending on the type of change.

Will my live app stop working if I move between paid plans?

Your app remains active, but features that are not available on the new plan are hidden or disabled.

What happens if I move to Free?

If your app is already published, it will be deactivated until you subscribe to a paid plan again. Your Ego app configuration remains available.

","payment-issues","

If Shopify cannot successfully collect your bill, your Shopify account or related app access can be affected according to Shopify's billing status.

Check:

Shopify Admin → Settings → Billing

to review outstanding or failed charges.

If your Ego plan does not return to the expected status after the Shopify billing issue has been resolved, contact Ego Support. Shopify notes that unpaid bills can cause a store to become frozen until payment is restored.

","Payment Issues","downgrading-vs-uninstalling-ego-mobile-builder","

These actions have different consequences.

	Downgrade to Free	Uninstall Ego Mobile Builder
Ego remains installed	Yes	No
Paid subscription	Ends / moves to Free	Canceled
Published mobile app	Deactivated	Deactivated
App configuration	Retained in Ego	Retained temporarily
Reactivation	Upgrade to a paid plan	Reinstall and restore before data removal

When an app is uninstalled, Shopify automatically cancels its recurring app subscription. Shopify also sends its mandatory shop-data redaction request 48 hours after uninstall, so Ego cannot guarantee preservation of your app configuration after that period.

If you plan to use your mobile app again, downgrading is therefore different from uninstalling the Shopify app.

","Downgrading vs. Uninstalling Ego Mobile Builder","downgrading-your-plan","

Before downgrading, review the features and limits included in the new plan.

Ego shows the affected features in the downgrade confirmation so you can understand what will change before proceeding.

Downgrading to a lower paid plan

If you move from a higher paid plan to a lower paid plan—for example, Scale → Growth—your mobile app remains active.

However, features that are not supported by the new plan will no longer be available.

This applies to both:

Ego Mobile Builder: unsupported settings and features are hidden or disabled.
Your mobile app: features that require the previous plan are hidden or unavailable to customers.

For example, when moving from Scale to Growth, you can lose access to Scale-only features such as scheduled notifications, advanced navigation, advanced segmentation, higher language limits, and advanced analytics.

Before confirming the downgrade, review any active languages, scheduled notifications, segments, designs, or integrations that exceed the limits of the new plan.

For paid-plan downgrades, Shopify can issue a prorated application credit based on the price difference and the unused portion of the current billing cycle. This is a Shopify app credit rather than an automatic cash refund.

Downgrading to Free

Downgrading to Free has a larger impact because Free does not support a live published mobile app.

If your mobile app has already been successfully published to the App Store or Google Play, downgrading to Free will deactivate the mobile app.

This means customers can no longer use the published mobile app experience while your store remains on the Free plan.

Your app configuration remains in Ego Mobile Builder, so you don't need to rebuild your app from scratch.

To reactivate your mobile app, subscribe to a paid plan again.

Downgrading to Free is different from uninstalling Ego Mobile Builder. Your configuration remains associated with your account while you continue using Ego on the Free plan.

","Downgrading Your Plan","upgrading-your-plan","

You can upgrade your plan from the Pricing page whenever you need additional features or higher limits.

For example:

Free → Growth
Publish your app and start using paid features.

Growth → Scale
Unlock advanced navigation, scheduled push notifications, 9 notification automations, 50 segments, 10 languages, and advanced analytics.

Scale → Enterprise
Unlock higher limits, additional customization and Enterprise-only integrations.

When upgrading between paid plans during an active billing cycle, Shopify normally prorates the price difference based on the remaining days in your billing cycle.

Changing your Ego subscription plan alone does not require you to create a new mobile app.

","Upgrading Your Plan","pricing-and-billing","

How are Ego charges billed?

Ego Mobile Builder subscription charges are processed through Shopify Billing and appear on your Shopify bill.

You can review app charges from:

Shopify Admin → Settings → Billing

Shopify app subscriptions use their own 30-day billing cycle, which might not start on the same date as your Shopify subscription cycle.

Is there a free trial?

Growth, Scale, and Enterprise currently include a 14-day free trial.

If you have completed your app submission and your app is still waiting for approval from Apple or Google when your trial is close to ending, contact Ego Support.

Are there any hidden fees?

Ego does not charge a success fee or take a percentage of your mobile app revenue.

However, some external services can have separate charges.

If you publish using your own developer accounts, the current standard developer fees are:

Apple Developer Program — $99 USD/year
Google Play developer registration — $25 USD one-time

Apple and Google charge these fees directly.

Ego also supports publishing through an Ego-managed developer account on paid plans, so having your own developer account is not required for every submission.

Third-party apps such as loyalty, helpdesk, review, or marketing services can also require separate subscriptions from their respective providers.

","Pricing and Billing","which-plan-should-i-choose","

Choose Free if you are still designing and previewing your app and are not ready to publish.

Choose Growth if you want to publish your app but only need essential design, notification, segmentation, analytics, and integration features.

For most merchants that plan to actively use their mobile app as a sales and marketing channel, we recommend Scale. In particular, choose Scale if you need features such as scheduled push notifications, advanced automation, up to 10 languages, 50 customer segments, multi-level navigation, or advanced conversion and retention analytics.

Choose Enterprise when you need higher limits, theme customization requests, dedicated services, or the Enterprise-only Smile.io and Gorgias integrations.

","Which Plan Should I Choose?","compare-plans","

The table below highlights the differences merchants are most likely to consider when choosing a plan.

	Free	Growth	Scale	Enterprise
Price	$0	$79/month	$199/month	$499/month
Publish to iOS & Android	No	Yes	Yes	Yes
Custom screens	1	3	Unlimited	Unlimited
Parallel app designs	1	2	5	Unlimited
Design blocks	10	25 / 19 block types	35 / 36 block types	60 / 36 block types
Push notifications	Test only	Manual + 3 automations	Manual + scheduled + 9 automations	Same as Scale
Saved customer segments	—	5	50	Unlimited
App languages	1	Up to 5	Up to 10	On demand
Analytics	—	Core sales, orders, installs & traffic	Advanced conversion, acquisition & retention	Scale + additional behavioral insights
Integrations	—	Core Shopify & marketing integrations	Growth + advanced commerce & chat integrations	Scale + Smile.io & Gorgias

Push notification availability

Growth includes manual notifications and these automated notifications:

Abandoned Cart
Welcome Offer
Order Update

Scale and Enterprise add scheduled notifications and support all 9 automation types, including Back in Stock, Abandoned Checkout, Inactive User, Low Stock Alert, Price Drop Alert, and Thank You & Exclusive Offer.

The current pricing specification does not define a separate plan-based monthly push-send quota; plan differences are based on notification capabilities and targeting features.

Analytics differences

Growth includes core metrics such as:

Total Sales
Total Orders
Average Order Value
Conversion Rate
App Installs
Traffic
Active Users
Signups
Top 5 Best Selling Products

Scale adds advanced metrics such as:

Repeat Purchase Rate
Geo-location breakdown
4-step Conversion Funnel
App Install Breakdown
Widget Impressions
Source of Opens
Order Sources
Abandoned Checkout Rate
Sessions per User
Customer Lifetime Value
Top 20 Best Selling Products

Enterprise additionally includes:

App Activity by hour and day
Time to First Purchase
Order Frequency
Inactive Users
Full Best Selling Product list

Integration differences

Growth supports integrations including:

Shopify Search & Discovery, Judge.me, Klaviyo, Shopify Inbox, Shopify Bundles, Shopify Flow, and Ego Cart Drawer.

Scale adds integrations such as:

WhatsApp, Aris Product Options, and Ego Free Gift.

Enterprise additionally supports:

Smile.io
Gorgias Helpdesk

For the complete feature-by-feature comparison, go to Ego Mobile Builder → Pricing → Compare plans.

","Compare Plans","

Ego Mobile Builder offers two types of plans:

Free plan: build and preview your mobile app at no cost. Publishing is not available on this plan.
Paid plans (Growth, Scale, Enterprise): publish your app to the App Store and Google Play, with more features and higher limits on each higher plan.

All prices are in USD and billed through Shopify. See Compare Plans below for prices and plan details.

Important: You cannot publish or keep a published mobile app active on the Free plan.

","cms8o0rcx01vw2us1q8rlf2a5","ego-mobile-app-builder-feature-overview","Ego Mobile App Builder Feature Overview","Explore the key features of Ego Mobile App Builder, from app design and customization to marketing, analytics, notifications, and mobile app management.",[2044,2045,2046,2047,2048,2049,2050,2051],"Sep 12, 2026","2026-07-31T08:13:11.169Z","2026-09-12T15:35:25.601Z",[],{"_189":305,"_227":2071,"_229":307},{"_189":2068,"_227":2069,"_229":2070},{"_189":2065,"_227":2066,"_229":2067},{"_189":2062,"_227":2063,"_229":2064},{"_189":2059,"_227":2060,"_229":2061},{"_189":2056,"_227":2057,"_229":2058},{"_189":2053,"_227":2054,"_229":2055},{"_189":192,"_227":2052,"_229":194},"

1. What can I customize in my mobile app?
You can customize your app’s branding, layout, navigation, images, components, and supported shopping experiences.

2. Can I preview changes before publishing them?
Yes. You can preview your mobile app design and configurations using Ego Live Preview before publishing them to customers.

3. Can I send push notifications to specific customer groups?
Yes. You can send notifications to all users or target selected customer segments.

5. What performance data can I track?
You can monitor metrics such as sales, orders, average order value, traffic, conversion rate, and other supported app performance data.

6. Can I connect other Shopify apps to my mobile app?
Yes. You can connect supported integrations to extend features such as reviews, bundles, product options, marketing, and live chat.

7. Do all features and integrations work automatically after being enabled?
Not always. Some features or integrations may require additional configuration in Shopify or the connected app before they can be used in your mobile app.

","6-connect-integrations","

Connect supported Shopify apps and third-party services to extend your mobile app experience.

Available integrations include:

Shopify Search & Discovery
Ego Free Gifts BOGO Upsell
Shopify Bundles
Ego Cart Drawer Cart Upsell
Judge.me Product Reviews
Shopify Flow
Klaviyo
Shopify Inbox
WhatsApp
Aris Product Options

To connect an integration:

Open Integrations.
Search or filter by category.
Select Connect.
Complete the required setup.
Preview and test the feature before publishing.

Some integrations may require the related app, campaign, or feature to be configured in Shopify first.

","6. Connect integrations","5-monitor-app-analytics","

Use App Analytics to understand how your mobile app contributes to store performance.

Depending on the available report, you may review:

Total sales.
Total orders.
Average order value.
Traffic.
Conversion rate.
Top-selling products.
Order sources.
Checkout behavior.

Use these insights to improve product placement, notifications, promotions, and the shopping journey.

For example, if traffic increases but conversion decreases, review your product pages, cart, and checkout settings.

","5. Monitor app analytics","4-submit-your-app","

When your app design and settings are ready, use the guided submission flow to publish it on the Apple App Store and Google Play.

During submission, you will:

Choose between publishing a new app or migrating an existing app.
Enter app and store listing information.
Upload icons, screenshots, and branding assets.
Provide iOS and Android build details.
Select your developer accounts.
Review and submit the information.

If you use your own developer accounts, invite the Ego team through the official Apple or Google invitation process. You do not need to share your password.

You can track each platform separately through statuses such as Draft, Pending, In Review, Submitting, Live, or Rejected.

","4. Submit your app","3-create-notifications-and-customer-segments","

Use push notifications to bring customers back to your app and promote important content.

You can:

Send one-time notifications.
Schedule notifications.
Create automated notifications.
Add a title, message, image, and destination.
Send notifications to all users or selected customer segments.

Customer segments help you target relevant groups such as new users, existing customers, purchasers, or inactive users.

Before sending, review the message, target audience, destination, and scheduled time.

","3. Create notifications and customer segments","2-configure-app-settings","

Use App Settings to control how customers browse, sign in, and shop in your app.

Available settings may include:

Product badges and stock indicators.
Out-of-stock product visibility.
Search and wishlist behavior.
Customer login and account creation.
Cart and checkout settings.
Fast checkout and abandoned-cart reminders.
Multi-language and multi-currency options.
App promotion and re-engagement settings.

Configure these options based on your current Shopify store setup and customer journey.

","2. Configure app settings","1-customize-and-design-your-app","

Use the visual editor to create an app that matches your brand.

You can:

Start with a ready-made theme or empty design.
Customize colors, fonts, images, icons, and branding.
Add and arrange banners, product sections, collections, videos, and other components.
Configure the header, side menu, and bottom navigation.
Preview changes before publishing.

Before moving to the next step, check that your content is readable, images are clear, and all buttons lead to the correct destination.

","1. Customize and design your app","

Ego Mobile App Builder gives you the tools to create, configure, publish, and manage a branded mobile shopping app directly from your Shopify Admin—without coding.

This article introduces the main areas you will use when building and operating your mobile app:

Customize and design your app
Configure app settings
Create notifications and customer segments
Submit your app
Monitor app analytics
Connect integrations

","cms8lns2c01uk2us1ifoyob0i","what-is-ego-mobile-app-builder","What is Ego Mobile App Builder?","Learn what Ego Mobile App Builder is, how it helps you build a native mobile shopping app for your Shopify store, and what you can do without coding.",[2080,2081,2082,2083,2084,2085],"2026-07-31T07:07:06.324Z","2026-09-12T15:34:46.678Z",[],{"_189":305,"_227":2099,"_229":307},{"_189":2096,"_227":2097,"_229":2098},{"_189":2093,"_227":2094,"_229":2095},{"_189":2090,"_227":2091,"_229":2092},{"_189":2087,"_227":2088,"_229":2089},{"_189":192,"_227":2086,"_229":194},"

1. What is Ego Mobile App Builder?
Ego Mobile App Builder helps Shopify merchants create and manage native iOS and Android shopping apps directly from Shopify.

2. Do I need coding skills to build my mobile app?
No. You can design, configure, preview, and manage your app without coding.

3. Does my mobile app sync with my Shopify store?
Yes. Your mobile app syncs directly with your Shopify store, so products, collections, prices, images, inventory, and other supported store data can be updated automatically. This helps keep the information displayed in your app consistent with your online store.

4. Can I preview my app before publishing it?
Yes. You can preview and test your app before submitting it to the app stores.

5. Can I publish my app to both iOS and Android?
Yes. Your app can be prepared and submitted to both the Apple App Store and Google Play.

6. Can I update my app after it goes live?
Yes. Some content and configurations can be updated and published immediately through Ego Mobile App Builder, while changes to certain native app features or store listing information may require you to resubmit a new app version for review.

7. Where can I get help when building or publishing my app?
You can use the Help Center or contact the Ego support team through in-app live chat for assistance.

","where-to-go-for-help","

If you need help while creating or managing your app, you can:

Browse the Ego Mobile App Builder Help Center for setup instructions and detailed feature guides.
Contact the Ego support team through the in-app live chat.
Review the app submission guides before submitting your app.
Contact support if you need assistance with developer accounts, app builds, store review requirements, or publishing issues.

","Where to go for help","who-is-ego-mobile-app-builder-for","

Ego Mobile App Builder is suitable for Shopify merchants who:

Want to launch an iOS and Android shopping app without coding.
Want more control over their mobile shopping experience.
Have a growing base of returning customers.
Use promotions, product launches, or loyalty campaigns regularly.
Want to communicate with customers through push notifications.
Prefer an app builder instead of developing and maintaining a custom application.

","Who is Ego Mobile App Builder for?","why-create-a-mobile-app-for-your-shopify-store","

A dedicated mobile app can help you provide a more focused shopping experience for customers who frequently purchase on mobile devices.

With Ego Mobile App Builder, you can:

Strengthen your brand presence on customers’ devices.
Deliver a faster and more mobile-focused shopping experience.
Create a more engaging way for customers to browse products.
Communicate directly with customers through push notifications.
Encourage repeat visits and purchases.
Reduce the resources required to build and maintain a custom mobile app.
Manage your Shopify store and mobile app through a connected workflow.

","Why create a mobile app for your Shopify store?","how-does-ego-mobile-app-builder-work","

The general process includes the following steps:

Install Ego Mobile App Builder on your Shopify store.
Select a theme or start with an empty design.
Customize your app layout, branding, and navigation.
Configure the mobile features you want to use.
Preview and test your app.
Prepare the required app submission information.
Select your Apple and Google developer accounts.
Submit your app for review.
Publish your app after it is approved by the app stores.
Continue managing your app through Shopify.

After your app goes live, you can update most app content and configurations directly from Ego Mobile App Builder. Some major changes related to the native app build or store listing may require a new app version to be submitted.

","How does Ego Mobile App Builder work?","

Ego Mobile Builder is an in-app tool within Shopify that allows merchants to quickly create and manage their own mobile shopping app without coding.

With Ego Mobile Builder, merchants can transform their Shopify store into a fully functional mobile app for iOS and Android, helping them deliver a faster, more engaging shopping experience for their customers.

The app builder provides an intuitive interface where merchants can:

Customize the mobile app layout and design
Sync products, collections, and store data directly from Shopify
Preview the app in real time
Configure essential mobile features such as push notifications, navigation, and branding
Submit the app to Apple App Store and Google Play

By leveraging Ego Mobile Builder, merchants can launch a mobile app faster, strengthen brand presence, and increase customer engagement through a dedicated mobile shopping experience.

","cmuv1cvoq008a2ut9u1rwv2pi","campaigns","Campaigns","Track revenue and funnel performance of each marketing campaign using UTM parameters, and create trackable UTM links for your ads.",[2111,2112,2113,2114,2115,2116,2117],"Oct 5, 2026","2026-10-05T09:16:52.202Z","2026-10-05T09:17:06.153Z",[],"facebook-pixel","EG Facebook Pixel Tiktok Pixel",{"_189":305,"_227":2136,"_229":307},{"_189":2133,"_227":2134,"_229":2135},{"_189":2130,"_227":2131,"_229":2132},{"_189":2127,"_227":2128,"_229":2129},{"_189":2124,"_227":2125,"_229":2126},{"_189":2121,"_227":2122,"_229":2123},{"_189":2118,"_227":2119,"_229":2120},"utm-links","

Use this section to create and manage trackable links for your ads.

Create a UTM link

In the UTM links section, click Create UTM link.
Fill in the link information (UTM name, source, medium, campaign, and optional content and term).
Save the link.

=> The new link appears in the list with a generated link that you can use in your ads.

Manage your UTM links

The table lists all your UTM links.

Column	Description
UTM name	The name that identifies this UTM link
Source	Traffic source (for example, facebook)
Medium	Traffic medium (for example, cpc)
Campaign	Campaign name
Generated link	The final link with UTM parameters, ready to use in your ads
Created	Date the link was created
Action	Copy, Edit, or Delete the link

Actions:

Copy icon: Copy the generated link to use in your ad.
Edit icon: Update the link information.
Delete icon: Remove the link from the list.

Use the search box to find a link by UTM name.

","UTM links","all-campaigns","

This table shows the funnel and revenue for every UTM combination.

Column	Description
Source	Where the traffic comes from (facebook, google, tiktok, ig…)
Medium	Type of traffic (paid, cpc…)
Campaign	Name of the campaign
Content	Ad or creative identifier (for example, a video or reel name)
Term	Audience or keyword (for example, a targeting group or search term)
VC	View Content: product page views
ATC	Add to Cart: products added to cart
IC	Initiate Checkout: checkouts started
PUR	Purchase: completed orders
VC→ATC	Conversion rate from View Content to Add to Cart
ATC→IC	Conversion rate from Add to Cart to Initiate Checkout
IC→PUR	Conversion rate from Initiate Checkout to Purchase

How to use the table:

The TOTAL row at the bottom sums up all rows.
Click a row to view the details of that campaign.
Use the Showing dropdown to change how many rows are displayed per page.
Click Export CSV to download the table data.

About (not set): The (not set) row groups visits and orders that came without UTM parameters, such as direct visits or links that were not tagged. A high number here means many of your links are missing UTM tags.

","All Campaigns","utm-attributed-revenue-trend","

This chart shows how UTM-attributed revenue changes over time.

UTM Revenue (left axis): Revenue from orders with an identified UTM source.
Tracked % (right axis): The share of revenue that was tracked with UTM.

Click How to read for a quick explanation of the chart.

Important: This chart shows only revenue from orders with an identified UTM source. It is not your store's total revenue.

","UTM-attributed Revenue Trend","campaign-performance","

This chart shows revenue by campaign, sorted from highest to lowest.

Each bar is one campaign.
The value at the end of the bar is the revenue generated by that campaign.
Use it to quickly see your best-performing campaigns.

Note: Orders without UTM tags are grouped under (not set).

","Campaign Performance","summary-metrics","

Four cards at the top summarize your campaign results in the selected period.

Metric	Description
Revenue	Total revenue from orders attributed to a UTM source
Orders	Number of orders attributed to UTM campaigns
Sessions	Number of visits that came from UTM links
Conv. Rate	Share of sessions that resulted in an order

Each card also shows the comparison with the previous period.

Tip: Hover over a metric name to see its definition.

","Summary metrics","open-campaigns","

Open the app in your Shopify Admin.
Go to Campaigns.

Filter your data

At the top of the page, use the filters to narrow down the data.

Source: Choose a source such as facebook, google, tiktok, or ig. Default is All.
Medium: Choose a medium such as paid or cpc. Default is All.
Search: Type a source, medium, or campaign name to find it quickly.
Date range: Select a period (for example, Last 7 days).

=> All metrics, charts, and tables on the page update based on your filters.

","Open Campaigns","

Campaigns helps you see which campaigns, sources, and ads bring in visitors and revenue, based on the UTM parameters in your links.

From this guide, you will:

Filter campaign data by source, medium, and date range.
Read the summary metrics and charts.
Analyze the funnel of every UTM combination.
Export campaign data to CSV.
Create and manage UTM links for your ads.

What is a UTM? UTM parameters are short tags added to the end of a link (source, medium, campaign, content, term). When a customer clicks that link and visits your store, Ego Pixel reads the tags and attributes the visit and the order to that campaign.

","fbpx-art-performance-analytics","performance-analytics","Performance Analytics","Analyze your store's conversion performance from Facebook and TikTok with funnel metrics, tag analytics, and product insights.",[2145,2146,2147,2148,2149,2150],"2026-06-30T03:08:00.000Z","2026-10-05T03:17:03.679Z",[],{"_189":305,"_227":2166,"_229":307},{"_189":2163,"_227":2164,"_229":2165},{"_189":2160,"_227":2161,"_229":2162},{"_189":2157,"_227":2158,"_229":2159},{"_189":2154,"_227":2155,"_229":2156},{"_189":2151,"_227":2152,"_229":2153},"products-analytics","

Displays the top performing products by revenue.

Metrics include:

View Content - Number of product page views for products with that tag.
Add to Cart - Number of times products with that tag were added to cart.
Initiate Checkout - Number of checkout events for products with that tag.
Purchase - Number of successful purchases.
Revenue: Total revenue generated by products.

=> This section helps you identify best-selling products and high-interest items.

","Products Analytics","tags-analytics","

This section analyzes performance based on Shopify product tags.

Metrics explained:

View Content - Number of product page views for products with that tag.
Add to Cart - Number of times products with that tag were added to cart.
Initiate Checkout - Number of checkout events for products with that tag.
Purchase - Number of successful purchases.
Conv. Rate - Conversion rate from View Content → Purchase.
Revenue: Total revenue generated by products with that tag.

The Revenue by Tag chart helps identify which product categories generate the most sales.

","Tags Analytics","funnel-conversion-metrics","

These metrics show how customers move through the shopping journey.

View Content → Add to Cart: Number of customers who added a product to cart after viewing it.
Add to Cart → Purchase: Shows how many users completed a purchase after adding items to the cart.
View Content → Purchase: Shows the overall product page to purchase conversion rate.

","Funnel Conversion Metrics","date-range","

Select a date range to view analytics within a specific period (e.g., Last 7 days).

=> All data in this page will update based on the selected timeframe.

","Date Range","platform","

At the top right of the page, click the platform dropdown and select Facebook Pixel or TikTok Pixel.

=> All data in this page will update based on the selected platform.

Tip: Keep the same date range and switch between Facebook Pixel and TikTok Pixel to compare how each channel performs.

","Platform","

Performance Analytics helps you measure customer behavior and evaluate your store's sales performance.

From this guide, you will:

Switch between Facebook Pixel and TikTok Pixel data.
Filter analytics by a selected date range.
Track conversion performance across the customer journey.
Analyze product tag performance and revenue.
Identify top-performing products based on key metrics.

","fbpx-art-pixel-analytics","pixel-analytics","Pixel Analytics","Monitor your Facebook and TikTok Pixel performance with event metrics, trends, and conversion insights in one dashboard.",[2174,2175],"2026-10-05T03:13:14.177Z",[],{"_189":305,"_227":2179,"_229":307},{"_189":2176,"_227":2177,"_229":2178},"how-to-use-pixel-analytics","

Step 1: Open Pixel Analytics

Open the app in your Shopify Admin.
Go to Analytics.
Make sure the Pixel Analytics tab is selected.

The dashboard will update automatically with the selected Pixel's data.

Step 2: Choose a platform

At the top right of the page, click the platform dropdown and select the platform you want to analyze:

Facebook Pixel: View analytics for your Meta (Facebook) Pixels.
TikTok Pixel: View analytics for your TikTok Pixels.

Step 3: Select a Pixel

Below the tabs, select the Pixel you want to analyze.

Click the Pixel dropdown
Choose the Pixel connected to your store (shown with its name and Pixel ID)

The dashboard will update automatically with the selected Pixel's data.

Note: Only Pixels of the selected platform are displayed. To see a TikTok Pixel, switch the platform to TikTok Pixel first.

=> The Pixel list and all data on the page will update based on the selected platform.

Step 2: Choose a Date Range

Use the Date Range filter to view analytics within a specific period.

All metrics and charts will refresh based on the selected time range.

The dashboard displays key event statistics tracked by your Pixel.

Each card shows:

Total event count
Comparison with the previous period

Event	Decription
PageView	Triggered when a user visits a page on your store
ViewContent	Triggered when a user views a product page
ViewCollection	Triggered when a user views a product collection
ViewCart	Triggered when a user views the shopping cart
AddToCart	Triggered when a user adds a product to the cart
Search	Triggered when a user performs a search
InitiateCheckout	Triggered when a user starts the checkout process
AddPaymentInfo	Triggered when a user enters payment information
Purchase	Triggered when an order is successfully completed
Revenue	Total revenue generated from purchase events

The Event Activities chart visualizes event activity over time:

Displays event trends across the selected date range
Each line represents a different event type
Helps identify traffic patterns and conversion behavior

Action:

Use the All Events dropdown to filter specific event types.

Click the icon \"View\" to display event details

$\"\"$

","How to Use Pixel Analytics?","

Pixel Analytics helps you monitor the performance of your connected Facebook and TikTok Pixels and understand how customers interact with your store.

From this guide, you will:

Switch between Facebook Pixel and TikTok Pixel.
Select a Pixel and date range for analysis.
View key event metrics and performance trends.
Analyze event activity over time.
Filter and explore specific event details.

","cmuuqfh8w000e2ut9x40c8iv9","tiktok-create-feed","Create Tiktok Feed","Create a product feed to generate a shareable URL that keeps your Shopify products synchronized with TikTok and other platforms.",[2189,2190,2191],"2026-10-05T04:10:57.680Z","2026-10-05T08:38:24.984Z",[],"Feed",{"_189":305,"_227":2198,"_229":307},{"_189":2195,"_227":2196,"_229":2197},{"_189":2192,"_227":2193,"_229":2194},"upload-feed","

Step 1: Copy the Feed URL generated in the app.

Step 2: Go to TikTok Ads Manager >> Select Assets >> Select Catalog >> Select your Catalog.

https://ads.tiktok.com

Step 3: Click \"Products\" >> Click \"Add Products\" >> Select \"Data Feed Schedule\"

Step 4: Enter a Data Feed Name, paste the link URL into the Data Feed URL field, choose the update schedule, and hit Next

Note: The feed URL does not require a username or password, so you can leave those fields empty.

","Upload Feed","create-a-product-feed","

Step 1: Go to Feeds in the app dashboard and click \"Create Feed\"

Step 2: Configure the feed settings:

Feed Name – Enter a name for your feed.
Product Source – Select the products you want to include.
Variant Export – Choose how product variants should be exported.
Image Settings – Select which product images will be included.
Pricing Settings – Choose how product prices will be displayed.
Select the Feed Update Schedule (Daily or Weekly).

Step 3: Click Create Feed to generate the feed.

After the feed is created, the system will generate a Feed URL that can be used to sync product data with TikTok.

","Create a Product Feed","

Create a Feed to generate a product data URL for syncing your Shopify products with external platforms.

From this guide, you will:

Configure your feed settings.
Generate a product feed URL.
Use the feed to keep product data synchronized automatically.

","fbpx-art-create-feed","facebook-create-feed","Create Facebook Feed","Create a product feed to generate a shareable URL that keeps your Shopify products synchronized with Meta and other platforms.",[2206,2207,2208],"2026-10-05T08:26:48.705Z",[],{"_189":305,"_227":2198,"_229":307},{"_189":2195,"_227":2210,"_229":2197},{"_189":2192,"_227":2209,"_229":2194},"

Step 1: Copy the Feed URL generated in the app.

$\"\"$

Step 2: Go to Meta Commerce Manager >> Select Data Sources >> Select your Catalog.

https://business.facebook.com/settings/catalogs

$\"\"$

Step 3: Click “ Open in Commerce Manager” >> Click “Add” >> Select “ Data file”

$\"\"$

Step 4: Paste link URL into the Use a URL or Google Sheets field and hit Next

$\"\"$

","

Step 1: Go to Feeds in the app dashboard and click “ Create Feed”

$\"\"$

Step 2: Configure the feed settings:

Feed Name – Enter a name for your feed.
Product Source – Select the products you want to include.
Variant Export – Choose how product variants should be exported.
Image Settings – Select which product images will be included.
Pricing Settings – Choose how product prices will be displayed.
Select the Feed Update Schedule (Daily or Weekly).

$\"\"$

Step 3: Click Create Feed to generate the feed.

After the feed is created, the system will generate a Feed URL that can be used to sync product data with Meta.

$\"\"$

","fbpx-art-what-is-a-feed","what-is-a-feed","What is a Feed?","Learn what a product feed is and how it helps sync your Shopify products with Meta and other advertising platforms.",[2219],"Aug 5, 2026","2026-08-05T08:41:36.805Z",[],{"_189":2212,"_227":2220,"_229":2213},"

The Feed generates a product data feed URL from your store. This feed contains up-to-date product information such as title, description, price, availability, images, and variants.

The generated feed can be used to sync your products with external advertising and marketing platforms, allowing those platforms to automatically pull the latest product data from your store.

With this feed you can:

Provide a product feed URL that can be connected to advertising platforms.
Import products into Meta Commerce Manager / Meta Catalog.
Use the catalog for Dynamic Product Ads (DPA) on Facebook and Instagram.
Ensure product data (price, stock status, images) stays automatically updated on those platforms.

","cmuuq47cd00062ut96ap3wesl","tiktok-create-catalog","Create TikTok Catalog","Create a TikTok Catalog to sync your Shopify products and use them in Catalog Ads and shopping experiences.",[2230,2231],"2026-10-05T04:02:11.629Z","2026-10-05T06:56:27.085Z",[],"Catalog",{"_189":305,"_227":2235,"_229":307},{"_189":2232,"_227":2233,"_229":2234},"create-catalog","

Step 1: Open Catalog Manager

In the app dashboard, go to Catalog Manager.
Click Create Catalog to start creating a new catalog.

Step 2: Connect your TikTok account

Before creating a catalog, you need to connect your TikTok for Business account.
Log in to your TikTok for Business account and grant permissions.

=> Once connected, you can create and manage catalogs directly from the app.

Step 3: Enter catalog information

Business Center / Ad Account – Select the connected TikTok account

Pixel – Select the Pixel you want to connect with this catalog

Best practice: We recommend connecting only one TikTok Pixel to each catalog. Using a single pixel helps ensure accurate event tracking and improves product matching for Catalog Ads.

TikTok matches pixel events (such as ViewContent, AddToCart, and CompletePayment) with catalog products using the product ID, so make sure the Pixel used for your ads is the one linked to the catalog you advertise with.

Catalog Name – Name of your catalog

Step 4: Configure Catalog Settings

After entering the catalog name, configure the catalog settings:

=> Then click \"Save\" to save the catalog.

Step 5: Verify the catalog

You can check the catalog status in: Catalog Manager inside the app or TikTok Ads Manager (Assets → Catalog). https://ads.tiktok.com

Click \"Open in TikTok Catalog Manager\" to manage the Catalog.

Make sure products are successfully synced and ready for advertising.

","Create Catalog","

Create a TikTok Catalog to keep your Shopify products synchronized with TikTok for advertising and commerce.

From this guide, you will:

Connect your TikTok for Business account.
Create and configure a TikTok Catalog.
Link your catalog to a TikTok Pixel.
Verify that your products are synced successfully.

","fbpx-art-create-catalog","Create Facebook Catalog","Create a Meta Catalog to sync your Shopify products and use them in dynamic ads and shopping experiences.",[2242,2243],"2026-10-05T04:03:55.323Z",[],{"_189":305,"_227":2245,"_229":307},{"_189":2232,"_227":2244,"_229":2234},"

Step 1: Open Catalog Manager

In the app dashboard, go to Catalog Manager.
Click Create Catalog to start creating a new catalog.

$\"\"$

Step 2: Connect your Meta account

Before creating a catalog, you need to connect your Meta (Facebook) account.
Log in to your Facebook Business account and grant permissions.

$\"\"$

=> Once connected, you can create and manage catalogs directly from the app.

Step 3: Enter catalog information

Business Account – Select the connected Meta Business account

$\"\"$

2.Pixel – Select the Pixel you want to connect with this catalog

Best practice: We recommend connecting only one Meta Pixel to each catalog. Using a single pixel helps ensure accurate event tracking and improves product matching for Dynamic Ads.

According to Meta Platforms documentation, a pixel should be associated with the same catalog used for advertising so that events such as ViewContent, AddToCart, and Purchase can be correctly matched with catalog items.

https://www.facebook.com/business/help/1275400645914358

$\"\"$

3.Catalog Name – Name of your catalog

$\"\"$

Step 4: Configure Catalog Settings

After entering the catalog name, configure the catalog settings:

$\"\"$

=> Then click \"Save\" to save the catalog.

Step 5: Verify the catalog

You can check the catalog status in: Catalog Manager inside the app or Meta Commerce Manager. https://business.facebook.com/commerce_manager

$\"\"$

2.Click \"Open in Commerce Manager\" to manage the Catalog.

$\"\"$

3.Make sure products are successfully synced and ready for advertising.

$\"\"$

","

Create a Meta Catalog to keep your Shopify products synchronized with Meta for advertising and commerce.

From this guide, you will:

Connect your Meta Business account.
Create and configure a Meta Catalog.
Link your catalog to a Meta Pixel.
Verify that your products are synced successfully.

","fbpx-art-what-is-a-catalog","what-is-a-catalog","What is a Catalog?","Learn what a Meta Catalog is, how it works, and why it's essential for dynamic ads and shopping experiences.",[2253],"2026-08-05T08:30:36.867Z",[],{"_189":2247,"_227":2254,"_229":2248},"

A Facebook Catalog stores information about the products you want to promote on Facebook (Meta) ads, such as name, price, description, image, and availability.

By connecting your store to a catalog, your product data can sync automatically and be used in Facebook ads and shopping features.

Key Benefits:

Product Management: Organize and update all product information in one place.
Dynamic Ads: Automatically show relevant products to customers who interacted with your store.
Shopping Features: Enable product discovery through Facebook and Instagram shopping experiences.
Auto Sync: Keep product details, prices, and inventory updated from your store.

","cmv7wczeq00092uoc7hblfs0n","chatgpt-check-event-delivery","Check Event Delivery","Learn how to verify that your ChatGPT Pixel and Conversions API events reach OpenAI. Check them in Live Diagnostic, with the ChatGPT Pixel Helper and in ChatGPT Ads Manager, and fix the most common issues.",[2266,2267,2268,2269,2270],"Oct 14, 2026","2026-10-14T09:17:59.234Z",[2264,2265,2168],"ChatGPT Pixel","add-your-chatgpt-pixel","chatgpt-fix-rejected-key",{"_189":305,"_227":2281,"_229":307},{"_189":2278,"_227":2279,"_229":2280},{"_189":2275,"_227":2276,"_229":2277},{"_189":2272,"_227":2273,"_229":2274},{"_189":852,"_227":2271,"_229":854},"

What you see	What to do
Pixel Helper finds no pixel	Turn off Test mode, check that the pixel is on and the app embed is enabled, and turn off ad blockers.
Reloading the page adds no new Page View	This is expected. Ego Pixel ignores reloads of the same page within 30 seconds to filter out fake views. Wait, or open another page.
No Initiate Checkout or Purchase	Turn on Conversions API and add your key.
Events arrive but campaigns show no revenue	Create an \"Order created\" conversion event (see Prepare ChatGPT Pixel).
Orders are counted twice	Turn off the pixel in OpenAI's ChatGPT Ads app if it uses the same Pixel ID.
A \"Requires Attention\" warning on your pixel	Replace your key (see Fix a Rejected Conversions API Key).

","verify-in-chatgpt-ads-manager","

Step 1: Open Your Pixel

Open ChatGPT Ads Manager: https://ads.openai.com
Go to Conversions and select your pixel.

Step 2: Review Recent Events

Check the list of recent events.

⇒ New events can take 30 minutes or more to appear in ChatGPT Ads Manager. If you don't see them yet, check back later.

Note: A delay in ChatGPT Ads Manager doesn't mean your events are missing. To confirm right away, use Live Diagnostic: it shows each event within seconds of sending it to OpenAI.

Good to know:

ChatGPT uses its own event names: page_viewed, contents_viewed, items_added, checkout_started and order_created (Purchase).
The same event can arrive from both the browser and our server. Ego Pixel sends a matching event ID, so OpenAI counts it once.
Events sent with Test mode on are checked but not recorded, so they don't appear here.

","Verify in ChatGPT Ads Manager","test-in-your-browser-with-chatgpt-pixel-helper","

Step 1: Install the Extension

Install the ChatGPT Pixel Helper extension from the Chrome Web Store.

Step 2: Check Your Pixel

Open your store.
Click the extension icon.

⇒ Pixel active means the pixel loaded on your store.

Step 3: Check Your Events

View a product and add it to the cart. You should see page_viewed, contents_viewed and items_added.

Seeing \"Events 0\" with more than one ChatGPT pixel? That's expected. With several ChatGPT pixels, Ego Pixel sends events to each pixel separately so each keeps its own event settings. Pixel Helper can't display these events, but they still reach OpenAI. Check them in Live Diagnostic or ChatGPT Ads Manager.

","Test in Your Browser with ChatGPT Pixel Helper","test-in-live-diagnostic","

Your pixel needs Conversions API turned on.

Step 1: Open Live Diagnostic

On the ChatGPT page, click Test next to your pixel.

⇒ Live Diagnostic opens with your pixel selected.

Step 2: Create Test Events

Open your store in another tab.
View a product.
Add it to the cart.
Start checkout and place a test order.

Step 3: Check the Results

Return to Live Diagnostic. Each event appears as it arrives and shows when it has been sent to OpenAI.

⇒ Click an event to see the data sent to OpenAI. Purchase shows as Purchase in the list, and the details show the name OpenAI received: order_created.

Note: Initiate Checkout and Purchase are sent from our server only, so Live Diagnostic and ChatGPT Ads Manager are the places to check them.

","Test in Live Diagnostic","

After adding your pixel, check that your events reach OpenAI.

In this guide, you will:

Test events in Live Diagnostic.
Check browser events with ChatGPT Pixel Helper.
Verify events in ChatGPT Ads Manager.
Fix the most common issues.

Before you start, make sure that:

Your pixel is on.
Test mode is off.
The Ego Pixel app embed is enabled.
Ad blockers are off in your browser, or you're using a private window.

","cmv7u2e53002j2uo5vl645jcp","Add Your ChatGPT Pixel","Learn how to add your ChatGPT Pixel to Ego Pixel during onboarding or from the ChatGPT page. You'll also choose the tracking scope, the events to send and the customer data that helps OpenAI match orders to ad clicks.",[2288,2289,2290,2291],"2026-10-14T08:13:45.879Z",[],{"_189":305,"_227":2301,"_229":307},{"_189":2298,"_227":2299,"_229":2300},{"_189":2295,"_227":2296,"_229":2297},{"_189":2292,"_227":2293,"_229":2294},"manage-your-pixels","

On the ChatGPT page, each pixel has these controls:

Status: turn the pixel on or off.
Conversions API: turn server-side tracking on or off. If the pixel has no key yet, a window asks you for one.
Test: open Live Diagnostic for this pixel.
Actions: edit the pixel, view its analytics or delete it.

Note: Deleting a pixel in Ego Pixel stops tracking on your store. It doesn't delete the pixel in ChatGPT Ads Manager.

","Manage Your Pixels","add-a-pixel-from-the-chatgpt-page","

Step 1: Open the ChatGPT Page

Go to ChatGPT in the app menu and click Add pixel.

Step 2: Enter Your Pixel Details

Enter a Pixel name and your Pixel ID.

Step 3: Choose the Tracking Scope

Entire store: track all pages and products. Recommended for most stores.
Specific target: track only selected products, collections or tags.

⇒ With Specific target, orders are sent to this pixel only if they contain at least one selected product.

Step 4: Turn On Conversions API

Turn on Conversions API (server-side tracking).
Paste your Conversions API key.
Leave Test mode off unless you're testing.

Step 5: Select Events

Click the events you want to send to ChatGPT:

Event in Ego Pixel	Name in ChatGPT Ads Manager	Needs Conversions API
Page View	page_viewed	No
View Content	contents_viewed	No
Add To Cart	items_added	No
Initiate Checkout	checkout_started	Yes
Purchase	order_created	Yes

⇒ Initiate Checkout and Purchase show a Server-side label and can't be selected until Conversions API is on.

Step 6: Choose Customer Information

Select the customer details to send with events: Email, Phone, External ID, First Name, Last Name, City, Region, Postal Code and Country.

⇒ More details help OpenAI match orders to ad clicks. Email, phone, external ID and names are hashed before they're sent.

Step 7: Save Your Pixel

Click Save in the bar at the top of the page.

⇒ Your settings are applied to your store right away.

","Add a Pixel from the ChatGPT Page","add-your-pixel-during-onboarding","

Step 1: Choose ChatGPT Pixel

On the platform screen, select ChatGPT Pixel.
Click Continue.

Step 2: Enter Your Pixel Details

Enter a ChatGPT Pixel Name.
Paste your ChatGPT Pixel ID.
Click Continue.

Step 3: Add Your Conversions API Key

Paste your Conversions API key.
Click Continue once the key is accepted.

⇒ No key yet? Click Skip. You can add it later, but Initiate Checkout and Purchase won't be tracked until you do.

Step 4: Set Your Timezone

Choose your store's timezone. Your analytics reports use it to split data by day.

Step 5: Enable the App Embed

Click Shopify Theme Editor.
In App embeds, turn on Ego Pixel and click Save.
Return to the app and check I've done this.

⇒ Tracking starts only after the app embed is on. See Enable Ego Pixel Theme Extension for details.

","Add Your Pixel During Onboarding","

Once your pixel and Conversions API key are ready, you can add your ChatGPT Pixel to Ego Pixel.

In this guide, you will:

Add your pixel during onboarding.
Add a pixel from the ChatGPT page.
Choose the events and customer data to send.
Manage your pixels.

Before you start, have these ready:

Your Pixel ID (see Prepare ChatGPT Pixel).
Your Conversions API key (see Set Up Conversions API Key).

","cmv7syxs1001q2uo5mxwnqvr7","chatgpt-set-up-conversions-api-key","Set Up Conversions API Key","Learn how to generate a Conversions API key in ChatGPT Ads Manager and when to use Test mode. The key lets Ego Pixel send checkout and purchase events to OpenAI from the server, unaffected by ad blockers.",[2310,2311,2312],"2026-10-14T07:43:05.089Z","2026-10-15T08:09:23.100Z",[],{"_189":305,"_227":2319,"_229":307},{"_189":2316,"_227":2317,"_229":2318},{"_189":2313,"_227":2314,"_229":2315},"use-test-mode-safely","

ChatGPT doesn't use a Test Event Code like Facebook or TikTok. Instead, Ego Pixel has a Test mode checkbox under the key field.

Test mode on: OpenAI checks your events but doesn't record them. Use it while setting up.
Test mode off: events are recorded and count toward your campaigns.

Important: Turn Test mode off before you run real campaigns. Otherwise your conversions won't be counted.

","Use Test Mode Safely","generate-your-conversions-api-key","

Step 1: Open Conversions

Open ChatGPT Ads Manager: https://ads.openai.com
Make sure you're in the same ad account as your pixel.
Go to the Conversions tab.

⇒ OpenAI rejects a key created in a different ad account.

Step 2: Create the Key

Create a new Conversions API key.
Copy the key and store it somewhere safe.

Keep your key private. Paste it only into Ego Pixel. Never share it by chat or email, or add it to your website.

Step 3: Add the Key to Ego Pixel

In Ego Pixel, paste the key into the Conversions API key field when you add or edit your ChatGPT pixel.
Wait a moment while Ego Pixel checks the key with OpenAI.

[Image 06: Conversions API key accepted]

⇒ If the key is wrong, a red message appears under the field. This check doesn't create any events in your ChatGPT Ads account.

","Generate Your Conversions API Key","

The Conversions API key lets Ego Pixel send events to OpenAI from our server. Ad blockers can't stop these events.

In this guide, you will:

Generate a Conversions API key in ChatGPT Ads Manager.
Add the key to Ego Pixel.
Learn when to use Test mode.

The key is required for Initiate Checkout and Purchase. Without it, Ego Pixel only tracks Page View, View Content and Add To Cart from the browser, and ChatGPT Ads Manager won't receive your orders.

","cmv7mpzia061y2ulkbam1x1nj","prepare-chatgpt-pixel","Prepare ChatGPT Pixel","Learn how to create a ChatGPT Pixel and an \"Order created\" conversion event in ChatGPT Ads Manager. Once created, you'll use the Pixel ID to connect it with Ego Pixel and start tracking ChatGPT Ads conversions.",[2328,2329,2330,2331],"2026-10-14T04:48:09.730Z","2026-10-14T07:28:29.651Z",[],{"_189":305,"_227":2341,"_229":307},{"_189":2338,"_227":2339,"_229":2340},{"_189":2335,"_227":2336,"_229":2337},{"_189":2332,"_227":2333,"_229":2334},"before-you-connect","

If your store also uses OpenAI's ChatGPT Ads Shopify app with the same Pixel ID, turn off the pixel in that app first.

Why: each app sends its own event IDs, so OpenAI can't tell they're the same order and counts every purchase twice.

Your pixel is now ready to connect to Ego Pixel.

","Before You Connect","create-an-order-created-conversion-event","

ChatGPT Ads Manager only reports revenue and ROAS for events marked as conversions.

Step 4: Create the Conversion Event

In the Conversions tab, create a new conversion event.
Choose the Order created event type.
Select the pixel you created in Step 2.
Save the conversion event.

⇒ Purchases tracked by Ego Pixel now count as conversions in this event.

Step 5: Add It to Your Campaigns

Select this conversion event in your ChatGPT Ads campaigns so they're measured and optimized on purchases.

Note: Skipping this section doesn't stop tracking. Events still reach OpenAI, but your campaigns won't show purchases, revenue or ROAS.

","Create an \"Order Created\" Conversion Event","create-your-pixel-in-chatgpt-ads-manager","

Step 1: Access Conversions

Log in to your ChatGPT Ads account.
Open ChatGPT Ads Manager: https://ads.openai.com
Go to the Conversions tab.

⇒ This is where you create and manage your pixels, Conversions API keys and conversion events.

Step 2: Create a Pixel

Create a new pixel for your website.
Enter a pixel name you'll recognize, such as your store name.
Save the pixel.

⇒ If you already have a pixel for this store, skip to Step 3.

Step 3: Get Your Pixel ID

Select your pixel in the Conversions tab.
Copy the Pixel ID.

⇒ You'll paste this Pixel ID into Ego Pixel when you add your pixel.

","Create Your Pixel in ChatGPT Ads Manager","

Before connecting ChatGPT Pixel to Ego Pixel, you need a pixel in your ChatGPT Ads account.

In this guide, you will:

Access Conversions in ChatGPT Ads Manager.
Create a new ChatGPT Pixel.
Get your Pixel ID.
Create an \"Order created\" conversion event so purchases count as conversions.

","cmutrcisq01fa2unrbb7zr8ni","tiktok-check-event-delivery","Verify that your TikTok Pixel and Events API events are delivered correctly using Live Diagnostic and TikTok Events Manager.",[2350,2351,2352,2353],"2026-10-04T11:48:53.162Z","2026-10-05T08:13:38.611Z",[],"TikTok Pixel",{"_189":305,"_227":2363,"_229":307},{"_189":2360,"_227":2361,"_229":2362},{"_189":2357,"_227":2358,"_229":2359},{"_189":2354,"_227":2355,"_229":2356},"check-events-in-tiktok-events-manager-overview","

After verifying that events are being sent successfully through Live Diagnostic and TikTok Test Events, you can use the Overview tab in TikTok Events Manager to confirm that your events are being received and processed correctly by TikTok.

Open TikTok Events Manager

Log in to your TikTok Ads Manager account.
Navigate to Assets → Events.
Select the Pixel connected to your store.
Open the Overview tab.

Verify Received Events

In the Overview tab, TikTok displays all events received by your Pixel, including whether each event came from the Browser (Pixel) or the Server (Events API).

These events may take some time to appear after being triggered.

Deduplication

When both TikTok Pixel and Events API are enabled, the app sends the same event ID with each browser and server event so TikTok can match them and count each event only once.

Note: Seeing the same event from both Browser and Server is expected. TikTok will deduplicate them automatically.

Custom Event Warning

⚠️ Pageview may appear as Custom Events in TikTok Events Manager because they are not included in TikTok's Standard Event list. This is expected behavior and does not affect tracking accuracy or event delivery.

Purchase Event Name

⚠️ On TikTok, the purchase event appears as CompletePayment instead of Purchase. This is TikTok's standard event name for completed orders.

","Check Events in TikTok Events Manager Overview","test-events-in-tiktok-events-manager","

You can also verify event delivery directly in TikTok Events Manager. To test server-side events (Events API), you need to use a Test Event Code.

Step 1: Get the Test Event Code

Log in to your TikTok Ads Manager account and open Events Manager (Assets → Events). https://ads.tiktok.com
Select the Pixel connected to your store.
Open the Test Events tab.
Copy the Test Event Code displayed under Test server events.

Step 2: Add the Test Event Code in the Pixel

Go to app and select Pixel
Paste the Test Event Code into the Test Event Code field.
Save the settings.

Step 3: Generate Test Events

Perform actions on your store such as:

View product
Add to cart
Initiate checkout
Purchase

Step 4: Verify Events

Return to TikTok Events Manager → Test Events and check whether the events appear in the dashboard.

=> If the events are displayed here, it confirms that TikTok is successfully receiving your browser and server events (Pixel + Events API).

Important: After testing, remove the Test Event Code from the app. Otherwise, TikTok will treat incoming events as test events and they will not be recorded in your main event reporting.

","Test Events in TikTok Events Manager","test-events-in-the-app-live-diagnostic","

Important: To use Live Diagnostic, your Pixel must have Events API enabled.

The Live Diagnostic feature in the app allows you to monitor events in real time when users interact with your store.

Step 1:

Open the Live Diagnostic section in the app dashboard.
Select the TikTok pixel you want to test.

Step 2: Click \"Open store\" to visit your storefront and perform actions such as:

View a product
Add a product to cart
Start checkout
Complete a purchase

Step 3: Return to the Live Diagnostic screen to see the events captured in real time.

⇒ If the events appear in the list, it means the tracking is working correctly.

","Test Events in the App (Live Diagnostic)","

After completing the setup, you should test your events to make sure they are being sent and received correctly. This ensures your pixel tracking is working properly and that TikTok can accurately record conversions.

","cmutqzphl01dv2unrwbgcjhjq","tiktok-set-up-events-api-token","Set Up Events API Token","Learn how to generate an Events API Access Token and Test Event Code from TikTok Events Manager for use with Ego Pixel.",[2372,2373,2374],"2026-10-04T11:38:55.305Z","2026-10-05T08:20:17.467Z",[],{"_189":305,"_227":2381,"_229":307},{"_189":2378,"_227":2379,"_229":2380},{"_189":2375,"_227":2376,"_229":2377},"get-a-test-event-code-for-events-api","

Step 1: Open TikTok Events Manager

Log in to your TikTok Ads Manager account, then go to Assets → Events. https://ads.tiktok.com
Select the Pixel that you want to test.

Step 2: Open the Test Events Tab

In the Pixel dashboard, click the Test Events tab.

[Screenshot: Test Events tab]

=> This section allows you to test events coming from your browser or server.

Step 3: Copy the Test Event Code

Scroll down to the Test server events section.
Copy the Test Event Code displayed there.

Note: The Test Event Code may change between Events Manager sessions. If you come back later to test again, check that the code in the app is still the current one.

Step 4: Paste the Code into the App

Go back to your app dashboard and paste the Test Event Code into the Test Event Code field.

=> Once the code is added, all events sent from the server will appear in the Test Events section in TikTok Events Manager, allowing you to verify that your Events API integration is working correctly.

Important: After completing the test, make sure to remove the Test Event Code from the app. If the code remains active, TikTok will treat all incoming events as test events, and they will not be recorded in your production event data.

","Get a Test Event Code for Events API","get-an-access-token-for-events-api","

Step 1: Open Events Manager in your TikTok Ads account

Go to TikTok Ads Manager and navigate to Assets → Events. https://ads.tiktok.com
Under Web Events, click Manage.
Choose the Pixel you want to use.
Open the Settings tab.

Step 2: Generate the access token

Scroll down to the Events API section.
Click Generate Access Token.
Copy the generated Access Token.

Important: Keep your Access Token private. Do not share it publicly.

Step 3: Add the token to the app

Return to your app's Events API configuration page.
Paste the Access Token into the Access Token field.
Click Save to complete the setup.

","Get an Access Token for Events API","

Set up Events API to enable accurate server-side event tracking with Ego Pixel.

From this guide, you will:

Generate an Access Token to allow Ego Pixel to send server-side events to TikTok.
Generate a Test Event Code to verify that Events API events are received correctly before going live.
Use both values to complete your Events API configuration in Ego Pixel.

","cmutqvl0s01dp2unrhhjckuew","add-your-tiktok-pixel","Add Your TikTok Pixel","Add a TikTok Pixel to Ego Pixel using either Manual Input or Auto Connect. Choose the method that best fits your setup.",[2391,2392,2393],"Oct 6, 2026","2026-10-04T11:35:42.892Z","2026-10-06T02:57:43.104Z",[],{"_189":305,"_227":2400,"_229":307},{"_189":2397,"_227":2398,"_229":2399},{"_189":2394,"_227":2395,"_229":2396},"method-2-auto-connect-pixel-recommended","

Step 1: Open the Pixel Manager screen

Open the app in your Shopify Admin.
Go to TikTok Pixel.
Click Create New Pixel.

➡ You will see the Pixel setup screen.

Step 2: Choose Auto Connect Pixel

At the top of the setup screen:

Select Auto Connect Pixel (recommended option)

This method allows you to connect your TikTok Pixel without manual input.

Step 3: Log in to TikTok account

Click Connect TikTok.

A TikTok login popup will appear.
Log in to your TikTok for Business account.

➡ Make sure you use an account with access to your TikTok Ads Manager / Business Center.

Step 4: Grant permissions

Click Continue
Approve all required permissions

➡ This allows Ego to:

Access your Pixel
Send events via Events API
Sync tracking data

Step 5: Select your Pixel

After logging in:

Choose your Business Center
Select your Ad Account
Select your TikTok Pixel

➡ Only Pixels you have permission for will be displayed.

Step 6: Choose Tracking Scope

In the Tracking Scope section, choose where the pixel will track events.

Entire store: Track events across your entire store.
Specific target: Track events only for selected items. If you choose this option, you can configure:
Specific Products – select products to track
Collection page – select specific collections
Specific tags – track products with selected tags

Step 7: Enable Events API (Optional)

In the Events API section: Turn on Events API (server-side tracking, solution for iOS 14.5)

=> This enables server-side tracking, which improves event accuracy and helps avoid browser restrictions or ad blockers.

Set up Events API token in your Ego Pixel

Step 8: Configure Event Settings

In the Event settings section, select the events you want to send to TikTok.

Available events include:

PageView
ViewContent
AddToCart
InitiateCheckout
AddPaymentInfo
Purchase
Search

=> Only enabled events will be sent to TikTok.

Step 9: Select Customer Information Parameters

In Customer information parameters, choose the customer data to include with events for better matching in TikTok.

Available parameters include:

Email
Phone
External ID

=> Providing more parameters can improve event matching quality.

Step 10: Save the Pixel

After finishing the configuration, Click Save in the top-right corner.

⇒ The pixel will start tracking events based on your settings.

","Method 2: Auto Connect Pixel (Recommended)","method-1-manual-input-pixel","

Step 1: Open the Create Pixel screen

Open the app in your Shopify Admin.
Go to TikTok Pixel.
Click Create New Pixel.

=> You will see the Create New Pixel configuration screen.

Step 2: Choose Manual Setup

At the top of the setup screen ⇒ Select Manual Setup

Step 3: Enter Pixel Information

At the top of the page, enter the required pixel details.

Pixel name: Enter a name to identify this pixel in your store.
Pixel ID: Paste your TikTok Pixel ID from TikTok Events Manager.

How to get your Pixel ID?

Go to TikTok Events Manager (TikTok Ads Manager → Assets → Events). https://ads.tiktok.com
Under Web Events, click Manage and select the Pixel you want to use.
In the Overview tab, find the Pixel ID displayed at the top of the page (it is also available in the Settings tab).
Copy the Pixel ID.
Return to the app and paste the Pixel ID into the \"Pixel ID\" field.

Step 4: Choose Tracking Scope

In the Tracking Scope section, choose where the pixel will track events.

Entire store: Track events across your entire store.
Specific target: Track events only for selected items. If you choose this option, you can configure:
Specific Products – select products to track
Collection page – select specific collections
Specific tags – track products with selected tags

Step 5: Enable Events API (Optional)

In the Events API section: Turn on Events API (server-side tracking, solution for iOS 14.5)

=> This enables server-side tracking, which improves event accuracy and helps avoid browser restrictions or ad blockers.

Set up Events API token in your Ego Pixel

Step 6: Configure Event Settings

In the Event settings section, select the events you want to send to TikTok.

Available events include:

PageView
ViewContent
AddToCart
InitiateCheckout
AddPaymentInfo
Purchase
Search

=> Only enabled events will be sent to TikTok.

Note: On TikTok, the purchase event is recorded as CompletePayment. This is the event TikTok uses to optimize your purchase campaigns.

Step 7: Select Customer Information Parameters

In Customer information parameters, choose the customer data to include with events for better matching in TikTok.

Available parameters include:

Email
Phone
External ID

=> Providing more parameters can improve event matching quality. Customer data is hashed before being sent to TikTok.

Step 8: Save the Pixel

After finishing the configuration, Click Save in the top-right corner.

⇒ The pixel will start tracking events based on your settings.

","Method 1: Manual Input Pixel","

Add your TikTok Pixel to start tracking events with Ego Pixel.

From this guide, you will:

Add a Pixel using Manual Input or Auto Connect (recommended).
Configure tracking and event settings.
Save your Pixel and start tracking your storefront.

","cmutqczqy01d32unrauqyjrip","prepare-tiktok-pixel","Prepare Pixel","Learn how to create a TikTok Pixel in TikTok Events Manager. Once created, you'll use the Pixel ID to connect it with Ego TikTok Pixel and start tracking website events.",[2409,2410],"2026-10-04T11:21:15.514Z","2026-10-05T08:42:22.183Z",[],{"_189":305,"_227":2414,"_229":307},{"_189":2411,"_227":2412,"_229":2413},"create-your-tiktok-pixel","

Step 1: Access TikTok Events Manager

Log in to your TikTok for Business account.
Open TikTok Ads Manager.
Go to Tools → Events.
Click Connect data source.

TikTok's current setup flow uses Events Manager to create and manage website data connections.

Step 2: Choose Web as Your Data Source

Select Web.
Click Next.

This tells TikTok that you want to track activity on your website.

Step 3: Enter Your Website

Enter your store's website URL.
Click Next.

Step 4: Choose Your Setup Method

Select Manual Setup.

Then select the TikTok Pixel setup option provided by TikTok.

Step 5: Create Your Pixel

Enter a Pixel Name.
Click Create.

TikTok will create the Pixel and assign a unique Pixel ID.

Step 6: Get Your Pixel ID

After creating the Pixel:

Open the Pixel you just created.
Go to the Pixel details/settings.
Copy the Pixel ID.

You will use this ID when connecting the Pixel to Ego TikTok Pixel.

","Create Your TikTok Pixel","

Before connecting a TikTok Pixel to Ego Pixel, you need to create a TikTok Pixel in TikTok Events Manager.

In this guide, you will:

Access TikTok Events Manager.
Create a new TikTok Pixel.
Get your Pixel ID.
Confirm that your Pixel is ready for connection.

","fbpx-art-meta-reporting-delays","meta-reporting-delays","About Meta Reporting Delays","Learn why Meta reports may not update immediately after setup and how to verify your events in real time.",[2423,2424,2425],"2026-10-06T01:57:45.351Z",[],"Facebook Pixel",{"_189":305,"_227":2432,"_229":307},{"_189":2429,"_227":2430,"_229":2431},{"_189":2426,"_227":2427,"_229":2428},"how-to-confirm-your-events-are-working-right-now","

Don't wait for the Overview to update. Use the Test Events tab in Meta Events Manager instead — it shows events in real time as they arrive, with no delay.

Check Event Delivery

","How to confirm your events are working right now?","why-does-this-happen","

Meta doesn't display events the moment they're received. Instead, they process incoming data in batches before surfacing it in the Overview tab. This is standard behavior across all Meta integrations — the delay is fixed at the platform level and typically ranges from 30 minutes to a few hours.

The screenshot below shows what you might see right after setup — the Overview tab shows no activity even though events are already being received by Meta.

$\"\"$

","Why does this happen?","

Once your pixels are set up, events will start being sent to Meta, but they may take some time to appear in Meta dashboards and reports.

Stats may take time to appear
After events are sent to Meta, it can take at least 30 minutes for statistics to show up in the dashboard. This is normal Meta behavior — not an issue with your integration.

","fbpx-art-check-event-delivery","check-event-delivery","Verify that your Meta Pixel and Conversions API events are delivered correctly using Live Diagnostic and Meta Events Manager.",[2439,2440,2441,2442,2443],"2026-10-06T01:57:19.418Z",[],{"_189":305,"_227":2454,"_229":307},{"_189":2360,"_227":2453,"_229":2362},{"_189":2450,"_227":2451,"_229":2452},{"_189":2447,"_227":2448,"_229":2449},{"_189":2444,"_227":2445,"_229":2446},"review-and-confirm-custom-events","

Custom Event Warning

⚠️ ViewCart and ViewCollection may appear as Custom Events in Meta Events Manager because they are not included in Meta's Standard Event list. This is expected behavior and does not affect tracking accuracy or event delivery.

Confirm Custom Events

In some cases, Meta may display a warning asking you to review or confirm these events.

To confirm a custom event:

Locate the event in the Overview or Diagnostics section.
Click Review or Confirm Event.
Follow Meta's instructions to mark the event as expected.

* Note: Confirming an event only removes the warning displayed by Meta. The event is already being tracked correctly before and after confirmation.

","Review and Confirm Custom Events","check-events-in-meta-events-manager-overview","

After verifying that events are being sent successfully through Live Diagnostics and Meta Test Events, you can use the Overview tab in Meta Events Manager to confirm that your events are being received and processed correctly by Meta.

Step 1: Open Meta Events Manager

Log in to your Meta Business account.
Navigate to Events Manager.
Select the Pixel connected to your store.
Open the Overview tab.

Step 2: Verify Received Events

In the Overview tab, Meta displays all events received by your Pixel.

These events may take some time to appear after being triggered.

$\"\"$

","Check Events in Meta Events Manager Overview","test-events-in-meta-events-manager","

You can also verify event delivery directly in Meta Events Manager. To test server-side events (Conversions API), you need to use a Test Event Code.

Step 1: Get the Test Event Code

Log in to your Meta Business account and open Events Manager. https://business.facebook.com/events_manager2
Select the Pixel (Dataset) connected to your store.
Open the Test Events tab.
Copy the Test Event Code displayed on the page.

$\"\"$

Step 2: Add the Test Event Code in the Pixel

Go to app and select Pixel
Paste the Test Event Code into the Test Event Code field.
Save the settings.

$\"\"$

Step 3: Generate Test Events

Perform actions on your store such as:

View product
Add to cart
Initiate checkout
Purchase

Step 4: Verify Events

Return to Meta Events Manager → Test Events and check whether the events appear in the dashboard.

$\"\"$

=> If the events are displayed here, it confirms that Meta is successfully receiving your browser and server events (Pixel + CAPI).

* Important: After testing, remove the Test Event Code from the app. Otherwise, Meta will treat incoming events as test events and they will not be recorded in your main event reporting.

","Test Events in Meta Events Manager","

* Important: To use Live Diagnostic, your Pixel must have Conversions API (CAPI) enabled.

The Live Diagnostic feature in the app allows you to monitor events in real time when users interact with your store.

Step 1: Open the Live Diagnostic section in the app dashboard and Select the pixel you want to test.

$\"\"$

Step 2: Click \"Open store\" to visit your storefront and perform actions such as:

View a product
Add a product to cart
Start checkout
Complete a purchase

$\"\"$

Step 3: Return to the Live Diagnostic screen to see the events captured in real time.

$\"\"$

⇒ If the events appear in the list, it means the tracking is working correctly.

","

After completing the pixel setup, verify that your events are being sent and received correctly.

From this guide, you will:

Test events using Live Diagnostic in Ego Pixel.
Verify browser and server events in Meta Events Manager.
Confirm that your events are processed correctly in the Overview tab.
Review and confirm custom events, if required.

","fbpx-art-set-up-capi-token","set-up-capi-token","Set Up Conversions API (CAPI) Token","Learn how to generate a Conversions API Access Token and Test Event Code from Meta Events Manager for use with Ego Pixel.",[2462,2463,2464],"2026-10-06T01:56:59.191Z",[],{"_189":305,"_227":2471,"_229":307},{"_189":2468,"_227":2469,"_229":2470},{"_189":2465,"_227":2466,"_229":2467},"get-an-test-event-code-for-conversions-api","

Step 1: Open Meta Events Manager

Log in to your Meta Business account, then go to Events Manager. https://business.facebook.com/events_manager2
Select the Pixel (Dataset) that you want to test.

$\"\"$

Step 2: Open the Test Events Tab

In the Pixel dashboard, click the Test events tab.

$\"\"$

=> This section allows you to test events coming from your browser or server.

Step 3: Copy the Test Event Code

Scroll down to the Confirm your server’s events are set up correctly
Click Copy next to the Test Event Code.

$\"\"$

Step 4: Paste the Code into the App

Go back to your app dashboard and paste the Test Event Code into the Test Event Code field.

$\"\"$

=> Once the code is added, all events sent from the server will appear in the Test Events section in Meta Events Manager, allowing you to verify that your Conversions API integration is working correctly.

* Important: After completing the test, make sure to remove the Test Event Code from the app. If the code remains active, Meta will treat all incoming events as test events, and they will not be recorded in your production event data.

","Get an Test Event Code for Conversions API","get-an-access-token-for-conversions-api","

Step 1: Open Event Manager in your Meta Business account

Go to Meta Business Manager and Navigate to Event Manager. https://business.facebook.com/events_manager2
Select Datasets in the left menu.
Choose the dataset (Pixel) you want to use.
Open the Settings tab.

$\"\"$

Step 2: Generate the access token

Scroll down to the Set up direct integration section.
Click Generate access token.
Copy the generated Access Token.

$\"\"$

Step 3: Add the token to the app

Return to your app’s CAPI configuration page.
Paste the Access Token into the Access Token field.
Click Save to complete the setup.

$\"\"$

","Get an Access Token for Conversions API","

Set up Conversions API (CAPI) to enable accurate server-side event tracking with Ego Pixel.

From this guide, you will:

Generate an Access Token to allow Ego Pixel to send server-side events to Meta.
Generate a Test Event Code to verify that CAPI events are received correctly before going live.
Use both values to complete your Conversions API configuration in Ego Pixel.

","fbpx-art-add-your-pixel","add-your-pixel","Add Your Pixel","Add a Meta Pixel to Ego Pixel using either Manual Input or Auto Connect. Choose the method that best fits your setup.",[2479,2480,2481],"2026-10-06T02:08:30.921Z",[],{"_189":305,"_227":2484,"_229":307},{"_189":2397,"_227":2483,"_229":2399},{"_189":2394,"_227":2482,"_229":2396},"

Step 1: Open the Pixel Manager screen

Open the app in your Shopify Admin.
Go to Facebook Pixel.
Click Create New Pixel.

$\"\"$

➡ You will see the Pixel setup screen.

$\"\"$

Step 2: Choose Auto Connect Pixel

At the top of the setup screen:

Select Auto Connect Pixel (recommended option)

This method allows you to connect your Meta Pixel without manual input.

$\"\"$

Step 3: Log in to Meta account

Click Connect Facebook.

$\"\"$

A Meta login popup will appear.
Log in to your Meta (Facebook) account.

➡ Make sure you use an account with access to your Business Manager.

Step 4: Grant permissions

Click Continue
Approve all required permissions

➡ This allows Ego to:

Access your Pixel
Send events via Conversions API
Sync tracking data

$\"\"$

Step 5: Select your Pixel

After logging in:

Choose your Business Account
Select your Ad Account
Select your Meta Pixel (Dataset)

➡ Only Pixels you have permission for will be displayed.

$\"\"$

Step 6: Choose Tracking Scope

In the Tracking Scope section, choose where the pixel will track events.

Entire store: Track events across your entire store.

Specific target: Track events only for selected items. If you choose this option, you can configure:

- Specific Products – select products to track

- Collection page – select specific collections

- Specific tags – track products with selected tags

$\"\"$

Step 7: Enable Conversion API (Optional)

In the Conversion API section: Turn on Conversions API (solution for iOS 14.5)

=> This enables server-side tracking, which improves event accuracy and helps avoid browser restrictions or ad blockers.

Set up Conversions API (CAPI) token in your Ego Pixel

Step 8: Configure Event Settings

In the Event settings section, select the events you want to send to Meta.

Available events include:

PageView
ViewContent
AddToCart
ViewCart
InitiateCheckout
AddPaymentInfo
Purchase
Search
ViewCollection

=> Only enabled events will be sent to Meta.

Step 9: Select Customer Information Parameters

In Customer information parameters, choose the customer data to include with events for better matching in Meta.

Available parameters include:

First Name
Last Name
Email
Phone
City
State
Zip Code
Country
External ID

=> Providing more parameters can improve event matching quality.

Step 10: Save the Pixel

After finishing the configuration, Click Save in the top-right corner.

⇒ The pixel will start tracking events based on your settings.

","

Step 1: Open the Create Pixel screen

Open the app in your Shopify Admin.
Go to Facebook Pixel.
Click Create New Pixel.

$\"\"$

=> You will see the Create New Pixel configuration screen.

$\"\"$

Step 2: Choose Manual Setup

At the top of the setup screen ⇒ Select Manual Setup

$\"\"$

Step 3: Enter Pixel Information

At the top of the page, enter the required pixel details.

Pixel name: Enter a name to identify this pixel in your store.
Pixel ID: Paste your Facebook Pixel ID from Meta Events Manager.

$\"\"$

How to get your Pixel ID?

Go to Meta Events Manager https://business.facebook.com/events_manager
Select the Pixel you want to use.
In the Overview tab, find the Pixel ID displayed at the top of the page.
Copy the Pixel ID.
Return to the app and paste the Pixel ID into the “Pixel ID” field.

$\"\"$

Step 4: Choose Tracking Scope

In the Tracking Scope section, choose where the pixel will track events.

Entire store: Track events across your entire store.

Specific target: Track events only for selected items. If you choose this option, you can configure:

- Specific Products – select products to track

- Collection page – select specific collections

- Specific tags – track products with selected tags

$\"\"$

Step 5: Enable Conversion API (Optional)

In the Conversion API section: Turn on Conversions API (solution for iOS 14.5)

$\"\"$

=> This enables server-side tracking, which improves event accuracy and helps avoid browser restrictions or ad blockers.

Set up Conversions API (CAPI) token in your Ego Pixel

Step 6: Configure Event Settings

In the Event settings section, select the events you want to send to Meta.

Available events include:

PageView
ViewContent
AddToCart
ViewCart
InitiateCheckout
AddPaymentInfo
Purchase
Search
ViewCollection

=> Only enabled events will be sent to Meta.

Step 7: Select Customer Information Parameters

In Customer information parameters, choose the customer data to include with events for better matching in Meta.

Available parameters include:

First Name
Last Name
Email
Phone
City
State
Zip Code
Country
External ID

=> Providing more parameters can improve event matching quality.

Step 8: Save the Pixel

After finishing the configuration, Click Save in the top-right corner.

⇒ The pixel will start tracking events based on your settings.

","

Add your Meta Pixel to start tracking events with Ego Pixel.

From this guide, you will:

Add a Pixel using Manual Input or Auto Connect (recommended).
Configure tracking and event settings.
Save your Pixel and start tracking your storefront.

","fbpx-art-enable-theme-extension","enable-theme-extension","Enable Ego Pixel Theme Extension","Enable the Ego Pixel app embed to activate pixel tracking and other app features on your Shopify storefront.",[2492,2493,2494],"2026-10-06T01:56:30.204Z",[],{"_189":305,"_227":2501,"_229":307},{"_189":2498,"_227":2499,"_229":2500},{"_189":2495,"_227":2496,"_229":2497},"method-2-enable-from-the-shopify-theme-editor","

Step 1: Open Online Store

From the left sidebar in Shopify Admin, navigate to: Online Store → Themes

$\"\"$

Step 2: Edit the Current Theme

In the Current theme section, click Edit theme.

$\"\"$

Step 3: Open App EmbedsInside the Theme Editor:

Click the App embeds icon in the left sidebar.
Locate the embed related to your app.
Turn the toggle ON to enable it.

$\"\"$

Step 4: Save Changes

Click Save in the top-right corner to apply the changes.

$\"\"$

=> The app embed is activated and the app’s functionality will run on the storefront.

","Method 2: Enable from the Shopify Theme Editor","method-1-enable-from-the-ego-pixel-dashboard","

Step 1: Open the Theme Editor

From the app Dashboard, click Enable app embed in the notification banner.

=> You will be redirected to the Shopify Theme Editor.

$\"\"$

Step 2: Enable the App Embed

In the Theme Editor:

Click App embeds in the left sidebar.
Locate Ego Facebook Pixel Meta Feed
Toggle the switch ON to enable it.

$\"\"$

Step 3: Save the Settings

Click Save in the top-right corner to apply the changes.

$\"\"$

","Method 1: Enable from the Ego Pixel Dashboard","

Enable the Ego Pixel theme extension to activate the app on your Shopify storefront.

From this guide, you will:

Enable the app embed using the Ego Pixel dashboard.
Enable the app embed from the Shopify Theme Editor.

","fbpx-art-disable-other-pixels","disable-other-pixels","Disable Other Pixels","Disable other Meta Pixel integrations to prevent duplicate events and ensure accurate tracking in Ego Pixel.",[2509,2510,2511],"2026-10-06T01:56:11.607Z",[],{"_189":305,"_227":2518,"_229":307},{"_189":2515,"_227":2516,"_229":2517},{"_189":2512,"_227":2513,"_229":2514},"disable-meta-pixel-from-other-shopify-apps","

To avoid duplicate tracking events, make sure to disable or uninstall other apps that also track Meta/Facebook Pixel or Conversion API.

If these apps remain active, they may send duplicate events to Meta, which can affect your tracking accuracy.

If you need assistance identifying or disabling other tracking apps, please contact our support team for help.

$\"\"$

","Disable Meta Pixel from Other Shopify Apps","disable-shopify-s-default-meta-pixel","

Shopify provides a built-in Facebook & Instagram sales channel that may automatically send events to Meta. If this is enabled, it can duplicate the events sent by our app.

Step 1: Go to Shopify Admin and Click Facebook & Instagram in the left menu.

$\"\"$

Step 2: Open the Settings tab.

$\"\"$

Step 3: Find the Share Data / Pixel tracking section.

$\"\"$

Step 4: Click Change.

$\"\"$

Step 5: Set the tracking option to Disabled or remove the connected pixel.

$\"\"$

=> This ensures Shopify will stop sending events through its built-in integration.

","Disable Shopify’s Default Meta Pixel","

If multiple integrations send events to the same Meta Pixel, duplicate events may occur and affect tracking accuracy.

From this guide, you will:

Disable Shopify's default Meta Pixel integration.
Disable Meta Pixel tracking from other Shopify apps.
Prevent duplicate events and improve tracking accuracy.

","fbpx-art-prepare-pixel","prepare-pixel","Learn how to create a Meta Pixel (Dataset) in Meta Events Manager. Once created, you'll use the Pixel ID to connect it with Ego Pixel and start tracking website events.",[2525,2526],"2026-10-06T01:55:59.508Z",[],{"_189":305,"_227":2530,"_229":307},{"_189":2527,"_227":2528,"_229":2529},"create-your-pixel-in-meta-events-manager","

Step 1: Access Events Manager

Log in to your Meta Business Manager account.
Open Events Manager from the main menu. https://business.facebook.com/events_manager
Click Connect Data.

$\"\"$

⇒ This is where you create and manage your tracking assets, including Pixel (Dataset).

Step 2: Choose Web as Your Data Source

Select Web as the data source type.
Click Next.

$\"\"$

⇒ This tells Meta that you want to track website activity using a Pixel.

Step 3: Configure Your Pixel

Enter a Pixel Name (we recommend using your store or brand name).
(Optional) Enter your website URL.
Click Create.

$\"\"$

⇒ Meta will now generate your new Pixel automatically.

Step 4: Confirm Pixel Creation

After setup:

Your new Pixel will appear inside Events Manager
It will be assigned a unique Pixel ID

$\"\"$

","Create Your Pixel in Meta Events Manager","

Before connecting a Pixel to Ego Pixel, you need to create a Meta Pixel (Dataset) in Meta Events Manager.

In this guide, you will:

Access Meta Events Manager.
Create a new Meta Pixel (Dataset).
Get your Pixel ID.
Confirm that your Pixel is ready for connection.

","fbpx-art-meta-pixel-and-capi","meta-pixel-and-capi","Meta (Facebook) Pixel & CAPI","Track customer events accurately, sync product data, and optimize your Meta marketing with Ego Facebook Pixel Meta Feed.",[2538,2539,2540,2541,2542],"2026-10-14T09:53:11.012Z",[],{"_189":2555,"_227":2556,"_229":2557},{"_189":2552,"_227":2553,"_229":2554},{"_189":2549,"_227":2550,"_229":2551},{"_189":2546,"_227":2547,"_229":2548},{"_189":2543,"_227":2544,"_229":2545},"conclusion","

Meta Pixel is the simplest way to start tracking and improving Meta ads.
CAPI makes tracking more reliable, especially when browsers block data.
(+) ChatGPT Pixel works the same way for ChatGPT ads. Add the Conversions API key so checkouts and purchases are tracked.

⇒ For the best results, a Pixel + CAPI setup usually gives the most accurate reporting and stronger ad optimization.

","Conclusion","chatgpt-pixel-conversions-api","

What it is?

ChatGPT Pixel is OpenAI’s tracking for ads shown in ChatGPT. It works the same way as Meta Pixel + CAPI: the pixel records what visitors do in their browser, and the Conversions API sends the same actions to OpenAI from the server.

What it can do for your site?

Track key actions: Page View, View Content, Add to Cart, Checkout, Purchase
Show which ChatGPT ads lead to sales (revenue and ROAS in ChatGPT Ads Manager)
Help ChatGPT ads learn who is likely to buy

How it works with Ego Pixel

Page View, View Content and Add to Cart are sent from both the browser and the server, with the same event ID, so OpenAI counts each action once.
Checkout and Purchase are sent from the server only, so they need a Conversions API key.

⇒ Learn how OpenAI matches browser and server events: Deduplicate browser and server events

How it differs from Meta

Topic	Meta	ChatGPT
Where you set it up	Meta Events Manager	ChatGPT Ads Manager
Server tracking	CAPI (Access Token)	Conversions API (Conversions API key)
Testing	Test Event Code	Test mode checkbox in Ego Pixel
Event names	PageView, AddToCart, Purchase…	page_viewed, items_added, order_created…

Using OpenAI’s own ChatGPT Ads app? Don’t use it with the same Pixel ID as Ego Pixel, or every order is counted twice.

Ready to start? See Prepare ChatGPT Pixel.

","ChatGPT Pixel & Conversions API","comparison","

Topic	Meta Pixel	CAPI
Where it runs	In the visitor’s browser	On your server
Reliability	Medium (can be blocked)	Higher (less affected by blocking)
Setup difficulty	Easier	Usually harder (but apps can make it easy)
Best for	Quick tracking + basic ads optimization	More complete conversion tracking + better data quality
Common risk	Missing events	Double-counting if not matched correctly

Best practice for most stores: use both together, set up properly so Meta can match the same event and count it once.

","Comparison","capi-server-tracking","

What it is?

A way to send the same website actions to Meta from your server (not only from the visitor’s browser).

What it can do for your site?

Make your ad reporting more complete
Improve ad optimization by sending more reliable purchase signals
Recover tracking signals that the browser may block

Pros:

More stable when browsers block tracking
Often captures more purchases and checkout events
Helps reduce “missing conversions” in reports

Cons:

Setup is usually more complex than Pixel (your app can simplify this)
Needs careful configuration to avoid “double counting” (Pixel + CAPI must be matched correctly)

","CAPI (Server tracking)","meta-pixel-browser-tracking","

What it is?

A small piece of code added to your website that helps you understand what visitors do (for example: view a product, add to cart, purchase).

What it can do for your site?

Track key actions: Page View, View Content, Add to Cart, Checkout, Purchase
Help Meta (Facebook/Instagram) ads learn who is likely to buy
Improve ad reporting (which ads lead to sales)

Pros:

Easy and fast to set up
Great for basic tracking and ad optimization
Works well for most stores without extra systems

Cons:

Can miss some data when browsers block tracking (ad blockers, privacy settings, iOS limits)
Depends on the visitor’s device and browser conditions

","Meta Pixel (Browser tracking)","fbpx-art-welcome","welcome","Welcome to Ego Facebook Pixel","Learn how to set up and use Ego Facebook Pixel Meta Feed to improve your Meta tracking and marketing performance.",[2565,2566],"2026-08-05T09:00:06.485Z",[],{"_189":2570,"_227":2571,"_229":2572},{"_189":2567,"_227":2568,"_229":2569},"ego-facebook-pixel-meta-feed-key-capabilities","

Track unlimited Meta Pixels to monitor customer interactions across your store

Server-side tracking with Conversion API to improve event accuracy and bypass browser limitations

Real-time event monitoring to verify that your tracking setup is working correctly

Seamless Meta Catalog integration to keep your product feed synchronized automatically

Improve ad performance with reliable product data for Dynamic Ads and retargeting

Detailed analytics and event insights to support smarter marketing decisions

Privacy-friendly tracking designed to support modern data compliance standards

","Ego Facebook Pixel Meta Feed – Key Capabilities","why-ego-facebook-pixel-meta-feed","

Accurate tracking is essential to understand your customers and maximize the performance of your advertising campaigns.

Ego Facebook Pixel Meta Feed helps you track and optimize your store performance across Meta platforms with reliable event tracking and seamless catalog integration. By combining Facebook Pixel and Conversion API, the app ensures accurate event tracking even with iOS 14+ restrictions and ad blockers.

Gain better insights into customer behavior, improve attribution accuracy, and power your Meta ads with high-quality data. With a simple setup and no coding required, you can start tracking and optimizing your campaigns in just minutes.

","Why Ego Facebook Pixel Meta Feed?","c2f9e5a2ed05b4294bc193b4f","Pricing, theme compatibility, variants, multiple bars, and performance.",[2582,2583,2584,2585,2586,2587],"2026-07-02T04:44:24.659Z",[2580,2581],"sticky-atc","Ego Sticky Add to Cart","bar-not-showing","display-behavior-and-click-actions",{"_189":2603,"_227":2604,"_229":2605},{"_189":2600,"_227":2601,"_229":2602},{"_189":2597,"_227":2598,"_229":2599},{"_189":2594,"_227":2595,"_229":2596},{"_189":2591,"_227":2592,"_229":2593},{"_189":2588,"_227":2589,"_229":2590},"faq-speed","

No measurable impact — the bar is a single lightweight script loaded through Shopify's app-embed system, and it only runs on pages where the bar can appear.

","Will it slow down my store?","faq-mobile","

Yes — visibility, trigger, position, sizing, and click action are all configured per device, and mobile has its own compact Minimal style. A common setup: desktop shows the full bar on scroll-past-button; mobile shows the Minimal bar always.

","Can the bar behave differently on mobile?","faq-multiple-bars","

Yes — create as many as you like and keep unused ones as Drafts. Use display rules to point different bars at different products or collections, and compare their clicks and revenue in the bar list. See Managing Your Bars for the A/B workflow.

","Can I create multiple bars?","faq-variants","

Enable the variant selector element and shoppers pick size/color directly in the bar. With the selector hidden, the bar adds whatever variant is currently selected on the page. If the chosen variant is out of stock, the button switches to your out-of-stock state (own text and colors); whether the bar appears at all on sold-out variants is a separate toggle.

","How does the bar handle products with variants?","faq-theme","

The bar is a standard theme app embed and works with Online Store 2.0 themes without code changes. It inherits your theme font by default, and cart-drawer behavior follows your theme. If anything looks off on your specific theme, our team adjusts it for free — just open the chat.

","Does it work with my theme?","faq-free","

Yes — Ego Sticky Add to Cart is completely free to install, including setup help, widget customization, and migration support from our team via the in-app chat.

","Is the app free?","cbf6173a16c08959a7ad3817e","Bar Not Showing on Storefront","Symptom-based checklist — from the most common cause down.",[2613,2614,2615,2616,2617],[2611,2612],"installing-sticky-add-to-cart","product-display-rules",{"_189":2630,"_227":2631,"_229":2632},{"_189":2627,"_227":2628,"_229":2629},{"_189":2624,"_227":2625,"_229":2626},{"_189":2621,"_227":2622,"_229":2623},{"_189":2618,"_227":2619,"_229":2620},"still-stuck","

Test in an incognito window to rule out caching, and try a second browser. If the bar still doesn't appear, contact us via Chat with us (24/7) with your store URL and a product link — our team will check your theme and adjust the widget to fit it, free of charge.

","Still stuck?","check-looks","

Common fixes:

Bar covered by a cookie banner or chat bubble → raise the Offset (up to 100 px desktop / 80 px mobile) to lift the bar clear.
Colors or fonts clash → set Font to Use current theme font and copy hex colors from your theme settings.
Bar feels cramped on mobile → switch the mobile style to Minimal.

","Bar shows but looks off → overlaps or styling clashes","check-rules-device","

Open the bar and verify:

Display rules — the product you're viewing isn't excluded, or is included in the \"specific\" selection. A product recently removed from an included collection silently drops out.
Device toggles — \"Show on desktop devices\" / \"Show on mobile devices\" are on for the device you're testing.
Trigger — with a scroll-based \"When to show\", the bar only appears after you start scrolling or pass the theme's Add to cart button. Scroll before concluding it's missing.

","Shows on some products/devices but not others → check rules and device settings","check-bar-status","

In Bar Editor, confirm your bar's status is Active. Draft bars are fully saved but never render. Also confirm you actually saved after the last edit — unsaved changes show in the save bar.

","Embed is active but still nothing → check the bar status","check-embed","

The Dashboard's status banner must read Active. If it's Inactive:

Click Active app embed — the Theme Editor opens.
Toggle the Sticky Cart embed on.
Click Save.

This is by far the most common cause — and it must be re-enabled whenever you publish a new theme, since the embed setting is per-theme.

","Bar shows nowhere → check the app embed","c438da54b785ba04342fe6190","Understanding Your Analytics","The four metrics, per-bar comparison, and how attribution works.",[2641,2642,2643],[2639,2640],"Managing & Analytics","managing-your-bars","create-your-first-bar",{"_189":2650,"_227":2651,"_229":2652},{"_189":2647,"_227":2648,"_229":2649},{"_189":2644,"_227":2645,"_229":2646},"how-attribution-works","

When a shopper adds a product through the sticky bar, the item is tagged with the bar that produced it. Orders containing tagged items then count toward that bar's Add to Cart and Revenue. Timing: impressions and clicks appear near-instantly; order-based figures appear shortly after the order is placed.

Revenue here is an estimate for comparing bars against each other — it doesn't account for refunds or cancellations. Always use Shopify's own reports for accounting.

","How revenue attribution works","per-bar-metrics","

The bar list shows Clicks and Revenue for each bar individually — the basis for the duplicate-and-compare workflow described in Managing Your Bars.

","Per-bar performance","dashboard-metrics","

The Dashboard shows four store-wide totals:

Metric	Meaning
Impression	How many times the sticky bar was shown to shoppers.
Clicks	Total clicks on the Sticky Add to Cart button.
Add to Cart	Successful add-to-cart actions made via the bar.
Revenue	Estimated revenue from orders that include items added via the bar.

Reading the funnel: impressions → clicks → add-to-carts. Lots of impressions but few clicks? The bar may be visually lost — try a stronger button color or the \"scrolls past the Add to cart button\" trigger so it appears at the decisive moment.

","Dashboard metrics","cb971a6329bc6bc432e9300d4","Managing Your Bars","The bar list, statuses, and a clean A/B-testing workflow with duplicates.",[2658,2659],[2640,217],{"_189":2663,"_227":2664,"_229":2665},{"_189":2660,"_227":2661,"_229":2662},"bar-actions","

Per bar: Edit, Duplicate, Delete (permanent — the app asks: \"Are you sure you want to delete this bar? This action cannot be undone.\"), and an inline status switch between Active and Draft.

A clean A/B workflow:

Duplicate your live bar.
Change exactly one thing on the copy (button color, trigger, click action).
Point the two bars at different collections via display rules — or run them in alternating weeks.
Compare Clicks and Revenue in the list and keep the winner.

Drafts are fully saved but never shown to shoppers — park experiments and seasonal variants there.

","Bar actions","bar-list","

The Bar Editor page lists all your bars with name, status, what they apply to, clicks, revenue, and activation date. Finding things:

Filter with the All / Active / Draft tabs.
Search by name.
Sort by name, status, or activation date.

","The bar list","c39860bb47c9f4d5d4e680d44","Product & Page Display Rules","Include, exclude, or feature one product on the homepage — with validation notes.",[2672,2673],[2581,2639],"Customization",{"_189":2677,"_227":2678,"_229":2679},{"_189":2674,"_227":2675,"_229":2676},"homepage","

Enable Show on homepage to display the bar on your home page too:

Toggle the option on.
Use the product picker (search or Browse) to choose the one product the homepage bar sells — your bestseller or the current promotion.

Visitors can then add that product to the cart straight from the homepage, without opening a product page. Rotate the featured product when your promotion changes.

","Featuring a product on the homepage","product-rules","

In Advanced display rules, pick one targeting mode:

Mode	Behavior	Example use
All Products (default)	Bar shows on every product page.	Most stores.
Specific product	Only on products you pick (multi-select).	Only your bestsellers get the bar.
Specific collections	Only on products in selected collections.	Only the \"Sale\" collection.
Exclude specific product	Everywhere except the picked products.	Hide on pre-order items.
Exclude specific collections	Everywhere except selected collections.	Hide on gift cards / services.

When a \"specific\" mode is selected, at least one product or collection must be chosen — the editor blocks saving with a warning (\"Action required: Changes needed to save bar\") until you do. Reset filters clears everything back to All Products.

","Product and collection rules","cb3fe33a0644fd5bcaab08bdb","design-and-text","Design & Text Content","Fonts, every color control, and the three customizable texts with their limits.",[2687,2688,2689],[2686,2640],"bar-layouts-and-elements",{"_189":2696,"_227":2697,"_229":2698},{"_189":2693,"_227":2694,"_229":2695},{"_189":2690,"_227":2691,"_229":2692},"text-content","

Three customizable texts, each with a length limit:

Text	Default	Limit
Add to Cart button	\"ADD TO CART\"	20 characters
Out of stock button	\"Out of stock\"	20 characters
Success message	\"Successfully added to cart!\"	50 characters

Selling in another language? Write the texts in your storefront's language — they render exactly as entered. Keep button text short and imperative; \"ADD TO CART\" outperforms clever copy.

","Text content","colors","

Every part of the bar has explicit color controls:

Button — text and background in three states: default, hover, and out of stock. Use your theme's primary CTA color for default; make out-of-stock visibly muted (e.g. gray background).
Card — bar background, product title, price, compare-at price, and saving-amount colors. The saving amount defaults to green — keep a color that reads as \"good news\".
Variant & quantity selectors — text, background, and border colors.

Copy exact hex values from your theme settings (Theme Editor → Theme settings → Colors) for a perfect match.

","Colors","fonts-and-borders","

Font defaults to Use current theme font, so the bar blends in with zero effort — recommended. Or pick a specific font: Helvetica, Arial, Tahoma, Trebuchet MS, Times New Roman, Georgia, Garamond, or Courier New.

For shape, switch between square and pill corners and fine-tune the border radius from 0 to 40 px — match the radius your theme uses on its own buttons for a native look.

","Fonts and borders","ccdd348d831f6f40e10d6b12f","Display Behavior & Click Actions","When the bar appears, where it sits, exact sizing ranges, and what the button does.",[2704,2705,2706,2707],[2686,2612],{"_189":2717,"_227":2718,"_229":2719},{"_189":2714,"_227":2715,"_229":2716},{"_189":2711,"_227":2712,"_229":2713},{"_189":2708,"_227":2709,"_229":2710},"click-actions","

Pick the Action on click per device:

Action	Behavior	Choose when…
Add on cart only (default)	Adds the item, shows the success toast, shopper stays on the page.	You want shoppers to keep browsing (higher multi-item carts).
Redirect to cart page	Adds the item and opens the cart.	You want a deliberate review-cart step.
Redirect to checkout (Buy now)	Adds the item and jumps straight to checkout.	Single-product stores, impulse purchases, ad landing pages.

On themes with a cart drawer, adding to cart also refreshes/opens the drawer where the theme supports it — the experience follows your theme automatically.

","What the button does","sizing","

Bar height (desktop): Small 60 px · Medium 80 px (default) · Large 100 px.
Bar content width: 70–100% of the bar.
Button height: 20–36 px (fixed in the Fill layout, where the button fills the bar).
Offset — distance from the screen edge: 0–100 px on desktop, 0–80 px on mobile. Use it to clear cookie banners or chat bubbles that sit in the same corner.

","Sizing reference","position-and-devices","

Place the bar at the Bottom (default) or Top of the screen — configured separately for desktop and mobile. Bottom is standard on mobile (thumb-reachable); top can work on desktop if your theme has a sticky header you want to pair with.

Independent toggles control whether the bar shows on desktop devices and mobile devices at all — e.g. run mobile-only if your desktop page is short.

","Position and devices","when-to-show","

Choose the trigger per device:

Trigger	Behavior	Choose when…
Always on display (default)	Visible from page load.	Maximum availability; short product pages.
When user starts scrolling	Appears on the first scroll.	You want a clean first impression, then persistent availability.
When user scrolls past the Add to cart button	Appears exactly when the theme's own button leaves the screen.	The elegant choice — there's never a moment without a buy button, and never two at once.

The bar slides in with a smooth animation in every mode.

","When the bar appears","cbe32c2de82d774142ca7738c","Bar Layouts & Elements","The four templates, every toggleable element, and the mobile Complete/Minimal styles.",[2725,2726,2727],[2681,2581],{"_189":2734,"_227":2735,"_229":2736},{"_189":2731,"_227":2732,"_229":2733},{"_189":2728,"_227":2729,"_229":2730},"mobile-style","

Mobile has its own style switch:

Complete — the full form with selectors, like desktop.
Minimal — a compact bar with just the essentials and the button.

Recommendation: start with Minimal on mobile. Vertical space is precious, and a compact bar converts without covering content. Switch to Complete only if variant selection in the bar is critical for your products.

","Mobile style: Complete vs. Minimal","bar-elements","

Per device, each element has its own toggle:

Product image and title — reminds the shopper what they're buying; hide on very small screens if space is tight.
Price, compare-at price, and the saving amount — showing the crossed-out price plus \"save $X\" is a proven nudge on discounted products.
Variant selector — lets shoppers pick size/color directly in the bar. Essential if your products have variants; without it the bar adds the currently selected variant.
Quantity selector — for products bought in multiples.
The Add to Cart button — always shown.

After a successful add, shoppers see a confirmation toast (\"Successfully added to cart!\" — text customizable).

","Elements you can show or hide","four-layouts","

Layout	Look	Choose when…
Classic	Clean full-width bar.	You want a safe default that fits any theme.
Floating	Detached, rounded, hovers above the edge.	Your theme has a modern, airy look.
Fill	Edge-to-edge with a full-height button.	You want the button to dominate.
Slash	Bold styling with accent-colored pricing.	You want the price/discount to pop.

Switching templates later keeps your bar; only the visual preset changes.

","The four layouts","ce58de5142a5f564d439759b1","Create Your First Sticky Bar","Template to live bar in five minutes — a guided walkthrough.",[2742,2743,2744],[2686,2581],{"_189":2751,"_227":2752,"_229":2753},{"_189":2748,"_227":2749,"_229":2750},{"_189":2745,"_227":2746,"_229":2747},"name-and-activate","

Give the bar a Template Name (required — e.g. \"Main product bar\").
Set Status to Active (or keep Draft to save without publishing).
Save, then open any product page on your storefront.

You should see the bar (respecting the trigger you chose), and clicking its button should add the product and show the success message. If not, walk through Bar Not Showing on Storefront.

","Step 3 — Name, activate, test","the-bar-editor","

The editor opens full-screen with a live preview you can flip between Desktop and Mobile. Settings sit in four accordion sections:

Device Settings — visibility, when the bar appears, click action, position, and sizing — separate sub-tabs for desktop and mobile.
Design — fonts, borders, and every color.
Text Content — the three customizable texts (button, out-of-stock, success message).
Advanced display rules — which products and pages show the bar.

For a first bar, the defaults are sensible — you can go live without touching most of them.

","Step 2 — Tour the editor","pick-a-template","

Open Bar Editor and click Create New Bar. Four templates appear with visual previews:

Classic — a clean full-width bar; the default and the safest fit for most themes.
Floating — a detached, rounded bar hovering above the page edge.
Fill — edge-to-edge with a full-height button.
Slash — a bold variant with accent-colored pricing.

The template sets the starting shape; every detail stays editable. When unsure, start with Classic.

","Step 1 — Pick a template","c5bbbe1698331e2c894e2eebf","Installing & Activating the App","Install, follow the two-step Quick Guide, and verify the bar is live.",[2759,2760,2761,2762],[2640,2580],{"_189":2772,"_227":2773,"_229":2774},{"_189":2769,"_227":2770,"_229":2771},{"_189":2766,"_227":2767,"_229":2768},{"_189":2763,"_227":2764,"_229":2765},"verify-checklist","

☑ App embed banner shows Active.
☑ At least one bar has status Active in the Bar Editor.
☑ Open a product page on your storefront — the bar appears (scroll if you chose a scroll-based trigger).
☑ Clicking the bar's button adds the product to the cart and shows the success message.

Need help at any point? The Chat with us button reaches our team 24/7, and setup help is free.

","Quick verification checklist","app-embed-status","

The Dashboard shows an app-embed status banner:

Inactive — \"App embed is turned off and the Sticky add to cart bar will not be displayed on your storefront.\" Click Active app embed to open the Theme Editor and switch it on.
Active — \"Bar features are active and visible on your store.\" You're done.

The embed is per-theme: if you publish a new theme later, enable it again there. This single toggle is the cause of most \"bar disappeared\" reports.

","Step 2 — Verify the app embed","install-the-app","

Install the app from the Shopify App Store. The Dashboard greets you with a two-step Quick Guide:

\"Edit Sticky add to cart to match your needs\" — click Configure. This opens the bar creator where you pick a template and adjust functionality, display conditions, and design (see Create Your First Sticky Bar). The step completes once you've saved a bar.
\"Integrate Sticky Add to cart with your theme\" — click Integrate Now. Shopify's Theme Editor opens with the Sticky Cart app embed pre-selected: toggle it on and click Save. The step completes once the embed is detected.

","Step 1 — Install and configure","what-is-sticky-atc","

Ego Sticky Add to Cart keeps a buy bar always within reach while shoppers browse a product page. The bar can show the product image and title, price (with compare-at and savings), a variant selector, a quantity selector, and a prominent Add to Cart button.

Why it matters: on long product pages — and especially on mobile — the theme's own Add to cart button scrolls out of view. Every scroll back up is a chance to drop off. A sticky bar removes that friction, which is why it reliably lifts add-to-cart rates.

","What is Ego Sticky Add to Cart?","c7e351b79e8ef53cb9495abfc","Billing timing, failed payments, cancellations, portal access, inventory, and more.",[2785,2786,2787,2788,2789,2790,2791,2792,2793,2794],"2026-07-02T04:17:26.880Z",[2782,2783,2784],"subscriptions","Ego Subscriptions","failed-payments-and-retries","customer-portal","importing-existing-subscriptions",{"_189":2822,"_227":2823,"_229":2824},{"_189":2819,"_227":2820,"_229":2821},{"_189":2816,"_227":2817,"_229":2818},{"_189":2813,"_227":2814,"_229":2815},{"_189":2810,"_227":2811,"_229":2812},{"_189":2807,"_227":2808,"_229":2809},{"_189":2804,"_227":2805,"_229":2806},{"_189":2801,"_227":2802,"_229":2803},{"_189":2798,"_227":2799,"_229":2800},{"_189":2795,"_227":2796,"_229":2797},"faq-migration","

Yes — CSV-based import under Subscriptions → Import Subscriptions, with our support team assisting the mapping and validation. See Importing Subscriptions from Another App.

","Can I migrate from another subscription app?","faq-branding","

Contact our team via the in-app chat to verify your store — we remove the branding text for free.

","How do I remove the Ego branding under the widget?","faq-portal-login","

With their normal Shopify customer login. New-customer-accounts stores get a native subscriptions section in the account pages; classic stores use the hosted portal link (/apps/ego-portal) — add it to your account menu and navigation so it's easy to find.

","How do customers access the portal?","faq-out-of-stock","

Enable the Out of stock alert (Settings → Email settings) — you'll be emailed when an upcoming order contains an out-of-stock product, so you can restock, or swap/remove the product on the affected contracts before the cycle bills.

","What if a subscribed product goes out of stock?","faq-price-change","

Yes, per contract: open the subscription → products section → Edit Price. You can change it immediately or schedule the change after N billing cycles. Editing the plan itself only affects new subscriptions.

","Can I change the price for existing subscribers?","faq-prepaid","

Pay as you go bills at every delivery (e.g. $25/month). Auto-renew prepaid charges several deliveries upfront — minimum 2 — and renews with another batch (e.g. $75 per 3 months). Prepaid = better cash flow and lower churn; pair it with a bigger discount.

","Pay-as-you-go vs. prepaid — what's the difference?","faq-cancel-limits","

Yes — set Minimum required orders in the plan's advanced settings (cancel only after N orders), and/or disable cancellation in the portal settings so cancellations go through your support. Always state commitments clearly on the product page.

","Can I stop customers from cancelling immediately?","faq-customer-self-service","

Through the customer portal — they log in with their normal store account and manage everything there (skip, pause, address, payment, swaps), limited to the permissions you enabled. If customers say they \"can't find it\", add the portal link to your store navigation and order emails — see The Customer Portal.

","How do customers skip or pause by themselves?","faq-failed-payment","

The app retries automatically per your Billing settings (up to 6 retries, 1–10 days apart) and emails the customer a payment-update link on each failed attempt. After the last retry it executes your configured action: skip the cycle (default), pause, or cancel. You can also fix it manually: send the payment-update link from the contract, then Rebill order in Past Orders. See Failed Payments & Retry Settings.

","What happens if a customer's payment fails?","faq-when-billed","

Renewals are charged automatically once a day at a fixed hour in the store's billing timezone, on each contract's next billing date. You can see and Reschedule that date on the subscription's detail page, or bill immediately with Place Order. Prepaid plans are charged once per prepaid batch, then auto-renew.

","When exactly are customers billed?","c4edd80c2f74c6ab321f22356","widget-not-showing","Widget Not Showing on Product Pages","Work through the causes in order — from most to least common.",[2833,2834,2835,2836,2837,2838],[2831,2832],"installing-ego-subscriptions","widget-customization",{"_189":2852,"_227":2853,"_229":2854},{"_189":2849,"_227":2850,"_229":2851},{"_189":2846,"_227":2847,"_229":2848},{"_189":2843,"_227":2844,"_229":2845},{"_189":2840,"_227":2841,"_229":2842},{"_189":2618,"_227":2839,"_229":2620},"

Test in an incognito window (rules out caching), and try another product from the plan. If it still doesn't show, contact us via the in-app chat with your store URL and the product link — we'll diagnose it on your actual theme.

","widget-looks-wrong","

If the widget renders but clashes with your theme (overlapping text, wrong fonts, misplaced position):

Move the app block position in the Theme Editor (drag it in the product template).
Use Custom CSS in the widget settings for fine adjustments.
Or just message us via in-app chat — theme-fit adjustments are free.

","Widget shows but looks broken?","check-payments","

Shopify hides subscription options entirely when the store's payment setup doesn't support recurring billing. Check Shopify admin → Settings → Payments: you need Shopify Payments (or another subscription-compatible gateway). This is often the culprit on brand-new stores and development stores.

","4. Payment gateway supports subscriptions?","check-widget-settings","

Under Widgets, confirm:

Show subscription widget on product pages is enabled (the master switch).
At least one layout is active.
If the variant you're viewing is sold out: Show widget on sold out variants is on, or switch to an in-stock variant.

","3. Widget settings","check-plan","

In Subscription plans, open your plan and verify:

Status is Active, not Draft.
The product you're testing is among the selected products — or its collection is among the selected collections. Watch out: a product recently removed from the collection silently drops out of the plan.

The widget only renders on products that belong to at least one active plan.

","2. Is the product actually in an active plan?","check-embed-and-block","

Check the two Dashboard banners first:

App embed inactive → click Activate app embed, toggle Ego Subscriptions on in the Theme Editor's App embeds panel, save.
App block missing → click Add app block and place the block in your product template, save.

Recently published a new theme? Both must be re-enabled on the new theme — this is the most common cause of a widget that \"suddenly disappeared\".

","1. App embed and app block enabled?","c33ece7358f0011c8ddfa2da2","analytics-dashboard","The Analytics Dashboard","Track subscription revenue, growth, MRR, and churn — and know what each number means.",[2864,2865,2866,2867],[2862,2863],"Managing Subscriptions","managing-subscriptions-in-admin","plan-discounts",{"_189":2876,"_227":2877,"_229":541},{"_189":2874,"_227":2875,"_229":359},{"_189":2871,"_227":2872,"_229":2873},{"_189":2868,"_227":2869,"_229":2870},"order-tags","

Every subscription order is tagged — Ego First Order for initial purchases, Ego Recurring Order for renewals — so you can segment any Shopify report, build custom analytics, or drive Flow automations from your real order data.

","Deeper analysis in Shopify","how-to-read","

MRR up + cancellation rate steady — healthy growth; keep acquiring.
New subscriptions up but recurring revenue flat — churn is eating growth; look at the cancellation rate and consider an escalating discount (see Subscribe & Save Discounts).
Recurring ≫ first-time revenue — a mature base; protect it with solid dunning settings and the upcoming-order email.

","How to read the numbers","metrics","

Metric	Meaning
Subscription revenue	Gross subscription revenue minus discounts, shipping, and taxes for the period.
First-time order revenue	Revenue from customers' first subscription orders — how well you're acquiring subscribers.
Recurring order revenue	Revenue from automatic renewals — how well you're retaining them.
New subscriptions	Contracts created in the period.
Subscription growth	New + reactivated − cancelled, vs. the previous period.
Cancellation rate	Share of subscriptions cancelled in the period.
Total active subscriptions	Contracts currently active.
Monthly recurring revenue (MRR)	All active contracts normalized to a monthly value regardless of frequency — a weekly $10 plan counts ≈ $43/month. The single best health metric to watch.
Expected collections next 30 days	Projected recurring revenue over the next 30 days — near-term cash-flow forecast.
Lifetime subscription revenue	All-time subscription revenue.

","where-to-find","

The app's home Dashboard shows your subscription analytics with a time-range selector (yesterday, last 7 / 30 / 90 days). Figures can be shown in your store currency using daily exchange rates.

","c14b7863be2ffebeaf5a9f48e","email-notifications","Every email the app can send, when it fires, and how to configure each one.",[2883,2884,2885],[2782,2783],{"_189":2892,"_227":2893,"_229":2894},{"_189":2889,"_227":2890,"_229":2891},{"_189":2886,"_227":2887,"_229":2888},"merchant-emails","

Email	When it's sent
Out of stock alert	A product in an upcoming subscription order is out of stock — restock or swap the product before the next cycle bills.
Charge confirmation	A recurring order was charged successfully.
Failed charge notification	A charge could not be processed.

Minimum recommended set: upcoming order + billing failed for customers, out of stock for you. These three prevent the most revenue loss.

","Store owner notifications","customer-emails","

Email	When it's sent	Why keep it on
Subscription activation	When the customer first subscribes.	Confirms the deal (frequency, discount) and sets expectations.
Subscription upcoming order	Before the next charge — 2 days by default, adjustable per contract via Email Buffer Days.	The customer's chance to skip or edit before being billed — the single best defense against refunds and chargebacks.
Subscription order confirmation	When a recurring order is placed successfully.	Reassurance + a natural portal entry point.
Billing failed	When a charge fails, including a final-attempt warning explaining what happens next.	Contains the payment-update link — this is how failed payments get fixed.
Subscription cancellation	When the subscription is cancelled.	Closure + win-back opportunity.
Pause / resume confirmations	When the subscription is paused or resumed.	Prevents \"am I still being charged?\" tickets.

","Customer notifications","email-settings","

Go to Settings → Email settings. A master switch enables subscription emails; below it, each notification type has its own toggle so you control exactly what gets sent. These emails are sent by the app — they complement (not replace) Shopify's own order confirmation emails.

","Turning emails on","c8356864bc9d14ce91e79cbce","Failed Payments & Retry Settings","What happens when a charge fails, how to configure dunning, and how to recover revenue.",[2901,2902,2903,2904],[2879,2900],"upcoming-and-past-orders",{"_189":2914,"_227":2915,"_229":2916},{"_189":2911,"_227":2912,"_229":2913},{"_189":2908,"_227":2909,"_229":2910},{"_189":2905,"_227":2906,"_229":2907},"recovering","

Your recovery toolkit:

Filter the subscription list by Failed to see every affected contract.
On the contract, use Send link to update payment method — the customer fixes the card in one click.
Once fixed, open Past Orders and click Rebill order on the failed cycle (each cycle shows its attempt count and last attempt date).

","Recovering failed payments manually","final-action","

Action	What happens	Choose when…
Skip billing cycle (default)	The failed cycle is marked \"Billing failed\"; the next cycle proceeds as scheduled.	You'd rather keep the subscriber and lose one order.
Pause subscription	Billing stops until you or the customer resume.	You want an explicit re-engagement moment.
Cancel subscription	The contract ends.	You don't want unpaid contracts lingering.

","Choosing the final action","retry-settings","

Go to Settings → Billing settings:

Retry failed payments — the master toggle. Turn it on; without it a single card hiccup silently costs you the order.
Maximum number of retry attempts — 1 to 6 (default 3).
Delay before retrying — 1 to 10 days between attempts (default 1).
Send an email if a billing retry attempt fails — keep on; the email contains the payment-update link, which is how most failures get fixed.

Recommended starting point: 3–4 attempts, 2–3 days apart — spans a payday cycle without dragging on for weeks.

","Configuring retries","what-happens-on-failure","

Expired cards and insufficient funds are normal in subscriptions — what matters is recovering them automatically. With retries enabled, a typical timeline looks like this:

Day 0 — the scheduled charge fails. The contract shows under the Failed tab; the customer gets a \"payment failed\" email (if enabled) with a link to update their payment method.
Day 1, 2, … — the app retries automatically per your settings, notifying the customer on each failed attempt. The final-attempt email tells them exactly what happens if it fails again.
After the last retry — the app executes your chosen final action: skip the cycle, pause, or cancel the subscription.

If the customer fixes their card at any point, the next retry succeeds and the contract returns to normal.

","What happens when a payment fails","c3c2a61832a9e4afbc506e9e3","Upcoming & Past Orders","Place, reschedule, skip, and rebill recurring orders — and read the billing history.",[2922,2923,2924],[2862,2879],{"_189":2931,"_227":2932,"_229":2933},{"_189":2928,"_227":2929,"_229":2930},{"_189":2925,"_227":2926,"_229":2927},"email-buffer","

Two per-contract controls fine-tune the reminder emails:

Email Buffer Days — how many days before billing the customer's upcoming-order reminder goes out (default 2). Give prepaid or high-value contracts a longer buffer so customers have time to skip or edit.
Stop sending upcoming order emails — mute reminders for this one contract only (e.g. at the customer's request).

","Per-subscription email controls","past-orders","

The Past Orders tab is the billing history. Each row shows the order number, products, the originally expected renewal date, how many billing attempts were made and when, and a status:

Status	Meaning
Paid	Charged successfully; the Shopify order exists.
Billed / Unbilled	Whether the cycle has been processed by billing yet.
Skipped	The cycle was skipped (by you or the customer).
Cancelled	The cycle was cancelled with the contract.

The first order carries a \"First order\" badge. For any cycle that failed to bill, click Rebill order to retry the charge manually — useful after a customer fixes their payment method.

","Past orders — reading the history","upcoming-orders","

The Upcoming Orders tab lists the future billing cycles of a contract: products, next order date, total, email buffer days, and status (Queued or Skipped). Three actions per cycle:

Place order — bill this cycle right now. Use when a customer asks to \"send it early\".
Reschedule — pick a new date and time for the charge. If the new date collides with an active payment-retry (dunning) process, the app shows a warning first — resolve the failed payment before moving the date.
Skip order — skip this cycle entirely; billing resumes with the next one. The cycle shows as Skipped, nothing is charged.

","Upcoming orders","c6f9d40b371a9f590bd2f25bd","Managing Subscriptions in Admin","Find any contract and handle the everyday tasks — recipes included.",[2939,2940,2941,2942],[2900,2782],{"_189":2952,"_227":2953,"_229":2954},{"_189":2949,"_227":2950,"_229":2951},{"_189":2946,"_227":2947,"_229":2948},{"_189":2943,"_227":2944,"_229":2945},"contract-discounts","

Customer emailing to cancel? From the Discounts card, create a targeted discount: code, Percentage or Fixed Amount, and a Recurring Cycle Limit (e.g. 50% off the next 2 orders). It applies automatically to this contract's coming cycles — a proven save-offer that costs less than losing the subscriber.

","Save offers with discounts","edit-products","

From the products section of the detail page you can, per line item:

Add product — on an existing plan or a custom one-off plan.
Edit Quantity / Edit Variant (e.g. customer wants a different size).
Edit Price — set a base price, or schedule a price change after N billing cycles (percentage, fixed discount, or fixed price per unit).
Swap Product — replace it with another product entirely.
Remove Product, or Skip Items on a specific upcoming date.

Changes apply to future orders of this contract only — other subscribers are unaffected.

","Editing the products on a contract","common-tasks","

Task	How
Pause a subscription	Detail page → header → Pause (confirm). Resume the same way with Resume.
Bill right now	Header → Place Order — charges the next cycle immediately.
Skip the next delivery	Header → Skip Next Order (or skip any specific cycle from the Upcoming Orders tab).
Customer's card expired	Payment info card → Send link to update payment method — the customer gets a secure Shopify link, no card data passes through you.
Change the shipping address	Shipping card → Select Address or edit — applies to all future orders of this contract.
Change how often it ships	Detail tab → edit the delivery policy (frequency).
Leave an internal note	Merchant notes (only you see it) vs. Customer notes (customer-visible).

","Everyday task recipes","subscription-list","

The Subscriptions page lists every contract: ID, customer, status, creation date, frequency, next order date, total, and order count. To find one fast:

Filter by status tab: All / Active / Paused / Failed / Cancelled.
Search by Subscription ID, or filter by customer (name/email).

Click a row to open the detail page — four tabs: Detail, Past Orders, Upcoming Orders, and Activity Logs (a full audit trail: who changed what, when).

","Finding a subscription","cc84d2d0819e17e0da548edb7","translations","Translating Widget & Portal Text","Localize every customer-facing string — step by step.",[2962,2963],[2832,2783],"Storefront & Customer Portal",{"_189":2967,"_227":2968,"_229":2969},{"_189":2964,"_227":2965,"_229":2966},"how-to-translate","

Make sure the target language is published in Shopify (Settings → Languages).
Open Translations in the app and pick the locale.
Edit each string and save.

Translations are stored through Shopify's native translation system, so the storefront automatically shows the right language to each customer based on the locale they're browsing in — no extra configuration.

Single-language store? You can still use this page to reword any widget text (e.g. change \"Subscribe & save\" to \"Never run out\"). The admin interface itself is available in English, German, French, Italian, Japanese, and Spanish.

","How to translate","what-can-be-translated","

The Translations page covers all customer-facing widget strings: \"Purchase Options\", \"One-time purchase\", \"Subscribe & Save\", \"Auto Renew Prepaid\", the discount badge, \"Delivery frequency\", \"Subscription details\", the tooltip title and description — plus the selling-plan names customers see.

","What can be translated","ca760b0d0e4dfc1321538b77e","build-a-box","Build a Box","Let customers assemble their own subscription box — setup from start to finish.",[2977,2978,2979],[2832,2976],"create-your-first-plan",{"_189":2986,"_227":2987,"_229":2988},{"_189":2983,"_227":2984,"_229":2985},{"_189":2980,"_227":2981,"_229":2982},"design-and-publish","

Switch to the Design tab to match your brand: colors, typography, and borders, with a live preview. Then set the box status to Active and share it:

Copy the box's URL from the admin and link it from your navigation, homepage banner, or ads.
The box storefront experience runs on the same app embed as the widget — no additional theme setup.

Test the whole flow once yourself: build a box, subscribe, and check the created contract under Subscriptions — box contracts are managed exactly like regular ones.

","Step 2 — Design and publish","configure-setting","

Create a box under Build a box and work through the Setting tab:

Pricing — choose Dynamic pricing box: the box price is the sum of the selected products (updated live as the customer picks). A fixed-price box option is coming soon.
Layout — Cart panel or Box drawer; pick what fits your theme better (you can switch later).
Products — show all products or organize them by category. Set the total items per box (e.g. exactly 6) and optional per-product min/max quantities (e.g. max 2 of any single flavor).
Purchase options — attach one or more subscription plans (Pay as you go or Auto-renew prepaid with delivery frequency and discount, same as regular plans) and optionally allow one-time purchase.
Discount tiers — reward bigger boxes: e.g. 6 items → 10% off, 9 items → 15% off. The reward bar shows customers how close they are to the next tier.
Summary step — after the box is full, send customers to the Cart page or a checkout drawer.

","Step 1 — Configure the box (Setting tab)","what-is-build-a-box","

Build a box lets customers assemble a personalized bundle: they pick products from your curated selection, fill the box to the size you define, and subscribe to it (or buy once, if you allow it). A progress bar and reward messages (\"Add 2 more to get 10% off!\") guide them along. Typical uses: snack boxes, coffee samplers, pet-treat bundles, cosmetics kits.

","What is Build a Box?","c0374ee5e0a7987ad69f3de4d","The Customer Portal","Set up self-service for subscribers and control exactly what they can do.",[2994,2995,2996,2997,2998,2999],[2832,2879,2862],{"_189":3015,"_227":3016,"_229":3017},{"_189":3012,"_227":3013,"_229":3014},{"_189":3009,"_227":3010,"_229":3011},{"_189":3006,"_227":3007,"_229":3008},{"_189":3003,"_227":3004,"_229":3005},{"_189":3000,"_227":3001,"_229":3002},"test-portal","

Create a test subscription with your own email, then log in on the storefront as that customer and open the portal. Verify you can see the subscription, skip an order, and edit the address. What you see is exactly what your customers get.

","Step 4 — Test as a customer","portal-permissions","

Every capability is a toggle, grouped in the portal settings:

Subscription settings — allow editing delivery frequency / shipping address / payment info; disable pause, reactivation, or cancellation.
Order settings — \"Order now\" button, skip next order, skip any order, change next delivery date, view order history.
Product settings — add new products, swap products or variants, change quantities, remove products, skip specific products.
Discount settings — allow one-time product discounts in the portal.
Subscription info — show original price & discount percentage.

Recommended baseline: allow skip, pause, address and payment edits (they prevent cancellations and failed payments); think twice before disabling cancellation — customers who can't cancel call their bank instead.

","Step 3 — Set the permissions","what-customers-can-do","

Depending on the permissions you enable, customers can: view active and past subscriptions with upcoming orders and full order history; pause / resume / cancel; skip orders; reschedule the next delivery; change delivery frequency; edit the shipping address; update the payment method; add, swap, or remove products; change quantities; trigger an order now; and apply discount codes.

","What subscribers can do","portal-setup","

For the new customer accounts version, the app page includes a Go to theme shortcut that opens the customer-account editor — confirm the subscriptions page is visible there.

For the classic portal, add the link where customers will look for it:

Copy the portal URL from the app.
Shopify admin → Online Store → Navigation → add a menu item \"Manage subscription\" pointing to the URL (footer menu and/or account menu).
Optional: also link it from your order-confirmation emails.

","Step 2 — Make the portal reachable","two-portal-versions","

Configure both under Customer portal in the app:

New customer accounts (recommended if your store uses Shopify's new customer accounts): subscriptions appear natively inside the customer's account pages. To check which accounts you use: Shopify admin → Settings → Customer accounts.
Classic portal: a hosted portal at your-store.com/apps/ego-portal. The admin shows the link with a copy button.

In both cases customers sign in with their normal Shopify customer login — there are no separate passwords to manage.

","Step 1 — Choose your portal version","why-portal","

Most subscription support tickets are \"skip my next order\", \"change my address\", \"pause for a month\". The customer portal lets subscribers do all of this themselves — fewer tickets for you, and customers who can pause or skip are far less likely to cancel outright.

","Why the portal matters","cba2d8e65c831bec8af43276e","Customizing the Product Page Widget","Layouts, behavior, texts, and styling of the subscription options — step by step.",[3023,3024,3025,3026,3027],[2831,2956,2826],{"_189":3040,"_227":3041,"_229":3042},{"_189":3037,"_227":3038,"_229":3039},{"_189":3034,"_227":3035,"_229":3036},{"_189":3031,"_227":3032,"_229":3033},{"_189":3028,"_227":3029,"_229":3030},"widget-language","

All customer-facing strings — \"Purchase Options\", \"One-time Purchase\", \"Subscribe & save\", \"Delivery frequency\", the discount badge, tooltips — are editable and translatable per language on the Translations page (see Translating Widget & Portal Text).

New stores show a small Ego branding line under the widget. Contact our team via in-app chat to verify your store and we remove it for free.

","Texts, languages, and branding","custom-css-js","

If the widget needs pixel-perfect matching with your theme, the settings accept Custom CSS and Custom JS — no theme code edits required. If you're not comfortable writing CSS, message us via the in-app chat: our team adjusts the widget to your theme for free.

","Advanced: Custom CSS & JS","general-settings","

Widget-wide behavior settings, with our recommendations:

Setting	What it does
Default purchase option	Which option is preselected: One-time purchase, Pay as you go, or Auto-renew prepaid. Preselecting the subscription lifts subscriber conversion — test it.
Show subscription option before one-time	Puts the subscription on top of the list.
Show subscription widget on product pages	The master visibility switch — keep on.
Show information tooltip icon	Adds a \"Subscription details\" tooltip; write its title and description yourself (how billing works, how to cancel — reduces hesitation).
Show widget on sold out variants	Whether the widget renders when the variant is out of stock.
Auto-update price on quantity change	Recalculates the shown price when the customer changes quantity.
Add to cart button text	Customize the CTA text.

","Step 3 — Set the behavior","layout-editor","

The editor has three tabs:

Widget — the container: borders, divider color and thickness, background, icons, and the selected vs. unselected option states.
Options — each purchase option's label, price, compare-at price, and description: font, size, weight, and color, plus margins and the discount badge.
Delivery Frequency — the frequency selector's look.

Element sizes scale from 1x to 3x. Every change updates the preview instantly; nothing goes live until you save.

","Step 2 — Style it","widget-layouts","

Go to Widgets. Three layouts are available, each fully customizable:

Default Layout — purchase options stacked in a vertical list. The safest choice; works with virtually every theme.
Divider Layout — options side by side in equal-width columns. Good when you have exactly two options (one-time vs. subscribe).
Grid Layout — options arranged in a grid. Good for several frequency plans.

At least one layout must stay active. Click Customize on your chosen layout to open the editor with a live preview.

","Step 1 — Choose a layout","cc87fac5f65e2dad2cd82d968","advanced-plan-settings","Advanced Plan Settings & Shipping Profiles","Minimum orders before cancelling, automatic plan expiry, and subscription-only shipping rates.",[3051,3052,3053],[2976,3050],"Subscription Plans","payment-types-and-frequency",{"_189":3060,"_227":3061,"_229":3062},{"_189":3057,"_227":3058,"_229":3059},{"_189":3054,"_227":3055,"_229":3056},"shipping-profiles","

Want subscribers to get cheaper (or free) delivery without touching your store-wide shipping? Create a subscription shipping profile:

Go to Settings → Shipping profile and create a profile — name it, define zones and rates (e.g. \"Subscription shipping — $2 flat\" or free).
Open your plan and attach the profile in the Shipping profile step of the builder.

That's it — you don't add products to the profile manually; linking it to the plan is enough. Orders from that plan then use the profile's rates instead of your default shipping.

","Shipping profiles for subscriptions","max-orders","

Maximum allowed orders ends the subscription automatically after N successful orders — no manual cleanup, no accidental extra billing.

When to use it: fixed-length programs — a 6-month coffee tasting course, a 12-week training box. When the last order is billed, the contract completes on its own.

Each contract's detail page shows its successful-order count against both limits, so you always know where a customer stands.

","Maximum allowed orders","min-orders","

In a plan's Advanced settings, Minimum required orders means customers can cancel only after completing N orders.

When to use it: you're giving a big first-order discount (say 40% off the first box) and need at least 3 orders to make the economics work. Set minimum = 3; the portal simply won't offer cancellation until the third order is delivered.

Be transparent — state the commitment clearly on the product page (\"3-month minimum\") to avoid support tickets and chargebacks.

","Minimum required orders","c2413d646ea1a3efb41962484","Subscribe & Save Discounts","Plan discounts, escalating loyalty discounts, per-customer discounts, and stacking rules.",[3068,3069,3070,3071],[3050,2862],{"_189":3080,"_227":3081,"_229":3082},{"_189":3077,"_227":3078,"_229":3079},{"_189":3074,"_227":3075,"_229":3076},{"_189":2943,"_227":3072,"_229":3073},"

You can also discount one specific customer's subscription — the classic \"save offer\" when someone wants to cancel:

Open the subscription under Subscriptions.
In the Discounts card, click create discount.
Set the code, choose Percentage or Fixed Amount, and set the Recurring Cycle Limit — how many upcoming orders it applies to (e.g. 50% off the next 2 orders).

The discount applies automatically to that contract's next cycles and can be removed at any time.

","Discounts for a single subscriber","discount-combinations","

Subscription pricing is applied through an automatic app discount. Under Settings → Discount settings you decide how it plays with your other promotions:

Enable automatic app discount — the master switch.
Combine with product discounts / order discounts / shipping discounts — three independent toggles.

Example: allow combining with shipping discounts (so subscribers can use your free-shipping code) but not with product discounts (so a 20%-off sale doesn't stack on top of the subscriber discount).

","Stacking with other discounts","tiered-discount","

Enable Change discount after X orders to grow the reward the longer someone stays subscribed:

Set the initial discount (e.g. 10%).
Set after how many orders it changes (e.g. after 3 orders).
Set the new discount (e.g. 15%).

Result: \"10% off your first 3 orders, then 15% off forever.\" This directly attacks the most common churn window (months 2–4) — customers see a concrete reason to stay.

","Escalating discount — reward loyalty","plan-discount","

To give subscribers a discount on every delivery:

Open the plan (Subscription plans → your plan → edit the plan entry).
Enable Offer incentives.
Choose Percentage (e.g. 15% off every order) or Fixed amount (e.g. $5 off every order).

The widget automatically shows the discounted price next to the crossed-out regular price plus a \"Save X%\" badge — no discount codes needed, the price is simply lower at checkout.

","The plan discount","c920861241e878bece4303d25","Payment Types & Delivery Frequency","Pay as you go vs. auto-renew prepaid, billing schedules, and renewal anchors — with examples.",[3088,3089,3090,3091],[2976,2782],{"_189":3101,"_227":3102,"_229":3103},{"_189":3098,"_227":3099,"_229":3100},{"_189":3095,"_227":3096,"_229":3097},{"_189":3092,"_227":3093,"_229":3094},"billing-time","

The app charges renewals automatically once per day at a fixed hour in your store's billing timezone. On a contract's billing day, the charge runs, Shopify creates the order, and the next billing date advances by the plan's frequency. You can watch and control all of this per contract:

The next billing date is shown on the subscription's detail page — and you can Reschedule it.
Place Order bills a cycle immediately instead of waiting.
If a charge fails, the retry system takes over — see Failed Payments & Retry Settings.

Every order is tagged in Shopify: Ego First Order on the initial purchase, Ego Recurring Order on renewals. Use these tags to filter orders, build reports, or trigger Shopify Flow automations.

","When exactly are customers charged?","renewal-anchors","

Fine-tune when recurring orders happen:

Cutoff days — how many days before the billing date changes are locked. Example: with a 3-day cutoff, a customer editing their order 2 days before billing affects the following cycle, not the imminent one. Leave \"Unset\" if you don't need it.
Renewal day — anchor renewals to the same weekday as the first order (good for weekly plans: \"always ships Monday\") or the same day of month (good for monthly: \"always the 15th\").
Renewal month — for yearly plans: renew in the same month as the initial order, or pin a specific month.

","Cutoff and renewal anchors","delivery-frequency","

Each plan has one frequency: every N days, weeks, months, or years (e.g. every 2 weeks, every 3 months). To offer customers a choice of frequencies, add multiple plans to the same group — the widget shows them as a \"Delivery frequency\" selector.

Enable Show frequency description to add your own explanation under the plan name — useful for prepaid plans (\"Billed every 3 months, ships monthly\").

","Delivery frequency","payment-types","

Type	How billing works	Example
Pay as you go	The customer is charged at every delivery, at the delivery frequency.	$25 coffee bag, delivered and billed every month. Customer pays $25/month until they cancel.
Auto-renew prepaid	The customer pays for several deliveries upfront (minimum 2). When the prepaid batch runs out, the subscription automatically renews with another prepaid batch.	3-month prepaid: customer pays $75 today, receives 3 monthly deliveries, then is charged $75 again for the next 3.

Which to choose? Pay as you go is simpler and converts better for first-time subscribers. Prepaid gives you cash upfront and lower churn — pair it with a bigger discount to make the upfront payment worth it. You can offer both as separate plans and let customers choose.

","The two payment types","c6ed2cafc2b56dc5a23dfed40","Importing Subscriptions from Another App","Migrate existing contracts with a CSV file — reviewed, selective, and support-assisted.",[3109,3110,3111],[2862,2976],{"_189":3116,"_227":3117,"_229":3118},{"_189":3113,"_227":3114,"_229":3115},{"_189":1089,"_227":3112,"_229":1349},"

Payment methods: whether stored payment methods carry over depends on your gateway (Shopify Payments customers keep their cards; imported contracts from external gateways may require the customer to confirm payment). Our team will confirm this for your specific setup before you migrate.
Next billing dates are preserved from the CSV — double-check a few so nobody gets billed early.
Turn off billing in the old app before migrating, so customers aren't charged twice.

Migrations touch live billing — we strongly recommend doing them together with our team via the in-app chat. We'll validate your CSV and watch the first billing cycles with you.

","review-and-migrate","

Uploaded rows land in the Not yet migrated tab, showing each subscription's ID, customer name and email, status, frequency, next billing date, and total price. Check a few rows against your old app to confirm the mapping looks right.

Then either:

select specific rows and click Migrate Subscriptions, or
click Migrate All — with the option to migrate only active and paused subscriptions (recommended; cancelled contracts usually aren't worth importing).

Migrated rows move to the Migrated tab so you always know what's done.

","Review before migrating","how-migration-works","

Switching from another subscription app (Recharge, Appstle, Seal, etc.)? Your existing subscriber contracts can be imported so billing continues without interruption. The flow:

Export your subscriptions from the current app (every major app has a CSV export).
Prepare the CSV following our template — the import page links it, and the banner reminds you: contact support if you need help mapping your columns.
Upload the file under Subscriptions → Import Subscriptions.
Review and migrate — nothing goes live until you explicitly migrate rows.

","How migration works","cfa1a7c46cfedf830f2a91b89","Create Your First Subscription Plan","A full walkthrough: products, frequency, discount — with a worked example.",[3124,3125,3126,3127,3128,3129],[3050,2863,2826],{"_189":3145,"_227":3146,"_229":3147},{"_189":3142,"_227":3143,"_229":3144},{"_189":3139,"_227":3140,"_229":3141},{"_189":3136,"_227":3137,"_229":3138},{"_189":3133,"_227":3134,"_229":3135},{"_189":3130,"_227":3131,"_229":3132},"test-it","

Open any product from the selected collection on your storefront. You should see the purchase options widget with:

One-time purchase at the normal price, and
your plan (\"Deliver every month — save 15%\") at the discounted price.

Select the subscription, add to cart, and check out — Shopify will ask for a subscription-capable payment method. The new contract then appears under Subscriptions in the app.

If the widget doesn't appear, walk through Widget Not Showing on Product Pages — it's almost always the app embed, plan status, or payment gateway.

","Step 5 — Test on your storefront","activate","

Save the plan and check its status in the plan list — it must be Active (a Draft plan is saved but invisible to customers). The list shows every plan with its products/variants count, purchase type, and quick actions to Duplicate, Delete, or toggle status.

","Step 4 — Save and activate","add-a-plan","

Click Add subscription plan and fill in:

Plan name — this is the text customers see in the widget. Write it from their perspective: \"Deliver every month — save 15%\".
Payment type — choose Pay as you go (billed at each delivery — right for our example) or Auto-renew prepaid (customer pays several deliveries upfront). Details in Payment Types & Delivery Frequency.
Delivery frequency — 1 month for our example. Any combination of a number + days/weeks/months/years works.
Offer incentives — enable it, choose Percentage, enter 15. The preview now shows a \"Save 15%\" badge and the discounted price.

Optionally enable Show frequency description to add your own explanatory line under the plan name.

You can add several plans to the same group — e.g. \"Every 2 weeks — save 10%\" and \"Every month — save 15%\". Customers pick their frequency in the widget dropdown.

","Step 3 — Add the subscription plan","select-products","

Choose which items can be subscribed to:

Specific selected products — pick individual products (and, if you want, only certain variants). Best when you're starting with a few hero products.
Product in selected collections — every product in the chosen collections is subscribable. Best for whole categories like \"Coffee\" — new products added to the collection are covered automatically.

For our example, we select the Coffee collection. At least one product is required — the builder won't save without it.

","Step 2 — Select products","start-a-plan","

Go to Subscription plans and click Create new plan. The plan builder opens with a setup sidebar showing three steps:

Select products (required)
Plans — the actual subscription option(s)
Shipping profile (optional)

A preview panel on the right shows the plan exactly as customers will see it in the widget, updating as you type.

","Step 1 — Start a new plan","example-goal","

Let's build a classic \"subscribe & save\" plan as a worked example: customers subscribing to any coffee product get a delivery every month and save 15% on each order. You can adapt every step to your own products.

","What we'll build","c7a1ad7f3727cc97a1c00853a","Installing & Activating Ego Subscriptions","Install the app, enable the app embed and app block, and verify everything is ready.",[3154,3155,3156,3157,3158,3159],"5 min",[2976,2832,2826],{"_189":3169,"_227":3170,"_229":3171},{"_189":870,"_227":3168,"_229":872},{"_189":2769,"_227":3167,"_229":802},{"_189":3164,"_227":3165,"_229":3166},{"_189":3161,"_227":3162,"_229":3163},{"_189":2763,"_227":3160,"_229":2765},"

Before announcing subscriptions to your customers, verify:

☑ Both Dashboard banners (app embed + app block) show Active.
☑ At least one subscription plan has status Active and contains the right products.
☑ On the storefront, the product page shows \"One-time purchase\" and your subscription option with the discounted price.
☑ A test checkout works — place a small subscription order yourself, then cancel it from Subscriptions in the admin.

","setup-guide","

The Dashboard side guide tracks the three launch steps:

Create a subscription plan — see Create Your First Subscription Plan for a full walkthrough.
Choose a widget style — pick and brand a widget layout under Widgets.
Preview in store — open a product that's in your plan and check the widget live.

There's also a video tutorial on the Dashboard, and the in-app chat connects you to our team 24/7 if anything is unclear.

","Step 3 — Finish the setup guide","enable-app-embed-and-block","

Two theme components make the widget render. The Dashboard shows a status banner for each, so you always know what's missing:

A. App embed (the engine):

On the Dashboard, click Activate app embed. Your Theme Editor opens on the App embeds panel.
Toggle Ego Subscriptions on.
Click Save (top right of the Theme Editor).

B. App block (the widget's position on the product page):

On the Dashboard, click Add app block. The Theme Editor opens your product template.
In the left panel, the Ego Subscriptions block is added to the product information section — drag it to where the purchase options should sit (usually right above the Add to cart button).
Click Save.

Back on the Dashboard, both banners should now show Active. If one still shows inactive, refresh the page.

","Step 2 — Enable the app embed and app block","

Install Ego Subscriptions from the Shopify App Store and approve the requested permissions. The app opens inside your Shopify admin. In the left navigation you'll find everything you need:

Subscription plans — create and manage your plans.
Subscriptions — every customer contract, with statuses and actions.
Widgets — how the subscription options look on product pages.
Build a box — the box-builder feature.
Customer portal — what subscribers can do by themselves.
Translations — localize every customer-facing text.
Settings — billing retries, emails, discount combinations, shipping profiles.

","

Shopify only allows subscription purchases when your payment setup supports recurring billing. Make sure of two things:

Your store uses Shopify Payments (or PayPal Express / another gateway that Shopify lists as subscription-compatible).
Your checkout currency supports subscriptions in your country.

If the payment gateway doesn't support subscriptions, the widget simply won't render a subscription option — this is the #1 cause of \"widget not showing\" (see Widget Not Showing on Product Pages).

","what-is-ego-subscriptions","

Ego Subscriptions adds recurring purchases (\"subscribe & save\") to your Shopify store. Here's the full loop:

You create a subscription plan — which products, how often, and what discount subscribers get.
Customers see a subscription widget on your product pages and choose \"Subscribe & save\" instead of a one-time purchase.
The app bills them automatically on schedule and creates the recurring orders in Shopify.
Customers manage everything themselves (skip, pause, swap, cancel) in a customer portal.
You track performance on the analytics dashboard and manage every contract from the admin.

Failed payments are retried automatically, customers get email notifications at every step, and a Build a Box feature lets shoppers assemble their own subscription bundle.

","What is Ego Subscriptions?","cms4imkck00rm2us1lgi7le1s","gift-not-free","Why Are Gifts not Free?","Possible reasons why your gifts are not discounted as configured and how to resolve.",[3184,3185],"Jul 28, 2026","2026-07-28T10:31:06.116Z","2026-07-28T10:35:19.256Z",[],"free-gifts-bogo-upsell","Ego BOGO Free Gifts & Bundles","FAQs",{"_189":3189,"_227":3190,"_229":3191},{"_189":3186,"_227":3187,"_229":3188},"gift-is-sometimes-not-free","

If the gift is added but not free all the time:

This can happen when another Shopify discount is active but is not configured to combine with the Ego Free Gift discount.
Ego Free Gift discounts are set to combine with other discounts by default. Check the combination settings of the other Shopify discount to make sure both discounts can apply at the same time.

","Gift is sometimes not free","gift-is-always-added-with-full-price","

If the gift lands in the cart at full price:

In the campaign's gift settings, confirm the discount is set (e.g. Percentage = 100).
In Shopify admin → Discounts, confirm the automatic discount Ego Free Gift Discount exists and is active — don't delete or edit it manually; the app manages it.
If it's missing, please contact support.

","Gift is always added with full price","ceb2b690fd48ecb16dbd71f7c","gifts-not-appearing","Why Are Gifts Not Shown on Storefront?","Symptom-based troubleshooting: work through the exact issue you're seeing with Free Gift campaigns.",[3203,3204,3205,3206],"Oct 2, 2026","2026-07-02T04:17:26.914Z","2026-10-02T08:03:08.000Z",[3201,3202],"installing-ego-free-gift","campaign-display-settings",{"_189":3216,"_227":3217,"_229":3218},{"_189":3213,"_227":3214,"_229":3215},{"_189":3210,"_227":3211,"_229":3212},{"_189":3207,"_227":3208,"_229":3209},"campaign-never-fires-check-priority-conflicts","

If another campaign has Stop on Match and matches the cart first (lower priority number), your campaign is skipped by design. Review priorities under \"Works with other offers\" and either re-order them or remove Stop on Match from the blocking campaign.

","Campaign never fires → check priority conflicts","a-specific-surface-is-missing-check-the-theme-compatibility","

The required storefront surface may be missing or unsupported by your current theme.

Please contact our support team so we can check your theme compatibility and help set up the correct placement.

","A specific surface is missing -> check the theme compatibility","bar-shows-but-no-gift-is-added-check-the-campaign-conditions","

Open the campaign and verify, in order:

The cart truly meets the condition — right products (check the applies to targeting: a $100 cart of excluded products won't qualify), full threshold amount, correct quantity.
The gift is still available in stock or enable \"Continue selling when out of stock\".
Sub-conditions aren't excluding you: \"New customer\" excludes you as a repeat buyer; \"Logged out\" excludes you while logged in; a Specific link address campaign only fires when you arrive via that link. Test in an incognito window to simulate a fresh visitor.

","Bar shows but no gift is added → check the campaign conditions","nothing-shows-at-all-check-the-app-embed-and-campaign-status","

If no bar, widget, or gift appears anywhere, please check if the app embed is enabled and the campaign status is active.

To enable App embed:

Online Store > Edit Theme.
Toggle Ego Free Gift on in the Theme Editor's App embeds panel.
Save. Re-check after publishing any new theme — the embed is per-theme.

To activate a campaign:

Within the app, navigate to Campaign.
Open the campaign you want to activate.
Turn on Active in the Status card and click Save. You can also click the play icon in the campaign list's Action column.

$\"Offer$

","Nothing shows at all → check the app embed and campaign status","cmseecqkn00002umgjhsvlqsb","how-do-i-stop-the-same-customer-from-claiming-free-gift-repeatedly","How Do I Stop the Same Customer from Claiming the Gift Repeatedly?","You can use Shopify Flow together with customer tags to prevent customers who have already received a gift from qualifying again.",[3226,3227],"2026-08-04T08:29:10.919Z",[],{"_189":3231,"_227":3232,"_229":3233},{"_189":3228,"_227":3229,"_229":3230},"step-2-exclude-tagged-customers-from-the-campaign","

In your Ego Free Gift campaign:

Open the campaign settings.
Add a customer-related Sub-condition.
Select Customer tags.
Enter the gift-claimed tag and tick Exclude customers with these tags.
Save and activate the campaign.

Customers with this tag will no longer qualify for the gift.

Make sure the tag used in Ego exactly matches the tag added by your Shopify Flow workflow.

$\"Add$

","Step 2 — Exclude tagged customers from the campaign","step-1-tag-customers-who-have-received-the-gift","

Create a workflow in Shopify Flow that automatically adds a customer tag when an order contains the gift product.

Configure the workflow to:

Trigger when an order is created.
Check whether the order contains the selected gift product.
Add a customer tag, such as gift-claimed, to the customer.

This tag identifies customers who have already received the gift.

Customers must log in and be associated with a Shopify customer profile for the tag to be applied reliably.

","Step 1 — Tag customers who have received the gift","cms5qsvsi013k2us1kv6w57ra","discount-stack","Can Ego Gift Discounts Stack with Shopify Discounts?","Learn how Ego gift discounts work with Shopify discounts and what combination settings are required for both offers to apply together.",[3243],"Aug 4, 2026","2026-07-29T07:07:43.986Z","2026-08-04T03:29:19.681Z",[],{"_189":3244,"_227":3245,"_229":3246},"discount-combination-setup","

Yes. Ego Free Gift discounts are configured to combine with other discounts by default.

However, the other Shopify discount must also allow discount combinations. Check its Combinations settings in Shopify Admin to make sure both discounts can apply at the same time.

For example, a customer may qualify for:

A free gift from an Ego Free Gift campaign.
A 10% Shopify order discount.

Both can apply to the same order, as long as the 10% Shopify discount is also configured to combine with product discount and order discount in its Combinations settings. The reason why both product discount and order discount should be checked is because Ego Free Gift discount is considered to be both.

","Discount combination setup","cmse4ejrn03qk2us1xnqst5ei","why-upsells-not-show-in-checkout-page-thank-you-page","Why Are Upsells Not Shown in Checkout Page/Thank you Page?","Possible reasons why your upsell campaigns are not displayed as configured.",[3255,3256,3257],"2026-08-04T03:50:39.251Z","2026-08-04T04:11:46.086Z",[],{"_189":3260,"_227":3263,"_229":3262},{"_189":3260,"_227":3261,"_229":3262},{"_189":266,"_227":3258,"_229":3259},"

Check that:

The campaign status is Active.
The campaign schedule has started.
The customer or order meets all campaign conditions.
The offered products are active and available.
The app block was added to the correct page.
The Checkout page is being tested on a Shopify Plus store.

Contact our support team if the offer is still not displayed after completing these checks.

","Still not showing?","upsells-on-checkout-page","

The Thank You Page offer will not appear until you add the corresponding Ego app block.

To add the block:

From Shopify Admin, go to Online Store > Edit Theme.
Open the Checkout and accounts editor.
Select the Checkout or Thank you page you want to customize.
Click Add app block.
Select the Ego upsell block.
Position the block where you want the offer to appear.
Click Save.

After adding the block, confirm that the related campaign is active and that the test order meets its configured conditions.

","Upsells on Checkout Page","

Upsell blocks on the Checkout page are available only to stores on the Shopify Plus plan.

If your store is not on Shopify Plus, the offer cannot be displayed during checkout. Consider using a Product Page, Cart Page, Cart Drawer, Pop-up, Post-purchase, or Thank You Page offer instead.

If your store is on Shopify Plus, make sure the Ego upsell app block has been added to the Checkout page. For details on how to add the block, please view the section below.

","ced9b99d059b82145b81e2149","Campaign performance, gift revenue, AOV comparisons — and how the numbers are measured.",[3270,3271,3272],[3268,3269],"upsell-campaigns","create-your-first-campaign",{"_189":3279,"_227":3280,"_229":3281},{"_189":3276,"_227":3277,"_229":3278},{"_189":3273,"_227":3274,"_229":3275},"how-the-numbers-are-measured","

Metrics are based on paid orders: an order counts as a campaign order when it contains items added by a gift or upsell campaign. Numbers appear in near real time after payment.

Caveats for accounting: revenue is gross at time of payment — refunds and cancellations are not deducted — and multi-currency stores may see slightly approximate conversions. Use Shopify's own reports as the source of truth for finance; use these analytics to compare campaigns.

","How the numbers are measured","store-level-metrics","

The Analytics page has four tabs — Overview, Free Gift, Upsell and Bundle — a date range picker (e.g. Last 30 days) and a vs previous period comparison.

$\"Analytics$

Overview / Store & Campaign — Total Orders Revenue, Orders, Store AOV, Campaign's AOV, Non-campaign's AOV and the AOV difference, plus a revenue chart and how much of your store revenue the app accounts for.
Free Gift — Orders with Gift, Gift Revenue, Gift AOV, Non-gift AOV.
Upsell — Orders with Upsell, Upsell Revenue, Upsell AOV, Non-upsell AOV.
Bundle — Orders with Bundle, Bundle Revenue, Campaign AOV and the bundle funnel (View → Add to cart → Order).

The number that matters most: Campaign AOV vs. Non-campaign AOV. If orders that touched a campaign average $85 while others average $60, your offers are adding real value — not just giving margin away.

Orders matching more than one type are counted once, in priority order Gift > Upsell > Bundle, to avoid double-counting.

","Store-level metrics","per-campaign-metrics","

The Campaign list has a tab per campaign family (Free gift, Upsell, Bundles) and shows each campaign's Status, Widget health (e.g. Shown on storefront with the last time it was seen), campaign type and start date. Use the Action icons to start/pause, edit, duplicate or delete a campaign.

$\"Campaign$

The Dashboard Analytics card shows the headline totals: Offer Revenue, Accepted Orders and Offer's AOV. Duplicate a campaign, change one variable (threshold, gift, message), and compare results — that's your built-in A/B test.

","Per-campaign metrics","c79b85c567722ae27740b717a","placement-translations-settings","Placement, Translations & Settings","Pin widgets to an exact spot on your theme, translate storefront copy, and manage shop-level settings.",[3291,3292,3293],[3289,3290],"Widgets & Display","widget-catalog","bundle-deal-display",{"_189":3299,"_227":3300,"_229":3301},{"_189":2956,"_227":3297,"_229":3298},{"_189":3294,"_227":3295,"_229":3296},"settings","

Settings holds shop-level options:

Bundle setting — show or hide the theme's Add to cart & Buy it now buttons on products with a Bundle deal. If they stay visible, pick the exact button with Pick on storefront.
Storefront API — the token storefront widgets use to look up products. Regenerate it if it was deleted or stopped working.
Custom code — add custom CSS/JS for the widgets; turn it off to keep the code without applying it.

$\"Settings$ ","App settings","

Open Translations to translate the storefront copy for each language your store sells in. Translation by offers covers the gift offer and each upsell placement; Translation by widgets covers the shared widget copy. A badge shows how many texts need an update.

$\"Translations$ ","Translations","placement","

Widgets are placed automatically (Auto-detect). If one lands in the wrong spot on your theme, open Placement and click Pick on storefront next to the widget, then click the element it should sit next to.

Available for the cart upsell widget, reward bar, product page widget, Bundle widget and announcement bar. For product-page widgets, choose which product the picker opens on.

$\"Placement$ ","Placement — choose where widgets appear","cdc6f7e9cac598e1faf9a1f4f","The Widget Catalog","The Widget Catalog provides ready-to-use storefront widgets for your Free Gift and Upsell campaigns.",[3308,3309,3310,3311],[3202,3307],"cart-theme-integration",{"_189":3321,"_227":3322,"_229":3323},{"_189":3318,"_227":3319,"_229":3320},{"_189":3315,"_227":3316,"_229":3317},{"_189":3312,"_227":3313,"_229":3314},"bundle-widget","

The Bundle tab has one widget that styles every Bundle deal on your product pages. Choose a template, border and spacing under Layout, then fine-tune Color, Typography and Custom style (CSS). One setting applies to every bundle campaign.

$\"Bundle$ ","Bundle widget","upsell-widgets","

Upsell widgets recommend additional products at different points in the customer journey.

Cross-sell Pop-up

Display complementary product recommendations in a pop-up.

Best for:

Recommending related products after an Add to cart action.
Presenting a simple, focused cross-sell offer.
Increasing cart value without leaving the current page.

$\"Cross-sell$

Add-ons Pop-up

Display optional add-on products in a pop-up.

Best for:

Accessories.
Product upgrades.
Optional services or complementary items.

Customers can select one or more add-ons before continuing.

$\"Add-ons$

Cross-sell Product Page

Recommend complementary products directly on the product page.

Best for:

Related product recommendations.
Accessories and matching products.
Encouraging additional purchases before the main product is added to the cart.

$\"Cross-sell$

Frequently Bought Together Product Page

Display a frequently bought together bundle directly on the product page.

Best for:

Product bundles.
Multi-product combinations.
Increasing the value of the initial purchase.

Customers can select included products and add them together.

$\"Frequently$

Add-ons Product Page

Display optional products or services on the product page.

Best for:

Product accessories.
Extra services.
Optional upgrades or customizations.

Customers can choose add-ons before adding the main product to the cart.

$\"Add-ons$

Cart Drawer

Display upsell products at the top of the slide-out cart drawer.

Best for:

Stores using a cart drawer.
Last-minute recommendations before checkout.
Keeping customers within the current shopping flow.

$\"Cart$

Cart Page

Display upsell products on the cart page.

Best for:

Recommending products before checkout.
Stores using a full cart page.
Displaying several offers in a product carousel or grid.

$\"Cart$

","Upsell widgets","free-gift-widgets","

Free Gift widgets help customers discover promotions, track their progress, and claim available rewards.

Milestone Bar

Display multiple reward milestones and show customers how close they are to unlocking each reward.

Best for:

Tiered cart value campaigns.
Tiered cart quantity campaigns.
Promotions with multiple rewards.

Example: Free gift at $50, order discount at $80, and free shipping at $100.

$\"Milestone$

Single Milestone Bar

Highlight one reward and show customers their progress toward unlocking it.

Best for:

Campaigns with one clear reward threshold.
Simple cart value or cart quantity promotions.
Keeping the promotion focused and easy to understand.

Example: Spend $100 more to receive a free gift.

$\"Single$

Notification

Display a notification when customers qualify for a gift or when the campaign status changes.

Best for:

Confirming that a reward has been unlocked.
Reminding customers that a gift is available.
Providing immediate campaign feedback.

Example: Your cart qualifies for a free gift.

$\"Notification$

Announcement Bar

Promote a Free Gift campaign through a storefront announcement bar.

Best for:

Increasing campaign awareness.
Highlighting limited-time promotions.
Showing campaign conditions before customers begin shopping.

Example: Free gift with every order over $50.

$\"Announcement$

Product Page Widget

Display Free Gift campaign information directly on eligible product pages.

Best for:

Product-based gift campaigns.
Buy X Get Y offers.
Showing gift options before customers add a product to the cart.

Customers can view the promotion and interact with eligible gift products directly from the product page.

$\"Product$

Promotion Badge

Add a promotional badge to product images to draw attention to products included in a Free Gift campaign.

Best for:

Highlighting eligible products.
Communicating special offers in product grids.
Improving campaign visibility on product and collection pages.

Example: Free Gift Hot Sale.

$\"Promotion$

Offer on Slide Cart

Display Free Gift campaigns inside the cart drawer.

Best for:

Stores using a slide-out cart.
Showing gift eligibility without redirecting customers to the cart page.
Encouraging customers to add more products before checkout.

$\"Offer$

Deal of the Day

Display selected Free Gift campaigns as a list of daily or limited-time offers.

Best for:

Featuring multiple active campaigns.
Running daily promotions.
Highlighting time-sensitive discounts and gifts.

Each deal can include campaign information, gift details, and a countdown timer.

$\"Deal$

","Free Gift widgets","how-to-add-a-widget"," $\"Widget$

The Widgets page holds the global appearance of each storefront element. Each widget exists once per store: style it once and every campaign using it inherits the design — your storefront stays consistent no matter how many campaigns run.

To style a widget:

Open Widgets from the app navigation.
Select the Free Gift, Upsell or Bundle tab.
Click Customize on the widget you want to style.
Adjust its settings, colors and content while watching the live mobile/desktop preview.
Click Save.

Upsell widget editors also show a Status card (In use / Not in use) and which placement the widget targets. Offer on slide cart and Deal of the day let you choose which campaigns to show (up to 10).

The available settings may vary depending on the selected widget.

Before adding a widget, make sure the corresponding campaign has been created and activated.

$\"Widget$

","How to add a Widget","ce7f78350de26500e93e68b88","Bundle Display, Styling & Checkout","Show the Bundle widget on your theme, style it, and understand how bundle prices apply at checkout.",[3331,3332,3333,3334,3335],[3330,3283],"Bundle Campaigns","bundle-deal-setup",{"_189":3348,"_227":3349,"_229":3350},{"_189":3345,"_227":3346,"_229":3347},{"_189":3342,"_227":3343,"_229":3344},{"_189":3339,"_227":3340,"_229":3341},{"_189":3336,"_227":3337,"_229":3338},"good-to-know","

One Bundle widget shows per product page. If several bundles match the same product, the one created first is shown.
Track results on Analytics → Bundle: Orders with Bundle, Bundle Revenue and the View → Add to cart → Order funnel.

","Good to know","pricing-at-checkout","

Bundle discounts are applied automatically through the app's Ego Free Gift Discount — no code to enter.
Each bundle item stays a separate line in cart and checkout, with the discount applied.
Only items added through the bundle widget get the bundle price. If a shopper breaks the group (removes an item or changes a quantity), the group goes back to full price.
Inventory is tracked per product as usual — there are no bundle SKUs.
Make sure your other Shopify discounts can combine with Product and Order discounts, otherwise Shopify may prefer them over the bundle discount.

","How bundle prices apply","style","

Go to Widgets → Bundle → Customize. Layout (template, border, spacing), Color, Typography and Custom style apply to every bundle on your store.

$\"Bundle$ ","Style the widget","theme-buttons","

In Settings → Bundle setting, choose whether the theme's Add to cart & Buy it now buttons are shown or hidden on bundle products. Hide detects the buttons automatically; if they stay visible, pick the exact button on your storefront.

$\"Settings$ ","Theme Add to cart & Buy it now buttons","show-on-theme","

Make sure the Ego Free Gift app embed is on (see Installing & Activating).
On Online Store 2.0 themes, add the Ego Bundle app block to the product section in the theme editor.
For other themes or page builders, paste the snippet from the bundle's Other settings.
If the widget sits in the wrong spot, use Placement → Bundle widget → Pick on storefront.

$\"Placement$ ","Show the widget on your theme","cb7640eb0caa08e37884897f6","Set Up a Bundle Deal","Configure bundle info, visibility, offer tiers, add-ons, eligible products, variants and pricing.",[3358,3359,3360,3361,3362],"2026-10-08T05:02:16.842Z",[3357,3290],"bundle-deal-overview",{"_189":3375,"_227":3376,"_229":3377},{"_189":3372,"_227":3373,"_229":3374},{"_189":3369,"_227":3370,"_229":3371},{"_189":3366,"_227":3367,"_229":3368},{"_189":3363,"_227":3364,"_229":3365},"5-activate","

New bundles are saved as Draft. Turn on Active in the Status card and click Save. When you edit a live bundle, carts that already contain it keep their current lines.

","5. Activate","4-eligible-products-variants-pricing-and-other","

Eligible bundle products — off by default, so tiers are a pure quantity break on the current product. Turn it on to let shoppers fill the units with other products (all products, same as deal visibility, all except selected, specific products or collections).
Variants — let customers choose a different variant for each item, hide the theme variant picker, and style the picker with swatches.
Pricing — show prices per item, use the compare-at price, hide decimals, round prices, or update the theme's product price.
Other — skip the cart and go straight to checkout, limit the bundle to selected Markets, exclude B2B customers, zoom offer images on hover, and copy the <div data-ego-hybrid-bundle></div> snippet for custom placement or page builders.

$\"Pricing$

","4. Eligible products, variants, pricing and other","3-highlight-and-add-ons","

Highlight — a badge on the tier as Text (e.g. Most Popular), Icon or Countdown, with style, effect (None/Blinking) and position.
Other settings — Add offer image, Add gift (single gift or a multiple-gift selector), Add upsell (selected or complementary products) and Add shipping discount. Alternative product offers support the offer image only.

$\"Highlight,$ ","3. Highlight and add-ons","2-offers-tiers","

A bundle can have maximum 10 offers. Click Add more and pick the offer type; drag the chips to reorder.

$\"Add$

Quantity break — quantity plus a Percentage or Fixed amount discount (fixed amounts are taken off each item).
Buy X get Y — BUY and GET quantities with their own discount; under Customer gets choose BOGO (Same item) or BXGY (Different items).
Product bundle — row 1 is always the viewed product; add up to 9 more product rows with quantity, discount and label, and choose a List, Row or Grid layout.
Alternative product — exactly one other product with its own quantity and discount.

Offer type	Suggested campaign
Quantity break	Buy 2 Get 10% off, Buy 3 Get 20% off, Buy 4 Get 30% off
Buy X Get Y	Buy 1 item → get another product at 50% off Buy 2 items → get the third one for free
Product bundle	Buy a combo 1 Shirt + 1 Pant + 1 Hat at 20% off each item
Alternative product	Try another product at 30% off

Every offer also has a Title, Sub-title, Mark as out of stock, a Tag and Selected by default (one offer only).

$\"Offer$

","2. Offers (tiers)","1-bundle-info-visibility-and-timeline","

Bundle name — for your own reference only.
Title / Sub-title — the heading shoppers see above the tiers (e.g. BUY MORE SAVE MORE!).
Visibility — show the bundle on all products, all products except selected, specific products, or products in selected collections. The main product is always the product page being viewed.
Active timeline — start date/time and an optional end time.

The Preview on the right renders the widget for the product you pick under Product previewing.

$\"Bundle$ ","1. Bundle info, visibility and timeline","cfa2777e34de1041293130b15","Bundle Deal Overview & Templates","What a Bundle deal is, the six starting templates, and where bundles live in the app.",[3383,3384,3385],[3330,3290],{"_189":3392,"_227":3393,"_229":3394},{"_189":3389,"_227":3390,"_229":3391},{"_189":3386,"_227":3387,"_229":3388},"templates","

Template	What you get
Quantity breaks for the same product	1 / 2 / 3 units of the viewed product with growing discounts.
Buy X, get Y (BXGY) deal	Buy 1 · Buy 2 get 1 free · Buy 3 get 2 free.
Quantity breaks for different products	Shoppers mix variants or products across the units; a tier can add a free gift and free shipping.
Complete the bundle	The viewed product plus matching products, each discounted.
Free Gift & Upsell	Quantity tiers plus a bundle tier with an upsell add-on and a free gift.
Sold out	Shows how tiers look when marked as out of stock.

$\"Bundle$ $\"Bundle$ ","The templates","create-a-bundle","

Go to Campaign and click Create campaign.
Open the Bundle tab and select Bundle deal.
Choose a template — you can fully customize it later.

Your bundles are listed on the Bundles tab of the campaign list, with their status and whether the widget is being shown on your storefront.

$\"Bundles$ ","Create a bundle","what-is-a-bundle-deal","

A Bundle deal shows a set of offer tiers on the product page — e.g. Buy 1, Buy 2 get 1 free, Buy 3 get 2 free — so shoppers can pick a bigger deal before adding to cart. One widget can mix:

Quantity break — more units, bigger discount.
Buy X get Y — BOGO on the same item or BXGY with different items.
Product bundle — the viewed product plus other products sold together.
Alternative product — offer a different product as one of the tiers.

Each tier can also carry a free gift, an upsell, a shipping discount or an offer image.

","What is a Bundle deal?","c6fb91a2ac1829181e1ca536b","Upsell Display","Instructions on how to display the upsell campaigns on your store.",[3401,3402,3403],[3289,3193],"Upsell Campaigns",{"_189":3410,"_227":3411,"_229":3412},{"_189":3407,"_227":3408,"_229":3409},{"_189":3404,"_227":3405,"_229":3406},"displaying-the-widget-on-the-post-purchase-page","

Navigate to Shopify Settings > Checkout > Post-purchase page and choose Ego Free Gift.

Need help? Reach out to us via live chat anytime for further assistance.

","Displaying the widget on the Post Purchase page","displaying-the-widget-on-the-thank-you-page-checkout-page","

Open the Theme Editor > Checkout and customer accounts.

Add the Ego Cart Block app block and drag it to the desired position.

","Displaying the widget on the Thank you page/Checkout page","essential-steps-to-display-the-upsell-widget","

Make sure the campaign is Active within the app.

$\"Campaign$

Ego Free Gift app needs to be enabled in App Embeds of your live theme.

You only need to fulfill the 2 above steps for showing the upsell offers in the product page, popups and in carts. For remaining placements, please see below instructions.

Widget in the wrong spot? Open Placement in the app to pick exactly where the cart upsell widget appears. See Placement, Translations & Settings.

","Essential steps to display the upsell widget","cmrvsfcwc02hc2umpfhs0j8yb","post-purchase-upsell","Post-purchase Upsell","Display a limited-time offer after checkout and let customers add another product to their existing order without starting a new checkout.",[3420,3421],"2026-07-22T07:55:30.444Z",[],{"_189":3425,"_227":3426,"_229":3427},{"_189":3422,"_227":3423,"_229":3424},"campaign-setting","

The upsell editor is a single page: Basic information, Offer, Content and Settings on the left, the Status card and a live Preview on the right. Turn on Active in the Status card and click Save to publish.

Creating a Post-purchase Upsell campaign consists of four parts:

Basic information
Offer
Content
Settings

1. Basic information

Configure the internal campaign name and campaign schedule.

1.1. Offer name

Enter a name to identify the campaign in the app.

The offer name is used for internal management only and will not be visible to customers.

1.2. Start date and time

Set the date and time when the campaign should begin.

The campaign will become available for eligible post-purchase orders when the scheduled start time is reached.

1.3. End date and time

Enable Set end date and time when you want the campaign to stop automatically.

This is useful for limited-time promotions, seasonal campaigns, or offers tied to a specific sales period. Leave this option disabled when the campaign should continue running until you manually deactivate it.

$\"Post-purchase$

2. Offer

Configure the trigger products, offered products, and discount for each step in the post-purchase sequence.

The Offer section starts with First offer. Click the + button next to it to add the next step, then use the tabs to switch between:

First offer: The First offer is the initial product recommendation shown after checkout. Use it for the main post-purchase opportunity you want customers to see first.
Second offer: The Second offer is an additional recommendation that can appear after the first offer, depending on the configured offer flow. Use it to present another relevant product after the customer responds to the first offer.

Downsell offer: The Downsell offer is an alternative offer that can be shown when the customer declines an earlier offer.
It is typically used for:
- A lower-priced product.
- A smaller product version.
- A reduced discount.
- A simpler accessory or add-on.
The downsell should provide a lower-commitment alternative to the original offer.

Each tab can be configured separately.

2.1. Trigger

Choose which products in the completed order make the selected offer eligible to appear.

All products: The offer can appear after any completed order.
Specific products: The offer appears when the order includes one or more selected products.
Products in specific collections: The offer appears when the order includes a product from one or more selected collections.

Use specific products or collections when the offer is relevant only to certain purchases.

2.2. Offers

Choose how the product displayed in the selected offer step is determined.

- Manual selection

Select the exact product you want to offer.

Click Browse to search for and add a product. This option gives you direct control over the product shown at that stage.

- Basic AI — automated recommendations

Allow the app to automatically choose a relevant product based on the completed order.

Use this option when you want recommendations to be generated automatically instead of assigning products manually.

2.3. Discount

Discount type

Select the type of discount applied to the offer products.

The available configuration are:

No discount: Offer products are added at their regular price.
Percentage/Fixed amount: Offer products are added with a discount.

When a discount type is selected, enter the corresponding value in the Discount amount field. The amount is based on your store’s currency.

If you configure Fixed amount discount type, there is another option to consider: Apply discount to each eligible item in an order

Enabled: Each eligible item receives the full discount amount.
Disabled: The configured discount amount is distributed across all eligible items in the order.

Discount code

Enter the name that identifies the upsell discount.

This code will be visible to customers when the discount is applied. Use a short and understandable name, such as CART OFFER.

3. Content

Customize the text and actions displayed on the post-purchase offer page.

Content can be configured separately for:

First offer
Second offer
Downsell offer

3.1. Header

Title

Enter the main heading displayed above the offer.

Use a clear message that tells customers they can still add the product to their existing order.

The title supports the {{discount}} template. When used, it is replaced with the discount configured for the selected offer.

Sub-title

Enter the supporting message displayed below the title.

Use it to explain that the product can be added quickly without another checkout.

3.2. Button

Pay now button

Enter the label displayed on the primary button customers use to accept the offer.

The product price may be shown automatically alongside the configured text.

Decline button

Enter the label displayed on the secondary button customers use to reject the offer.

When a downsell is configured, declining an earlier offer may take the customer to the downsell instead of ending the offer flow immediately.

3.3. Announcement bar

Use the announcement bar to display urgency or other important information above the product offer.

Announcement

Enter the message shown in the announcement bar.

The field supports the {{timer}} template. Place this template where you want the countdown timer to appear.

Timer (minutes)

Enter how long the countdown should run.

The configured number determines the duration displayed through the {{timer}} template.

When timer runs out

Choose what happens when the countdown reaches zero.

- Restart

Resets the countdown and keeps the offer visible.

Use this when the timer is intended to create urgency without removing the offer.

- Hide offer

Closes the offer when the timer expires.

This has the same effect as the customer declining the offer.

- Show downsell

Skips to the configured Downsell offer when the timer expires.

Use this to automatically present a lower-commitment alternative after the customer does not accept the initial offer in time.

This option requires a Downsell offer to be configured.

- Do nothing

Hides the countdown but keeps the current offer visible.

Customers can still accept or decline the offer after the timer disappears.

$\"Post-purchase$

4. Settings

Control campaign priority, product behavior, the number of offers displayed, and the widget position.

4.1. Priority

Enter a priority number to determine the order in which campaigns are evaluated.

Campaigns with lower numbers are evaluated first. For example, a campaign with priority 1 runs before campaigns with priority 2 or 3.

4.2. Allow multiple quantities

Enable this setting to let customers add more than one unit of an offered product.

Leave it disabled when each offered product should be added only once through the upsell widget.

4.3. Don’t show products that are already in the cart

Enable this setting to hide an offered product when the same product is already present in the customer’s cart.

This avoids displaying duplicate recommendations and keeps the offer relevant to the customer’s current order.

4.4. Randomize offer product order

Enable this setting to display offer products in a different order instead of always following the original selection order.

This can give multiple products more balanced visibility when a campaign contains several recommendations.

4.5. Limit offered products shown

Enable this setting to restrict how many offer products are displayed in the widget at one time.

Use it when the campaign contains many products but you want to keep the cart experience focused and easy to browse.

4.6. Paginate products

Enable pagination to divide offered products into multiple pages or groups within the widget. In short, it limits how many products are shown to the customers at one time, in one widget frame.

This option is useful when the campaign includes more products than can comfortably fit in the available cart space.

$\"Post-purchase$

","Campaign setting","what-is-a-post-purchase-upsell-campaign","

A Post-purchase Upsell campaign displays an additional offer after the customer completes checkout but before they reach the final order confirmation page.

Customers can review the offered product, select a variant, and add it to the existing order with one click. They do not need to re-enter their payment or shipping information.

You can create a sequence that includes:

A First offer shown immediately after checkout.
A Second offer shown after the first offer, depending on the campaign flow.
A Downsell offer shown as an alternative when the customer declines an earlier offer.

This campaign is useful for recommending complementary products, lower-priced alternatives, accessories, or other relevant additions while purchase intent is still high.

You can control:

Which purchased products trigger each offer.
Which product is presented at each stage.
Whether a discount is applied.
The content shown on the offer page.
How the countdown timer behaves.
The order in which multiple campaigns are evaluated.

","What is a Post-purchase Upsell campaign?","cmrvriqkv02gk2umps0pujvp8","checkout-page","Checkout Page","Display relevant product recommendations during checkout and encourage customers to add more items before completing their purchase.",[3435,3436],"2026-07-22T07:30:08.527Z",[],{"_189":3438,"_227":3439,"_229":3440},{"_189":3422,"_227":3437,"_229":3424},"

Creating a Checkout Page Upsell campaign consists of four parts:

Basic information
Offer
Content
Settings

1. Basic information

Configure the campaign name and schedule.

1.1. Offer name

Enter a name to identify the campaign in the app.

The offer name is used for internal management only and will not be visible to customers.

1.2. Start date and time

Set the date and time when the campaign should begin.

The campaign will become available to eligible customers when the scheduled start time is reached.

1.3. End date and time

Enable Set end date and time when you want the campaign to stop automatically.

$\"Checkout$

2. Offer

Configure the products that trigger the campaign, the products customers receive as recommendations, and any discount applied to them.

2.1. Trigger

Choose which products must be present in the customer’s cart for the upsell offer to appear.

All products: The campaign can be triggered by any product added to the cart.
Specific products: The campaign appears when the cart contains one or more selected products.
Specific collections: The campaign appears when the cart contains a product from one or more selected collections.

Use specific products or collections when the offered products are relevant only to certain purchases.

2.2. Offers

Choose how the products displayed in the upsell widget are selected.

Manual selection

Select the exact products you want to recommend.

Click Browse to search for and add offer products. This option gives you full control over which products customers see.

Basic AI — automated recommendations

Allow the app to automatically recommend relevant products. The data is taken from the app Shopify Search & Discovery.

2.3. Discount

Configure whether customers receive a discount when they add an offered product.

Discount type

Select the type of discount applied to the offer products.

The available configuration are:

No discount: Offer products are added at their regular price.
Percentage/Fixed amount: Offer products are added with a discount.

When a discount type is selected, enter the corresponding value in the Discount amount field. The amount is based on your store’s currency.

If you configure Fixed amount discount type, there is another option to consider: Apply discount to each eligible item in an order

Enabled: Each eligible item receives the full discount amount.
Disabled: The configured discount amount is distributed across all eligible items in the order.

Discount code

Enter the name that identifies the upsell discount.

This code will be visible to customers in the cart when the discount is applied. Use a short and understandable name, such as CART OFFER.

3. Content

Customize the customer-facing text displayed in the checkout upsell widget.

3.1. Title

Enter the heading displayed above the recommended products.

This setting overrides the default title configured for the checkout widget.

Examples:

You may also like
Complete your order
Add something extra
Recommended for you

3.2. Sub-title

Enter the supporting message displayed below the title.

The sub-title supports the {{discount}} template. When used, the template is automatically replaced with the campaign’s configured discount.

$\"Checkout$

4. Settings

Control campaign priority, product behavior, the number of offers displayed, and the widget position.

4.1. Priority

Enter a priority number to determine the order in which campaigns are evaluated.

Campaigns with lower numbers are evaluated first. For example, a campaign with priority 1 runs before campaigns with priority 2 or 3.

4.2. Allow multiple quantities

Enable this setting to let customers add more than one unit of an offered product.

Leave it disabled when each offered product should be added only once through the upsell widget.

4.3. Hide products that are already bought

Enable this setting to hide an offered product when the same product is already present in the customer’s cart.

This avoids displaying duplicate recommendations and keeps the offer relevant to the customer’s current order.

4.4. Randomize offer product order

Enable this setting to display offer products in a different order instead of always following the original selection order.

This can give multiple products more balanced visibility when a campaign contains several recommendations.

4.5. Limit offered products shown

Enable this setting to restrict how many offer products are displayed in the widget at one time.

Use it when the campaign contains many products but you want to keep the cart experience focused and easy to browse.

4.6. Paginate products

Enable pagination to divide offered products into multiple pages or groups within the widget. In short, it limits how many products are shown to the customers at one time, in one widget frame.

This option is useful when the campaign includes more products than can comfortably fit in the available cart space.

","what-is-a-checkout-page-upsell-campaign","

A Checkout Page Upsell campaign displays product recommendations directly in the Shopify checkout.

It allows customers to review recommended products, select a variant, and add an item without leaving the checkout process.

Use this campaign to suggest complementary products, practical add-ons, or low-friction impulse purchases at the final stage of the customer journey.

You can control:

Which products trigger the campaign.
Which products are recommended.
Whether an upsell discount is applied.
The customer-facing title and sub-title.
The display order and number of offered products.

Note: Checkout Page Upsell requires a compatible Shopify checkout customization setup, which is only available for Shopify Plus stores.

","What is a Checkout Page Upsell campaign?","cmrvm1ngn02fi2umptfy1hlck","pop-up-upsell","Product Page and Pop-up Upsell","Display product recommendations in product pages and popup at key moments in the shopping journey.",[3448,3449],"2026-07-22T04:56:53.255Z",[],{"_189":3452,"_227":3453,"_229":3454},{"_189":3422,"_227":3450,"_229":3451},"

Product page and Pop-up are separate campaign types in the Create campaign picker. Creating either consists of four parts:

Basic information
Offer
Content
Settings

1. Basic information

Configure the type of offer and when the campaign runs.

1.1. Offer type

Product page campaigns offer Cross-sell, Frequently bought together and Product add-on. Pop-up campaigns offer Cross-sell and Product add-on.

$\"Pop-up$

Select how the products will be presented to customers in the popup.

Cross-sell

Displays complementary products as individual recommendations.

Customers can review each recommended product, select a variant, and add products to the cart separately.

Use this offer type when you want to recommend optional products related to the customer’s current purchase.

Example:
Recommend a phone case and screen protector after a customer adds a phone to the cart.

Frequently bought together (Product page only)

Displays the trigger product together with several related products in one offer.

Customers can select the products they want and add all selected items to the cart using a single button.

Use this offer type when products are commonly purchased together or form a complete set.

Example:
Offer a camera, memory card, and camera bag as a frequently bought together combination.

Product add-on

Displays optional extras related to the trigger product.

Use this offer type to recommend accessories, upgrades, supporting products, or other additions that improve the main product purchase.

Example:
Offer gift wrapping or a care product as an add-on to the selected item.

1.2. Offer name

Enter a name to identify the campaign in the app.

The offer name is used for internal management only and will not be visible to customers.

1.3. Start date and time

Set the date and time when the campaign should begin.

The campaign will become available to eligible customers when the scheduled start time is reached.

1.4. End date and time

Enable Set end date and time when you want the campaign to stop automatically.

$\"Product$

2. Offer

Configure the products that trigger the campaign, the products customers receive as recommendations, and any discount applied to them.

2.1. Trigger

Choose which products must be present in the customer’s cart for the upsell offer to appear.

All products: The campaign can be triggered by any product added to the cart.
Specific products: The campaign appears when the cart contains one or more selected products.
Specific collections: The campaign appears when the cart contains a product from one or more selected collections.

Use specific products or collections when the offered products are relevant only to certain purchases.

2.2. Offers

Choose how the products displayed in the upsell widget are selected.

Manual selection

Select the exact products you want to recommend.

Click Browse to search for and add offer products. This option gives you full control over which products customers see.

Basic AI — automated recommendations

Allow the app to automatically recommend relevant products. The data is taken from the app Shopify Search & Discovery.

2.3. Discount

Configure whether customers receive a discount when they add an offered product.

Discount type

Select the type of discount applied to the offer products.

The available configuration are:

No discount: Offer products are added at their regular price.
Percentage/Fixed amount: Offer products are added with a discount.

When a discount type is selected, enter the corresponding value in the Discount amount field. The amount is based on your store’s currency.

Discount code

Enter the name that identifies the upsell discount.

This code will be visible to customers in the cart when the discount is applied. Use a short and understandable name, such as CART OFFER.

2.4. Apply discount

Choose when the configured discount remains valid.

Always: The discount continues to apply to the offered product after the trigger product is removed from the cart.
Only if trigger product is in cart: The discount applies only while a qualifying trigger product remains in the cart.

The second option helps prevent customers from removing the qualifying product and purchasing only the discounted upsell item.

$\"Pop-up$

3. Content

Customize the customer-facing text displayed in the popup.

3.1. Title

Enter the main heading displayed at the top of the popup.

The title should briefly introduce the recommendation or explain the relationship between the products.

Examples:

You may also like
Frequently bought together (Product page only)
Complete your order
Add something extra

3.2. Sub-title

Enter the supporting message displayed under the popup title.

Use the sub-title to explain the offer, highlight its value, or encourage customers to consider the recommended products.

Examples:

Why not add a few more stylish picks?
Complete the set with these matching items.
Add these essentials before you continue.
Everything you need in one order.

3.3. Button text

Enter the label displayed on the button customers use to add the offered products to their cart.

The button behavior depends on the selected offer type:

For individual recommendations, customers use the button to add an offered product.
For a combined offer, customers use the button to add all selected products together.

Keep the text short and action-oriented.

Examples:

Add
Add to cart
Add selected items
Add bundle to cart
Get this offer

Use the preview panel to check how the title, sub-title, and button text appear to customers.

4. Settings

Control campaign priority, product behavior, the number of offers displayed, and the widget position.

4.1. Priority

Enter a priority number to determine the order in which campaigns are evaluated.

Campaigns with lower numbers are evaluated first. For example, a campaign with priority 1 runs before campaigns with priority 2 or 3.

4.2. Allow multiple quantities

Enable this setting to let customers add more than one unit of an offered product.

Leave it disabled when each offered product should be added only once through the upsell widget.

4.3. Don’t show products that are already in the cart

Enable this setting to hide an offered product when the same product is already present in the customer’s cart.

This avoids displaying duplicate recommendations and keeps the offer relevant to the customer’s current order.

4.4. Randomize offer product order

Enable this setting to display offer products in a different order instead of always following the original selection order.

This can give multiple products more balanced visibility when a campaign contains several recommendations.

4.5. Limit offered products shown

Enable this setting to restrict how many offer products are displayed in the widget at one time.

Use it when the campaign contains many products but you want to keep the cart experience focused and easy to browse.

Limit total number of upsells can be added (Pop-up)

Cap how many offered products a customer can add from the pop-up.

4.6. Paginate products

Enable pagination to divide offered products into multiple pages or groups within the widget. In short, it limits how many products are shown to the customers at one time, in one widget frame.

This option is useful when the campaign includes more products than can comfortably fit in the available cart space.

4.7. Display setting

Choose where and when the popup appears.

Product page

Displays the popup after the customer clicks the Add to cart button on a product page.

Use this setting to present relevant recommendations immediately after the customer adds the trigger product.

Cart page

Displays the popup after the customer clicks the Checkout button on the cart page.

The popup appears before the customer continues to checkout, giving them one more opportunity to add recommended products.

4.8. Display frequency - Popup upsell only

Choose how often the popup can be shown to the same customer.

When the offer is not in cart: Shows the popup when none of the offered products are currently in the customer’s cart. Once an offered product is added, the popup will not appear again unless that product is removed.
After 1 hour: After the popup is displayed, it can appear again once one hour has passed.
After 24 hours: After the popup is displayed, it can appear again once 24 hours have passed.
Always show: Shows the popup whenever the customer performs the selected trigger action, even if they have already seen it before.
Only once: Shows the popup only once to each customer.

Choose a lower frequency when you want to avoid interrupting customers repeatedly. Use Always show only when the offer is important enough to appear every time the trigger action occurs.

$\"Pop-up$

","Campaign Setting","what-are-product-page-and-popup-upsell-campaigns","

Product Page Upsell and Popup Upsell campaigns help you recommend complementary products, frequently bought together items, or optional add-ons based on the product a customer is viewing or purchasing.

Both campaign types use the same offer configuration, including:

Trigger products or collections.
Recommended products.
Offer type.
Upsell discount.
Customer-facing content.
Product display rules.

The main difference is how the offer appears to customers.

Product Page Upsell

A Product Page Upsell campaign displays product recommendations directly on the product page.

Customers can view and add recommended products while browsing the trigger product, without waiting for another action or leaving the page.

Use this campaign when you want the offer to remain visible as part of the product page shopping experience.

Popup Upsell

A Popup Upsell campaign displays product recommendations in a popup after the customer performs a selected action.

The popup can appear:

After the customer clicks the Add to cart button on a product page.
After the customer clicks the Checkout button on the cart page.

Use this campaign when you want to present the offer at a specific moment in the customer journey without permanently displaying it on the page.

","What are Product Page and Popup Upsell campaigns?","cmrvl2u1y02f62umps0fmf3zp","cart-page-upsell","Cart Page Upsell","Cart Page Upsell campaign displays product recommendations when customers view their cart.",[3462,3463],"2026-07-22T04:29:48.838Z",[],{"_189":3465,"_227":3466,"_229":3467},{"_189":3422,"_227":3464,"_229":3424},"

Creating a Cart Page Upsell campaign consists of four parts:

Basic information
Offer
Content
Settings

1. Basic information

Configure where the offer appears and when the campaign runs.

1.1. Offer placement

Select where the upsell widget will be displayed:

Cart page: Displays the offer on your store’s full cart page.
Cart drawer: Displays the offer inside the cart drawer or mini cart.

Choose the placement that matches your store’s current cart experience.

1.2. Offer name

Enter a name to identify the campaign in the app.

The offer name is used for internal management only and will not be visible to customers.

1.3. Start date and time

Set the date and time when the campaign should begin.

The campaign will become available to eligible customers when the scheduled start time is reached.

1.4. End date and time

Enable Set end date and time when you want the campaign to stop automatically.

$\"Cart$

2. Offer

Configure the products that trigger the campaign, the products customers receive as recommendations, and any discount applied to them.

2.1. Trigger

Choose which products must be present in the customer’s cart for the upsell offer to appear.

All products: The campaign can be triggered by any product added to the cart.
Specific products: The campaign appears when the cart contains one or more selected products.
Specific collections: The campaign appears when the cart contains a product from one or more selected collections.

Use specific products or collections when the offered products are relevant only to certain purchases.

2.2. Offers

Choose how the products displayed in the upsell widget are selected.

Manual selection

Select the exact products you want to recommend.

Click Browse to search for and add offer products. This option gives you full control over which products customers see.

Basic AI — automated recommendations

Allow the app to automatically recommend relevant products. The data is taken from the app Shopify Search & Discovery.

2.3. Discount

Configure whether customers receive a discount when they add an offered product.

Discount type

Select the type of discount applied to the offer products.

The available configuration are:

No discount: Offer products are added at their regular price.
Percentage/Fixed amount: Offer products are added with a discount.

When a discount type is selected, enter the corresponding value in the Discount amount field. The amount is based on your store’s currency.

If you configure Fixed amount discount type, there is another option to consider: Apply discount to each eligible item in an order

Enabled: Each eligible item receives the full discount amount.
Disabled: The configured discount amount is distributed across all eligible items in the order.

Discount code

Enter the name that identifies the upsell discount.

This code will be visible to customers in the cart when the discount is applied. Use a short and understandable name, such as CART OFFER.

2.4. Apply discount

Choose when the configured discount remains valid.

Always: The discount continues to apply to the offered product after the trigger product is removed from the cart.
Only if trigger product is in cart: The discount applies only while a qualifying trigger product remains in the cart.

The second option helps prevent customers from removing the qualifying product and purchasing only the discounted upsell item.

$\"Cart$

3. Content

Customize the customer-facing text displayed in the upsell widget.

3.1. Title

Enter the heading displayed above the recommended products.

The title should briefly explain that the products are recommendations or complementary offers.

Examples:

You may also like
Complete your order
Frequently bought together
Add something extra

3.2. Button text

Enter the label displayed on the button customers use to add an offered product to their cart.

Keep the text short and action-oriented.

Examples:

Add
Add to cart
Add item
Get this offer

Use the preview panel to check how the title and button text appear to customers.

4. Settings

Control campaign priority, product behavior, the number of offers displayed, and the widget position.

4.1. Priority

Enter a priority number to determine the order in which campaigns are evaluated.

Campaigns with lower numbers are evaluated first. For example, a campaign with priority 1 runs before campaigns with priority 2 or 3.

4.2. Allow multiple quantities

Enable this setting to let customers add more than one unit of an offered product.

Leave it disabled when each offered product should be added only once through the upsell widget.

4.3. Don’t show products that are already in the cart

Enable this setting to hide an offered product when the same product is already present in the customer’s cart.

This avoids displaying duplicate recommendations and keeps the offer relevant to the customer’s current order.

4.4. Randomize offer product order

Enable this setting to display offer products in a different order instead of always following the original selection order.

This can give multiple products more balanced visibility when a campaign contains several recommendations.

4.5. Limit offered products shown

Enable this setting to restrict how many offer products are displayed in the widget at one time.

Use it when the campaign contains many products but you want to keep the cart experience focused and easy to browse.

4.6. Paginate products

Enable pagination to divide offered products into multiple pages or groups within the widget. In short, it limits how many products are shown to the customers at one time, in one widget frame.

This option is useful when the campaign includes more products than can comfortably fit in the available cart space.

4.7. Select position

Choose where the upsell widget appears within the cart:

Top of the cart: Displays the offer before the main cart content or cart items.
Bottom of the cart: Displays the offer after the main cart content or cart items.

Use the top position when the offer should receive immediate visibility. Use the bottom position when you want customers to review their current cart before seeing additional recommendations.

$\"Cart$

","what-is-a-cart-page-upsell-campaign","

A Cart Page Upsell campaign displays product recommendations when customers view their cart. It helps you suggest complementary products, useful add-ons, or other relevant items before customers continue to checkout.

The offer can appear on either the cart page or the cart drawer, depending on the placement you select. Customers can review product details, choose a variant, and add an offered product directly from the upsell widget without leaving their cart.

You can control:

Which products or collections trigger the campaign.
Which products are recommended.
Whether an upsell discount is applied.
The content displayed in the widget.

","What is a Cart Page Upsell campaign?","cmrvthx3k02hl2umpantkwcfc","thank-you-page-upsell","Thank You Page Upsell","Display additional product recommendations on the Thank You page and encourage customers to place a follow-up order after completing their purchase.",[3475,3476],"2026-07-22T08:25:29.552Z",[],{"_189":3478,"_227":3479,"_229":3480},{"_189":3422,"_227":3477,"_229":3424},"

Creating a Thank You Page Upsell campaign consists of four parts:

Basic information
Offer
Content
Settings

1. Basic information

Configure the internal campaign name and campaign schedule.

1.1. Offer name

Enter a name to identify the campaign in the app.

The offer name is used for internal management only and will not be visible to customers.

1.2. Start date and time

Set the date and time when the campaign should begin.

The campaign will become available on eligible Thank You pages when the scheduled start time is reached.

1.3. End date and time

Enable Set end date and time when you want the campaign to stop automatically.

$\"Thank$

2. Offer

Configure the products that trigger the campaign, the products recommended to customers, and any discount applied to the offer.

2.1. Trigger

Choose which products in the completed order make the Thank You Page Upsell eligible to appear.

All products: The campaign can appear after any completed order.
Specific products: The campaign appears when the completed order includes one or more selected products.
Products in specific collections: The campaign appears when the completed order includes a product from one or more selected collections.

Use specific products or collections when the offer is relevant only to certain purchases.

2.2. Offers

Choose how the products displayed on the Thank You page are selected.

Manual selection

Select the exact products you want to recommend.

Click Browse to search for and add offer products. This option gives you full control over which products customers see.

Basic AI — automated recommendations

Allow the app to automatically select relevant products based on the completed order. The data is taken from the app Shopify Search & Discovery.

2.3. Discount

Configure whether customers receive a discount on the recommended products.

Discount type

Select the discount type applied to eligible products.

No discount: Products are offered at their regular price.
Percentage: Applies a percentage discount.
Fixed amount: Applies a fixed monetary discount.

When a discount type is selected, enter the corresponding value in the Discount amount field.

Discount code

Enter the name used to identify the Thank You Page Upsell discount.

The discount code may be visible to customers when the offer is claimed. Use a short and understandable name, such as:

THANK YOU OFFER
EXCLUSIVE DEAL

Apply discount to each eligible item in an order

Enable this option to apply the configured discount amount separately to every eligible offered item.

Enabled: Each eligible item receives the full discount amount.
Disabled: The configured discount amount is distributed across all eligible items.

3. Content

Customize the text and call-to-action displayed in the Thank You Page Upsell widget.

3.1. Header

Title

Enter the main heading displayed above the offer.

The title supports the {{discount}} template. When used, it is automatically replaced with the configured discount value.

Sub-title

Enter the supporting message displayed below the title.

Use the sub-title to explain the offer, create urgency, or encourage customers to consider the recommended products.

3.2. Announcement bar

Use the announcement bar to display a limited-time message above the recommended products.

Announcement

Enter the message shown in the announcement bar.

The field supports the {{timer}} template. Place this template where you want the countdown to appear.

Timer

Enter the number of minutes for the countdown.

The countdown is displayed wherever the {{timer}} template is included in the announcement text.

Note: The configured timer may be longer than the customer’s current Order Status Page session. The widget is removed when the customer leaves the page.

3.3. When the timer runs out

Choose what happens when the countdown reaches zero.

Restart

Resets the countdown and keeps the offer visible.

Use this when the timer is intended to create urgency without removing the campaign.

Hide offer

Removes the offer from the Thank You page when the countdown expires.

Customers will no longer be able to claim the offer from the current page.

Do nothing

Hides or stops the countdown while keeping the offer visible.

Customers can still review and claim the recommended products after the timer ends.

3.4. You may also like

Enter the heading displayed above the recommended product list.

3.5. Buttons

Enter the label displayed on the primary call-to-action button.

$\"Thank$

4. Settings

Control campaign priority and how recommended products are displayed.

4.1. Priority

Enter a priority number to determine the order in which campaigns are evaluated.

Campaigns with lower numbers are evaluated first. For example, a campaign with priority 1 is evaluated before campaigns with priority 2 or 3.

Use priority when multiple Thank You Page Upsell campaigns may match the same completed order.

4.2. Allow multiple quantities

Enable this setting to let customers select more than one unit of an offered product.

Leave it disabled when each offered product should only be selected once.

4.3. Don’t show products that are already in the cart

Enable this setting to exclude products already included in the customer’s completed order.

This helps avoid recommending products the customer has just purchased.

4.4. Randomize offer product order

Enable this setting to vary the order in which recommended products appear.

This can provide more balanced visibility when the campaign contains several products.

4.5. Limit offered products shown

Enable this setting to restrict how many recommended products are displayed in the widget.

Use it to keep the Thank You page focused and easy to review.

4.6. Paginate products

Enable pagination to divide recommended products into multiple pages or groups. In short, it limits how many products are shown to the customers at one time, in one widget frame.

","what-is-a-thank-you-page-upsell-campaign","

A Thank You Page Upsell campaign displays product recommendations on the order confirmation or Thank You page after a customer completes checkout.

Unlike a Post-purchase Upsell offer, products accepted from the Thank You page are generally added through a new purchase flow rather than being added directly to the completed order.

Use this campaign to:

Recommend products related to the customer’s recent purchase.
Promote limited-time offers after checkout.
Encourage customers to return and make another purchase.
Present complementary products while purchase intent is still high.

You can control:

Which purchased products trigger the campaign.
Which products are recommended.
Whether an upsell discount is applied.
The title, sub-title, announcement, and button text.
How long the offer remains available.
The number and order of products displayed.

","What is a Thank You Page Upsell campaign?","c9ec0f3653ca3e10110d433f3","reward-bar-milestones","Reward Bar & Milestone Tiers","Build a tiered reward ladder with a live progress bar — full setup with an example.",[3488,3489,3490],[3289,3202],"Free Gift Campaigns",{"_189":3495,"_227":3496,"_229":3497},{"_189":3422,"_227":3494,"_229":3424},{"_189":3491,"_227":3492,"_229":3493},"display-setting","

1. Show on Included Page

Choose where the reward widget will be displayed on your store.

Show the reward widget on cart

Enable this option to display the reward widget on the cart page or cart drawer.

Show the reward widget on product pages

Enable this option to display the reward widget on product pages. Then, use the Display on dropdown to choose which product pages should show the widget:

- All product pages – Display the widget on every product page.

- Product specific page – Display the widget only on selected product pages.

- Products included in the offer – Display the widget only on product pages for products included in the campaign.

- All products in specific collections – Display the widget on product pages for products belonging to selected collections.

$\"Show$

For Single goal, the Offer content card sets the widget title, the text before and after the gift is achieved (use {{amount}} for the remaining amount), and an optional badge.

2. Milestone reward

Enable this option to show customers a text indicating how much more they need to spend to unlock the next milestone.

Customize the progress message displayed before reaching each milestone.

Use the {{amount}} variable to automatically display the remaining amount customers need to spend.

Customize the message shown when customers have unlocked all available milestones.

$\"Milestones$

3. Offer claim behavior

Mode	What the customer experiences	Use when
Automatically add products to cart	The moment they qualify, all gift items appear in the cart at the discounted price, with a notification toast.	The gift has no variants (one tote bag, one sample sachet). Zero friction.
Give customers a choice of products to add	A \"Congratulations!\" pop-up opens on the cart page and they pick their gift — including the variant (size, color).	Gifts with variants, or when choosing between several gifts is part of the fun.

In choice mode you can also limit the total gifts added — e.g. the customer qualifies for 3 gift options but may add only 1.

In choice mode the Pop-up card sets the title, subtitle and button text. Turn on Show decline offer button to let customers decline the gift, then choose what happens after they decline: Hide for the rest of the session or Show again when the customer reaches a new milestone.

$\"Choice$ ","Display setting","

Creating a gift offer consists of 5 fundamental parts:

Basic information
Customer buys (main condition, sub-condition)
Customer gets
Works with other offers
Advanced settings (optional)

1. Basic information

1.1. Offer title

The offer name is for internal management only and won’t be visible to customers.

1.2. Start date/End date

Start time: The time that the offer starts working.
End time (optional): The time that the offer stops working.

$\"Offer$

2. Customer buys

2.1. Select the products that will trigger the offer
First, decide what the qualifying purchase applies to: All products, Collections, Product tags, or Specific products. This controls which items move the customer toward the reward.

All products: All products in cart will be counted toward the cart quantity/cart value condition.
Collections: Only products in the selected collections will be counted toward cart quantity/cart value condition.
Product tags: Only products with the chosen tags will be counted toward cart quantity/cart value condition.
Specific products: Only products selected will be counted toward cart quantity/cart value condition.

2.2. Sub conditions

Sub-conditions are optional to set up. Sub conditions can be combined together to target more specific customers.

$\"Add$

Condition	What it checks
New customer	First-time vs. returning buyers.
Customer's order history	Total spent overall, spent on the last order, or number of orders placed. Also lets you limit the number of uses per customer.
Customer location	Selected countries — or exclude customers from selected locations.
Customer tags	Match Shopify customer tags; can exclude by tag, and treat logged-out visitors as having no tags.
Customer's status	Logged in / logged out.
Product price	Only items above/below a price qualify.
Subscription products	Only subscription or only one-time purchases.
Specific link address	The offer activates only for visitors arriving via a special shareable link (e.g. `?summersale2024`) that the editor generates for you.

Note: Some sub-conditions rely on Shopify customer data and can only be evaluated when the customer is logged in. These sub conditions include New customer, Customer's order history, Customer tags.

If the customer is not logged in, these conditions may not be applied.

3. Customer gets

3.1. Gift method:

Multi-goal: a ladder of milestones including more than 1 reward, maximum 4 reward tiers. Tiers could be Free gift, Order discount or Free shipping.
Single goal: one reward only and specifically used for Free gift offer.

For Multi-goal, pick the Tiered reward type under Tiers & rewards: Cart subtotal (subtotal of eligible items — before discount codes, shipping and taxes) or Product quantity.

$\"Multi-goal$

With Single goal, set the amount under Customer meets condition and pick the gift under Customer gets.

$\"Single$

3.2. Milestones
Click Add milestone and choose the reward type (Free gift, Order discount or Free shipping) to create a new tier. In each milestone, input a milestone name for internal management and set the minimum cart value required for customers to unlock the milestone in the \"Buy at least\" field. Each tier must be greater than the previous.

Free shipping milestone

No additional configuration is required.

Customers automatically receive free shipping once their cart reaches the minimum value set for this milestone.

Order discount milestone

- Discount name: Enter the name of the discount. This name may be displayed to customers as a discount tag in the cart, checkout page and in the order details, helping customers identify the promotion.

- Choose how the discount is calculated and input the value:

Percentage – Deduct a percentage from the order total.

Fixed Amount – Deduct a fixed monetary amount from the order total.

Free gift milestone.

Select the product(s) customers will receive when they reach this milestone.

Click Browse to choose one or more gift products.

4. Works with other offers

Under Works with other offers, two controls decide the outcome:

Priority — a number. Assign a priority level to this offer to determine the order in which offers are applied. A lower number indicates a higher priority (for example, 1 takes precedence over 2 or 3). This setting is used when a customer qualifies for multiple offers at the same time. Give your most important offer priority 1.
Stop on Match — \"Apply this campaign only and skip others if matched.\" When the campaign fires, no lower-priority campaign runs.

Example:
Campaign A (Priority 1): Buy $500 get free gift A

Campaign B (Priority 2): Buy 3 products get free gift B

Stop on Match is true -> If customer achieve $500 cart value, they will receive free gift A no matter whether they have more or less than 3 products in cart.

5. Advance settings

What happens when a customer passes several tiers? Choose the distribution rules below:

All eligible gifts — they receive every reward they've qualified for (at $120: free shipping + lip balm + 10% off). Generous, maximally motivating.
Nearest milestone gift only — only the highest tier reached (at $120: just the 10% off). Protects margin.

$\"Advanced$ ","what-is-the-reward-bar","

The reward bar shows shoppers a live progress bar toward your reward tiers — for example \"Spend $20 more to unlock free shipping!\" — in the cart and/or on product pages. Because the next reward is always visible, it's the single strongest AOV lever in the app.

Reward types include: Free shipping, Free gift and Order discount.

","What is the reward bar?","c4508924cf776705d47811824","bxgy-and-bogo","Buy X Get Y & BOGO","Product-triggered rewards: setup, the multiply formula, and practical examples.",[3506,3507,3508],[3504,3505],"cart-value-quantity-gifts","gift-claim-behavior",{"_189":3511,"_227":3512,"_229":3513},{"_189":3422,"_227":3510,"_229":3424},{"_189":3491,"_227":3509,"_229":3493},"

1. Offer claim behavior

Mode	What the customer experiences	Use when
Automatically add products to cart	The moment they qualify, all gift items appear in the cart at the discounted price, with a notification toast.	The gift has no variants (one tote bag, one sample sachet). Zero friction.
Give customers a choice of products to add	A \"Congratulations!\" pop-up opens on the cart page and they pick their gift — including the variant (size, color).	Gifts with variants, or when choosing between several gifts is part of the fun.

In choice mode you can also limit the total gifts added — e.g. the customer qualifies for 3 gift options but may add only 1.

$\"Offer$

2. Offer exposure

$\"Offer$

2.1. Announcement bar
Show a store-wide banner promoting the offer. Configure the following:

Where: every page, home, product, or cart pages; device — desktop & mobile, only desktop, or only mobile.
Type: simple bar, whole bar clickable, or bar with a link/button (set the URL, button label, button-vs-link style, open in new tab).
Position: top or bottom of the screen; sticky or scrolls away; optional close icon.
Countdown timer: fixed duration in minutes (restarts per visitor) or a specific end date. When it runs out choose: Restart, Hide announcement bar, Show custom title (e.g. \"Offer ended — see what's next\"), or Do nothing.

$\"Announcement$

2.2. Product page widget

Show a banner on the product page and promote your offers. Set up a title and a subtitle to indicate what the offer is and how much left customers need to spend to get the gift dynamically.

$\"Product$

2.3. Promotion badge

Catch shopper's attention with special offer badges on product images. You can edit the badge content and choose whether the badge is displayed on every page or a specific page (homepage, product page, collection page).

$\"Promotion$

","

Creating a BXGY/BOGO offer consists of 5 fundamental parts:

Basic information
Customer buys (main condition, sub-condition)
Customer gets
Works with other offers
Advanced settings (optional)

1. Basic information

1.1. Offer title

The offer name is for internal management only and won’t be visible to customers.

1.2. Start date/End date

Start time: The time that the offer starts working.
End time (optional): The time that the offer stops working.

$\"Offer$

2. Customer buys

2.1. Select the products that will trigger the offer

This controls which items move the customer toward the reward.

Each product quantity and variant can be adjusted according to your preferred conditions.

Product requirement decides how several selected products are evaluated:

Any selected product — customers only need to meet the required quantity for one selected product.
All selected products — customers must meet the required quantity for every selected product.

$\"BXGY$

2.2. Add sub-conditions

Sub-conditions are optional to set up. Sub conditions can be combined together to target more specific customers.

$\"Add$

Condition	What it checks
New customer	First-time vs. returning buyers.
Customer's order history	Total spent overall, spent on the last order, or number of orders placed. Also lets you limit the number of uses per customer.
Customer location	Selected countries — or exclude customers from selected locations.
Customer tags	Match Shopify customer tags; can exclude by tag, and treat logged-out visitors as having no tags.
Customer's status	Logged in / logged out.
Product price	Only items above/below a price qualify.
Subscription products	Only subscription or only one-time purchases.
Specific link address	The offer activates only for visitors arriving via a special shareable link (e.g. `?summersale2024`) that the editor generates for you.

If the customer is not logged in, these conditions may not be applied.

3. Customer gets

For BXGY Campaign:

Select the gifts you would like to offer as well as the quantity and discounts for them.

You can select multiple products to offer as gifts in this section and set up the quantity limit for each variant.

$\"BXGY$

For BOGO campaign:

Gifts automatically configured to be the exact same products with the products chosen in the \"Customer buys\" section. The quantity of the gifts can be adjusted.

Please note: Specifically for BOGO campaign, if you select multiple products in the \"Customer buys\" section -> Each selected product is evaluated individually, not as a combined requirement.

This means customers do not need to purchase every selected product to receive the corresponding gift.

Example

If you select:

Customer Buys: Product A, Product B
Customer Gets: Product A, Product B

Then:

Customer buys Product A → Receives the gift for Product A.
Customer buys Product B → Receives the gift for Product B.
Customer buys both Product A and Product B → Receives both gifts.

In other words, each qualifying product triggers its corresponding gift independently.

In the \"Config discount\", give your discount a name. This name is displayed as a discount tag when your discount is applied to a product in cart.

After that, input the discount value. There are 2 discount types:

Percentage: The price of your gift will be discounted by a percentage of its original price. 100% means free gift.
Fixed: Set a fixed price for your gifts.

$\"BOGO:$

Ego Free Gift discount should work seamlessly with other Shopify discounts under the Shopify discount rules. It is configured to automatically combine with product, order, and shipping discounts If you have other Shopify discounts running, please make sure they are configured to be combinable.

4. Works with other offers

Under Works with other offers, two controls decide the outcome:

Priority — a number. Assign a priority level to this offer to determine the order in which offers are applied. A lower number indicates a higher priority (for example, 1 takes precedence over 2 or 3). This setting is used when a customer qualifies for multiple offers at the same time. Give your most important offer priority 1.
Stop on Match — \"Apply this campaign only and skip others if matched.\" When the campaign fires, no lower-priority campaign runs.

Example:
Campaign A (Priority 1): Buy $500 get free gift A

Campaign B (Priority 2): Buy 3 products get free gift B

Stop on Match is true -> If customer achieve $500 cart value, they will receive free gift A no matter whether they have more or less than 3 products in cart.

5. Advanced settings

Multiply formula: Enable this option to allow the gift quantity to increase as customers purchase more qualifying items.
When enabled, the Get (Y) quantity is multiplied based on how many times the customer meets the Buy (X) requirement.

Works in reverse: removes gift items automatically when the customer no longer qualifies — e.g. they remove products and fall below the threshold.
We recommend keeping this on for every campaign. Without it, a shopper can qualify, receive the gift, empty the rest of the cart, and check out with only the free item.

$\"Advanced:$ ","what-is-bxgy-bogo-campaign","

A BXGY (Buy X Get Y) or BOGO (Buy One Get One) campaign rewards customers with a free or discounted product when they purchase specific qualifying products.

Unlike Cart Value or Cart Quantity campaigns, BXGY campaigns are based on which products customers buy, rather than the total cart value or number of items.

A BXGY/BOGO campaign has two parts:

Buy (X): The products customers must purchase to qualify.
Get (Y): The product(s) customers receive as the reward.

You can configure:

Which products or collections qualify as the Buy products.
Which products are offered as the Gift.
The required purchase quantity.
The gift quantity customers receive.

Example 1: Buy One Get One Free (BOGO)

Buy 1 T-Shirt
Get 1 T-Shirt for free

Example 2: Buy X Get Y

Buy 2 Coffee Bags
Get 1 Coffee Mug for free

Notes

For BOGO campaign, the gifts are automatically configured to be the exact same products with the products chosen to trigger the offer.

","What is BXGY/BOGO campaign?","cmrip5r4400z92umq5jxbowr0","gift-offer-subcondition","Gift Offer Sub-conditions","Sub conditions of every gift campaign",[3521,3522],"2026-07-13T04:03:03.172Z",[],{"_189":3526,"_227":3527,"_229":3528},{"_189":3523,"_227":3524,"_229":3525},"which-sub-conditions-require-customers-to-log-in","

Some sub-conditions in Ego Free Gift rely on Shopify customer data. For these conditions to work correctly, the customer must be logged in to their Shopify customer account so the app can identify them and access the required information.

Sub-Conditions That Require Login

Customer's Order History

Customers must be logged in when the campaign uses conditions based on their previous order history, such as: Total amount spent, Amount spent on the last order, Number of orders placed, Number of times the offer can be used per customer

Without login, the app cannot identify the customer and check their previous order data.

Customer Tags

Customers must be logged in for the app to check their Shopify customer tags.

For example, if an offer is available only to customers with a VIP tag, the customer needs to log in before the app can verify that they are eligible.

Note: Logged-out visitors are treated as having no customer tags. Therefore, an exclude by tag condition may still allow logged-out visitors to qualify.

What Happens If the Customer Is Not Logged In?

If a campaign uses a condition that requires customer identification, the app may not be able to confirm whether a logged-out visitor qualifies for the offer.

For the most accurate eligibility checks, we recommend informing customers that they need to log in before adding products to their cart when your campaign uses Customer's Order History or Customer Tags conditions.

","Which sub-conditions require customers to log in?","list-of-sub-conditions","

Sub-conditions are optional and can be combined to target more specific customer groups or purchase scenarios. In the campaign editor, click Add sub condition under Offer sub condition and pick one or more options:

$\"Add$

Condition	What it checks
New customer	Targets first-time or returning customers.
Customer's order history	Checks the customer's total spend, amount spent on their last order, or number of orders placed. You can also limit the number of times each customer can use the offer.
Customer location	Includes or excludes customers from selected countries.
Customer tags	Matches Shopify customer tags. You can include or exclude customers based on specific tags.
Customer's status	Targets customers based on whether they are logged in or logged out.
Product price	Only products above or below a specified price qualify.
Subscription products	Targets subscription purchases or one-time purchases.
Specific link address	Activates the offer only for visitors who access your store through a special shareable link generated in the campaign editor, such as `?summersale2024`.

","List of Sub-conditions","cb8e080c151335fd9d41934b7","Cart Value & Quantity Gifts","Threshold gifts in detail: conditions, And/Or logic, and how the discount is applied.",[3535,3536,3537],[3505,3534],"eligibility-and-targeting",{"_189":3540,"_227":3541,"_229":3542},{"_189":3422,"_227":3539,"_229":3424},{"_189":3491,"_227":3538,"_229":3493},"

1. Offer claim behavior

Mode	What the customer experiences	Use when
Automatically add products to cart	The moment they qualify, all gift items appear in the cart at the discounted price, with a notification toast.	The gift has no variants (one tote bag, one sample sachet). Zero friction.
Give customers a choice of products to add	A \"Congratulations!\" pop-up opens on the cart page and they pick their gift — including the variant (size, color).	Gifts with variants, or when choosing between several gifts is part of the fun.

In choice mode you can also limit the total gifts added — e.g. the customer qualifies for 3 gift options but may add only 1.

The claim card also holds the Notification title (auto-add mode) and two options:

Don't re-add removed gifts — when a customer removes an automatically added gift, keep it out of the cart instead of adding it back.
Reserve the gift for a limited time — show a countdown on the gift in the cart; when it runs out, the gift is removed automatically.

$\"Offer$

2. Offer exposure

Turn each surface on with its toggle and click Edit to configure it. Every editor has a live mobile/desktop preview.

$\"Offer$

2.1. Announcement bar
Show a store-wide banner promoting the offer. Configure the following:

Where: every page, home, product, or cart pages; device — desktop & mobile, only desktop, or only mobile.
Type: simple bar, whole bar clickable, or bar with a link/button (set the URL, button label, button-vs-link style, open in new tab).
Position: top or bottom of the screen; sticky or scrolls away; optional close icon.
Countdown timer: fixed duration in minutes (restarts per visitor) or a specific end date. When it runs out choose: Restart, Hide announcement bar, Show custom title (e.g. \"Offer ended — see what's next\"), or Do nothing.

$\"Announcement$

2.2. Product page widget

Show a banner on the product page and promote your offers. Set up a title and a subtitle to indicate what the offer is and how much left customers need to spend to get the gift dynamically.

$\"Product$

2.3. Promotion badge

$\"Promotion$

","

The campaign editor is a single page. On the right, the Status card turns the campaign on (Active) or into Test mode, and the Summary card recaps your setup as you go. Creating a gift offer consists of 5 fundamental parts:

Basic information
Customer buys (main condition, sub-condition)
Customer gets
Works with other offers
Advanced settings (optional)

1. Basic information

1.1. Offer title

The offer name is for internal management only and won’t be visible to customers.

1.2. Start date/End date

Start time: The time that the offer starts working.
End time (optional): The time that the offer stops working.

$\"Offer$

2. Customer buys

2.1. Select the products that will trigger the offer
First, decide what the qualifying purchase applies to: All products, Collections, Product tags, Specific products or Exclude products. This controls which items move the customer toward the reward.

All products: All products in cart will be counted toward the cart quantity/cart value condition.
Collections: Only products in the selected collections will be counted toward cart quantity/cart value condition.
Product tags: Only products with the chosen tags will be counted toward cart quantity/cart value condition.
Specific products: Only products selected will be counted toward cart quantity/cart value condition.
Exclude products: All products count except the ones you select.
$\"Customer$

2.2. Main conditions

Main condition lets you set the minimum cart value AND/OR minimum cart quantity customers must reach to qualify for your gift offer. Click Add main condition to add a second condition, then choose And (both must be met) or Or (either is enough). Cart value is counted on the subtotal of eligible items — before discount codes, shipping and taxes; free gifts and excluded products don't count.
The cart value you enter is based on your store’s main currency (e.g., VND as shown in the image).
$\"Two$

2.3. Sub conditions

Sub-conditions are optional to set up. Sub conditions can be combined together to target more specific customers.

$\"Add$

Condition	What it checks
New customer	First-time vs. returning buyers.
Customer's order history	Total spent overall, spent on the last order, or number of orders placed. Also lets you limit the number of uses per customer.
Customer location	Selected countries — or exclude customers from selected locations.
Customer tags	Match Shopify customer tags; can exclude by tag, and treat logged-out visitors as having no tags.
Customer's status	Logged in / logged out.
Product price	Only items above/below a price qualify.
Subscription products	Only subscription or only one-time purchases.
Specific link address	The offer activates only for visitors arriving via a special shareable link (e.g. `?summersale2024`) that the editor generates for you.

If the customer is not logged in, these conditions may not be applied.

3. Customer gets

Select the gifts you would like to offer as well as the quantity and discounts for them.

You can select multiple products to offer as gifts in this section and set up the quantity limit for each variant.

$\"Customer$

In the \"Config discount\", give your discount a name. This name is displayed as a discount tag when your discount is applied to a product in cart.

After that, input the discount value. There are 2 discount types:

Percentage: The price of your gift will be discounted by a percentage of its original price. 100% means free gift.
Fixed: Set a fixed price for your gifts.

4. Works with other offers

Open the Advanced card at the bottom of the editor and click Show more.

Under Works with other offers, two controls decide the outcome:

Priority — a number. Assign a priority level to this offer to determine the order in which offers are applied. A lower number indicates a higher priority (for example, 1 takes precedence over 2 or 3). This setting is used when a customer qualifies for multiple offers at the same time. Give your most important offer priority 1.
Stop on Match — \"Apply this campaign only and skip others if matched.\" When the campaign fires, no lower-priority campaign runs.

Example:
Campaign A (Priority 1): Buy $500 get free gift A

Campaign B (Priority 2): Buy 3 products get free gift B

Stop on Match is true -> If customer achieve $500 cart value, they will receive free gift A no matter whether they have more or less than 3 products in cart.

5. Advanced settings

Enable Works in reverse (advanced settings) and the app removes gift items automatically when the customer no longer qualifies — e.g. they remove products and fall below the threshold.

We recommend keeping this on for every campaign. Without it, a shopper can qualify, receive the gift, empty the rest of the cart, and check out with only the free item.

The editor also shows a Discount combination required reminder: make sure your other Shopify discounts can combine with Product and Order discounts, otherwise Shopify may prioritize another discount over Ego Free Gift.

Multiply formula is also available here: it multiplies the gift (e.g. buy 4 get 2, buy 6 get 3). It is disabled when two main conditions are joined with Or, because there is no single threshold to multiply.

$\"Advanced:$ ","what-is-cart-value-cart-quantity-campaign","

A Cart Value/Cart Quantity Campaign rewards customers when their cart reaches a specific spending amount or product quantity.

You can choose one of two campaign types:

Cart Value

Customers qualify when their cart value reaches the minimum amount you set.

Example: Spend $100 or more → Get a free gift.

The cart value is calculated after Shopify product discounts are applied and before Shopify order discounts are applied (if available)

Cart Quantity

Customers qualify when the total number of items in their cart reaches the required quantity.

Example: Buy 3 items → Get a free gift.

The quantity is based on the total number of product units in the cart, not the number of unique products.

","What is Cart value/Cart quantity campaign?","c28d2fd837902f94a6ebd7f7f","Create Your First Campaign","A quick walkthrough: Create and launch your first Free Gift or Upsell campaign in a few steps.",[3548,3549,3550,3551],[3504,3482,3193],{"_189":3561,"_227":3562,"_229":3563},{"_189":3558,"_227":3559,"_229":3560},{"_189":3555,"_227":3556,"_229":3557},{"_189":3552,"_227":3553,"_229":3554},"step-4-activate-and-test","

Click Save in the top bar once the settings are done.

Then run a test on your storefront:

Add products that meet your offer conditions to the cart.
Check that your offer shows up and applies the correct discount or gift.
Check that every offer exposure shows up correctly (announcement bar, product page widget, promotion badge).
Remove items to get below the threshold — if you enabled Works in reverse, the gift disappears.

","Step 4 — Activate and test","step-3-activate-the-campaign","

Every campaign editor has a Status card at the top right:

Active — live on your storefront as soon as you save, within the start and end dates.
Test mode (Free Gift campaigns) — only people with the preview link see the offer, so you can try it before shoppers do.

Below it, the Summary card checks off each required step (name, what customers buy, what they get) and recaps how the gift is claimed and where it is promoted.

$\"Status$

The campaign will work when:

Its status is Active
The scheduled start time has been reached
Customers meet the configured conditions
The selected products are available

You can also start or pause a campaign from the Campaign list using the play/pause icon in the Action column.

","Step 3 — Activate the campaign","step-2-campaign-setting","

Complete the required settings based on the selected campaign type.

For Free Gift campaigns

Configure:

Campaign name and schedule
Qualifying products, collections, cart value, or quantity
Gift products and reward conditions
Display method and storefront widgets

$\"Customer$

For Upsell campaigns

Configure:

Offer placement and schedule
Trigger products or collections
Offered products
Discount settings
Customer-facing content
Display behavior and campaign priority

","Step 2 — Campaign setting","step-1-choose-a-campaign-type","

From the app dashboard, go to Campaigns and click Create campaign.

The Create campaign picker has three tabs — Free gift, Upsell and Bundle. Choose one of the following categories:

Free Gift

Cart Value Gift — Offer a free gift when the cart total reaches a specified value.
Cart Quantity Gift — Offer a free gift when customers add a specified number of items to their cart.
Buy X Get Y — Reward customers with a selected gift when they purchase specific products or quantities.
BOGO — Create Buy One Get One or similar offers, such as Buy 2 Get 1 Free.
Reward Bar — Display progress toward one or more rewards based on the customer’s cart value or quantity.

$\"Create$

Upsell

Recommend additional products at different stages of the shopping journey.

Each upsell campaign targets one placement:

Product page — below the product details.
Cart page — last chance before checkout.
Pop-up — triggered at key moments, with configurable trigger and frequency.
Checkout page — inside Shopify checkout.
Post-purchase — a one-click offer between payment and the thank-you page; the customer accepts without re-entering payment. Supports a funnel of up to three sequenced offers (first, second, downsell) with a countdown.
Thank-you page — after the order completes.

To show the widget in the Checkout page, you have to be in Shopify Plus.Click the campaign type you want to create to open its editor.

Bundle

Bundle deal — Mix quantity breaks, product bundles and Buy X Get Y in one product-page widget. Start from a template and customize every tier. See Bundle Deal Overview & Templates.

$\"Campaign$ ","Step 1 — Choose a campaign type","c7ed54ba6fcb6598d7fd31743","installing-ego-free-gift-bogo-upsell","Installing & Activating Ego BOGO Free Gifts & Bundles","Install the app, enable the app embed, and get ready to run your first offer.",[3571,3572,3573,3574],"2026-10-14T04:43:32.374Z",[3269,3289,3193],{"_189":305,"_227":3580,"_229":307},{"_189":800,"_227":3579,"_229":802},{"_189":797,"_227":3578,"_229":799},{"_189":3575,"_227":3576,"_229":3577},"step-3-set-up-and-activate-a-campaign","

After the app embed is enabled, create and configure your first Free Gift, Upsell or Bundle campaign.

To set up a campaign:

Go to Campaign and click Create campaign.
Pick the campaign type, then configure conditions, eligible products, rewards, display settings and schedule. Everything is on one page — the Summary card on the right updates as you go.
In the Status card, turn on Active. A new campaign is saved as Draft until you do.
Click Save in the top bar. An active campaign goes live within its start and end dates.

$\"Offer$

Want to try the offer before shoppers see it? Turn on Test mode instead: only people with the preview link see the offer, while discounts and widgets work for real.

","Step 3 — Set Up and Activate a Campaign","

The app embed allows Ego BOGO Free Gifts & Bundles to display promotional widgets and campaign content inside your Shopify storefront.

To enable the app embed:

From your Shopify admin, go to Online Store > Themes.
Find your current published theme.
Click Customize.
In the Theme Editor, click the App embeds icon in the left sidebar.
Find Ego BOGO Free Gifts & Bundles.
Turn on the app embed.
Click Save.

","

To install Ego BOGO Free Gifts & Bundles:

Go to the Ego BOGO Free Gifts & Bundles listing on the Shopify App Store.
Click Install.
Review the permissions requested by the app.
Click Install again to confirm.

After the installation is complete, Shopify will redirect you to the app dashboard.

","

Ego BOGO Free Gifts & Bundles helps you create free gift campaigns, BOGO offers, product upsells, cart offers, and post-purchase promotions for your Shopify store.

Before your campaigns can appear on the storefront, you need to follow the core steps:

Install the app from the Shopify App Store.
Enable the app embed in your Shopify theme.
Activate the campaign inside the app.

","cms5yb1xp016k2us1gb1eyqux","what-is-ego-free-gift-upsell","What is Ego BOGO Free Gifts & Bundles","Get an introduction to Ego Free Gifts BOGO Upsell and explore its main Free Gift and Upsell features.",[3590,3591,3592,3593],"2026-07-29T10:37:49.069Z","2026-10-14T04:41:30.598Z",[],"About Ego BOGO Free Gifts & Bundles",{"_189":305,"_227":3602,"_229":307},{"_189":3599,"_227":3600,"_229":3601},{"_189":3596,"_227":3597,"_229":3598},{"_189":818,"_227":3594,"_229":3595},"

Launch your first promotion in just a few steps:

Install and activate Ego Free Gifts BOGO Upsell.
Create your first Free Gift, Upsell or Bundle campaign.
Add a widget to showcase the offer on your storefront.
Activate the campaign and test the customer experience.

Use these guides to get up and running:

","Get Started","what-sets-ego-free-gifts-bogo-upsell-apart","

Ego brings Free Gift, BOGO, and Upsell campaigns into one app, so you can manage multiple promotion strategies without switching between separate tools.

The app offers:

All-in-one tool to increase order value — Present relevant offers at the right moments to encourage customers to add more to their orders.

Simple campaign management — Configure campaign rules, storefront displays, and discount behavior from one place.
Flexible customer targeting — Deliver more relevant promotions based on shopping behavior and customer conditions.
Consistent storefront experience — Customize promotional widgets to match your store and guide customers clearly through each offer.
24/7 support — Get help with campaign setup, theme compatibility, and storefront placement whenever needed.

","What Sets Ego Free Gifts BOGO Upsell Apart?","available-campaigns","

Ego Free Gifts BOGO Upsell includes 3 main campaign categories.

1. Free Gift

Create offers that reward customers based on conditions such as cart value, product quantity, or selected products.

You can use Free Gift campaigns to run promotions such as:

Gift with cart value/cart quantity
BXGY
BOGO
Rewards Bar

2. Upsell

Recommend additional products at different stages of the shopping journey, including:

Product pages (You can create Cross-sell, Frequently Bought Together, and Add-on offers)
Carts
Checkout page
Post-purchase page
Thank you page

3. Bundle

Sell more units per order with a Bundle deal on the product page: quantity breaks, Buy X Get Y and product bundles in one widget, built from ready-made templates.

See Bundle Deal Overview & Templates.

","Available Campaigns","

Ego Free Gifts BOGO Upsell is a Shopify app that helps merchants create Free Gift, Upsell and Bundle offers throughout the customer journey.

The app allows you to reward customers when they meet specific purchase conditions, recommend relevant products, and display promotional offers across your storefront.

By combining Free Gift and Upsell tools in one app, you can encourage larger purchases, improve product discovery, and increase average order value.

","cart-art-how-to-customize-the-cart-font","how-to-customize-the-cart-font","How to customize the cart font?",[3613,3614],"Aug 3, 2026","2025-10-02T03:28:31.000Z","2026-08-03T08:06:04.339Z",[],"cart-drawer","Ego Cart Drawer",{"_189":3618,"_227":3619,"_229":3620},{"_189":3615,"_227":3616,"_229":3617},"old-version-installed-before-24-02-2025","

In some cases, merchants may want to change the cart font to better match their theme or use a custom font.

To change the font in the cart, simply use the following CSS code:

section#cart-drawer-container {

font-family: your-font-name !important;
}
Replace your-font-name with the exact name of the font you want to use.

Example:

section#cart-drawer-container {
font-family: Montserrat !important;
}

Paste this code into the Custom CSS section in your Cart Editor Settings.

$\"\"$

Need help? Let us know via in-app live chat or email: help@opusecom.co🤩

","Old version - Installed before 24/02/2025","current-version-installed-after-24-02-2025","

To make the cart font match your theme’s font, go to Settings and enable the option Apply Theme Fonts.

$\"\"$

To use a custom font in your cart, apply the following CSS code:

#cart-drawer-container {

font-family: your-font-name !important;

}

Replace your-font-name with the exact name of the font you want to use.

Example:
#cart-drawer-container {

font-family: Montserrat !important;

}

Paste this code into the Custom CSS section in your Cart Editor Settings.

$\"\"$

","Current version - Installed after 24/02/2025","cart-art-if-i-change-from-paid-plan-to-free-plan-will-i-be-charged","if-i-change-from-paid-plan-to-free-plan-will-i-be-charged","If I change from Paid plan to Free plan, will I be charged?",[3629],"Jul 30, 2026","2025-10-02T20:21:58.000Z","2026-07-30T11:00:01.724Z",[],{"_189":305,"_227":3630,"_229":307},"

If you switch from a Paid plan to the Free plan before your trial ends, you won’t be charged.

However, if you downgrade after the trial has ended but before the current subscription period ends, you will still be charged for the full billing period. Shopify will automatically refund the unused portion of the billing cycle if the app is not uninstalled.

If you have any questions regarding this matter, please reach out to our support team.

Need help? Let us know via in-app live chat or email: help@egohub.co 🤩

","cart-art-will-i-get-charged-after-uninstalling-the-app","will-i-get-charged-after-uninstalling-the-app","Will I get charged after uninstalling the app?",[3638],"2025-10-02T20:49:16.000Z","2026-07-30T11:00:20.015Z",[],{"_189":305,"_227":3639,"_229":307},"

If you uninstall the app within the 7-day trial, you won’t be charged. After the trial ends, you will still be charged for the full subscription period, even if you uninstall before it ends. If you have any questions regarding this matter, please reach out to our support team.

Need help? Let us know via in-app live chat or email: help@egohub.co 🤩

","cart-art-how-to-set-up-ai-recommended-upsells","how-to-set-up-ai-recommended-upsells","How to set up AI recommended Upsells?","Learn how to configure in Shopify Search & Discovery to set up AI recommended Upsells.",[3648,3649],"2025-10-02T03:32:57.000Z","2026-08-03T08:51:19.315Z",[],{"_189":3653,"_227":3654,"_229":3655},{"_189":3650,"_227":3651,"_229":3652},"steps-to-set-up-ai-recommended-upsells","

Step 1:

To edit the Complementary products and Related products of each product, please navigate to Recommendations page > Find the product you want to edit and click the row. If the main product is not available > Click \"Add recommendations\". !

$\"\"$

Step 2:

Both sections \"Edit complementary products\" and \"Edit related products\" have the \"Browse\" button for you to select the products from your product list. !

$\"\"$

Click \"Browse\", tick the products you want to suggest and click \"Add\". !

$\"\"$

For related products, the data has been auto-generated, however, you can customize by ticking \"Hide auto-generated recommendations\" at the bottom of the page and choose recommended products upon your preferences.

Hit \"Save\" to finalize the setup.

Need help? Let us know via in-app live chat or email: help@egohub.co 🤩

","Steps to set up AI recommended Upsells","summary","

In the Upsells features, there are 2 methods to set up upsell products. One is by manually creating upsell offer, and the second is to have it automatically set up using the data from Shopify Search & Discovery. !

$\"\"$

For people who have used Shopify Search & Discovery already, it is recommended that you choose to set up upsell products by \"Use AI recommended upsells\" option as it saves more time setting up the upsells comparing to creating manual offers. You can select either \"Complementary\" or \"Related\" option and it takes the data from the app > Recommendations.

$\"\"$

By default, the \"Complementary products\" column is empty and has to be configured manually, only the \"Related products\" has data gathered from customers' behaviour. Click here to see in details how recommendations in this app work.

","Summary","cart-art-how-to-cancel-subscriptions","how-to-cancel-subscriptions","How to cancel Subscriptions?",[3663,3664],"2025-10-02T02:04:30.000Z","2026-07-30T11:01:33.113Z",[],{"_189":305,"_227":3668,"_229":307},{"_189":3665,"_227":3666,"_229":3667},"steps-by-steps-guide","

If you prefer to not use the above link, please follow the steps below to uninstall instead:

Click on the \"Ego Cart Upsell\" app on the Apps menu of your Shopify Admin.
Select the \"Pricing\" tab on the left side of the screen.
Click select under FREE block - confirm the plan, then it's all done. You will be free of charge from now on.

| Please change the app plan to FREE before uninstalling the app to get rid of over-charged.

Rest assured that Ego doesn't leave any code behind on your store when uninstalled since it is enabled through an app embed.

Need help? Let us know via in-app live chat or email: help@egohub.co 🤩

","Steps by steps guide:","

If you're running into any issues with how Ego is working, please feel free to reach out to us in the chat on the bottom right of the app. We're always happy to help troubleshoot and we always appreciate feedback.

If you're still set on parting ways with us though, all you need to do is change to FREE plan in our Pricing tab; changing app plan to FREE will automatically cancel your subscription to Ego.

$\"\"$

","cart-art-when-will-i-get-charged-after-the-trial-ends","when-will-i-get-charged-after-the-trial-ends","When will I get charged after the trial ends?",[3676],"2025-10-02T20:47:24.000Z","2026-07-30T11:01:05.687Z",[],{"_189":305,"_227":3677,"_229":307},"

The Trial period lasts for 7 days (Basic, Advanced, and Pro plan) from the moment you install Ego Cart Upsell Cart Drawer. The subscription will be automatically added to Shopify billing cycle and billed right after the trial ends according to Shopify subscription charges.

Need help? Let us know via in-app live chat or email: help@egohub.co 🤩

","cart-art-how-to-convert-the-currency-in-rewards-bar","how-to-convert-the-currency-in-rewards-bar","How to convert the Currency in Rewards Bar?","Learn to convert the currency of the rewards bar when selling to different countries.",[3686,3687],"2025-10-02T02:18:43.000Z","2026-08-03T07:56:38.262Z",[],{"_189":3653,"_227":3691,"_229":3655},{"_189":3688,"_227":3689,"_229":3690},"steps-to-convert-the-currency-of-rewards-bar","

Step 1: Set up multiple currencies through Shopify Markets.

From your Shopify admin, go to Markets.
Click the market that you want to customize.
Click the + icon next to the Currency setting.
Click the currency, and then select the desired currency from the menu. By default, the market's currency is set to the currency for the region that you've selected for your market. For markets that contain more than one region, Use local currencies is set as the default instead.
Select whether prices are rounded up after currency conversion.
Click Done.
In the top bar, click Save.

$\"\"$

Step 2: Set up in app.

Go to Rewards bar feature page, tick the box in the Advanced settings called \"Enable Currency converter in Rewards Bar\".

$\"\"$

After that, for each field to input the minimum amount of the tier, you just need to follow your base currency. It will be converted to customers' currencies following the exchange rate of Shopify. Hit \"Save\" to finalize the setup.

Need help? Let us know via in-app live chat or email: help@opusecom.co 🤩

","Steps to convert the currency of Rewards bar","

When creating a reward tier based on the minimum cart value, merchants have to input a number representing the value, which is normally in the default currency of the store.

$\"\"$

If merchants sell to multiple markets, which means a variety of currency, this minimum value has to be converted to show the correct threshold of the rewards bar for each country. The advanced setting \"Enable Currency converter on Rewards Bar\" is for this purpose. However, for this setting to work properly, you need to follow these basic steps:

Step 1: Set up multiple currencies through Shopify Markets.
Step 2: Set up in app.

The currency in cart can be converted if you have set up multiple currencies in Shopify Markets and enable Shopify country selector. This advanced setting is used to convert the milestones of the rewards bar only.

","cart-art-is-it-easy-to-switch-between-plans","is-it-easy-to-switch-between-plans","Is it easy to switch between plans?",[3699],"2025-10-02T20:31:41.000Z","2026-07-30T11:00:47.101Z",[],{"_189":305,"_227":3700,"_229":307},"

Yes, it is really easy to switch plans. To switch between plans, go to the Pricing page and select your desired plan.

$\"\"$

You will then be directed to your Shopify admin to approve the subscription. If you have unused days from your previous plan, Shopify refunds you automatically in the form of Shopify credits.

Need help? Let us know via in-app live chat or email: help@egohub.co 🤩

","cart-art-if-i-change-from-paid-plan-to-free-plan-will-i-lose-the-features-or-effects-that-","if-i-change-from-paid-plan-to-free-plan-will-i-lose-the-features-or-effects-that-were-available-in-the-previous-plan","If I change from Paid plan to Free plan, will I lose the features or effects that were available in the previous plan?",[3708],"2025-10-02T20:23:13.000Z","2026-08-03T03:34:09.966Z",[],{"_189":305,"_227":3709,"_229":307},"

Upon downgrading, all data regarding your setup remains. However, there are a few points you should consider:

We will select list of carts based on the number of carts available on your plan (Default cart will stay)
You can still edit the features available in your previous plan but they can not be active unless you upgrade your plan again.

Need help? Let us know via in-app live chat or email: help@egohub.co 🤩

","cart-art-can-i-cancel-my-subscription-at-anytime","can-i-cancel-my-subscription-at-anytime","Can I cancel my subscription at anytime?",[3717,3718],"2025-10-02T20:44:08.000Z","2026-08-03T03:32:09.632Z",[],{"_189":305,"_227":3722,"_229":307},{"_189":3719,"_227":3720,"_229":3721},"how-to-cancel-subscription","

Step 1: Access the Pricing page from the app menu's bar

$\"\"$

Step 2: Click Active in Free plan to downgrade your plan

$\"\"$

Need help? Let us know via in-app live chat or email: help@egohub.co 🤩

","How to cancel subscription","

Absolutely! At Ego, we prioritize flexibility and control over your subscription. You can cancel anytime without hassle. Plus, the first 14 days of a paid subscription are completely free. If you decide to cancel within this period, you won’t be charged.

","cart-art-how-to-set-up-reward-tier-to-show-by-country","how-to-set-up-reward-tier-to-show-by-country","How to set up reward tier to show by country?","Learn how to utilize the advanced setting of rewards bar to show reward tiers to limited countries.",[3731,3732],"2025-10-02T19:53:36.000Z","2026-08-03T07:55:52.721Z",[],{"_189":3653,"_227":3736,"_229":3655},{"_189":3733,"_227":3734,"_229":3735},"steps-to-set-up-reward-tier-to-show-by-country","

Step 1: Include the country you want to show to in your Markets.

Navigate to \"Markets\" in your Shopify Admin.

$\"\"$

Check carefully if the country you want to show to is included in your existing markets. If not, click \"Create market\". Set up your new market by giving it a name, then select the countries for this market by clicking \"Add condition\".

$\"\"$

Step 2: Turn on the region selector in your live theme.

Go to \"Online Store\" in your Shopify Admin. Click \"Customize\" button next to your current live theme.

$\"\"$

Select either your \"Header\" or \"Footer\" section (depending on your theme) and turn on the Country/region selector:

$\"\"$

The result should have a field to select the country on your store as in the below screenshot:

$\"\"$

Step 3: Set up the feature in app.

Go to the Rewards Bar feature page, create a tier and tick the option \"Show this tier to limited country only\". Then click \"Select Countries\" and click all the countries you want to see the tier.

$\"\"$

Hit \"Save\" to finalize the setup.

Need help? Let us know via in-app live chat or email: help@opusecom.co 🤩

","Steps to set up reward tier to show by country","

When creating a reward tier for the rewards bar, there is an option under every tier to whether show the tier to limited country selection or not - which means each tier may have a different country display condition.

Example: A common used case is when merchants have 3 different free shipping threshold for different countries. Now we can set up: Tier 1: Free shipping at $30 - only shown for Vietnam, Thailand, Singapore. Tier 2: Free shipping at $70 - only shown for Japan and China. Tier 3: Free shipping at $100 - only shown for Germany.

Instead of seeing 3 reward tiers, each country listed above will only see ONE free shipping threshold in their rewards bar.

$\"\"$

This feature works depending on your Shopify Markets, which creates a region selector that you show on your online store. The basic steps for the feature to work properly are:
Step 1: Make sure to include the country you want to show to in your Markets.
Step 2: Turn on the region selector in your live theme.
Step 3: Set up in app.

","cart-art-how-can-i-test-the-cart-without-enabling-on-live-store","how-can-i-test-the-cart-without-enabling-on-live-store","How can I test the cart without enabling on Live Store?",[3745],"2025-10-02T01:57:48.000Z","2026-10-14T08:45:35.423Z",[3744],"how-to-test-a-cart-with-test-mode",{"_189":305,"_227":3746,"_229":307},"

You can play around with the features of the cart without showing the cart on your live store, by enabling Ego in a draft theme.

New: the easiest way to try a cart on your live store is Test mode — only visitors with your private preview link see the cart. See Test Mode Setup.

You can also test the cart in a draft theme:

Step 1:

Go to the Themes page in your Shopify admin. !

$\"\"$

Step 2:

Find your draft theme, then click the Customize button. !

$\"\"$

Step 3:

In the editor, click the App embeds icon (looks like a puzzle piece). !

$\"\"$

Step 4:

Find Ego Cart in the list and enable it. Hit Save. !

$\"\"$

Step 5:

Click Preview to check how the cart appears in your draft theme. !

$\"\"$

Need help? Let us know via in-app live chat or email: help@egohub.co 🤩

","cart-art-will-i-get-charged-more-when-i-change-the-plan","will-i-get-charged-more-when-i-change-the-plan","Will I get charged more when I change the plan?","We understand that your needs may change over time. Here’s what to expect when you upgrade or downgrade your subscription plan.",[3755,3756,3757,3758],"2025-10-02T20:50:58.000Z","2026-07-30T10:59:39.544Z",[],{"_189":305,"_227":3768,"_229":307},{"_189":3765,"_227":3766,"_229":3767},{"_189":3762,"_227":3763,"_229":3764},{"_189":3759,"_227":3760,"_229":3761},"ii-downgrade-plan","

When downgrading, Shopify will show a confirmation message. After confirming, you will lose access to features exclusive to the higher-tier plan.

When switching to a lower monthly plan, Shopify will automatically apply a credit for the unused portion of your current plan.

Proration Formula:

Credit = (current_plan_cost - new_plan_cost) × (remaining_days / 30)

Example:

You're on the Premium Plan ($39.99/month) and downgrade to the Advance Plan ($19.99/month) on Day 15.

Calculation:

($39.99 - $19.99) × (15/30) = $10.00

You’ll receive a $10.00 credit, automatically applied to your next app charge.

🔍 To check your credits: Go to Shopify Admin → Settings → Billing → Credits *More info: Shopify – Manage Billing

Need help? Let us know via in-app live chat or email: help@egohub.co 🤩

","II. Downgrade Plan","i-upgrade-plan","

When you upgrade to a higher plan, Shopify will ask you to approve the new charge. Learn more about how Shopify handles app charges here.

Once approved:

You’ll immediately unlock all features of the new plan.
All your existing data will remain intact.
Your current recurring charge will be canceled and replaced with the new one. 💡 If you upgrade mid-cycle, a prorated charge will apply based on the remaining days in your billing cycle.

Proration Formula:

Total = current_plan_cost + (new_plan_cost - current_plan_cost) × (remaining_days / 30)

Example:

You're on the Advance Plan ($19.99).
On Day 15 of the cycle, you upgrade to the Premium Plan ($39.99).

Calculation:

$19.99 + ($39.99 - $19.99) × (15/30) = $19.99 + $10.00 = $29.99

Your invoice will reflect two charges:

$19.99 for the Advance Plan
$10.00 for the upgrade If you upgrade on the same day your billing cycle starts, you’ll simply be charged the full price of the new plan (e.g., $39.99 for Premium). ---

","I. Upgrade Plan","table-of-contents","

I. Upgrade Plan

II. Downgrade Plan

📌 Note: Ego uses Shopify’s billing system, but operates on its own 30-day billing cycle, which may not align exactly with Shopify's invoice cycle. Most app charges will appear on your next Shopify invoice.

For more, see Shopify’s Billing Help Article.

","Table of Contents","

We understand that your needs may change over time. Here’s what to expect when you upgrade or downgrade your subscription plan.

","cart-art-why-cant-i-see-my-upsell-product-on-the-storefront","why-cant-i-see-my-upsell-product-on-the-storefront","Why can’t I see my Upsell product on the Storefront?",[3777,3778,3779],"Oct 2, 2025","2025-10-02T01:36:52.000Z","2025-10-02T21:40:00.000Z",[],{"_189":3786,"_227":3787,"_229":3788},{"_189":3783,"_227":3784,"_229":3785},{"_189":3780,"_227":3781,"_229":3782},"online-store-sales-channel","

Ensure the product is available in the Online Store sales channel:

Go to your Shopify Admin → Products tab.
Select the product.
In the Publishing section (top right), look for a green dot next to Online Store. !

$\"\"$

f it’s not there:

Click the three-dot icon in that section.
Select Manage Sales Channels.
Add the product to Online Store.

$\"\"$

Need help? Let us know via in-app live chat or email: help@egohub.co 🤩

","Online Store Sales Channel","active-status-vs-draft-status","

Make sure the product is set to Active. If the product is marked as Draft, it will not display as an upsell.

You can verify this in the Products tab of your Shopify Admin.
Look at the Status column next to the product name.

$\"\"$

","Active Status VS. Draft Status","track-quantity","

If “Track quantity” is enabled, the product must have available inventory. Check the Available column in your Shopify Admin:

If the number is 0, the add-on won’t appear.
Shopify uses four different inventory states. You can learn more about them here. For single-variant products:
Scroll to the Inventory section to view stock levels.

$\"\"$

For multi-variant products:

Go to the Variants section.
Click on each variant to view its inventory settings. ---

","Track Quantity","cart-art-why-ego-cart-doesnt-open-when-i-click-atc","why-ego-cart-doesnt-open-when-i-click-atc","Why Ego cart doesn't open when I click Add-to-cart button?","Why Ego cart doesn't open when I click ATC?",[3797],"2025-10-02T20:05:24.000Z","2026-07-30T03:40:41.661Z",[],{"_189":305,"_227":3798,"_229":307},"

Have you encountered an issue where the Ego cart does not open when you click on the Add to cart button on your store's pages, even though it's activated? This can be frustrating and may prevent your customers from completing their purchases. In this article, we will explain why this may be happening and how you can resolve it.

What is causing this issue?

The most common reason for the Ego cart not opening is due to the add to cart event being overlapped or over-ridden by other applications or theme on your store. The add to cart event is what triggers the Ego cart to open, so if it is not functioning properly, the cart will not open as expected.

How can I resolve this issue?

If you are experiencing this issue, the best course of action is to contact our support team. Our team of experts will be able to identify the root cause of the problem and provide you with the optimal solution.

$\"\"$

In some cases, the issue may be related to a specific app or theme on your store. In this case, our support team may recommend disabling or removing the app or making changes to your theme's code to resolve the issue.

","cmumfml6g034e2no5vt5t8h6a","shopify-sidekick-integration","How to use Shopify Sidekick with Ego Cart Drawer?","Ego Cart Drawer integrates with Shopify Sidekick to help you quickly find information.",[3808,3809,3810,3811],"Sep 29, 2026","2026-09-29T08:46:24.184Z","2026-09-29T08:50:40.667Z",[],{"_189":3821,"_227":3822,"_229":3823},{"_189":3818,"_227":3819,"_229":3820},{"_189":3815,"_227":3816,"_229":3817},{"_189":3812,"_227":3813,"_229":3814},"tips-for-asking-questions","

For better results, try to make your questions specific.

Mention the metric you want to check
Instead of asking “How is my cart doing?”, try “What was my cart revenue in the last 7 days?”
Include a time period when asking about analytics
For example: “How many cart orders did I get yesterday?” or “What was my cart abandonment rate in the last 30 days?”
Ask for a summary when you want an overview
For example: “Summarize my cart performance for the last 30 days.”
Use feature names when looking for setup help
For example: “How do I set up a Free Gift?” or “Find the guide for creating an upsell.”

","Tips for asking questions","how-to-use-ego-cart-drawer-with-sidekick","

Step 1: Have Ego Cart Drawer installed on your Shopify store.
Step 2: Enable Ego Cart Drawer in Sidekick settings.

Step 3: Input a question such as \"How can I set up Ego cart drawer?\" in Sidekick. Sidekick will ask you permission to use Ego Cart Drawer for this request. Click Yes and Submit.

Step 4: Sidekick will give you a summary answer based on the data it collects from the app as well as documents.

","How to use Ego Cart Drawer with Sidekick?","what-can-sidekick-do-with-ego-cart-drawer","

With Ego Cart Drawer connected, Sidekick can answer questions such as:

What was my cart revenue in the last 7 days?
How many upsells were added to cart?
What are my top-performing products?
Summarize my abandoned cart performance.
How do I set up a Rewards Bar?
Which cart is currently active?

Sidekick can access selected information from Ego Cart Drawer, including:

Information type	Details	Examples
Cart information	Cart name, cart status, scheduled date, targeted device, targeted customers	Which cart is currently active? Which carts are configured for mobile devices?
Analytics	Orders and revenue; Upsell, Free Gift, and Add-on performance; Top-performing products	How did my cart perform in the last 7 days? How much revenue did upsells generate last month?
Abandoned Cart	Cart and checkout abandonment rate, customer behavior funnel	How many customers abandoned at checkout? Which product is abandoned the most?
Help Docs	Sidekick gives you a summary on how to set up a feature, and scans the help center to provide you proper articles for detailed instructions.	How can I set up rewards bar for specific countries? How to configure Free Gift feature?

","What can Sidekick do with Ego Cart Drawer?","what-is-shopify-sidekick","

Sidekick is Shopify’s AI assistant built into the Shopify admin. You can ask questions in everyday language, and Sidekick uses the connected apps and store data available to it to return relevant information.

Ego Cart Drawer for Sidekick brings key cart and performance data from Ego Cart Drawer into that experience. Once connected, you can ask about cart status, revenue, upsells, abandoned carts, which documents to read for a particular setup, then get a quick summary without navigating through the Ego Cart Drawer dashboard.

It works much like asking a teammate “how is my cart performing this week?”, “which cart is active right now?”, or “what is my abandonment rate?” instead of checking multiple reports manually.

Important note: This version is read-only. There are no action tools. Sidekick can only read your Ego Cart data and help documents to answer questions. It never creates, edits, approves, or pays anything.

","What is Shopify Sidekick?","cart-art-what-plans-we-offer-and-the-differences-installed-since-332026","available-plans-and-differences-installed-since-332026","Available Plans and Their Differences (Installed since 3/3/2026)","What plans we offer and the differences? (Installed since 3/3/2026)",[3833,3834,3835],"2026-03-03T03:16:58.000Z","2026-08-03T03:38:24.074Z",[],"Billing & Plans",{"_189":3842,"_227":3843,"_229":3844},{"_189":3839,"_227":3840,"_229":3841},{"_189":3836,"_227":3837,"_229":3838},"explanation","

Multi cart: The Free plan and the Basic plan do not have the multi-cart feature, while Advanced plan allows up to 10 carts and Pro plan has a maximum of 50 different carts.
Announcement: You can only create a single announcement in Basic plan, while other paid plans can have multiple announcements (up to 5 announcements).
Multi-tier Progress Bar In the Free plan, the Rewards bar feature is not available. In paid plans, you can create up to 3 reward tiers, with 3 templates and confetti animation. If you only want the values of some specific products/collections to be counted in the Rewards bar, the feature is available in the Pro plan. The option to show rewards bar on empty cart is also only available in Pro plan.

$\"\"$

Basic Free Gift/Advanced Free Gift Free plan does not include the Free gift feature. In Basic and Advanced plan, the Basic Free Gift feature is available. This means that you can set up the free gift to be triggered by the minimum quantity of items in the cart or the minimum purchase amount. However, to unlock the option to trigger the free gift by buying specific products in the store (Advanced Free Gift), or selecting a specific variant of a product to be your free gift, you need to be in Pro plan.

$\"\"$

Upsell/Advance Upsell Upsell feature is not available in the Free plan. In the Basic plan, you can set up the Upsells by either AI recommended method or Manual method. With the Manual method, you can select the trigger of the upsells to be either \"All products\" or \"Specific products\".

$\"\"$

The locked features in the image above (Specific collection, Discounts, Advanced settings) are available in Advanced and Pro plan only, and you can also choose specific variants of the upsell in these 2 plans. In the Pro plan, you can show upsells when the cart is empty.

Basic Add-ons/Advanced Add-ons Free plan does not include the Add-ons feature. In Basic plan, you can set up the fixed price for your add-ons. However, to unlock the setting of Percentage Price, Tier Price, Auto-fulfill option and Add second Add-ons, you need to be in Advanced or Pro plan.

$\"\"$

Need help? Let us know via in-app live chat or email: help@opusecom.co 🤩

","Explanation","plan-descriptions","

$\"\"$

For details, please check out the feature table in the Pricing page of the app.

$\"\"$

","Plan Descriptions","plans-and-pricing","

We have 4 plans for merchants to choose from: Free, Basic, Advanced and Pro.

Pricing

Plan	Pricing
Basic	$12.99/month ($29.99/month for Shopify Plus)
Advanced	$19.99/month ($39.99/month for Shopify Plus)
Pro	$39.99/month ($69.99/month for Shopify Plus)

Each paid plan has a free 7-day trial that can be cancelled anytime. You will only be charged when the 7th day is over.

","Plans and Pricing","cart-art-app-billing-cycle","app-billing-cycle","App billing cycle",[3852,3853,3854,3855,3856],"2025-10-02T20:07:26.000Z","2026-08-03T03:32:54.442Z",[],{"_189":305,"_227":3869,"_229":307},{"_189":3866,"_227":3867,"_229":3868},{"_189":3863,"_227":3864,"_229":3865},{"_189":3860,"_227":3861,"_229":3862},{"_189":3857,"_227":3858,"_229":3859},"where-to-see-app-charges","

You can review all app charges directly in your Shopify Admin:

Go to Settings > Billing.
View your current and past invoices.
App charges are listed as line items under App Charges or App Usage Charges. For more detailed information, Shopify provides an official breakdown here: Shopify Help Center – App Charges ---

Need help? Let us know via in-app live chat or email: help@egohub.co 🤩

","Where to See App Charges","billing-timeline-example","

Let’s say you install an app on May 20 and approve a $12.99/month recurring charge:

Your first app billing cycle is May 20 – Jun 19.
You’ll be charged $12.99 on your next Shopify invoice, even if your main Shopify subscription renews on a different date.
On Jun 19, the next $12.99 will be billed, starting a new 30-day app billing cycle. Please note: App billing cycles and your Shopify billing cycle may not always align. This means charges can occasionally appear larger than expected, especially if Shopify combines multiple app billing periods (e.g., two months of charges) into a single invoice.

$\"\"$

","Billing Timeline Example","types-of-app-charges","

There are three main types of charges you may see from an app:

Recurring Application Charges (most common)

A flat monthly fee — for example, $12.99/month for Ego Basic plan.
Billed every 30 days starting from the approval date.
Automatically renews unless canceled.

Usage Charges

Based on how much you use the app (e.g., based on orders, views, or other metrics).
These are added to your invoice within your Shopify billing cycle.

One-Time Charges

A single charge, typically for a special feature, upgrade, or add-on.
Billed once and not repeated unless explicitly triggered again. ---

","Types of App Charges","what-is-an-app-billing-cycle","

An app billing cycle is the interval at which you are charged for using a third-party app on your Shopify store. Shopify manages billing for most apps (including Ego), so your app charges are added directly to your Shopify invoice.

Key Points:

App billing cycles do not necessarily match your Shopify subscription billing cycle.
Each app you install may have its own billing cycle, which usually starts on the day you approve the app charge.
Charges are typically recurring monthly, but apps can also use usage-based or one-time charges. ---

","What is an App Billing Cycle?","

When using apps through Shopify, including Ego, it's important to understand how app billing cycles work so you can manage your charges and subscriptions effectively. This guide will walk you through how Shopify handles billing for third-party apps, what to expect on your invoice, and how billing cycles relate to your Shopify subscription.

","cart-art-how-to-set-up-an-add-on-products-current-version-installed-since-24022025","how-to-set-up-an-add-on-products-current-version-installed-since-24022025","Add-ons Setup","Shipping Protection and Gift Wrapping with a single touch",[3879,3880,3881],"2025-09-30T21:31:08.000Z","2026-10-15T10:52:16.606Z",[],"Features & Setup",{"_189":3888,"_227":3889,"_229":3890},{"_189":3885,"_227":3886,"_229":3887},{"_189":3882,"_227":3883,"_229":3884},"3-steps-to-set-up-an-add-on-product","

Step 1: Access Add-ons Feature

From the app’s navigation menu, go to the Cart Editor tab. This will open the Cart List page. Click on the cart you want to edit to begin making changes.

$\"\"$

Select Add-ons module in the feature menu. Click Enable to turn on the feature.

$\"\"$

Step 2: Configure Add-on Product

Once enabled, an add-on product (Shipping Protection) will be automatically created. You can customize the product's title, description, and image as needed.

$\"\"$

Next, set up the price. There are three pricing methods available: Fixed Price, Percentage Price and Tier Price.
If you want to add the second add-on product, click Add Second Addons button.

$\"\"$

Step 3: Check how your add-on works on the storefront

Add items to cart to open cart.
Check if add-on appears in the cart.

$\"\"$

Need help? Let us know via in-app live chat or email: help@opusecom.co 🤩

","3. Steps to set up an add-on product","2-common-used-cases","

Example: Merchants want to offer Shipping Protection as an add-on for $5.

$\"\"$

","2. Common used cases","1-what-is-add-ons","

Add-ons is a feature that displays special services or products offered by merchants—such as shipping protection, gift wrapping, and more—directly in the cart.

","1. What is Add-ons?","cart-art-how-to-set-up-upsells-current-version-installed-since-24022025","how-to-set-up-upsells-current-version-installed-since-24022025","Upsells Setup (Current version - Installed since 24/02/2025)","Add in-cart upselling and cross-selling product block.",[3899,3900,3901,3902,3903],"2025-09-30T01:11:15.000Z","2026-10-15T10:49:27.378Z",[],{"_189":3914,"_227":3915,"_229":3916},{"_189":3885,"_227":3913,"_229":3887},{"_189":3910,"_227":3911,"_229":3912},{"_189":3907,"_227":3908,"_229":3909},{"_189":3904,"_227":3905,"_229":3906},"5-feature-settings-steps-to-set-up-an-automatic-upsells-offer","

Step 1

Navigate to the Cart Editor, select the cart that you want to edit. Then select Upsells module in the feature menu.

$\"\"$

Step 2

Select the template for how the upsell products show in the cart.

$\"\"$

There are 4 templates available: Default, Compacted, Slider and Stacked.

Step 3

Select \"Use AI recommended upsells\" method, which uses Shopify’s algorithm to suggest products with similar attributes. The data is taken from Shopify Search & Discovery app.

$\"\"$

Related: Default setting of this upsell method, and uses the auto-selected mechanism of Shopify.
Complementary: Similar to related products but is displayed differently on the product page. This requires manual setup in Shopify Search & Discovery.
How to configure within Shopify Search & Discovery App.

Step 4

Edit the upsell title and the upsell product background color.

$\"\"$

Other settings are:

Always show even the upsell product is in cart: The upsell product is still visible in the upsell block even if the same product is already in the cart.
Limit the number of upsell in cart: Use this when you want to limit the upsell products showing to customers at one time. !

$\"\"$

Step 5

Hit \"Save\" to finalize the setup.

$\"\"$

Step 6

If this button is in green color and says \"Enable\", it means the feature is not activated yet. Click to activate the module.

$\"\"$

Need help? Let us know via in-app live chat or email: help@opusecom.co 🤩

","5. Feature Settings: Steps to set up an automatic Upsells offer","4-advanced-settings","

In Manual method, there will be some advanced settings to show the upsells. For example, show this upsell if any/all of the following match: the cart value/cart quantity is equal to/not equal to/greater than/less than/..., or show upsells to specific countries.

$\"\"$

Other settings are:

Always show even the upsell product is in cart: The upsell product is still visible in the upsell block even if the same product is already in the cart.
Limit the number of upsell in cart: Use this when you want to limit the upsell products showing to customers at one time. !

$\"\"$

","4. Advanced Settings","3-feature-settings-steps-to-set-up-a-manual-upsells-offer","

Step 1

Navigate to the Cart Editor, select the cart that you want to edit. Then select Upsells module in the feature menu.

$\"\"$

Step 2

Select the template for how the upsell products show in the cart.

$\"\"$

There are 4 templates available: Default, Compacted, Slider and Stacked.

Step 3

Select the manual method and click \"Create Upsells\" to add an upsell module.

$\"\"$

The conditions to trigger upsell products can be All products, Specific products, Specific collections or Empty cart. Upsell products can only be searched for and configured one by one by selecting from the product list.

$\"\"$

After that, set up the discount for the upsells if you want to. This feature will automatically generate a discount itself, it is not necessary to create a equivalent Shopify discount.

If you have multiple upsell offers and a product may be the trigger of different upsell offers, the top offer (or the closest to the top) will be prioritized.

Step 4

Edit the upsell title and the upsell product background color.

$\"\"$

Step 5

Hit \"Save\" to finalize the setup.

$\"\"$

Step 6

If this button is in green color and says \"Enable\", it means the feature is not activated yet. Click to activate the module.

$\"\"$

","3. Feature Settings: Steps to set up a manual Upsells offer","

Example 1: Merchants want to encourage customers to buy more similar products for a discounted price.

$\"\"$

Example 2: Merchants want to promote a combo with better price compared to the main product.

$\"\"$

","1-upsells-definition","

Upsells is a block within the cart drawer that displays one or multiple complementary/related products of the added main products. Merchants can use this to encourage customers to purchase a more expensive item, add-ons, or upgrades to enhance their original purchase.

Customers can add these items to their cart with just a few clicks, increasing the chances of additional sales.

","1. Upsells Definition","cart-art-how-to-set-up-discount-box","how-to-set-up-discount-box","Discount Box Setup","Text field which allows customers to apply discount codes within the cart.",[3925,3926],"2025-10-01T20:56:33.000Z","2026-10-14T08:45:35.798Z",[],{"_189":3930,"_227":3931,"_229":3932},{"_189":3927,"_227":3928,"_229":3929},"steps-to-set-up-the-discount-box","

Step 1:

Navigate to the Cart Editor, select the cart that you want to edit. Then select Discount Box module in the feature menu.

$\"\"$

Step 2:

Edit the content for the Discount Box.

Discount Placeholder Text: A blurred text used to guide customers on how to input in this field, this text will be removed once the code is filled in. Default text is: Discount code.
Button Text: A clickable text to officially apply the discount to the order after filling in the code. Default text is: Apply.

$\"\"$

While multiple automatic discounts can be applied simultaneously, only one manual discount code is allowed in the cart drawer. To apply multiple manual discount codes, customers must proceed to checkout.
Free shipping discount code is not allowed in the cart drawer. Customers must complete this action at checkout.

Step 3:

Hit \"Save\" to finalize the setup.

$\"\"$

Step 4:

If this button is in green color and says \"Enable\", it means the feature is not activated yet. Click to activate the module.

$\"\"$

Need help? Let us know via in-app live chat or email: help@opusecom.co🤩

","Steps to set up the Discount Box","discount-box-definition","

Discount box is a field in which customers can type in the discount code. Instead of applying discount code in the checkout page, this field allows customers to use their code directly in the cart drawer, showing how the discount affects the order, hence making easier purchase decisions.

$\"\"$

","Discount Box Definition","cart-art-how-to-set-up-sticky-cart","how-to-set-up-sticky-cart","Sticky Cart Setup","Access cart drawer from all pages of the store with a button.",[3941,3942],"2025-10-02T20:03:09.000Z","2026-10-15T10:47:25.837Z",[],{"_189":3946,"_227":3947,"_229":3948},{"_189":3943,"_227":3944,"_229":3945},"2-steps-to-set-up-the-sticky-cart","

Step 1:

Navigate to the Sticky Cart in the app menu.

$\"\"$

Step 2:

Design how the sticky cart is displayed.

$\"\"$

Choose the cart icon in the 9 available options and the colors of the elements: Main background color, icon color, quantity background color, number color.
Change the button shape and size upon your wish.
Set up the position in mobile and desktop view (bottom/top right/left) and on which devices the sticky cart is shown (desktop only, mobile only or all devices).

Step 3:

Check the preview on mobile and desktop.

$\"\"$

Step 4:

Hit \"Save\" to finalize the setup.

$\"\"$

Step 5:

If this button at the top right of the page is in grey color, it means the feature is not activated yet. Click so it changes to green and enable the feature.

Need help? Let us know via in-app live chat or email: help@opusecom.co 🤩

","2. Steps to set up the Sticky Cart","1-sticky-cart-definition","

The sticky cart button is a button which is visible in all pages of your store. Customer can click this button to see their current cart drawer and the cart will slide from the position that has been set up in the cart editor.

","1. Sticky Cart Definition","cart-art-how-to-set-up-multi-cart","how-to-set-up-multi-cart","Multi-Cart Setup","Also called multiple carts separated by display conditions and settings",[3957,3958,3959],"2025-10-02T19:12:31.000Z","2026-10-15T10:41:11.160Z",[],{"_189":3964,"_227":3965,"_229":3966},{"_189":3885,"_227":3963,"_229":3887},{"_189":3960,"_227":3961,"_229":3962},"3-steps-to-set-up-multiple-carts","

Step 1: Create a new cart

From the app’s navigation menu, go to the Cart Editor tab.

Click on duplicate icon if you want to keep the settings and change display conditions.

$\"\"$

If you want to create a cart from scratch, click Create Cart.

$\"\"$

The new cart will be saved as a draft to prevent any conflicts. You can activate it once you’ve completed the settings.

$\"\"$

Step 2: Configure display condition

Click on arrow icon to open the trigger panel.

$\"\"$

Choose the device on which you want the cart to be displayed. e.g., Desktop only

$\"\"$

Choose the targeted customers you want the cart to be shown to. e.g., Logged-in customers.

$\"\"$

If you want the cart to be shown for all countries except one or some, choose Include > Select Locations.

$\"\"$

If you want the cart to be shown only for specific countries, choose Exclude > Select Locations.

$\"\"$

Select your start date and end date.

$\"\"$

Click save.

$\"\"$

Activate the cart.

$\"\"$

Step 3: Check how the cart works on store front

Need help? Let us know via in-app live chat or email: help@opusecom.co🤩

","3. Steps to set up multiple carts","

Example: Merchants want to create a cart for
- Mobile devices only
- For specific countries
- For specific customer tags, etc.

","1-multi-cart-definition","

The Multi-Cart feature allows you to create multiple shopping carts with predefined conditions—such as device type, customer location, or time-specific events. This helps you deliver a personalized shopping experience and optimize conversions effortlessly.

Default Cart: The initial cart that appears when you first install the app. It serves as the base setup before additional carts are created.

","1. Multi-Cart Definition","cart-art-how-to-set-up-a-free-gift-offer-current-version-installed-since-24022025","how-to-set-up-a-free-gift-offer-current-version-installed-since-24022025","Free Gift Setup (Current version - Installed since 24/02/2025)","Offering free items based on conditions like minimum spend, item quantity, or specific products/collections.",[3975,3976,3977],"2025-09-30T20:02:25.000Z","2026-10-15T10:39:39.066Z",[],{"_189":3982,"_227":3983,"_229":3984},{"_189":3885,"_227":3981,"_229":3887},{"_189":3978,"_227":3979,"_229":3980},"3-steps-to-set-up-a-free-gift-offer","

Step 1: Access Free Gift Feature

From the app’s navigation menu, go to the Cart Editor tab. This will open the Cart List page. Click on the cart you want to edit to begin making changes.

$\"\"$

Select Free Gift module in the feature menu.

$\"\"$

Step 2: Configure Free Gift Offer

Start by creating the first free gift offer. Click the Create Offer button.

$\"\"$

Choose one of the following trigger types to determine when the free gift is offered:

Minimum quantity of items – e.g., Buy at least 3 items
Minimum purchase amount – e.g., Spend at least $100
Specific Products/Collections – e.g., Purchase from the TEE Collection

$\"\"$

Choose the free gift.

$\"\"$

Choose how the gift is given and the limit number of gifts customers can get from this offer.

Click Create offer to save your setting.

$\"\"$

Step 3: Set up Free Gift Settings

Settings include:

Limiting total number of free products in cart.
Trigger free gift based on the total value of original (pre-discount) price. Check the box next to the setting(s) you want to apply.

$\"\"$

Step 4: Enable feature and check how your free gift works on the storefront

Click Enable to turn on the feature.

$\"\"$

In store front: Add products to the cart until the minimum requirement is met.
Check if the free gift option appears in the cart.
Manually add the free gift item to the cart in case you choose \"Let customers choose\" method.

$\"\"$

Notes: If you encounter any issues where the free gift is not appearing on your storefront, please follow these steps:

Check feature activation: Ensure that the Free Gift feature is enabled in the app settings.
Check free gift availability: Make sure the free gift item is in stock and available for purchase in the online store.
If you've already reviewed the steps above and your free gift is still not appearing, please contact our support team for further assistance.

Need help? Let us know via in-app live chat or email: help@opusecom.co 🤩

","3. Steps to set up a Free Gift Offer","

Example 1: Offer a free tee when customers spend at least $100.

$\"\"$

Example 2: Offer a free tee when customers buy at least 3 items.

$\"\"$

Example 3: Offer a free tee when customers buy an item from TEE Collection.

$\"\"$

","1-free-gift-definition","

The Free Gift feature allows you to offer free complimentary items to customers based on specific purchase conditions. You can set up free gifts to show in customer's cart when they meet one of the following criteria:

Minimum Spend Amount – e.g., Spend $100, get a free gift
Minimum Purchase Quantity – e.g., Buy 3 items, get 1 free
Specific Products or Collections – e.g., Buy any item from the TEE Collection collection, get a free item ---

","1. Free Gift Definition","cart-art-how-to-set-up-express-payments","how-to-set-up-express-payments","Express Payments Setup","Navigate to checkout page easier with accelerated checkout. Including Shopay, ApplePay, Paypal, GPay, etc.",[3993,3994],"2025-10-01T21:03:39.000Z","2026-10-15T10:28:04.427Z",[],{"_189":3998,"_227":3999,"_229":4000},{"_189":3995,"_227":3996,"_229":3997},"2-steps-to-set-up-express-payment","

Step 1:

Unlock Express Payments on Shopify Online Store

Go to Edit Code page of your theme

$\"\"$

Go to theme.liquid file

$\"\"$

Hit Ctrl+F or CMD+F and type in <body>

$\"\"$

Add the below code to any blank lines below the first <body> tag

<div style='display:none'> {% if additional_checkout_buttons %} {{ content_for_additional_checkout_buttons }} {% endif %} </div>

$\"\"$

Step 2:

Enable Express Payments Feature

From the app’s navigation menu, go to the Cart Editor tab. This will open the Cart List page. Click on the cart you want to enable the feature.

$\"\"$

Select Express Payment module in the feature menu. Click Enable to turn on the feature.

$\"\"$

Step 3:

Check to see if Express Payments have appeared in your cart.

$\"\"$

Need help? Let us know via in-app live chat or email: help@opusecom.co🤩

","2. Steps to set up Express Payment","1-express-payments-definition","

Express Payment refers to special checkout buttons designed for certain payment methods like PayPal, Apple Pay, Google Pay, Shop Pay, and more.

These buttons take customers directly to their preferred payment method, making the checkout process faster and reducing the chances of cart abandonment.

$\"\"$ $\"\"$

","1. Express Payments Definition","cart-art-how-to-set-up-trust-badges","how-to-set-up-trust-badges","Trust Badges Setup","Images of trusted payment options inside the Checkout Box.",[4009,4010],"2025-10-02T20:27:51.000Z","2026-10-15T10:27:47.210Z",[],{"_189":4014,"_227":4015,"_229":4016},{"_189":4011,"_227":4012,"_229":4013},"2-steps-to-set-up-trust-badges","

Step 1:

Navigate to the Cart Editor, select the cart that you want to edit. Then select Trust Badges module in the feature menu.

$\"\"$

Step 2:

Select the badges you would like to show in the cart drawer upon our 50 options by clicking the badges directly. If you want to add other images, you can upload your own:

$\"\"$

The new options will then be available at the \"Add your logo\" section and you can click them to start showing in the cart.

$\"\"$

Step 3:

Hit \"Save\" to finalize the setup.

$\"\"$

Step 4:

If this button is in green color and says \"Enable\", it means the feature is not activated yet. Click to activate the module.

$\"\"$

Need help? Let us know via in-app live chat or email: help@opusecom.co 🤩

","2. Steps to set up Trust Badges","1-trust-badges-definition","

Trust Badges are visual indicators displayed in the cart drawer to build customer confidence and reassure them about the security and legitimacy of the transaction. These badges typically represent security certifications, payment gateways, guarantees, or positive reviews.

$\"\"$

","1. Trust Badges Definition","cart-art-how-to-set-up-terms-conditions-current-version-installed-since-2422025","how-to-set-up-terms-conditions-current-version-installed-since-2422025","Customized Text (Terms & Conditions) Setup (Current version - Installed since 24/2/2025)","Add a terms and conditions checkbox & require customers to agree to your policies before checkout. It can also be used as a text line.",[4025,4026,4027],"2025-10-02T20:11:24.000Z","2026-10-15T10:27:18.376Z",[],{"_189":4034,"_227":4035,"_229":4036},{"_189":4031,"_227":4032,"_229":4033},{"_189":4028,"_227":4029,"_229":4030},"3-steps-to-set-up-a-customized-text","

Step 1:

Navigate to the Cart Editor, select the cart that you want to edit. Then select Terms & Conditions module in the feature menu.

$\"\"$

Step 2:

Fill in the text that you want the customer to agree with. If you want to link the text with an URL, click on the attachment icon and fill in the link as well as the text.

$\"\"$

Step 3:

Select related fields such as checkbox, required and set the color to match your store theme

$\"\"$

Step 4:

Hit \"Save\" to save all the changes

$\"\"$

Step 5:

Enable the module If the button says Enable, it means that the module is not enabled yet. Click on it to activate the module.

$\"\"$

Need help? Let us know via in-app live chat or email: help@opusecom.co 🤩

","3. Steps to set up a Customized Text","2-common-use-cases","

Example: Customer needs to agree with checkout rules, terms of use, shipping policy, payment terms, tax duties, the new Canada import tariff notice, refund policy, GDPR/CCPA compliance, and more before checkout. You can also use it for seasonal promotions or special events like Father’s Day, the 4th of July, and Summer Sale terms

","2. Common use cases","1-customized-text-definition","

Add a customizable checkbox to your cart or checkout page for various consent and policy confirmation. Additionally, this feature allows you to display a reminder text to inform customers of important updates or agreements before they complete their purchase.

$\"\"$

","1. Customized Text Definition","cart-art-how-to-set-up-announcements","how-to-set-up-announcements","Announcements Setup","A notification showing an announcement text with countdown timer or multiple announcement texts",[4045,4046,4047,4048],"2025-10-01T01:05:41.000Z","2026-10-15T10:15:21.744Z",[],{"_189":4056,"_227":4057,"_229":4058},{"_189":3885,"_227":4055,"_229":3887},{"_189":4052,"_227":4053,"_229":4054},{"_189":4049,"_227":4050,"_229":4051},"4-multiple-announcements","

$\"\"$

The Announcements feature allows to show up to 5 different texts. To set up multiple announcements, you should:

Select Multiple Announcement in the Announcement type
Fill in the content that you want to show to customers, hit \"Add new announcement\" if you want to show more announcements.
Announcements will auto-slide for the time in Display Duration.
Change the font size and style, the text color, and the arrow color.

You cannot show a time countdown when using Multiple Announcements.

Need help? Let us know via in-app live chat or email: help@opusecom.co🤩

","4. Multiple Announcements","3-steps-to-set-up-an-announcement","

Step 1:

Navigate to the Cart Editor, select the cart that you want to edit. Then select Announcements module in the feature menu.

$\"\"$

Step 2:

Set up the Timer by entering the number of hours and minutes (minimum 1 minute, maximum 24 hours). The countdown starts when the first product is added to the cart.

$\"\"$

Any value exceeding 24 hours will be automatically adjusted to 24.
The timer must be set to more than 0 minutes for the announcement to appear in the cart, even if you choose to display text only.

Step 3:

Choose what happens when the countdown ends:

Repeat the Countdown: Resets and starts over.
Hide the Countdown: The announcement bar disappears after the countdown ends.
Remove all items in cart: Removes all items from the cart once the countdown ends.

$\"\"$

Step 4:

Enter the Announcement Text, which will be displayed in the cart drawer. You can add emojis, align the text (left, center, right) and change the font style (normal, italic, bold).
Use {timer} where you want to display the timer. For example: Your products are reserved for {timer} minutes!
Customize the appearance of the text in the cart:

Text size and Text color change the size and color of the normal text, not including the timer.
Timer size and Timer color change the size and color of the timer only.

$\"\"$

Step 5:

$\"\"$

Customize the background color: solid or gradient color of the Announcement.
Adjust top/bottom padding.

Step 6:

Click \"Save\" to finalize the setup.

$\"\"$

Step 7:

If this button is in green color and says \"Enable\", it means the feature is not activated yet. Click to activate the module.

$\"\"$

","3. Steps to set up an Announcement","

Example 1: Merchants want to count down 20 minutes since customers add a product to cart.

$\"\"$

Example 2: Merchants want to inform customers about the BUY 2 GET 1 FREE sale campaign.

$\"\"$

","1-annoucements-definition","

The Announcements feature displays a notification bar with custom text and a countdown timer. When a customer adds a product to their cart, the countdown timer starts, creating a sense of urgency. This encourages faster checkouts and helps reduce cart abandonment rates. Announcement can be utilized to show other content without a timer, for example promoting a sale campaign.

","1. Annoucements Definition","cart-art-how-to-set-up-cart-notes-user-guide-current-version-installed-since-2422025","how-to-set-up-additional-notes","Additional Notes Setup","Text field allow putting additional information",[4067,4068],"2025-10-01T02:27:09.000Z","2026-10-15T10:12:57.264Z",[],{"_189":4072,"_227":4073,"_229":4074},{"_189":4069,"_227":4070,"_229":4071},"2-steps-to-set-up-a-cart-notes","

Step 1:

Navigate to the Cart Editor, select the cart that you want to edit. Then select Cart Notes module in the feature menu.

$\"\"$ $\"\"$

Step 2:

Fill in the title of the note box and the placeholder text of it

$\"\"$

Step 3:

Hit \"Save\" to save all the changes

$\"\"$

Step 4:

Enable the module

If the button says Enable, it means that the module is not enabled yet. Click on it to activate the module.

$\"\"$

Need help? Let us know via in-app live chat or email: help@opusecom.co 🤩

","2. Steps to set up a Cart Notes","1-additional-notes-definition","

Additional Notes is a text box being hidden under a text line, allowing customers to put additional notice for seller such as special requirements or shipping notice.

$\"\"$

","1. Additional Notes Definition","cart-art-how-to-set-up-rewards-bar-current-version-installed-since-2422025","how-to-set-up-rewards-bar-current-version-installed-since-2422025","Rewards Bar Setup (Current version - Installed since 24/2/2025)","A 'Free Shipping bar' progress bar that motivates customer to buy more",[4083,4084,4085,4086],"2025-09-30T02:51:39.000Z","2026-10-15T10:09:40.891Z",[],{"_189":4092,"_227":4093,"_229":4094},{"_189":3885,"_227":4091,"_229":3887},{"_189":4088,"_227":4089,"_229":4090},{"_189":3907,"_227":4087,"_229":3909},"

$\"\"$

Reward Bar module includes 5 advanced settings in general settings:

Show rewards on empty cart: Reward bar will show even if the cart is empty
Allow customers changing added item quantities in their cart: Quantity of products added by \"Free product\" reward type can't be changed
Enable Currency converter on Rewards Bar: Reward bar will run dynamically according to the customer preferred currency
Add discount amount to rewards bar: Discounted amount will be re-added to the reward bar
Remove auto-added products when the cart value is lower than the Minimum Amount: Rewarded products are removed if cart value drops below the tier’s minimum. Each reward tier will also have 1 advanced settings: Show this tier to limited country only: Limit countries from seeing this tier. Each tier can be set to show for different countries

$\"\"$

Need help? Let us know via in-app live chat or email: help@opusecom.co🤩

","3-steps-to-set-up-a-reward-bar","

Step 1:

Navigate to the Cart Editor, select the cart that you want to edit. Then select Reward Bar module in the feature menu.

$\"\"$

Step 2:

Select the Template and how the reward bar will run

$\"\"$

You can select how the reward bar show \"With or without icon\". Also, select how it runs in the dropdown \"Count the reward bar based on\"

Total value: The amount that the customer have to pay for items in cart
Total quantity: Sum of cart product's quantity

Step 3:

Edit the tier to match your rule

$\"\"$

Reward types: Including 4 types: Free Shipping, Free Product, Discount, Free Gift. These 4 types will be presented by 4 icons (In #1 template) in cart. Their mechanism are different: Free Shipping and Discount will only change the icon (In #1 template) of the tier to visualize the reward. But Free Product will automatically add a product to cart when the cart value is larger than Minimum Amount, and Free Gift will work based on the set up inside Free Gift module
Reward Description: Text line show under reward icon
Minimum Amount: The smallest cart value that the customer need to purchase to achieve this reward
Text before completing this tier: Text line runs above reward bar before the tier gets filled

Step 4:

Edit reward color and final text

$\"\"$

Text after completing full reward bar: Text line above the reward bar shows when all the tiers are reached

Step 5:

Hit \"Save\" to save all the changes

$\"\"$

Step 6:

If the button says Enable, it means that the module is not enabled yet. Click on it to activate the module.

$\"\"$

Step 7:

Create matching discounts on Shopify

$\"\"$ $\"\"$

Except for Free Gift, 3 other types will need to have discounts to work as rewards in cart. These discounts will be set up with the similar condition to the reward tier. For example: I have set up Free Shipping tier when the customer reaches $100 in Total value. I will have to set a automatic Free Shipping discount on Shopify with minimum purchase requirement of $100 then hit Save

$\"\"$

","3. Steps to set up a Reward Bar","

Example 1: Merchant wants to give free shipping fee for customers spending $100 and more

$\"\"$

Example 2: Merchants want to add multiple rewards: free shipping at $100, free product at $200 and 20% total order discount at $500

$\"\"$

","1-reward-bar-definition","

When the customer starts adding products to their cart and you want to offer them some discounts based on their cart value, the rewards bar will serve as a progress tracker that helps them know how close they are to earning rewards. This will increase sales as people will want to buy more and receive valuable rewards.

","1. Reward Bar Definition","cart-art-how-to-test-a-cart-with-test-mode","Test Mode Setup","Try a cart on your live store with a private preview link before shoppers see it.",[4103,4104,4105,4106,4107,4108],"2026-10-14T05:00:00.000Z","2026-10-14T08:52:44.221Z",[4102,3950],"how-to-run-an-ab-test-on-your-cart",{"_189":4122,"_227":4123,"_229":4124},{"_189":4119,"_227":4120,"_229":4121},{"_189":4116,"_227":4117,"_229":4118},{"_189":4113,"_227":4114,"_229":4115},{"_189":4110,"_227":4111,"_229":4112},{"_189":852,"_227":4109,"_229":854},"

The preview shows my live cart instead of the test cart

Make sure you saved the cart after selecting Test mode.
Check the cart's display conditions: your device, location or customer status must match them.
If you closed the tab, open the preview link again.

\"Cannot activate: trigger is identical to active cart…\"

Two carts with the same status can't use identical display conditions. Edit the locations, device, customer or dates of one of them first. (A Test mode cart and an Active cart can share the same conditions.)

I can't turn on Test mode

Test mode follows the same plan rules as activating a cart. If the app asks you to subscribe or upgrade (for example when the Free plan's monthly orders are used up), upgrade your plan to continue.

Need help? Let us know via in-app live chat or email: help@egohub.co 🤩

","go-live-or-turn-off-the-cart","

When you're happy with the cart, change its status:

Active — the cart goes live for every shopper who matches its display conditions.
Draft — the cart is turned off and no one sees it.

A Test mode cart whose schedule end date has passed is switched to Draft automatically, the same as an Active cart.

","Go live or turn off the cart","what-works-in-test-mode","

Offers and discounts are real. Free gifts, upsell discounts and reward bar rewards are applied exactly as they will be when the cart goes live.
Orders are real. An order placed during a preview is a normal Shopify order. Use a test payment method, or cancel and refund the order afterwards.
Analytics are recorded. Orders placed during a preview are counted in the cart's statistics like any other order.
Display conditions still apply. A Test mode cart only shows when its conditions (device, customer, location, schedule) match you. If no Test mode cart matches, you see your normal live cart.
Test a replacement safely. A Test mode cart can use exactly the same display conditions as an Active cart — useful when you want to try a new version of your live cart before switching.
A/B tests also run in Test mode, but only preview visitors are split between the variants. See A/B Testing Setup

","What works in Test mode","open-the-storefront-preview","

After saving, the Status card shows an Open storefront preview button. Click it — your store opens in a new tab.
A small blue Test mode preview badge appears in the bottom-left corner of the page. This confirms the preview is unlocked.
Browse your store and add products to the cart as a shopper would. Your Test mode cart is shown instead of the live cart.

Good to know

The preview stays unlocked for that browser tab while you browse. Closing the tab ends the preview — click Open storefront preview again to reopen it.
To preview on your phone or share it with a teammate, right-click Open storefront preview, copy the link and open it on the other device.
Your store has a single preview link that unlocks all carts in Test mode. Only share it with people you trust.
The Ego Cart app embed must be turned on in your live theme. If it's off, the app shows an \"App embed is turned off\" banner — click Activate app embed, then Save in the theme editor.

","Open the storefront preview","turn-on-test-mode","

You can switch a cart to Test mode from two places.

Option 1: From the Cart List

From the app's navigation menu, go to Cart Editor.
Find your cart and open its Status dropdown.
Select Test mode. The change applies immediately — no need to save.

$\"Cart$

Use the status filter next to the search box (All / Active / Test mode / Draft) to quickly find your test carts.

Option 2: Inside the cart editor

Open the cart you want to test.
In the Status card, select Test mode.

$\"Status$

Click Save. Test mode is turned on together with your other changes.

","Turn on Test mode","what-is-test-mode","

Test mode lets you try a cart on your live store before your shoppers see it. Only visitors who open your store's preview link see a cart in Test mode — everyone else keeps seeing your current live cart.

Offers and discounts work for real in Test mode, so you can check the full experience (reward bar, free gifts, upsells, add-ons…) exactly as a shopper would.

Every cart has one of three statuses:

Status	Who sees the cart
Active (green dot)	All shoppers who match the cart's display conditions.
Test mode (blue dot)	Only visitors who opened the preview link, and who match the cart's display conditions.
Draft (grey dot)	Nobody. The cart is turned off.

","What is Test mode?","cart-art-how-to-run-an-ab-test-on-your-cart","A/B Testing Setup","Compare two versions of a cart with a custom traffic split, then keep the winner in one click.",[4132,4133,4134,4135,4136,4137,4138,4139,4140],"2026-10-14T08:52:44.190Z","6 min",[3744,3950],{"_189":4163,"_227":4164,"_229":4165},{"_189":870,"_227":4162,"_229":872},{"_189":4159,"_227":4160,"_229":4161},{"_189":4156,"_227":4157,"_229":4158},{"_189":4153,"_227":4154,"_229":4155},{"_189":4150,"_227":4151,"_229":4152},{"_189":4147,"_227":4148,"_229":4149},{"_189":4144,"_227":4145,"_229":4146},{"_189":4141,"_227":4142,"_229":4143},"faq","

What happens if I downgrade to a plan without A/B testing?

Running tests end automatically and variant A is kept.

Can I duplicate or delete a cart that is being tested?

Yes. Duplicating copies variant A only — the copy is created as a Draft without a test. Deleting the cart removes both variants.

Can I restart a test?

End the current test, then click Create A/B test again. The new test starts at 50/50 and shoppers are assigned again from scratch.

Can I A/B test a cart in Test mode?

Yes, but only visitors who open the preview link are split between the variants. See Test Mode Setup

Need help? Let us know via in-app live chat or email: help@egohub.co 🤩

","FAQ","how-shoppers-are-assigned-to-a-variant","

Each shopper is assigned to variant A or B according to your traffic split and keeps the same variant on later visits.
Logged-in customers get the same variant on every device.
Once a shopper's cart is on a variant, it stays on that variant until checkout.
To check a specific variant on your store, add ?opus_variant=1 (variant A) or ?opus_variant=2 (variant B) to your store URL. Open it in a private (incognito) window — a cart that is already assigned keeps its variant.

","How shoppers are assigned to a variant","step-5-select-a-winner-and-end-the-test","

Click End test in the Status card (or choose Select a winner from the cart's ⋮ menu in the Cart List).
Compare the variants (Orders, AOV, Upsell rev., Add-on rev., Total rev.), then click Choose A or Choose B.
Click End test to confirm.

What happens next:

Keep A — variant B and its translations are deleted. Your cart stays as it was.
Keep B — variant B's settings and translations (including its free gifts, upsells and add-ons) replace variant A, then variant B is deleted. The cart keeps its name, status and display conditions.
All traffic goes to the winning variant.
Upsell discounts from the losing variant keep working for 14 days for shoppers who already have them in their cart. Free gifts from the losing variant are removed from shoppers' carts.

Ending a test can't be undone. The losing variant's settings can't be recovered.

","Step 5: Select a winner and end the test","step-4-track-the-results","

Open A/B test settings to see the Results table, counted from the moment the test started:

Orders and Order share
Cart revenue and Average order value
Upsell revenue / order and Add-on revenue / order
Free gifts given

In the Cart List, a cart with a running test shows a green A/B badge. Click the arrow next to it to see each variant's traffic share, how long the test has run and its upsell and add-on revenue. Click a variant row to open it in the editor.

Reading the results

Results are based on orders. Orders appear after the analytics sync, so allow some time before new orders show up.
If your split is uneven (for example 90/10), compare the per-order metrics such as average order value — not the totals.
Carts that were already open before the test started stay on variant A, so variant A can look a little stronger in the first days. Let the test run long enough to collect a meaningful number of orders for both variants before deciding.

","Step 4: Track the results","step-3-adjust-the-traffic-split","

Click the gear icon (A/B test settings) next to the A | B switch.
Under Traffic allocation, choose:
- Even allocation — traffic is split equally (50/50).
- Custom allocation — choose how much traffic goes to variant B with the Traffic to variant B slider (1–99%) or the 10% / 25% / 50% / 95% presets.
Click Apply.

A new split only applies to shoppers who haven't been assigned to a variant yet. Shoppers already in the test keep their variant.

","Step 3: Adjust the traffic split","step-2-edit-variant-b","

Use the A · 50% | B · 50% switch in the Status card to move between the two variants.
Change anything you want to test in variant B, then click Save. Each variant is saved separately.
Variant B starts with a copy of variant A's translations. To change them, click Edit translations for variant B, or select Variant B on the Translations page. Later changes to A's translations are not copied to B.

Tip: change only one or two things in variant B, so you know what made the difference.

","Step 2: Edit variant B","step-1-create-an-a-b-test","

From the app's navigation menu, go to Cart Editor and open the cart you want to test.
In the Status card, find the A/B test section and click Create A/B test.

$\"A/B$

Ego creates variant B as a full copy of your cart (settings, translations, free gifts, upsells and add-ons) and starts the test right away with a 50% / 50% split.

The editor switches to variant B and shows the message \"You're editing variant B. Its free gifts, upsells and add-ons are separate from variant A.\"

","Step 1: Create an A/B test","

A/B testing is a paid feature. If the Create A/B test button shows a lock icon, your current plan doesn't include it — upgrade from the Pricing page to unlock it.
Each cart can run one A/B test (variants A and B). You can run tests on several carts at the same time.
The cart's status, name, priority and display conditions are shared by both variants. Ego first picks the cart that matches the shopper, then picks the variant.
Save the cart before creating a test — variant B is copied from the saved settings.

","what-is-a-b-testing","

A/B testing lets you compare two versions of the same cart:

Variant A — your current cart.
Variant B — a copy of it that you can change freely: free gifts, upsells, add-ons, design, texts and more.

Ego splits your shoppers between the two variants, tracks the orders each one brings, and lets you keep the better one as your cart.

Common use cases

Test a different free gift threshold in the reward bar.
Compare two upsell offers or product recommendations.
Check whether a new design or add-on increases your average order value.

","What is A/B testing?","cart-art-how-to-use-ego-add-ons-in-your-theme-cart","how-to-use-ego-add-ons-in-your-theme-cart","Theme Integration Setup (Theme cart + Ego add-ons)","Keep your theme's own cart and show Ego's reward bar, free gifts and upsells inside it.",[4173,4174,4175,4176,4177,4178,4179,4180,4181],"2026-10-14T08:52:44.158Z",[3744,4076],{"_189":4204,"_227":4205,"_229":4206},{"_189":4201,"_227":4202,"_229":4203},{"_189":4198,"_227":4199,"_229":4200},{"_189":4195,"_227":4196,"_229":4197},{"_189":4192,"_227":4193,"_229":4194},{"_189":4189,"_227":4190,"_229":4191},{"_189":4186,"_227":4187,"_229":4188},{"_189":4183,"_227":4184,"_229":4185},{"_189":852,"_227":4182,"_229":854},"

My add-ons don't show

Check that the App embed status is Active.
Make sure you have an Active cart with the Reward bar, Free gifts or Upsells turned on, and that its display conditions match you.
Add a product to the cart — add-ons don't show in an empty cart.
Check the add-on isn't set to Hidden in the Placement card.

Add-ons only show on the cart page

Your theme's cart drawer may not be supported yet (badge Cart page only). Contact support, or switch back to the Ego cart drawer.
If your theme's cart type is Notification (a small popup after add to cart), add-ons show on the cart page only. For the best results, change your theme's cart type to Drawer — click Open theme settings in the Your theme card.

Ego shows the wrong theme

Click Re-scan in the Your theme card. Ego also re-detects your theme automatically when you publish a new one.

Free gifts don't show

Free gifts aren't included in the Free plan. Upgrade your plan to use them in your theme's cart.

Need help? Let us know via in-app live chat or email: help@egohub.co 🤩

","switch-back-to-the-ego-cart-drawer","

Go to Theme integration, select Ego cart drawer in Cart mode, confirm with Switch and click Save. Ego's drawer replaces your theme's cart again, with all features available.

","Switch back to the Ego cart drawer","edit-your-add-ons-in-the-cart-editor","

In Theme cart mode, the cart editor shows a Theme cart mode banner with a Manage placement shortcut.

The sidebar groups the features that work in your theme's cart under In your theme cart. Features only available in the Ego drawer are grouped under Ego drawer only.
Use the Drawer / Cart page switch to preview each surface. The final look follows your theme's styles.
Display conditions, design and settings still apply as usual.

","Edit your add-ons in the cart editor","step-4-optional-add-ego-blocks-to-your-cart-page","

Want add-ons in an exact spot on your cart page? Add them as blocks in the theme editor:

In the Status card, click Add block next to Reward bar, Upsells or Free gifts. The theme editor opens on your cart page template with the block ready to add.
Drag the block where you want it. You can adjust its Top padding and Bottom padding.
Click Save in the theme editor.

The blocks are called Cart reward bar, Cart free gifts and Cart upsells. A block placed on the cart page overrides that add-on's cart page position from the Placement card.

Blocks are only available for the cart page. In the cart drawer, add-ons are placed automatically.

","Step 4 (optional): Add Ego blocks to your cart page","step-3-choose-where-add-ons-appear","

In the Placement card, set the position of each add-on (Reward bar, Free gifts, Upsells) separately for the Cart drawer and the Cart page:

Top — below the cart title.
Bottom — above the subtotal and checkout button.
Hidden — not shown on that surface.

By default, the Reward bar is at the Top, and Free gifts and Upsells are at the Bottom. Add-ons in the same position always show in this order: Reward bar, Free gifts, Upsells.

In the Appearance card, keep Match my theme's font on so add-ons use your theme's font. Colors and styles are set in the cart editor.

Click Save when you're done.

The Advanced (for support) section contains custom position settings. Only change it if Ego support asks you to.

","Step 3: Choose where add-ons appear","step-2-check-the-status","

After saving, the Status card shows whether your add-ons are visible to shoppers:

Row	What it means	How to fix
App embed	Active — Ego is turned on in your theme. Inactive — shoppers can't see your add-ons.	Click Turn on app embed. The theme editor opens with Ego's app embed selected — turn it on and click Save.
Add-ons on store	Live — add-ons have been shown to shoppers recently. Not shown yet — no shopper has opened the cart since you switched.	Click View store, add a product to the cart and wait a few minutes.
Cart page blocks (Reward bar, Upsells, Free gifts)	Added / Not added — whether the Ego block is placed on your cart page template.	Optional. Click Add block (see Step 4).

","Step 2: Check the status","step-1-switch-to-theme-cart-mode","

From the app's navigation menu, go to Theme integration.
In Your theme, check that Ego detected your live theme and its cart type (Drawer, Page or Notification). If you just changed themes, click Re-scan.

$\"Theme$

In Cart mode, select Theme cart + Ego add-ons and confirm with Switch to theme cart.

$\"Switch$

Click Save.

You can also click the Cart mode badge next to the cart editor title to compare the two modes and switch.

$\"Cart$

Before you switch, make sure you have an Active cart in the Cart Editor with the Reward bar, Free gifts or Upsells turned on — add-ons only show for an Active cart.

","Step 1: Switch to Theme cart mode","supported-themes","

Ego detects your live theme automatically. On these themes, add-ons work in both the cart drawer and the cart page (badge Fully supported):

Horizon and its family: Atelier, Pitch, Fabric, Dwell, Heritage, Ritual, Savor, Tinker, Vessel.
Dawn and Shopify's free themes based on it: Refresh, Sense, Craft, Studio, Taste, Origin, Crave, Colorblock, Ride, Spotlight, Publisher, Trade.
Impulse, Prestige and Impact.

Copies or renamed versions of these themes are recognized too.

On other themes, the badge reads Cart page only: the theme's cart drawer isn't supported yet, so Ego add-ons show on your /cart page only. Contact our support team if you need add-ons in your theme's drawer.

","Supported themes","two-cart-modes","

Ego Cart works in two modes. You can switch between them at any time.

	Ego cart drawer (Recommended)	Theme cart + Ego add-ons
What shoppers see	Ego's fully customizable drawer replaces your theme's cart on every page.	Your theme's own cart drawer and cart page, with Ego add-ons inside.
Reward bar, free gifts, upsells	Yes	Yes
Announcements, add-ons, trust badges	Yes	No
Express checkout, sticky cart	Yes	No
Design	Fully customizable	Keeps your theme's look

$\"Ego$

Choose Theme cart + Ego add-ons if you love your theme's cart and only want to add Ego's sales boosters to it. Your store keeps using the Ego cart drawer until you switch and save.

","Two cart modes","cms77ztct01fm2us1gwqdzxg9","install-and-activate-cart","Installing & Activating Ego Cart Drawer Cart Upsell","Install the app, enable the app embed, and publish your customized cart drawer on your storefront.",[4215,4216,4217,4218],"2026-07-30T07:56:47.069Z","2026-07-30T07:59:40.038Z",[],{"_189":305,"_227":4226,"_229":307},{"_189":800,"_227":4225,"_229":802},{"_189":4222,"_227":4223,"_229":4224},{"_189":4219,"_227":4220,"_229":4221},"step-3-customize-and-activate-the-cart-drawer","

After enabling the app embed, return to the app dashboard and configure your cart drawer.

Open the features you want to use, such as Upsells, Rewards Bar, Free Gift, Add-ons, Announcement, or Trust Badges.
Customize the content, layout, colors, and display settings.
Preview the cart drawer to review the customer experience.
Click Save.
Make sure the cart status is Active.

","Step 3 — Customize and activate the cart drawer","step-2-enable-the-app-embed","

The app embed allows Ego Cart Drawer Cart Upsell to replace your theme’s default cart drawer and display the features configured in the app.

To enable the app embed:

From your Shopify admin, go to Online Store > Themes.
Find your current published theme.
Click Customize.
In the Theme Editor, open App embeds from the left sidebar.
Find Ego Cart Drawer Cart Upsell.
Turn on the app embed.
Click Save.

","Step 2 — Enable the app embed","

To install Ego Cart Drawer Cart Upsell:

Go to the Ego Cart Drawer Cart Upsell listing on the Shopify App Store.
Click Install.
Review the permissions requested by the app.
Click Install again to confirm.

After installation, Shopify will redirect you to the app dashboard.

","

Ego Cart Drawer Cart Upsell replaces your store’s default cart experience with a customizable slide-out cart that can include upsells, rewards, free gifts, add-ons, announcements, trust badges, and other conversion-focused elements.

Before the Ego cart drawer can appear on your storefront, complete these steps:

Install the app from the Shopify App Store.
Enable the app embed in your Shopify theme.
Customize and activate the cart drawer.

","cms7dyhqf01i52us194v7byno","feature-overview","Feature Overview","Explore the key features of Ego Cart Drawer Cart Upsell and learn how they help improve the cart experience and increase average order value.",[4235,4236,4237,4238,4239,4240,4241,4242,4243,4244,4245,4246,4247],"2026-07-30T10:43:43.047Z","2026-08-03T04:24:44.014Z",[],{"_189":4284,"_227":4285,"_229":4286},{"_189":4281,"_227":4282,"_229":4283},{"_189":4278,"_227":4279,"_229":4280},{"_189":4275,"_227":4276,"_229":4277},{"_189":4272,"_227":4273,"_229":4274},{"_189":4269,"_227":4270,"_229":4271},{"_189":4266,"_227":4267,"_229":4268},{"_189":4263,"_227":4264,"_229":4265},{"_189":4260,"_227":4261,"_229":4262},{"_189":4257,"_227":4258,"_229":4259},{"_189":4254,"_227":4255,"_229":4256},{"_189":4251,"_227":4252,"_229":4253},{"_189":4248,"_227":4249,"_229":4250},"sticky-cart","

$\"\"$

Need help? Let us know via in-app live chat or email: help@opusecom.co 🤩

","Sticky Cart","display-condition","

Display Conditions are the rules that trigger which cart is shown to the customer. These include:

Targeted Device – e.g., show a specific cart on mobile, desktop or tablet
Targeted Customer – e.g., logged-in customers or guest customers, or logged-in customers with a specific tag added.
Location – e.g., country-based targeting
Active Period – e.g., show a cart only during a specific time or promotional event

$\"\"$

As each cart can have its own display condition, you can create multiple carts to target different customer segments at one time. This helps you deliver a personalized shopping experience and optimize conversions effortlessly.

Default Cart: The initial cart that appears when you first install the app. It serves as the base setup before additional carts are created. If you downgrade from Advanced/Pro plan to Basic/Free plan, all carts will be disabled except for the one with the tag \"Default cart\".

$\"\"$

","Display Condition","express-payment","

Express Payment refers to special checkout buttons designed for certain payment methods like PayPal, Apple Pay, Google Pay, Shop Pay, and more.

These buttons take customers directly to their preferred payment method, making the checkout process faster and reducing the chances of cart abandonment.

$\"\"$

","Express Payment","customized-text-terms-and-conditions","

Add a customizable checkbox to your cart or checkout page for various consent and policy confirmation, such as checkout rules, terms of use, shipping policy, payment terms, tax duties, the new Canada import tariff notice, refund policy, GDPR/CCPA compliance, and more.

You can also use it for seasonal promotions or special events like Father’s Day, the 4th of July, and Summer Sale terms. Additionally, this feature allows you to display a reminder text to inform customers of important updates or agreements before they complete their purchase.

$\"\"$

","Customized Text (Terms and Conditions)","trust-badges","

$\"\"$

","Trust Badges","position","

The Position feature allows you to rearrange the module placement within the cart drawer based on your preferences. The cart drawer is divided into two main sections: Main Cart and Checkout Box, which include smaller modules. The modules can only be moved within its original main section.

$\"\"$

","Position","additional-notes","

Additional Notes is a text box being hidden under a text line, allowing customers to put additional information for merchants such as special requirements or shipping notice.

$\"\"$

","Additional Notes","discount-box","

$\"\"$

","Discount Box","add-ons","

Add-ons is a feature that displays special services or products offered by merchants, such as shipping protection, gift wrapping, or any one-click upsell product directly in the cart.

There are 3 price settings for this product:

Fixed Price: A set amount charged for the additional product.
Percentage Price: A dynamic charge based on order value.

Initial Amount: The minimum charge, applied if the calculated percentage is lower than this value.

Percentage of Order Value: The percentage of the order total to charge.
Incremental Rates: Adjusts the charge in increments (up to 99 values).

This price setting will create a product with 100 variants in your store with the formula:

Final charge = Initial Amount + (n×Incremental Rate)
(n = ordinal number of the variant closest to the percentage of the order value)

Example: Shipping Protection is 10% of the order value, with a $5 minimum and $0.5 incremental rate. If the order is $2995, the charge would be $300.

Tier Price: The price varies based on order value, divided into defined ranges.

Example: $2 for Shipping Protection if the order is under $100, $5 if it's $101 to $500, and $10 if it's more than $500.

$\"\"$

","Add-ons","free-gift","

Minimum Purchase Quantity – e.g., Buy 3 items, get 1 free
Minimum Spend Amount – e.g., Spend $50, get a free gift
Specific Products or Collections – e.g., Buy any item from the \"Skincare\" collection, get a free item

Free gifts are not automatically added to the cart. Customers must manually select the gift after meeting the conditions by clicking a button inside the gift block.

$\"\"$

","Free Gift","upsells","

Customers can add these items to their cart with just a few clicks, increasing the chances of additional sales.

$\"\"$

","Upsells","rewards-bar","

Rewards bar is a progress bar that motivates customer to buy more.

When the customer starts adding products to their cart and you want to offer them some discounts based on their cart value/cart quantity, the rewards bar will serve as a progress tracker that helps them know how close they are to earning rewards. This will increase sales as people will want to buy more and receive valuable rewards.

$\"\"$

Reward tiers are the milestones of the reward that customer has reached, and those tiers will be set through the Reward Types within the module. Reward types include: Free Shipping, Free Product, Discount, Free Gift.

These 4 types will be presented by 4 icons (In #1 template) in cart.
Their mechanism are different: Free Shipping and Discount will only change the icon (In #1 template) of the tier to visualize the reward. But Free Product will automatically add a product to cart when the cart value is larger than Minimum Amount, and Free Gift will work based on the set up inside Free Gift module.

","Rewards Bar","announcement","

The Announcement feature displays a notification bar with custom text and a countdown timer. When a customer adds a product to their cart, the countdown timer starts, creating a sense of urgency. This encourages faster checkouts and helps reduce cart abandonment rates.

$\"\"$

Announcement can be utilized to show other content without a timer, for example promoting a sale campaign.

$\"\"$

","Announcement","cmsd19tpq03go2us1pgtuqob9","what-is-ego-cart-drawer-cart-upsell","What is Ego Cart Drawer Cart Upsell?","Get an introduction to Ego Cart Drawer Cart Upsell and explore its main features.",[4296,4297,4298,4299],"2026-08-03T09:35:13.838Z","2026-10-15T07:53:15.035Z",[],"About Ego Cart Drawer Cart Upsell",{"_189":305,"_227":4309,"_229":307},{"_189":4306,"_227":4307,"_229":4308},{"_189":4303,"_227":4304,"_229":4305},{"_189":4300,"_227":4301,"_229":4302},"4-get-started","

Build and launch your cart drawer in just a few steps:

Install and activate Ego Cart Drawer Cart Upsell.
Customize the cart drawer to match your storefront.
Enable the features that support your sales goals.
Preview and test the cart experience.
Publish it on your live store.

Use these guides to get up and running:

","4. Get Started","3-what-sets-ego-cart-drawer-cart-upsell-apart","

Ego combines cart customization and conversion tools in one place, allowing you to improve the shopping experience without rebuilding your theme.

The app offers:

A smoother path to checkout — Let customers review and update their carts without leaving the current page.
More opportunities to grow order value — Present relevant recommendations and incentives before checkout.
Flexible cart customization — Choose and arrange the cart components that best support your store.
More relevant cart experiences — Use display conditions and multiple carts for different customers and shopping situations.
A consistent storefront design — Customize the cart drawer to better match your brand and theme.
24/7 support — Get help with setup, theme compatibility, and cart behavior whenever needed.

","3. What sets Ego Cart Drawer Cart Upsell apart?","available-features","

Ego Cart Drawer Cart Upsell includes two main feature groups.

1. Increase Order Value

Encourage customers to add more to their carts through relevant product recommendations and purchase incentives.

You can use features such as:

Upsells
Add-ons
Rewards Bar
Free Gift

2. Improve the Cart Experience

Give customers the information and actions they need before proceeding to checkout.

You can use features such as:

Announcement
Discount Box
Cart Notes
Trust Badges
Terms & Conditions
Express Payments
Sticky Cart

You can also use Display Conditions and Multi-Cart to create different cart experiences for specific shopping scenarios.

View some real carts from our merchants:

","Available Features","

Ego Cart Drawer Cart Upsell is a Shopify app that replaces your store’s default cart with a customizable slide-out cart drawer.

The app helps you create a smoother cart experience, recommend relevant products, promote cart incentives, and give customers important information before checkout.

By combining cart customization and sales-boosting tools in one app, you can reduce friction, encourage larger purchases, and improve the cart-to-checkout experience.

",{"_189":5637,"_191":3611,"_4321":3612,"_4322":5638,"_4324":5639,"_4326":5640,"_4328":4329,"_4330":5641,"_4332":5642,"_4333":-5,"_4335":5643,"_4337":5644},{"_189":5455,"_191":3181,"_4321":3182,"_4322":5456,"_4324":5457,"_4326":5458,"_4328":4329,"_4330":5459,"_4332":5460,"_4333":5461,"_4335":5462,"_4337":5463},{"_189":5303,"_191":2780,"_4321":2781,"_4322":5304,"_4324":5305,"_4326":5306,"_4328":4329,"_4330":5307,"_4332":-5,"_4333":-5,"_4335":5308,"_4337":5309},{"_189":5296,"_191":5297,"_4321":5298,"_4322":5299,"_4324":5300,"_4326":5301,"_4328":5200,"_4330":-5,"_4332":-5,"_4333":-5,"_4335":5201,"_4337":5302},{"_189":5210,"_191":2578,"_4321":2579,"_4322":5211,"_4324":5212,"_4326":5213,"_4328":4329,"_4330":5214,"_4332":-5,"_4333":-5,"_4335":5215,"_4337":5216},{"_189":5203,"_191":5204,"_4321":5205,"_4322":5206,"_4324":5207,"_4326":5208,"_4328":5200,"_4330":-5,"_4332":-5,"_4333":-5,"_4335":5201,"_4337":5209},{"_189":5194,"_191":5195,"_4321":5196,"_4322":5197,"_4324":5198,"_4326":5199,"_4328":5200,"_4330":-5,"_4332":-5,"_4333":-5,"_4335":5201,"_4337":5202},{"_189":5002,"_191":2109,"_4321":2110,"_4322":5003,"_4324":5004,"_4326":5005,"_4328":4329,"_4330":-5,"_4332":-5,"_4333":-5,"_4335":4336,"_4337":5006},{"_189":4559,"_191":836,"_4321":837,"_4322":4560,"_4324":4561,"_4326":4562,"_4328":4329,"_4330":-5,"_4332":-5,"_4333":-5,"_4335":4563,"_4337":4564},{"_189":4320,"_191":211,"_4321":213,"_4322":4323,"_4324":4325,"_4326":4327,"_4328":4329,"_4330":4331,"_4332":-5,"_4333":4334,"_4335":4336,"_4337":4338},"cmpv17zp5007f97b4em2jbs1g","name","tagline","Customer surveys & feedback loops","icon","MessageSquare","description","Survey types, trigger rules, and response analytics.","status","live","appStoreUrl","https://apps.shopify.com/ego-surveys","linkUrl","logoUrl","https://cdn.shopify.com/s/files/1/0690/4243/8282/files/Survey_Logo.png?v=1792039574","articleCount",26,"categories",[4339,4340,4341,4342,4343,4344],{"_189":4548,"_191":4549,"_4347":812,"_4324":4550,"_4349":4551},{"_189":4522,"_191":4523,"_4347":739,"_4324":4524,"_4349":4525},{"_189":4468,"_191":4469,"_4347":578,"_4324":4470,"_4349":4471},{"_189":4399,"_191":4400,"_4347":370,"_4324":4401,"_4349":4402},{"_189":4370,"_191":4371,"_4347":289,"_4324":4372,"_4349":4373},{"_189":4345,"_191":4346,"_4347":215,"_4324":4348,"_4349":4350},"c9d4e737ccc929d437fa7ad98","troubleshooting-faq","label","Wrench","articles",[4351,4352],{"_189":252,"_191":216,"_193":253,"_195":254,"_197":4363,"_199":256,"_201":202,"_203":257,"_204":205,"_206":207,"_208":4364},{"_189":190,"_191":192,"_193":194,"_195":196,"_197":4353,"_199":200,"_201":202,"_203":202,"_204":205,"_206":207,"_208":4354},[4355,4356,4357,4358,4359,4360,4361,4362],[216,217],{"_189":249,"_227":250,"_229":251},{"_189":246,"_227":247,"_229":248},{"_189":243,"_227":244,"_229":245},{"_189":240,"_227":241,"_229":242},{"_189":237,"_227":238,"_229":239},{"_189":234,"_227":235,"_229":236},{"_189":231,"_227":232,"_229":233},{"_189":226,"_227":228,"_229":230},[4365,4366,4367,4368,4369],[259,260],{"_189":278,"_227":279,"_229":280},{"_189":275,"_227":276,"_229":277},{"_189":272,"_227":273,"_229":274},{"_189":269,"_227":270,"_229":271},{"_189":266,"_227":267,"_229":268},"c36014750194297e14e6041af","analytics-integrations","BarChart2",[4374,4375,4376,4377],{"_189":343,"_191":217,"_193":344,"_195":345,"_197":4394,"_199":286,"_201":202,"_203":347,"_204":348,"_206":349,"_208":4395},{"_189":325,"_191":314,"_193":326,"_195":327,"_197":4389,"_199":286,"_201":202,"_203":329,"_204":205,"_206":207,"_208":4390},{"_189":308,"_191":291,"_193":309,"_195":310,"_197":4384,"_199":256,"_201":202,"_203":312,"_204":205,"_206":207,"_208":4385},{"_189":281,"_191":282,"_193":283,"_195":284,"_197":4378,"_199":286,"_201":202,"_203":287,"_204":205,"_206":207,"_208":4379},[4380,4381,4382,4383],[290,291],{"_189":305,"_227":306,"_229":307},{"_189":302,"_227":303,"_229":304},{"_189":299,"_227":300,"_229":301},{"_189":296,"_227":297,"_229":298},[4386,4387,4388],[314,282],{"_189":305,"_227":324,"_229":307},{"_189":321,"_227":322,"_229":323},{"_189":318,"_227":319,"_229":320},[4391,4392,4393],[291,217],{"_189":340,"_227":341,"_229":342},{"_189":337,"_227":338,"_229":339},{"_189":334,"_227":335,"_229":336},[4396,4397,4398],[314,291],{"_189":360,"_227":361,"_229":362},{"_189":357,"_227":358,"_229":359},{"_189":354,"_227":355,"_229":356},"c71984d62b6d44d387a015838","building-surveys","Zap",[4403,4404,4405,4406,4407,4408,4409,4410,4411],{"_189":545,"_191":508,"_193":546,"_195":547,"_197":4462,"_199":484,"_201":202,"_203":549,"_204":550,"_206":349,"_208":4463},{"_189":527,"_191":290,"_193":528,"_195":529,"_197":4457,"_199":484,"_201":202,"_203":531,"_204":348,"_206":207,"_208":4458},{"_189":501,"_191":502,"_193":503,"_195":504,"_197":4450,"_199":484,"_201":202,"_203":506,"_204":205,"_206":207,"_208":4451},{"_189":480,"_191":438,"_193":481,"_195":482,"_197":4444,"_199":484,"_201":202,"_203":485,"_204":205,"_206":207,"_208":4445},{"_189":459,"_191":390,"_193":460,"_195":461,"_197":4438,"_199":256,"_201":463,"_203":464,"_204":205,"_206":207,"_208":4439},{"_189":431,"_191":371,"_193":432,"_195":433,"_197":4430,"_199":256,"_201":435,"_203":436,"_204":348,"_206":207,"_208":4431},{"_189":409,"_191":410,"_193":411,"_195":412,"_197":4424,"_199":256,"_201":414,"_203":415,"_204":348,"_206":207,"_208":4425},{"_189":383,"_191":372,"_193":384,"_195":385,"_197":4417,"_199":256,"_201":387,"_203":388,"_204":205,"_206":207,"_208":4418},{"_189":363,"_191":260,"_193":364,"_195":365,"_197":4412,"_199":256,"_201":367,"_203":368,"_204":205,"_206":207,"_208":4413},[4414,4415,4416],[371,372],{"_189":305,"_227":382,"_229":307},{"_189":379,"_227":380,"_229":381},{"_189":376,"_227":377,"_229":378},[4419,4420,4421,4422,4423],[260,390],{"_189":305,"_227":408,"_229":307},{"_189":405,"_227":406,"_229":407},{"_189":402,"_227":403,"_229":404},{"_189":399,"_227":400,"_229":401},{"_189":396,"_227":397,"_229":398},[4426,4427,4428,4429],[],{"_189":305,"_227":430,"_229":307},{"_189":427,"_227":428,"_229":429},{"_189":424,"_227":425,"_229":426},{"_189":421,"_227":422,"_229":423},[4432,4433,4434,4435,4436,4437],[260,438],{"_189":305,"_227":458,"_229":307},{"_189":427,"_227":457,"_229":429},{"_189":454,"_227":455,"_229":456},{"_189":451,"_227":452,"_229":453},{"_189":448,"_227":449,"_229":450},{"_189":445,"_227":446,"_229":447},[4440,4441,4442,4443],[371,410,372],{"_189":305,"_227":479,"_229":307},{"_189":476,"_227":477,"_229":478},{"_189":473,"_227":474,"_229":475},{"_189":470,"_227":471,"_229":472},[4446,4447,4448,4449],[390,371],{"_189":305,"_227":500,"_229":307},{"_189":497,"_227":498,"_229":499},{"_189":494,"_227":495,"_229":496},{"_189":491,"_227":492,"_229":493},[4452,4453,4454,4455,4456],[508,372],{"_189":305,"_227":526,"_229":307},{"_189":523,"_227":524,"_229":525},{"_189":520,"_227":521,"_229":522},{"_189":517,"_227":518,"_229":519},{"_189":514,"_227":515,"_229":516},[4459,4460,4461],[282,508],{"_189":542,"_227":543,"_229":544},{"_189":539,"_227":540,"_229":541},{"_189":536,"_227":537,"_229":538},[4464,4465,4466,4467],[552,290,502],{"_189":566,"_227":567,"_229":568},{"_189":563,"_227":564,"_229":565},{"_189":560,"_227":561,"_229":562},{"_189":557,"_227":558,"_229":559},"cba96107e83a9be1a0c8dd35b","form-builder","Palette",[4472,4473,4474,4475,4476,4477,4478],{"_189":715,"_191":652,"_193":716,"_195":717,"_197":4517,"_199":256,"_201":575,"_203":719,"_204":348,"_206":349,"_208":4518},{"_189":695,"_191":680,"_193":696,"_195":697,"_197":4511,"_199":574,"_201":575,"_203":699,"_204":550,"_206":207,"_208":4512},{"_189":673,"_191":674,"_193":675,"_195":676,"_197":4505,"_199":574,"_201":575,"_203":678,"_204":348,"_206":207,"_208":4506},{"_189":646,"_191":580,"_193":647,"_195":648,"_197":4498,"_199":574,"_201":575,"_203":650,"_204":550,"_206":207,"_208":4499},{"_189":625,"_191":607,"_193":626,"_195":627,"_197":4492,"_199":574,"_201":575,"_203":629,"_204":205,"_206":207,"_208":4493},{"_189":600,"_191":601,"_193":602,"_195":603,"_197":4486,"_199":574,"_201":575,"_203":605,"_204":348,"_206":207,"_208":4487},{"_189":569,"_191":570,"_193":571,"_195":572,"_197":4479,"_199":574,"_201":575,"_203":576,"_204":348,"_206":349,"_208":4480},[4481,4482,4483,4484,4485],[579,580],{"_189":598,"_227":599,"_229":571},{"_189":595,"_227":596,"_229":597},{"_189":592,"_227":593,"_229":594},{"_189":589,"_227":590,"_229":591},{"_189":586,"_227":587,"_229":588},[4488,4489,4490,4491],[607,608],{"_189":622,"_227":623,"_229":624},{"_189":619,"_227":620,"_229":621},{"_189":616,"_227":617,"_229":618},{"_189":613,"_227":614,"_229":615},[4494,4495,4496,4497],[601,608],{"_189":644,"_227":645,"_229":626},{"_189":641,"_227":642,"_229":643},{"_189":638,"_227":639,"_229":640},{"_189":635,"_227":636,"_229":637},[4500,4501,4502,4503,4504],[652,570],{"_189":670,"_227":671,"_229":672},{"_189":667,"_227":668,"_229":669},{"_189":664,"_227":665,"_229":666},{"_189":661,"_227":662,"_229":663},{"_189":658,"_227":659,"_229":660},[4507,4508,4509,4510],[680,580],{"_189":305,"_227":694,"_229":307},{"_189":691,"_227":692,"_229":693},{"_189":688,"_227":689,"_229":690},{"_189":685,"_227":686,"_229":687},[4513,4514,4515,4516],[674,580],{"_189":305,"_227":714,"_229":307},{"_189":711,"_227":712,"_229":713},{"_189":708,"_227":709,"_229":710},{"_189":705,"_227":706,"_229":707},[4519,4520,4521],[579,570],{"_189":730,"_227":731,"_229":732},{"_189":727,"_227":728,"_229":729},{"_189":724,"_227":725,"_229":726},"c873d213c751083a1340f514a","getting-started","Rocket",[4526,4527,4528],{"_189":782,"_191":783,"_193":784,"_195":785,"_197":4542,"_199":256,"_201":202,"_203":787,"_204":348,"_206":349,"_208":4543},{"_189":760,"_191":579,"_193":761,"_195":762,"_197":4536,"_199":484,"_201":575,"_203":764,"_204":348,"_206":349,"_208":4537},{"_189":733,"_191":552,"_193":734,"_195":735,"_197":4529,"_199":256,"_201":202,"_203":737,"_204":348,"_206":349,"_208":4530},[4531,4532,4533,4534,4535],[508,390,410],{"_189":757,"_227":758,"_229":759},{"_189":754,"_227":755,"_229":756},{"_189":751,"_227":752,"_229":753},{"_189":748,"_227":749,"_229":750},{"_189":745,"_227":746,"_229":747},[4538,4539,4540,4541],[680,570],{"_189":779,"_227":780,"_229":781},{"_189":776,"_227":777,"_229":778},{"_189":773,"_227":774,"_229":775},{"_189":770,"_227":771,"_229":772},[4544,4545,4546,4547],[552,789,216],{"_189":305,"_227":803,"_229":307},{"_189":800,"_227":801,"_229":802},{"_189":797,"_227":798,"_229":799},{"_189":794,"_227":795,"_229":796},"cmuuzmgm400722ut9qtu6ieca","about-ego-survey","BookOpen",[4552],{"_189":804,"_191":805,"_193":806,"_195":807,"_197":4553,"_199":256,"_201":809,"_203":810,"_204":205,"_206":207,"_208":4554},[4555,4556,4557,4558],[813,579,552],{"_189":305,"_227":827,"_229":307},{"_189":824,"_227":825,"_229":826},{"_189":821,"_227":822,"_229":823},{"_189":818,"_227":819,"_229":820},"cmpv17z2k006o97b415c8lnk0","Native iOS & Android for Shopify stores","Smartphone","App design, launch process, push notifications, and integrations.",34,[4565,4566,4567,4568,4569,4570,4571],{"_189":4967,"_191":4968,"_4347":2002,"_4324":4550,"_4349":4969},{"_189":4869,"_191":4870,"_4347":1713,"_4324":4401,"_4349":4871},{"_189":4741,"_191":3294,"_4347":1334,"_4324":1334,"_4349":4742},{"_189":4678,"_191":4679,"_4347":1157,"_4324":4680,"_4349":4681},{"_189":4653,"_191":1103,"_4347":1081,"_4324":4348,"_4349":4654},{"_189":4600,"_191":4601,"_4347":916,"_4324":4550,"_4349":4602},{"_189":4572,"_191":4573,"_4347":838,"_4324":4574,"_4349":4575},"cmv8xx1yx0000tpsbq0k0pttl","integrations","Plug",[4576,4577],{"_189":874,"_191":839,"_193":875,"_195":876,"_197":4589,"_199":484,"_201":878,"_203":879,"_204":550,"_206":207,"_208":4590},{"_189":828,"_191":829,"_193":830,"_195":831,"_197":4578,"_199":484,"_201":833,"_203":834,"_204":550,"_206":207,"_208":4579},[4580,4581,4582,4583,4584,4585,4586,4587,4588],[839,840,841],{"_189":305,"_227":873,"_229":307},{"_189":870,"_227":871,"_229":872},{"_189":867,"_227":868,"_229":869},{"_189":864,"_227":865,"_229":866},{"_189":861,"_227":862,"_229":863},{"_189":858,"_227":859,"_229":860},{"_189":855,"_227":856,"_229":857},{"_189":852,"_227":853,"_229":854},{"_189":192,"_227":851,"_229":194},[4591,4592,4593,4594,4595,4596,4597,4598,4599],[840,841],{"_189":305,"_227":906,"_229":307},{"_189":870,"_227":905,"_229":872},{"_189":902,"_227":903,"_229":904},{"_189":899,"_227":900,"_229":901},{"_189":896,"_227":897,"_229":898},{"_189":893,"_227":894,"_229":895},{"_189":855,"_227":892,"_229":857},{"_189":852,"_227":891,"_229":854},{"_189":192,"_227":890,"_229":194},"cmrwvjkgw02v82umpdusf6wl7","analytics",[4603,4604,4605,4606],{"_189":1021,"_191":1022,"_193":1023,"_195":1024,"_197":4638,"_199":912,"_201":1026,"_203":1027,"_204":348,"_206":207,"_208":4639},{"_189":977,"_191":978,"_193":979,"_195":980,"_197":4626,"_199":912,"_201":982,"_203":983,"_204":348,"_206":207,"_208":4627},{"_189":941,"_191":942,"_193":943,"_195":944,"_197":4616,"_199":912,"_201":946,"_203":947,"_204":348,"_206":207,"_208":4617},{"_189":907,"_191":908,"_193":909,"_195":910,"_197":4607,"_199":912,"_201":913,"_203":914,"_204":348,"_206":207,"_208":4608},[4609,4610,4611,4612,4613,4614,4615],[],{"_189":305,"_227":940,"_229":307},{"_189":937,"_227":938,"_229":939},{"_189":934,"_227":935,"_229":936},{"_189":931,"_227":932,"_229":933},{"_189":928,"_227":929,"_229":930},{"_189":925,"_227":926,"_229":927},{"_189":192,"_227":924,"_229":194},[4618,4619,4620,4621,4622,4623,4624,4625],[],{"_189":305,"_227":976,"_229":307},{"_189":973,"_227":974,"_229":975},{"_189":970,"_227":971,"_229":972},{"_189":967,"_227":968,"_229":969},{"_189":964,"_227":965,"_229":966},{"_189":961,"_227":962,"_229":963},{"_189":958,"_227":959,"_229":960},{"_189":192,"_227":957,"_229":194},[4628,4629,4630,4631,4632,4633,4634,4635,4636,4637],[],{"_189":305,"_227":1020,"_229":307},{"_189":1017,"_227":1018,"_229":1019},{"_189":1014,"_227":1015,"_229":1016},{"_189":1011,"_227":1012,"_229":1013},{"_189":1008,"_227":1009,"_229":1010},{"_189":1005,"_227":1006,"_229":1007},{"_189":1002,"_227":1003,"_229":1004},{"_189":999,"_227":1000,"_229":1001},{"_189":996,"_227":997,"_229":998},{"_189":192,"_227":995,"_229":194},[4640,4641,4642,4643,4644,4645,4646,4647,4648,4649,4650,4651,4652],[],{"_189":305,"_227":1072,"_229":307},{"_189":1069,"_227":1070,"_229":1071},{"_189":970,"_227":1068,"_229":972},{"_189":1065,"_227":1066,"_229":1067},{"_189":1062,"_227":1063,"_229":1064},{"_189":937,"_227":1061,"_229":939},{"_189":1058,"_227":1059,"_229":1060},{"_189":1055,"_227":1056,"_229":1057},{"_189":1052,"_227":1053,"_229":1054},{"_189":1049,"_227":1050,"_229":1051},{"_189":1046,"_227":1047,"_229":1048},{"_189":1043,"_227":1044,"_229":1045},{"_189":192,"_227":1042,"_229":194},"mob-cat-app-submission",[4655,4656],{"_189":1102,"_191":1103,"_193":1081,"_195":1104,"_197":4665,"_199":912,"_201":1078,"_203":1106,"_204":1107,"_206":207,"_208":4666},{"_189":1073,"_191":1074,"_193":1075,"_195":1076,"_197":4657,"_199":912,"_201":1078,"_203":1079,"_204":348,"_206":207,"_208":4658},[4659,4660,4661,4662,4663,4664],[],{"_189":305,"_227":1101,"_229":307},{"_189":1098,"_227":1099,"_229":1100},{"_189":1095,"_227":1096,"_229":1097},{"_189":1092,"_227":1093,"_229":1094},{"_189":1089,"_227":1090,"_229":1091},{"_189":192,"_227":1088,"_229":194},[4667,4668,4669,4670,4671,4672,4673,4674,4675,4676,4677],[],{"_189":305,"_227":1148,"_229":307},{"_189":1145,"_227":1146,"_229":1147},{"_189":1142,"_227":1143,"_229":1144},{"_189":1139,"_227":1140,"_229":1141},{"_189":1136,"_227":1137,"_229":1138},{"_189":1133,"_227":1134,"_229":1135},{"_189":1130,"_227":1131,"_229":1132},{"_189":1127,"_227":1128,"_229":1129},{"_189":1124,"_227":1125,"_229":1126},{"_189":1121,"_227":1122,"_229":1123},{"_189":192,"_227":1120,"_229":194},"mob-cat-notifications","notifications","Layers",[4682,4683,4684,4685],{"_189":1292,"_191":1293,"_193":1294,"_195":1295,"_197":4729,"_199":912,"_201":1078,"_203":1297,"_204":205,"_206":207,"_208":4730},{"_189":1248,"_191":1249,"_193":1250,"_195":1251,"_197":4714,"_199":912,"_201":1253,"_203":1254,"_204":348,"_206":207,"_208":4715},{"_189":1196,"_191":1197,"_193":1198,"_195":1199,"_197":4699,"_199":912,"_201":1201,"_203":1202,"_204":348,"_206":207,"_208":4700},{"_189":1149,"_191":1150,"_193":1151,"_195":1152,"_197":4686,"_199":912,"_201":1154,"_203":1155,"_204":348,"_206":207,"_208":4687},[4688,4689,4690,4691,4692,4693,4694,4695,4696,4697,4698],[],{"_189":305,"_227":1195,"_229":307},{"_189":1192,"_227":1193,"_229":1194},{"_189":1189,"_227":1190,"_229":1191},{"_189":1186,"_227":1187,"_229":1188},{"_189":1183,"_227":1184,"_229":1185},{"_189":1180,"_227":1181,"_229":1182},{"_189":1177,"_227":1178,"_229":1179},{"_189":1174,"_227":1175,"_229":1176},{"_189":1171,"_227":1172,"_229":1173},{"_189":852,"_227":1170,"_229":854},{"_189":192,"_227":1169,"_229":194},[4701,4702,4703,4704,4705,4706,4707,4708,4709,4710,4711,4712,4713],[],{"_189":305,"_227":1247,"_229":307},{"_189":1244,"_227":1245,"_229":1246},{"_189":1241,"_227":1242,"_229":1243},{"_189":1238,"_227":1239,"_229":1240},{"_189":1235,"_227":1236,"_229":1237},{"_189":1232,"_227":1233,"_229":1234},{"_189":1229,"_227":1230,"_229":1231},{"_189":1226,"_227":1227,"_229":1228},{"_189":1223,"_227":1224,"_229":1225},{"_189":1220,"_227":1221,"_229":1222},{"_189":1171,"_227":1219,"_229":1173},{"_189":852,"_227":1218,"_229":854},{"_189":192,"_227":1217,"_229":194},[4716,4717,4718,4719,4720,4721,4722,4723,4724,4725,4726,4727,4728],[],{"_189":305,"_227":1291,"_229":307},{"_189":1145,"_227":1290,"_229":1147},{"_189":1287,"_227":1288,"_229":1289},{"_189":1284,"_227":1285,"_229":1286},{"_189":1281,"_227":1282,"_229":1283},{"_189":1278,"_227":1279,"_229":1280},{"_189":1229,"_227":1277,"_229":1231},{"_189":1226,"_227":1276,"_229":1228},{"_189":1223,"_227":1275,"_229":1225},{"_189":1272,"_227":1273,"_229":1274},{"_189":1171,"_227":1271,"_229":1173},{"_189":852,"_227":1270,"_229":854},{"_189":192,"_227":1269,"_229":194},[4731,4732,4733,4734,4735,4736,4737,4738,4739,4740],[],{"_189":305,"_227":1325,"_229":307},{"_189":1145,"_227":1324,"_229":1147},{"_189":1322,"_227":1323,"_229":1250},{"_189":1320,"_227":1321,"_229":1198},{"_189":1150,"_227":1318,"_229":1319},{"_189":1315,"_227":1316,"_229":1317},{"_189":1312,"_227":1313,"_229":1314},{"_189":1171,"_227":1311,"_229":1173},{"_189":852,"_227":1310,"_229":854},{"_189":192,"_227":1309,"_229":194},"mob-cat-settings",[4743,4744,4745,4746,4747,4748,4749,4750,4751,4752,4753],{"_189":1684,"_191":1685,"_193":1686,"_195":1687,"_197":4863,"_199":912,"_201":1078,"_203":1689,"_204":1653,"_206":207,"_208":4864},{"_189":1665,"_191":1446,"_193":1448,"_195":1666,"_197":4856,"_199":912,"_201":1078,"_203":1668,"_204":348,"_206":207,"_208":4857},{"_189":1647,"_191":1648,"_193":1649,"_195":1650,"_197":4850,"_199":912,"_201":1078,"_203":1652,"_204":1653,"_206":207,"_208":4851},{"_189":1620,"_191":1621,"_193":1622,"_195":1623,"_197":4842,"_199":912,"_201":1078,"_203":1625,"_204":205,"_206":207,"_208":4843},{"_189":1566,"_191":1567,"_193":1568,"_195":1569,"_197":4826,"_199":912,"_201":1571,"_203":1572,"_204":348,"_206":207,"_208":4827},{"_189":1534,"_191":1535,"_193":1536,"_195":1537,"_197":4816,"_199":912,"_201":1539,"_203":1540,"_204":205,"_206":207,"_208":4817},{"_189":1488,"_191":1489,"_193":1490,"_195":1491,"_197":4802,"_199":912,"_201":1493,"_203":1494,"_204":348,"_206":207,"_208":4803},{"_189":1462,"_191":1463,"_193":1464,"_195":1465,"_197":4794,"_199":912,"_201":1467,"_203":1468,"_204":348,"_206":207,"_208":4795},{"_189":1424,"_191":1425,"_193":1426,"_195":1427,"_197":4783,"_199":912,"_201":1429,"_203":1430,"_204":348,"_206":207,"_208":4784},{"_189":1370,"_191":1371,"_193":1372,"_195":1373,"_197":4767,"_199":912,"_201":1375,"_203":1376,"_204":348,"_206":207,"_208":4768},{"_189":1326,"_191":1327,"_193":1328,"_195":1329,"_197":4754,"_199":912,"_201":1331,"_203":1332,"_204":348,"_206":207,"_208":4755},[4756,4757,4758,4759,4760,4761,4762,4763,4764,4765,4766],[],{"_189":305,"_227":1369,"_229":307},{"_189":870,"_227":1368,"_229":872},{"_189":1365,"_227":1366,"_229":1367},{"_189":1362,"_227":1363,"_229":1364},{"_189":1359,"_227":1360,"_229":1361},{"_189":1356,"_227":1357,"_229":1358},{"_189":1353,"_227":1354,"_229":1355},{"_189":1350,"_227":1351,"_229":1352},{"_189":1089,"_227":1348,"_229":1349},{"_189":852,"_227":1347,"_229":854},{"_189":192,"_227":1346,"_229":194},[4769,4770,4771,4772,4773,4774,4775,4776,4777,4778,4779,4780,4781,4782],[],{"_189":305,"_227":1423,"_229":307},{"_189":870,"_227":1422,"_229":872},{"_189":1419,"_227":1420,"_229":1421},{"_189":1416,"_227":1417,"_229":1418},{"_189":1413,"_227":1414,"_229":1415},{"_189":1410,"_227":1411,"_229":1412},{"_189":1407,"_227":1408,"_229":1409},{"_189":1404,"_227":1405,"_229":1406},{"_189":1401,"_227":1402,"_229":1403},{"_189":1398,"_227":1399,"_229":1400},{"_189":1395,"_227":1396,"_229":1397},{"_189":1089,"_227":1394,"_229":1349},{"_189":852,"_227":1393,"_229":854},{"_189":192,"_227":1392,"_229":194},[4785,4786,4787,4788,4789,4790,4791,4792,4793],[],{"_189":305,"_227":1461,"_229":307},{"_189":1458,"_227":1459,"_229":1460},{"_189":1455,"_227":1456,"_229":1457},{"_189":1452,"_227":1453,"_229":1454},{"_189":1449,"_227":1450,"_229":1451},{"_189":1446,"_227":1447,"_229":1448},{"_189":1443,"_227":1444,"_229":1445},{"_189":852,"_227":1442,"_229":854},{"_189":192,"_227":1441,"_229":194},[4796,4797,4798,4799,4800,4801],[],{"_189":305,"_227":1487,"_229":307},{"_189":1484,"_227":1485,"_229":1486},{"_189":1481,"_227":1482,"_229":1483},{"_189":1478,"_227":1479,"_229":1480},{"_189":852,"_227":1477,"_229":854},{"_189":192,"_227":1476,"_229":194},[4804,4805,4806,4807,4808,4809,4810,4811,4812,4813,4814,4815],[],{"_189":305,"_227":1533,"_229":307},{"_189":1145,"_227":1532,"_229":1147},{"_189":1529,"_227":1530,"_229":1531},{"_189":1526,"_227":1527,"_229":1528},{"_189":1523,"_227":1524,"_229":1525},{"_189":1520,"_227":1521,"_229":1522},{"_189":1517,"_227":1518,"_229":1519},{"_189":1514,"_227":1515,"_229":1516},{"_189":1511,"_227":1512,"_229":1513},{"_189":852,"_227":1510,"_229":854},{"_189":1089,"_227":1509,"_229":1349},{"_189":192,"_227":1508,"_229":194},[4818,4819,4820,4821,4822,4823,4824,4825],[],{"_189":305,"_227":1565,"_229":307},{"_189":1562,"_227":1563,"_229":1564},{"_189":1559,"_227":1560,"_229":1561},{"_189":1556,"_227":1557,"_229":1558},{"_189":1553,"_227":1554,"_229":1555},{"_189":852,"_227":1552,"_229":854},{"_189":1089,"_227":1551,"_229":1349},{"_189":192,"_227":1550,"_229":194},[4828,4829,4830,4831,4832,4833,4834,4835,4836,4837,4838,4839,4840,4841],[],{"_189":305,"_227":1619,"_229":307},{"_189":1145,"_227":1618,"_229":1147},{"_189":1615,"_227":1616,"_229":1617},{"_189":1612,"_227":1613,"_229":1614},{"_189":1609,"_227":1610,"_229":1611},{"_189":1606,"_227":1607,"_229":1608},{"_189":1603,"_227":1604,"_229":1605},{"_189":1600,"_227":1601,"_229":1602},{"_189":1597,"_227":1598,"_229":1599},{"_189":1594,"_227":1595,"_229":1596},{"_189":1591,"_227":1592,"_229":1593},{"_189":852,"_227":1590,"_229":854},{"_189":1089,"_227":1589,"_229":1349},{"_189":192,"_227":1588,"_229":194},[4844,4845,4846,4847,4848,4849],[],{"_189":305,"_227":1646,"_229":307},{"_189":1643,"_227":1644,"_229":1645},{"_189":1640,"_227":1641,"_229":1642},{"_189":1637,"_227":1638,"_229":1639},{"_189":1634,"_227":1635,"_229":1636},{"_189":192,"_227":1633,"_229":194},[4852,4853,4854,4855],[],{"_189":305,"_227":1664,"_229":307},{"_189":1661,"_227":1662,"_229":1663},{"_189":1634,"_227":1660,"_229":1636},{"_189":192,"_227":1659,"_229":194},[4858,4859,4860,4861,4862],[],{"_189":305,"_227":1683,"_229":307},{"_189":1680,"_227":1681,"_229":1682},{"_189":1677,"_227":1678,"_229":1679},{"_189":1634,"_227":1676,"_229":1636},{"_189":192,"_227":1675,"_229":194},[4865,4866,4867,4868],[],{"_189":1702,"_227":1703,"_229":1704},{"_189":1699,"_227":1700,"_229":1701},{"_189":1696,"_227":1697,"_229":1698},{"_189":192,"_227":1695,"_229":194},"mob-cat-design-customize","design-customize",[4872,4873,4874,4875,4876,4877,4878,4879],{"_189":1963,"_191":305,"_193":307,"_195":1964,"_197":4957,"_199":912,"_201":1078,"_203":1966,"_204":205,"_206":207,"_208":4958},{"_189":1919,"_191":840,"_193":1920,"_195":1921,"_197":4944,"_199":912,"_201":1078,"_203":1923,"_204":205,"_206":207,"_208":4945},{"_189":1896,"_191":1897,"_193":1898,"_195":1899,"_197":4937,"_199":912,"_201":1078,"_203":1901,"_204":205,"_206":207,"_208":4938},{"_189":1869,"_191":1870,"_193":1871,"_195":1872,"_197":4929,"_199":912,"_201":1078,"_203":1874,"_204":205,"_206":207,"_208":4930},{"_189":1818,"_191":841,"_193":1819,"_195":1820,"_197":4914,"_199":912,"_201":1078,"_203":1822,"_204":550,"_206":207,"_208":4915},{"_189":1788,"_191":1789,"_193":1790,"_195":1791,"_197":4905,"_199":912,"_201":1793,"_203":1794,"_204":205,"_206":207,"_208":4906},{"_189":1746,"_191":1747,"_193":1748,"_195":1749,"_197":4892,"_199":912,"_201":1751,"_203":1752,"_204":348,"_206":207,"_208":4893},{"_189":1705,"_191":1706,"_193":1707,"_195":1708,"_197":4880,"_199":912,"_201":1710,"_203":1711,"_204":348,"_206":207,"_208":4881},[4882,4883,4884,4885,4886,4887,4888,4889,4890,4891],[],{"_189":305,"_227":1745,"_229":307},{"_189":1742,"_227":1743,"_229":1744},{"_189":1739,"_227":1740,"_229":1741},{"_189":1736,"_227":1737,"_229":1738},{"_189":1733,"_227":1734,"_229":1735},{"_189":1730,"_227":1731,"_229":1732},{"_189":1727,"_227":1728,"_229":1729},{"_189":1171,"_227":1726,"_229":1173},{"_189":852,"_227":1725,"_229":854},{"_189":192,"_227":1724,"_229":194},[4894,4895,4896,4897,4898,4899,4900,4901,4902,4903,4904],[],{"_189":305,"_227":1787,"_229":307},{"_189":1784,"_227":1785,"_229":1786},{"_189":1781,"_227":1782,"_229":1783},{"_189":1736,"_227":1780,"_229":1738},{"_189":1777,"_227":1778,"_229":1779},{"_189":1774,"_227":1775,"_229":1776},{"_189":1771,"_227":1772,"_229":1773},{"_189":1768,"_227":1769,"_229":1770},{"_189":1171,"_227":1767,"_229":1173},{"_189":852,"_227":1766,"_229":854},{"_189":192,"_227":1765,"_229":194},[4907,4908,4909,4910,4911,4912,4913],[],{"_189":305,"_227":1817,"_229":307},{"_189":1814,"_227":1815,"_229":1816},{"_189":1811,"_227":1812,"_229":1813},{"_189":1808,"_227":1809,"_229":1810},{"_189":852,"_227":1807,"_229":854},{"_189":1804,"_227":1805,"_229":1806},{"_189":192,"_227":1803,"_229":194},[4916,4917,4918,4919,4920,4921,4922,4923,4924,4925,4926,4927,4928],[],{"_189":305,"_227":1868,"_229":307},{"_189":870,"_227":1866,"_229":1867},{"_189":1863,"_227":1864,"_229":1865},{"_189":1860,"_227":1861,"_229":1862},{"_189":1857,"_227":1858,"_229":1859},{"_189":1854,"_227":1855,"_229":1856},{"_189":1851,"_227":1852,"_229":1853},{"_189":1848,"_227":1849,"_229":1850},{"_189":1845,"_227":1846,"_229":1847},{"_189":1842,"_227":1843,"_229":1844},{"_189":1089,"_227":1841,"_229":1091},{"_189":1838,"_227":1839,"_229":1840},{"_189":192,"_227":1837,"_229":194},[4931,4932,4933,4934,4935,4936],[],{"_189":305,"_227":1895,"_229":307},{"_189":1892,"_227":1893,"_229":1894},{"_189":1889,"_227":1890,"_229":1891},{"_189":1886,"_227":1887,"_229":1888},{"_189":1883,"_227":1884,"_229":1885},{"_189":192,"_227":1882,"_229":194},[4939,4940,4941,4942,4943],[],{"_189":305,"_227":1918,"_229":307},{"_189":1915,"_227":1916,"_229":1917},{"_189":1912,"_227":1913,"_229":1914},{"_189":1909,"_227":1910,"_229":1911},{"_189":192,"_227":1908,"_229":194},[4946,4947,4948,4949,4950,4951,4952,4953,4954,4955,4956],[],{"_189":305,"_227":1962,"_229":307},{"_189":1959,"_227":1960,"_229":1961},{"_189":1956,"_227":1957,"_229":1958},{"_189":1953,"_227":1954,"_229":1955},{"_189":1950,"_227":1951,"_229":1952},{"_189":1947,"_227":1948,"_229":1949},{"_189":1944,"_227":1945,"_229":1946},{"_189":1941,"_227":1942,"_229":1943},{"_189":1938,"_227":1939,"_229":1940},{"_189":852,"_227":1937,"_229":854},{"_189":192,"_227":1936,"_229":194},[4959,4960,4961,4962,4963,4964,4965,4966],[],{"_189":305,"_227":1993,"_229":307},{"_189":1990,"_227":1991,"_229":1992},{"_189":1987,"_227":1988,"_229":1989},{"_189":1984,"_227":1985,"_229":1986},{"_189":1981,"_227":1982,"_229":1983},{"_189":1978,"_227":1979,"_229":1980},{"_189":1089,"_227":1977,"_229":1349},{"_189":192,"_227":1976,"_229":194},"cms8lb5sj01ud2us1id5j1ysj","about-ego-mobile-app-builder",[4970,4971,4972],{"_189":2072,"_191":2073,"_193":2074,"_195":2075,"_197":4994,"_199":2040,"_201":2077,"_203":2078,"_204":348,"_206":207,"_208":4995},{"_189":2035,"_191":2036,"_193":2037,"_195":2038,"_197":4984,"_199":2040,"_201":2041,"_203":2042,"_204":348,"_206":207,"_208":4985},{"_189":1994,"_191":1995,"_193":1996,"_195":1997,"_197":4973,"_199":1999,"_201":2000,"_203":2000,"_204":348,"_206":207,"_208":4974},[4975,4976,4977,4978,4979,4980,4981,4982,4983],[],{"_189":305,"_227":2034,"_229":307},{"_189":2031,"_227":2032,"_229":2033},{"_189":2028,"_227":2029,"_229":2030},{"_189":2025,"_227":2026,"_229":2027},{"_189":2022,"_227":2023,"_229":2024},{"_189":2019,"_227":2020,"_229":2021},{"_189":2016,"_227":2017,"_229":2018},{"_189":2013,"_227":2014,"_229":2015},{"_189":192,"_227":2012,"_229":194},[4986,4987,4988,4989,4990,4991,4992,4993],[],{"_189":305,"_227":2071,"_229":307},{"_189":2068,"_227":2069,"_229":2070},{"_189":2065,"_227":2066,"_229":2067},{"_189":2062,"_227":2063,"_229":2064},{"_189":2059,"_227":2060,"_229":2061},{"_189":2056,"_227":2057,"_229":2058},{"_189":2053,"_227":2054,"_229":2055},{"_189":192,"_227":2052,"_229":194},[4996,4997,4998,4999,5000,5001],[],{"_189":305,"_227":2099,"_229":307},{"_189":2096,"_227":2097,"_229":2098},{"_189":2093,"_227":2094,"_229":2095},{"_189":2090,"_227":2091,"_229":2092},{"_189":2087,"_227":2088,"_229":2089},{"_189":192,"_227":2086,"_229":194},"cmpv17yfr005x97b4sf35ih2z","Server-side pixel & attribution","Target","Pixel setup, server-side events, and attribution testing.",[5007,5008,5009,5010,5011,5012,5013],{"_189":5179,"_191":4523,"_4347":739,"_4324":4524,"_4349":5180},{"_189":5134,"_191":2109,"_4347":2422,"_4324":4550,"_4349":5135},{"_189":5107,"_191":5108,"_4347":2349,"_4324":4550,"_4349":5109},{"_189":5076,"_191":5077,"_4347":2263,"_4324":4550,"_4349":5078},{"_189":5059,"_191":5060,"_4347":2229,"_4324":5004,"_4349":5061},{"_189":5040,"_191":5041,"_4347":2188,"_4324":4680,"_4349":5042},{"_189":5014,"_191":4601,"_4347":916,"_4324":4372,"_4349":5015},"fbpx-cat-analytics",[5016,5017,5018],{"_189":2167,"_191":2168,"_193":2169,"_195":2170,"_197":5036,"_199":2105,"_201":2142,"_203":2172,"_204":1653,"_206":207,"_208":5037},{"_189":2137,"_191":2138,"_193":2139,"_195":2140,"_197":5028,"_199":2105,"_201":2142,"_203":2143,"_204":1653,"_206":207,"_208":5029},{"_189":2100,"_191":2101,"_193":2102,"_195":2103,"_197":5019,"_199":2105,"_201":2106,"_203":2107,"_204":1653,"_206":207,"_208":5020},[5021,5022,5023,5024,5025,5026,5027],[],{"_189":305,"_227":2136,"_229":307},{"_189":2133,"_227":2134,"_229":2135},{"_189":2130,"_227":2131,"_229":2132},{"_189":2127,"_227":2128,"_229":2129},{"_189":2124,"_227":2125,"_229":2126},{"_189":2121,"_227":2122,"_229":2123},{"_189":2118,"_227":2119,"_229":2120},[5030,5031,5032,5033,5034,5035],[],{"_189":305,"_227":2166,"_229":307},{"_189":2163,"_227":2164,"_229":2165},{"_189":2160,"_227":2161,"_229":2162},{"_189":2157,"_227":2158,"_229":2159},{"_189":2154,"_227":2155,"_229":2156},{"_189":2151,"_227":2152,"_229":2153},[5038,5039],[],{"_189":305,"_227":2179,"_229":307},{"_189":2176,"_227":2177,"_229":2178},"fbpx-cat-feed","feed",[5043,5044,5045],{"_189":2211,"_191":2212,"_193":2213,"_195":2214,"_197":5056,"_199":2216,"_201":2142,"_203":2217,"_204":1653,"_206":207,"_208":5057},{"_189":2199,"_191":2200,"_193":2201,"_195":2202,"_197":5051,"_199":2105,"_201":2142,"_203":2204,"_204":1653,"_206":207,"_208":5052},{"_189":2180,"_191":2181,"_193":2182,"_195":2183,"_197":5046,"_199":2105,"_201":2185,"_203":2186,"_204":348,"_206":207,"_208":5047},[5048,5049,5050],[],{"_189":305,"_227":2198,"_229":307},{"_189":2195,"_227":2196,"_229":2197},{"_189":2192,"_227":2193,"_229":2194},[5053,5054,5055],[],{"_189":305,"_227":2198,"_229":307},{"_189":2195,"_227":2210,"_229":2197},{"_189":2192,"_227":2209,"_229":2194},[5058],[],{"_189":2212,"_227":2220,"_229":2213},"fbpx-cat-catalog","catalog",[5062,5063,5064],{"_189":2246,"_191":2247,"_193":2248,"_195":2249,"_197":5073,"_199":2216,"_201":2142,"_203":2251,"_204":1653,"_206":207,"_208":5074},{"_189":2236,"_191":2232,"_193":2237,"_195":2238,"_197":5069,"_199":2105,"_201":2142,"_203":2240,"_204":1653,"_206":207,"_208":5070},{"_189":2221,"_191":2222,"_193":2223,"_195":2224,"_197":5065,"_199":2105,"_201":2226,"_203":2227,"_204":1653,"_206":207,"_208":5066},[5067,5068],[],{"_189":305,"_227":2235,"_229":307},{"_189":2232,"_227":2233,"_229":2234},[5071,5072],[],{"_189":305,"_227":2245,"_229":307},{"_189":2232,"_227":2244,"_229":2234},[5075],[],{"_189":2247,"_227":2254,"_229":2248},"cmv7k8yck06082ulk8xjaj2k7","chatgpt-pixel",[5079,5080,5081,5082],{"_189":2320,"_191":2321,"_193":2322,"_195":2323,"_197":5101,"_199":2260,"_201":2325,"_203":2326,"_204":205,"_206":207,"_208":5102},{"_189":2302,"_191":2303,"_193":2304,"_195":2305,"_197":5096,"_199":484,"_201":2307,"_203":2308,"_204":1653,"_206":207,"_208":5097},{"_189":2282,"_191":2264,"_193":2283,"_195":2284,"_197":5090,"_199":2260,"_201":2286,"_203":2286,"_204":348,"_206":207,"_208":5091},{"_189":2255,"_191":2256,"_193":2257,"_195":2258,"_197":5083,"_199":2260,"_201":2261,"_203":2261,"_204":348,"_206":207,"_208":5084},[5085,5086,5087,5088,5089],[2264,2265,2168],{"_189":305,"_227":2281,"_229":307},{"_189":2278,"_227":2279,"_229":2280},{"_189":2275,"_227":2276,"_229":2277},{"_189":2272,"_227":2273,"_229":2274},{"_189":852,"_227":2271,"_229":854},[5092,5093,5094,5095],[],{"_189":305,"_227":2301,"_229":307},{"_189":2298,"_227":2299,"_229":2300},{"_189":2295,"_227":2296,"_229":2297},{"_189":2292,"_227":2293,"_229":2294},[5098,5099,5100],[],{"_189":305,"_227":2319,"_229":307},{"_189":2316,"_227":2317,"_229":2318},{"_189":2313,"_227":2314,"_229":2315},[5103,5104,5105,5106],[],{"_189":305,"_227":2341,"_229":307},{"_189":2338,"_227":2339,"_229":2340},{"_189":2335,"_227":2336,"_229":2337},{"_189":2332,"_227":2333,"_229":2334},"cmutpsz2101bh2unrp1wijqbl","tiktok-pixel",[5110,5111,5112,5113],{"_189":2401,"_191":2402,"_193":2403,"_195":2404,"_197":5130,"_199":2105,"_201":2406,"_203":2407,"_204":1653,"_206":207,"_208":5131},{"_189":2382,"_191":2383,"_193":2384,"_195":2385,"_197":5125,"_199":2387,"_201":2388,"_203":2389,"_204":348,"_206":207,"_208":5126},{"_189":2364,"_191":2365,"_193":2366,"_195":2367,"_197":5120,"_199":2105,"_201":2369,"_203":2370,"_204":348,"_206":207,"_208":5121},{"_189":2342,"_191":2343,"_193":2257,"_195":2344,"_197":5114,"_199":2105,"_201":2346,"_203":2347,"_204":348,"_206":207,"_208":5115},[5116,5117,5118,5119],[],{"_189":305,"_227":2363,"_229":307},{"_189":2360,"_227":2361,"_229":2362},{"_189":2357,"_227":2358,"_229":2359},{"_189":2354,"_227":2355,"_229":2356},[5122,5123,5124],[],{"_189":305,"_227":2381,"_229":307},{"_189":2378,"_227":2379,"_229":2380},{"_189":2375,"_227":2376,"_229":2377},[5127,5128,5129],[],{"_189":305,"_227":2400,"_229":307},{"_189":2397,"_227":2398,"_229":2399},{"_189":2394,"_227":2395,"_229":2396},[5132,5133],[],{"_189":305,"_227":2414,"_229":307},{"_189":2411,"_227":2412,"_229":2413},"cmuw1182h00wo2ut96m03p8id",[5136,5137,5138,5139,5140,5141,5142],{"_189":2519,"_191":2520,"_193":2403,"_195":2521,"_197":5175,"_199":2387,"_201":2142,"_203":2523,"_204":1653,"_206":207,"_208":5176},{"_189":2502,"_191":2503,"_193":2504,"_195":2505,"_197":5170,"_199":2387,"_201":2142,"_203":2507,"_204":1653,"_206":207,"_208":5171},{"_189":2485,"_191":2486,"_193":2487,"_195":2488,"_197":5165,"_199":2387,"_201":2142,"_203":2490,"_204":1653,"_206":207,"_208":5166},{"_189":2472,"_191":2473,"_193":2474,"_195":2475,"_197":5160,"_199":2387,"_201":2142,"_203":2477,"_204":1653,"_206":207,"_208":5161},{"_189":2455,"_191":2456,"_193":2457,"_195":2458,"_197":5155,"_199":2387,"_201":2142,"_203":2460,"_204":1653,"_206":207,"_208":5156},{"_189":2433,"_191":2434,"_193":2257,"_195":2435,"_197":5148,"_199":2387,"_201":2142,"_203":2437,"_204":348,"_206":207,"_208":5149},{"_189":2415,"_191":2416,"_193":2417,"_195":2418,"_197":5143,"_199":2387,"_201":2142,"_203":2420,"_204":1653,"_206":207,"_208":5144},[5145,5146,5147],[],{"_189":305,"_227":2432,"_229":307},{"_189":2429,"_227":2430,"_229":2431},{"_189":2426,"_227":2427,"_229":2428},[5150,5151,5152,5153,5154],[],{"_189":305,"_227":2454,"_229":307},{"_189":2360,"_227":2453,"_229":2362},{"_189":2450,"_227":2451,"_229":2452},{"_189":2447,"_227":2448,"_229":2449},{"_189":2444,"_227":2445,"_229":2446},[5157,5158,5159],[],{"_189":305,"_227":2471,"_229":307},{"_189":2468,"_227":2469,"_229":2470},{"_189":2465,"_227":2466,"_229":2467},[5162,5163,5164],[],{"_189":305,"_227":2484,"_229":307},{"_189":2397,"_227":2483,"_229":2399},{"_189":2394,"_227":2482,"_229":2396},[5167,5168,5169],[],{"_189":305,"_227":2501,"_229":307},{"_189":2498,"_227":2499,"_229":2500},{"_189":2495,"_227":2496,"_229":2497},[5172,5173,5174],[],{"_189":305,"_227":2518,"_229":307},{"_189":2515,"_227":2516,"_229":2517},{"_189":2512,"_227":2513,"_229":2514},[5177,5178],[],{"_189":305,"_227":2530,"_229":307},{"_189":2527,"_227":2528,"_229":2529},"fbpx-cat-getting-started",[5181,5182],{"_189":2558,"_191":2559,"_193":2560,"_195":2561,"_197":5190,"_199":2216,"_201":2142,"_203":2563,"_204":1653,"_206":207,"_208":5191},{"_189":2531,"_191":2532,"_193":2533,"_195":2534,"_197":5183,"_199":2260,"_201":2142,"_203":2536,"_204":205,"_206":207,"_208":5184},[5185,5186,5187,5188,5189],[],{"_189":2555,"_227":2556,"_229":2557},{"_189":2552,"_227":2553,"_229":2554},{"_189":2549,"_227":2550,"_229":2551},{"_189":2546,"_227":2547,"_229":2548},{"_189":2543,"_227":2544,"_229":2545},[5192,5193],[],{"_189":2570,"_227":2571,"_229":2572},{"_189":2567,"_227":2568,"_229":2569},"cmpv17xsa005697b40y98t6qg","order-tracking","Ego Order Tracking","Branded post-purchase experience","MapPin","Branded tracking pages, carrier setup, and notification emails.","coming-soon",0,[],"cmpv17x4x004f97b437bh7jpd","preorder","Ego Preorder","Sell before inventory arrives","Clock","Set up preorders, manage queues, and communicate with customers.",[],"cmpv17wgw003o97b4nas9x6fe","Always-visible add-to-cart button","Pin","Configure the sticky button appearance and behavior.","https://apps.shopify.com/ego-sticky-add-to-cart-bar",10,[5217,5218,5219,5220],{"_189":5281,"_191":4523,"_4347":739,"_4324":4524,"_4349":5282},{"_189":5254,"_191":5255,"_4347":2671,"_4324":4401,"_4349":5256},{"_189":5240,"_191":5241,"_4347":2638,"_4324":1334,"_4349":5242},{"_189":5221,"_191":4346,"_4347":215,"_4324":4348,"_4349":5222},"c24166febf1a915ee46fee863",[5223,5224],{"_189":2606,"_191":2580,"_193":2607,"_195":2608,"_197":5233,"_199":200,"_201":2576,"_203":2576,"_204":205,"_206":207,"_208":5234},{"_189":2573,"_191":192,"_193":194,"_195":2574,"_197":5225,"_199":200,"_201":2576,"_203":2576,"_204":205,"_206":207,"_208":5226},[5227,5228,5229,5230,5231,5232],[2580,2581],{"_189":2603,"_227":2604,"_229":2605},{"_189":2600,"_227":2601,"_229":2602},{"_189":2597,"_227":2598,"_229":2599},{"_189":2594,"_227":2595,"_229":2596},{"_189":2591,"_227":2592,"_229":2593},{"_189":2588,"_227":2589,"_229":2590},[5235,5236,5237,5238,5239],[2611,2612],{"_189":2630,"_227":2631,"_229":2632},{"_189":2627,"_227":2628,"_229":2629},{"_189":2624,"_227":2625,"_229":2626},{"_189":2621,"_227":2622,"_229":2623},{"_189":2618,"_227":2619,"_229":2620},"c51d7ac875f53533a20780ff2","managing-analytics",[5243,5244],{"_189":2653,"_191":2639,"_193":2654,"_195":2655,"_197":5250,"_199":200,"_201":2576,"_203":2576,"_204":205,"_206":207,"_208":5251},{"_189":2633,"_191":217,"_193":2634,"_195":2635,"_197":5245,"_199":200,"_201":2576,"_203":2576,"_204":205,"_206":207,"_208":5246},[5247,5248,5249],[2639,2640],{"_189":2650,"_227":2651,"_229":2652},{"_189":2647,"_227":2648,"_229":2649},{"_189":2644,"_227":2645,"_229":2646},[5252,5253],[2640,217],{"_189":2663,"_227":2664,"_229":2665},{"_189":2660,"_227":2661,"_229":2662},"c00ec6b1680aa0b2244332911","customization",[5257,5258,5259,5260],{"_189":2720,"_191":2686,"_193":2721,"_195":2722,"_197":5276,"_199":200,"_201":2576,"_203":2576,"_204":205,"_206":207,"_208":5277},{"_189":2699,"_191":2581,"_193":2700,"_195":2701,"_197":5270,"_199":200,"_201":2576,"_203":2576,"_204":348,"_206":207,"_208":5271},{"_189":2680,"_191":2681,"_193":2682,"_195":2683,"_197":5265,"_199":200,"_201":2576,"_203":2576,"_204":205,"_206":207,"_208":5266},{"_189":2666,"_191":2612,"_193":2667,"_195":2668,"_197":5261,"_199":200,"_201":2576,"_203":2576,"_204":205,"_206":207,"_208":5262},[5263,5264],[2581,2639],{"_189":2677,"_227":2678,"_229":2679},{"_189":2674,"_227":2675,"_229":2676},[5267,5268,5269],[2686,2640],{"_189":2696,"_227":2697,"_229":2698},{"_189":2693,"_227":2694,"_229":2695},{"_189":2690,"_227":2691,"_229":2692},[5272,5273,5274,5275],[2686,2612],{"_189":2717,"_227":2718,"_229":2719},{"_189":2714,"_227":2715,"_229":2716},{"_189":2711,"_227":2712,"_229":2713},{"_189":2708,"_227":2709,"_229":2710},[5278,5279,5280],[2681,2581],{"_189":2734,"_227":2735,"_229":2736},{"_189":2731,"_227":2732,"_229":2733},{"_189":2728,"_227":2729,"_229":2730},"c036995fb515135a5adc363bf",[5283,5284],{"_189":2754,"_191":2611,"_193":2755,"_195":2756,"_197":5290,"_199":200,"_201":2576,"_203":2576,"_204":348,"_206":349,"_208":5291},{"_189":2737,"_191":2640,"_193":2738,"_195":2739,"_197":5285,"_199":200,"_201":2576,"_203":2576,"_204":205,"_206":349,"_208":5286},[5287,5288,5289],[2686,2581],{"_189":2751,"_227":2752,"_229":2753},{"_189":2748,"_227":2749,"_229":2750},{"_189":2745,"_227":2746,"_229":2747},[5292,5293,5294,5295],[2640,2580],{"_189":2772,"_227":2773,"_229":2774},{"_189":2769,"_227":2770,"_229":2771},{"_189":2766,"_227":2767,"_229":2768},{"_189":2763,"_227":2764,"_229":2765},"cmpv17vsj002x97b4o94w3ow5","bundles","Ego Bundles","Fixed bundles, kits & mix-and-match","Package","Create and manage fixed bundles, kits, and mix-and-match offers.",[],"cmpv17v4j002697b4tp0lv0oe","Recurring billing & customer portal","RefreshCw","Subscription plans, billing, portals, and analytics.","https://apps.shopify.com/ego-subscriptions",17,[5310,5311,5312,5313,5314],{"_189":5429,"_191":4523,"_4347":739,"_4324":4524,"_4349":5430},{"_189":5406,"_191":5407,"_4347":3049,"_4324":4401,"_4349":5408},{"_189":5375,"_191":5376,"_4347":2961,"_4324":4680,"_4349":5377},{"_189":5339,"_191":5340,"_4347":2861,"_4324":1334,"_4349":5341},{"_189":5315,"_191":4346,"_4347":215,"_4324":4348,"_4349":5316},"c833f1bae690fda3ffdbffc3a",[5317,5318],{"_189":2825,"_191":2826,"_193":2827,"_195":2828,"_197":5331,"_199":200,"_201":2778,"_203":2778,"_204":348,"_206":207,"_208":5332},{"_189":2775,"_191":192,"_193":194,"_195":2776,"_197":5319,"_199":200,"_201":2778,"_203":2778,"_204":348,"_206":207,"_208":5320},[5321,5322,5323,5324,5325,5326,5327,5328,5329,5330],[2782,2783,2784],{"_189":2822,"_227":2823,"_229":2824},{"_189":2819,"_227":2820,"_229":2821},{"_189":2816,"_227":2817,"_229":2818},{"_189":2813,"_227":2814,"_229":2815},{"_189":2810,"_227":2811,"_229":2812},{"_189":2807,"_227":2808,"_229":2809},{"_189":2804,"_227":2805,"_229":2806},{"_189":2801,"_227":2802,"_229":2803},{"_189":2798,"_227":2799,"_229":2800},{"_189":2795,"_227":2796,"_229":2797},[5333,5334,5335,5336,5337,5338],[2831,2832],{"_189":2852,"_227":2853,"_229":2854},{"_189":2849,"_227":2850,"_229":2851},{"_189":2846,"_227":2847,"_229":2848},{"_189":2843,"_227":2844,"_229":2845},{"_189":2840,"_227":2841,"_229":2842},{"_189":2618,"_227":2839,"_229":2620},"c6299ca3ddbe24556379cbf1b","managing-subscriptions",[5342,5343,5344,5345,5346],{"_189":2934,"_191":2862,"_193":2935,"_195":2936,"_197":5369,"_199":200,"_201":2778,"_203":2778,"_204":348,"_206":349,"_208":5370},{"_189":2917,"_191":2900,"_193":2918,"_195":2919,"_197":5364,"_199":200,"_201":2778,"_203":2778,"_204":205,"_206":207,"_208":5365},{"_189":2895,"_191":2782,"_193":2896,"_195":2897,"_197":5358,"_199":200,"_201":2778,"_203":2778,"_204":348,"_206":207,"_208":5359},{"_189":2878,"_191":2879,"_193":602,"_195":2880,"_197":5353,"_199":200,"_201":2778,"_203":2778,"_204":348,"_206":207,"_208":5354},{"_189":2855,"_191":2856,"_193":2857,"_195":2858,"_197":5347,"_199":200,"_201":2778,"_203":2778,"_204":348,"_206":207,"_208":5348},[5349,5350,5351,5352],[2862,2863],{"_189":2876,"_227":2877,"_229":541},{"_189":2874,"_227":2875,"_229":359},{"_189":2871,"_227":2872,"_229":2873},{"_189":2868,"_227":2869,"_229":2870},[5355,5356,5357],[2782,2783],{"_189":2892,"_227":2893,"_229":2894},{"_189":2889,"_227":2890,"_229":2891},{"_189":2886,"_227":2887,"_229":2888},[5360,5361,5362,5363],[2879,2900],{"_189":2914,"_227":2915,"_229":2916},{"_189":2911,"_227":2912,"_229":2913},{"_189":2908,"_227":2909,"_229":2910},{"_189":2905,"_227":2906,"_229":2907},[5366,5367,5368],[2862,2879],{"_189":2931,"_227":2932,"_229":2933},{"_189":2928,"_227":2929,"_229":2930},{"_189":2925,"_227":2926,"_229":2927},[5371,5372,5373,5374],[2900,2782],{"_189":2952,"_227":2953,"_229":2954},{"_189":2949,"_227":2950,"_229":2951},{"_189":2946,"_227":2947,"_229":2948},{"_189":2943,"_227":2944,"_229":2945},"ceb05d9e018aa955508b635cb","storefront-customer-portal",[5378,5379,5380,5381],{"_189":3018,"_191":2832,"_193":3019,"_195":3020,"_197":5399,"_199":200,"_201":2778,"_203":2778,"_204":348,"_206":349,"_208":5400},{"_189":2989,"_191":2783,"_193":2990,"_195":2991,"_197":5391,"_199":200,"_201":2778,"_203":2778,"_204":348,"_206":349,"_208":5392},{"_189":2970,"_191":2971,"_193":2972,"_195":2973,"_197":5386,"_199":200,"_201":2778,"_203":2778,"_204":348,"_206":207,"_208":5387},{"_189":2955,"_191":2956,"_193":2957,"_195":2958,"_197":5382,"_199":200,"_201":2778,"_203":2778,"_204":205,"_206":207,"_208":5383},[5384,5385],[2832,2783],{"_189":2967,"_227":2968,"_229":2969},{"_189":2964,"_227":2965,"_229":2966},[5388,5389,5390],[2832,2976],{"_189":2986,"_227":2987,"_229":2988},{"_189":2983,"_227":2984,"_229":2985},{"_189":2980,"_227":2981,"_229":2982},[5393,5394,5395,5396,5397,5398],[2832,2879,2862],{"_189":3015,"_227":3016,"_229":3017},{"_189":3012,"_227":3013,"_229":3014},{"_189":3009,"_227":3010,"_229":3011},{"_189":3006,"_227":3007,"_229":3008},{"_189":3003,"_227":3004,"_229":3005},{"_189":3000,"_227":3001,"_229":3002},[5401,5402,5403,5404,5405],[2831,2956,2826],{"_189":3040,"_227":3041,"_229":3042},{"_189":3037,"_227":3038,"_229":3039},{"_189":3034,"_227":3035,"_229":3036},{"_189":3031,"_227":3032,"_229":3033},{"_189":3028,"_227":3029,"_229":3030},"c6b9963262270dec8095d03cf","subscription-plans",[5409,5410,5411],{"_189":3083,"_191":3050,"_193":3084,"_195":3085,"_197":5423,"_199":200,"_201":2778,"_203":2778,"_204":348,"_206":207,"_208":5424},{"_189":3063,"_191":2863,"_193":3064,"_195":3065,"_197":5417,"_199":200,"_201":2778,"_203":2778,"_204":348,"_206":207,"_208":5418},{"_189":3043,"_191":3044,"_193":3045,"_195":3046,"_197":5412,"_199":200,"_201":2778,"_203":2778,"_204":205,"_206":207,"_208":5413},[5414,5415,5416],[2976,3050],{"_189":3060,"_227":3061,"_229":3062},{"_189":3057,"_227":3058,"_229":3059},{"_189":3054,"_227":3055,"_229":3056},[5419,5420,5421,5422],[3050,2862],{"_189":3080,"_227":3081,"_229":3082},{"_189":3077,"_227":3078,"_229":3079},{"_189":3074,"_227":3075,"_229":3076},{"_189":2943,"_227":3072,"_229":3073},[5425,5426,5427,5428],[2976,2782],{"_189":3101,"_227":3102,"_229":3103},{"_189":3098,"_227":3099,"_229":3100},{"_189":3095,"_227":3096,"_229":3097},{"_189":3092,"_227":3093,"_229":3094},"cab289c6d3befba733f5f6eef",[5431,5432,5433],{"_189":3148,"_191":2831,"_193":3149,"_195":3150,"_197":5447,"_199":200,"_201":2778,"_203":2778,"_204":3152,"_206":349,"_208":5448},{"_189":3119,"_191":2976,"_193":3120,"_195":3121,"_197":5439,"_199":200,"_201":2778,"_203":2778,"_204":550,"_206":349,"_208":5440},{"_189":3104,"_191":2784,"_193":3105,"_195":3106,"_197":5434,"_199":200,"_201":2778,"_203":2778,"_204":205,"_206":207,"_208":5435},[5436,5437,5438],[2862,2976],{"_189":3116,"_227":3117,"_229":3118},{"_189":3113,"_227":3114,"_229":3115},{"_189":1089,"_227":3112,"_229":1349},[5441,5442,5443,5444,5445,5446],[3050,2863,2826],{"_189":3145,"_227":3146,"_229":3147},{"_189":3142,"_227":3143,"_229":3144},{"_189":3139,"_227":3140,"_229":3141},{"_189":3136,"_227":3137,"_229":3138},{"_189":3133,"_227":3134,"_229":3135},{"_189":3130,"_227":3131,"_229":3132},[5449,5450,5451,5452,5453,5454],[2976,2832,2826],{"_189":3169,"_227":3170,"_229":3171},{"_189":870,"_227":3168,"_229":872},{"_189":2769,"_227":3167,"_229":802},{"_189":3164,"_227":3165,"_229":3166},{"_189":3161,"_227":3162,"_229":3163},{"_189":2763,"_227":3160,"_229":2765},"cmpv17uhj001f97b4pfhu70bg","Automatic Gifts at spending thresholds & Smart Upsell Offers","Gift","Configure gift thresholds, upsell rules, and customer-facing displays.","https://apps.shopify.com/ego-free-gift","https://www.egohub.co/resources/help-center/free-gifts-bogo-upsell/what-is-ego-free-gift-upsell","/app-logos/free-gift.png",24,[5464,5465,5466,5467,5468,5469,5470,5471],{"_189":5627,"_191":5628,"_4347":3589,"_4324":4550,"_4349":5629},{"_189":5611,"_191":4523,"_4347":739,"_4324":4524,"_4349":5612},{"_189":5585,"_191":5586,"_4347":3487,"_4324":5457,"_4349":5587},{"_189":5551,"_191":5552,"_4347":3400,"_4324":5300,"_4349":5553},{"_189":5526,"_191":5527,"_4347":3329,"_4324":4680,"_4349":5528},{"_189":5510,"_191":5511,"_4347":3288,"_4324":1334,"_4349":5512},{"_189":5502,"_191":4601,"_4347":916,"_4324":4372,"_4349":5503},{"_189":5472,"_191":4346,"_4347":3183,"_4324":5473,"_4349":5474},"c4119c54f4b0b85a36ce37580","HelpCircle",[5475,5476,5477,5478,5479],{"_189":3247,"_191":3248,"_193":3249,"_195":3250,"_197":5497,"_199":3239,"_201":3252,"_203":3253,"_204":348,"_206":207,"_208":5498},{"_189":3234,"_191":3235,"_193":3236,"_195":3237,"_197":5494,"_199":3239,"_201":3240,"_203":3241,"_204":348,"_206":207,"_208":5495},{"_189":3219,"_191":3220,"_193":3221,"_195":3222,"_197":5490,"_199":3197,"_201":3224,"_203":3199,"_204":348,"_206":207,"_208":5491},{"_189":3192,"_191":3193,"_193":3194,"_195":3195,"_197":5484,"_199":3197,"_201":3198,"_203":3199,"_204":348,"_206":207,"_208":5485},{"_189":3172,"_191":3173,"_193":3174,"_195":3175,"_197":5480,"_199":3177,"_201":3178,"_203":3179,"_204":348,"_206":207,"_208":5481},[5482,5483],[],{"_189":3189,"_227":3190,"_229":3191},{"_189":3186,"_227":3187,"_229":3188},[5486,5487,5488,5489],[3201,3202],{"_189":3216,"_227":3217,"_229":3218},{"_189":3213,"_227":3214,"_229":3215},{"_189":3210,"_227":3211,"_229":3212},{"_189":3207,"_227":3208,"_229":3209},[5492,5493],[],{"_189":3231,"_227":3232,"_229":3233},{"_189":3228,"_227":3229,"_229":3230},[5496],[],{"_189":3244,"_227":3245,"_229":3246},[5499,5500,5501],[],{"_189":3260,"_227":3263,"_229":3262},{"_189":3260,"_227":3261,"_229":3262},{"_189":266,"_227":3258,"_229":3259},"cms2pxjns001h2us18g8iw5fe",[5504],{"_189":3264,"_191":217,"_193":2634,"_195":3265,"_197":5505,"_199":3197,"_201":3198,"_203":3199,"_204":205,"_206":207,"_208":5506},[5507,5508,5509],[3268,3269],{"_189":3279,"_227":3280,"_229":3281},{"_189":3276,"_227":3277,"_229":3278},{"_189":3273,"_227":3274,"_229":3275},"c0e37e26cf5e5171d0a3c21ee","widgets-display",[5513,5514],{"_189":3302,"_191":3289,"_193":3303,"_195":3304,"_197":5520,"_199":3197,"_201":3198,"_203":3199,"_204":348,"_206":207,"_208":5521},{"_189":3282,"_191":3283,"_193":3284,"_195":3285,"_197":5515,"_199":3197,"_201":3199,"_203":3199,"_204":348,"_206":207,"_208":5516},[5517,5518,5519],[3289,3290],{"_189":3299,"_227":3300,"_229":3301},{"_189":2956,"_227":3297,"_229":3298},{"_189":3294,"_227":3295,"_229":3296},[5522,5523,5524,5525],[3202,3307],{"_189":3321,"_227":3322,"_229":3323},{"_189":3318,"_227":3319,"_229":3320},{"_189":3315,"_227":3316,"_229":3317},{"_189":3312,"_227":3313,"_229":3314},"cd26439f5a0d3213437fa6b7a","bundle-campaigns",[5529,5530,5531],{"_189":3378,"_191":3357,"_193":3379,"_195":3380,"_197":5546,"_199":3197,"_201":3199,"_203":3199,"_204":205,"_206":207,"_208":5547},{"_189":3351,"_191":3330,"_193":3352,"_195":3353,"_197":5539,"_199":286,"_201":3199,"_203":3355,"_204":550,"_206":207,"_208":5540},{"_189":3324,"_191":3290,"_193":3325,"_195":3326,"_197":5532,"_199":3197,"_201":3199,"_203":3199,"_204":348,"_206":207,"_208":5533},[5534,5535,5536,5537,5538],[3330,3283],{"_189":3348,"_227":3349,"_229":3350},{"_189":3345,"_227":3346,"_229":3347},{"_189":3342,"_227":3343,"_229":3344},{"_189":3339,"_227":3340,"_229":3341},{"_189":3336,"_227":3337,"_229":3338},[5541,5542,5543,5544,5545],[3357,3290],{"_189":3375,"_227":3376,"_229":3377},{"_189":3372,"_227":3373,"_229":3374},{"_189":3369,"_227":3370,"_229":3371},{"_189":3366,"_227":3367,"_229":3368},{"_189":3363,"_227":3364,"_229":3365},[5548,5549,5550],[3330,3290],{"_189":3392,"_227":3393,"_229":3394},{"_189":3389,"_227":3390,"_229":3391},{"_189":3386,"_227":3387,"_229":3388},"cd31aee8e8f77cf61cb4965a1","upsell-analytics",[5554,5555,5556,5557,5558,5559],{"_189":3468,"_191":3469,"_193":3470,"_195":3471,"_197":5581,"_199":3197,"_201":3473,"_203":3199,"_204":348,"_206":207,"_208":5582},{"_189":3455,"_191":3456,"_193":3457,"_195":3458,"_197":5577,"_199":3197,"_201":3460,"_203":3199,"_204":348,"_206":207,"_208":5578},{"_189":3441,"_191":3442,"_193":3443,"_195":3444,"_197":5573,"_199":3197,"_201":3446,"_203":3199,"_204":348,"_206":207,"_208":5574},{"_189":3428,"_191":3429,"_193":3430,"_195":3431,"_197":5569,"_199":3197,"_201":3433,"_203":3199,"_204":348,"_206":207,"_208":5570},{"_189":3413,"_191":3414,"_193":3415,"_195":3416,"_197":5565,"_199":3197,"_201":3418,"_203":3199,"_204":348,"_206":207,"_208":5566},{"_189":3395,"_191":3307,"_193":3396,"_195":3397,"_197":5560,"_199":3197,"_201":3198,"_203":3199,"_204":205,"_206":207,"_208":5561},[5562,5563,5564],[3289,3193],{"_189":3410,"_227":3411,"_229":3412},{"_189":3407,"_227":3408,"_229":3409},{"_189":3404,"_227":3405,"_229":3406},[5567,5568],[],{"_189":3425,"_227":3426,"_229":3427},{"_189":3422,"_227":3423,"_229":3424},[5571,5572],[],{"_189":3438,"_227":3439,"_229":3440},{"_189":3422,"_227":3437,"_229":3424},[5575,5576],[],{"_189":3452,"_227":3453,"_229":3454},{"_189":3422,"_227":3450,"_229":3451},[5579,5580],[],{"_189":3465,"_227":3466,"_229":3467},{"_189":3422,"_227":3464,"_229":3424},[5583,5584],[],{"_189":3478,"_227":3479,"_229":3480},{"_189":3422,"_227":3477,"_229":3424},"c03f0dc304a0d1ea160715429","gift-campaigns",[5588,5589,5590,5591],{"_189":3529,"_191":3504,"_193":3530,"_195":3531,"_197":5606,"_199":3197,"_201":3198,"_203":3199,"_204":205,"_206":207,"_208":5607},{"_189":3514,"_191":3515,"_193":3516,"_195":3517,"_197":5602,"_199":3197,"_201":3519,"_203":3199,"_204":205,"_206":207,"_208":5603},{"_189":3498,"_191":3499,"_193":3500,"_195":3501,"_197":5597,"_199":3197,"_201":3198,"_203":3199,"_204":205,"_206":207,"_208":5598},{"_189":3481,"_191":3482,"_193":3483,"_195":3484,"_197":5592,"_199":3197,"_201":3198,"_203":3199,"_204":205,"_206":207,"_208":5593},[5594,5595,5596],[3289,3202],{"_189":3495,"_227":3496,"_229":3497},{"_189":3422,"_227":3494,"_229":3424},{"_189":3491,"_227":3492,"_229":3493},[5599,5600,5601],[3504,3505],{"_189":3511,"_227":3512,"_229":3513},{"_189":3422,"_227":3510,"_229":3424},{"_189":3491,"_227":3509,"_229":3493},[5604,5605],[],{"_189":3526,"_227":3527,"_229":3528},{"_189":3523,"_227":3524,"_229":3525},[5608,5609,5610],[3505,3534],{"_189":3540,"_227":3541,"_229":3542},{"_189":3422,"_227":3539,"_229":3424},{"_189":3491,"_227":3538,"_229":3493},"c86b1c2a1edac4348db04aeb1",[5613,5614],{"_189":3564,"_191":3565,"_193":3566,"_195":3567,"_197":5621,"_199":2260,"_201":3198,"_203":3569,"_204":348,"_206":349,"_208":5622},{"_189":3543,"_191":3269,"_193":3544,"_195":3545,"_197":5615,"_199":3197,"_201":3198,"_203":3199,"_204":348,"_206":349,"_208":5616},[5617,5618,5619,5620],[3504,3482,3193],{"_189":3561,"_227":3562,"_229":3563},{"_189":3558,"_227":3559,"_229":3560},{"_189":3555,"_227":3556,"_229":3557},{"_189":3552,"_227":3553,"_229":3554},[5623,5624,5625,5626],[3269,3289,3193],{"_189":305,"_227":3580,"_229":307},{"_189":800,"_227":3579,"_229":802},{"_189":797,"_227":3578,"_229":799},{"_189":3575,"_227":3576,"_229":3577},"cms2pvfgn001g2us1tj95qdrz","about-ego-bogo-free-gifts-bundles",[5630],{"_189":3581,"_191":3582,"_193":3583,"_195":3584,"_197":5631,"_199":2260,"_201":3586,"_203":3587,"_204":348,"_206":207,"_208":5632},[5633,5634,5635,5636],[],{"_189":305,"_227":3602,"_229":307},{"_189":3599,"_227":3600,"_229":3601},{"_189":3596,"_227":3597,"_229":3598},{"_189":818,"_227":3594,"_229":3595},"cmpv17ttx000o97b4207vce57","Slide-out cart with upsells & rewards","ShoppingCart","Setup, customization, and troubleshooting for the Cart Drawer app.","https://apps.shopify.com/opus-cart-drawer-cart-upsell","https://www.egohub.co/resources/help-center/cart-drawer/what-is-ego-cart-drawer-cart-upsell",36,[5645,5646,5647,5648,5649],{"_189":5881,"_191":5882,"_4347":4295,"_4324":4550,"_4349":5883},{"_189":5856,"_191":4523,"_4347":739,"_4324":4524,"_4349":5857},{"_189":5749,"_191":5750,"_4347":3878,"_4324":1334,"_4349":5751},{"_189":5731,"_191":5732,"_4347":3832,"_4324":5733,"_4349":5734},{"_189":5650,"_191":5651,"_4347":3183,"_4324":5473,"_4349":5652},"cart-cat-troubleshooting-faq","faq-frequently-asked-questions",[5653,5654,5655,5656,5657,5658,5659,5660,5661,5662,5663,5664,5665,5666,5667,5668],{"_189":3799,"_191":3800,"_193":3801,"_195":3802,"_197":5725,"_199":3804,"_201":3805,"_203":3806,"_204":348,"_206":207,"_208":5726},{"_189":3789,"_191":3790,"_193":3791,"_195":3792,"_197":5722,"_199":3625,"_201":3794,"_203":3795,"_204":1653,"_206":207,"_208":5723},{"_189":3769,"_191":3770,"_193":3771,"_195":3771,"_197":5717,"_199":3773,"_201":3774,"_203":3775,"_204":1653,"_206":207,"_208":5718},{"_189":3747,"_191":3748,"_193":3749,"_195":3750,"_197":5711,"_199":3625,"_201":3752,"_203":3753,"_204":205,"_206":207,"_208":5712},{"_189":3737,"_191":3738,"_193":3739,"_195":3739,"_197":5708,"_199":2260,"_201":3741,"_203":3742,"_204":1653,"_206":207,"_208":5709},{"_189":3723,"_191":3724,"_193":3725,"_195":3726,"_197":5704,"_199":3607,"_201":3728,"_203":3729,"_204":205,"_206":207,"_208":5705},{"_189":3710,"_191":3711,"_193":3712,"_195":3712,"_197":5700,"_199":3607,"_201":3714,"_203":3715,"_204":1653,"_206":207,"_208":5701},{"_189":3701,"_191":3702,"_193":3703,"_195":3703,"_197":5697,"_199":3607,"_201":3705,"_203":3706,"_204":1653,"_206":207,"_208":5698},{"_189":3692,"_191":3693,"_193":3694,"_195":3694,"_197":5694,"_199":3625,"_201":3696,"_203":3697,"_204":1653,"_206":207,"_208":5695},{"_189":3678,"_191":3679,"_193":3680,"_195":3681,"_197":5690,"_199":3607,"_201":3683,"_203":3684,"_204":205,"_206":207,"_208":5691},{"_189":3669,"_191":3670,"_193":3671,"_195":3671,"_197":5687,"_199":3625,"_201":3673,"_203":3674,"_204":1653,"_206":207,"_208":5688},{"_189":3656,"_191":3657,"_193":3658,"_195":3658,"_197":5683,"_199":3625,"_201":3660,"_203":3661,"_204":1653,"_206":207,"_208":5684},{"_189":3640,"_191":3641,"_193":3642,"_195":3643,"_197":5679,"_199":3607,"_201":3645,"_203":3646,"_204":1653,"_206":207,"_208":5680},{"_189":3631,"_191":3632,"_193":3633,"_195":3633,"_197":5676,"_199":3625,"_201":3635,"_203":3636,"_204":1653,"_206":207,"_208":5677},{"_189":3621,"_191":3622,"_193":3623,"_195":3623,"_197":5673,"_199":3625,"_201":3626,"_203":3627,"_204":1653,"_206":207,"_208":5674},{"_189":3603,"_191":3604,"_193":3605,"_195":3605,"_197":5669,"_199":3607,"_201":3608,"_203":3609,"_204":1653,"_206":207,"_208":5670},[5671,5672],[],{"_189":3618,"_227":3619,"_229":3620},{"_189":3615,"_227":3616,"_229":3617},[5675],[],{"_189":305,"_227":3630,"_229":307},[5678],[],{"_189":305,"_227":3639,"_229":307},[5681,5682],[],{"_189":3653,"_227":3654,"_229":3655},{"_189":3650,"_227":3651,"_229":3652},[5685,5686],[],{"_189":305,"_227":3668,"_229":307},{"_189":3665,"_227":3666,"_229":3667},[5689],[],{"_189":305,"_227":3677,"_229":307},[5692,5693],[],{"_189":3653,"_227":3691,"_229":3655},{"_189":3688,"_227":3689,"_229":3690},[5696],[],{"_189":305,"_227":3700,"_229":307},[5699],[],{"_189":305,"_227":3709,"_229":307},[5702,5703],[],{"_189":305,"_227":3722,"_229":307},{"_189":3719,"_227":3720,"_229":3721},[5706,5707],[],{"_189":3653,"_227":3736,"_229":3655},{"_189":3733,"_227":3734,"_229":3735},[5710],[3744],{"_189":305,"_227":3746,"_229":307},[5713,5714,5715,5716],[],{"_189":305,"_227":3768,"_229":307},{"_189":3765,"_227":3766,"_229":3767},{"_189":3762,"_227":3763,"_229":3764},{"_189":3759,"_227":3760,"_229":3761},[5719,5720,5721],[],{"_189":3786,"_227":3787,"_229":3788},{"_189":3783,"_227":3784,"_229":3785},{"_189":3780,"_227":3781,"_229":3782},[5724],[],{"_189":305,"_227":3798,"_229":307},[5727,5728,5729,5730],[],{"_189":3821,"_227":3822,"_229":3823},{"_189":3818,"_227":3819,"_229":3820},{"_189":3815,"_227":3816,"_229":3817},{"_189":3812,"_227":3813,"_229":3814},"cart-cat-billing-plans","billing-plans","CreditCard",[5735,5736],{"_189":3845,"_191":3846,"_193":3847,"_195":3847,"_197":5742,"_199":3607,"_201":3849,"_203":3850,"_204":205,"_206":207,"_208":5743},{"_189":3824,"_191":3825,"_193":3826,"_195":3827,"_197":5737,"_199":3607,"_201":3829,"_203":3830,"_204":205,"_206":207,"_208":5738},[5739,5740,5741],[],{"_189":3842,"_227":3843,"_229":3844},{"_189":3839,"_227":3840,"_229":3841},{"_189":3836,"_227":3837,"_229":3838},[5744,5745,5746,5747,5748],[],{"_189":305,"_227":3869,"_229":307},{"_189":3866,"_227":3867,"_229":3868},{"_189":3863,"_227":3864,"_229":3865},{"_189":3860,"_227":3861,"_229":3862},{"_189":3857,"_227":3858,"_229":3859},"cart-cat-features-setup","features-setup",[5752,5753,5754,5755,5756,5757,5758,5759,5760,5761,5762,5763,5764,5765,5766],{"_189":4166,"_191":4167,"_193":4168,"_195":4169,"_197":5845,"_199":2260,"_201":4099,"_203":4171,"_204":4130,"_206":207,"_208":5846},{"_189":4125,"_191":4102,"_193":4126,"_195":4127,"_197":5834,"_199":2260,"_201":4099,"_203":4129,"_204":4130,"_206":207,"_208":5835},{"_189":4095,"_191":3744,"_193":4096,"_195":4097,"_197":5826,"_199":2260,"_201":4099,"_203":4100,"_204":550,"_206":207,"_208":5827},{"_189":4075,"_191":4076,"_193":4077,"_195":4078,"_197":5820,"_199":484,"_201":4080,"_203":4081,"_204":348,"_206":207,"_208":5821},{"_189":4059,"_191":4060,"_193":4061,"_195":4062,"_197":5816,"_199":484,"_201":4064,"_203":4065,"_204":1653,"_206":207,"_208":5817},{"_189":4037,"_191":4038,"_193":4039,"_195":4040,"_197":5810,"_199":484,"_201":4042,"_203":4043,"_204":205,"_206":207,"_208":5811},{"_189":4017,"_191":4018,"_193":4019,"_195":4020,"_197":5805,"_199":484,"_201":4022,"_203":4023,"_204":1653,"_206":207,"_208":5806},{"_189":4001,"_191":4002,"_193":4003,"_195":4004,"_197":5801,"_199":484,"_201":4006,"_203":4007,"_204":1653,"_206":207,"_208":5802},{"_189":3985,"_191":3986,"_193":3987,"_195":3988,"_197":5797,"_199":484,"_201":3990,"_203":3991,"_204":1653,"_206":207,"_208":5798},{"_189":3967,"_191":3968,"_193":3969,"_195":3970,"_197":5792,"_199":484,"_201":3972,"_203":3973,"_204":205,"_206":207,"_208":5793},{"_189":3949,"_191":3950,"_193":3951,"_195":3952,"_197":5787,"_199":484,"_201":3954,"_203":3955,"_204":1653,"_206":207,"_208":5788},{"_189":3933,"_191":3934,"_193":3935,"_195":3936,"_197":5783,"_199":484,"_201":3938,"_203":3939,"_204":1653,"_206":207,"_208":5784},{"_189":3917,"_191":3918,"_193":3919,"_195":3920,"_197":5779,"_199":2260,"_201":3922,"_203":3923,"_204":1653,"_206":207,"_208":5780},{"_189":3891,"_191":3892,"_193":3893,"_195":3894,"_197":5772,"_199":484,"_201":3896,"_203":3897,"_204":348,"_206":207,"_208":5773},{"_189":3870,"_191":3871,"_193":3872,"_195":3873,"_197":5767,"_199":484,"_201":3875,"_203":3876,"_204":1653,"_206":207,"_208":5768},[5769,5770,5771],[],{"_189":3888,"_227":3889,"_229":3890},{"_189":3885,"_227":3886,"_229":3887},{"_189":3882,"_227":3883,"_229":3884},[5774,5775,5776,5777,5778],[],{"_189":3914,"_227":3915,"_229":3916},{"_189":3885,"_227":3913,"_229":3887},{"_189":3910,"_227":3911,"_229":3912},{"_189":3907,"_227":3908,"_229":3909},{"_189":3904,"_227":3905,"_229":3906},[5781,5782],[],{"_189":3930,"_227":3931,"_229":3932},{"_189":3927,"_227":3928,"_229":3929},[5785,5786],[],{"_189":3946,"_227":3947,"_229":3948},{"_189":3943,"_227":3944,"_229":3945},[5789,5790,5791],[],{"_189":3964,"_227":3965,"_229":3966},{"_189":3885,"_227":3963,"_229":3887},{"_189":3960,"_227":3961,"_229":3962},[5794,5795,5796],[],{"_189":3982,"_227":3983,"_229":3984},{"_189":3885,"_227":3981,"_229":3887},{"_189":3978,"_227":3979,"_229":3980},[5799,5800],[],{"_189":3998,"_227":3999,"_229":4000},{"_189":3995,"_227":3996,"_229":3997},[5803,5804],[],{"_189":4014,"_227":4015,"_229":4016},{"_189":4011,"_227":4012,"_229":4013},[5807,5808,5809],[],{"_189":4034,"_227":4035,"_229":4036},{"_189":4031,"_227":4032,"_229":4033},{"_189":4028,"_227":4029,"_229":4030},[5812,5813,5814,5815],[],{"_189":4056,"_227":4057,"_229":4058},{"_189":3885,"_227":4055,"_229":3887},{"_189":4052,"_227":4053,"_229":4054},{"_189":4049,"_227":4050,"_229":4051},[5818,5819],[],{"_189":4072,"_227":4073,"_229":4074},{"_189":4069,"_227":4070,"_229":4071},[5822,5823,5824,5825],[],{"_189":4092,"_227":4093,"_229":4094},{"_189":3885,"_227":4091,"_229":3887},{"_189":4088,"_227":4089,"_229":4090},{"_189":3907,"_227":4087,"_229":3909},[5828,5829,5830,5831,5832,5833],[4102,3950],{"_189":4122,"_227":4123,"_229":4124},{"_189":4119,"_227":4120,"_229":4121},{"_189":4116,"_227":4117,"_229":4118},{"_189":4113,"_227":4114,"_229":4115},{"_189":4110,"_227":4111,"_229":4112},{"_189":852,"_227":4109,"_229":854},[5836,5837,5838,5839,5840,5841,5842,5843,5844],[3744,3950],{"_189":4163,"_227":4164,"_229":4165},{"_189":870,"_227":4162,"_229":872},{"_189":4159,"_227":4160,"_229":4161},{"_189":4156,"_227":4157,"_229":4158},{"_189":4153,"_227":4154,"_229":4155},{"_189":4150,"_227":4151,"_229":4152},{"_189":4147,"_227":4148,"_229":4149},{"_189":4144,"_227":4145,"_229":4146},{"_189":4141,"_227":4142,"_229":4143},[5847,5848,5849,5850,5851,5852,5853,5854,5855],[3744,4076],{"_189":4204,"_227":4205,"_229":4206},{"_189":4201,"_227":4202,"_229":4203},{"_189":4198,"_227":4199,"_229":4200},{"_189":4195,"_227":4196,"_229":4197},{"_189":4192,"_227":4193,"_229":4194},{"_189":4189,"_227":4190,"_229":4191},{"_189":4186,"_227":4187,"_229":4188},{"_189":4183,"_227":4184,"_229":4185},{"_189":852,"_227":4182,"_229":854},"cart-cat-getting-started",[5858,5859],{"_189":4227,"_191":4228,"_193":4229,"_195":4230,"_197":5866,"_199":3607,"_201":4232,"_203":4233,"_204":348,"_206":207,"_208":5867},{"_189":4207,"_191":4208,"_193":4209,"_195":4210,"_197":5860,"_199":3625,"_201":4212,"_203":4213,"_204":348,"_206":207,"_208":5861},[5862,5863,5864,5865],[],{"_189":305,"_227":4226,"_229":307},{"_189":800,"_227":4225,"_229":802},{"_189":4222,"_227":4223,"_229":4224},{"_189":4219,"_227":4220,"_229":4221},[5868,5869,5870,5871,5872,5873,5874,5875,5876,5877,5878,5879,5880],[],{"_189":4284,"_227":4285,"_229":4286},{"_189":4281,"_227":4282,"_229":4283},{"_189":4278,"_227":4279,"_229":4280},{"_189":4275,"_227":4276,"_229":4277},{"_189":4272,"_227":4273,"_229":4274},{"_189":4269,"_227":4270,"_229":4271},{"_189":4266,"_227":4267,"_229":4268},{"_189":4263,"_227":4264,"_229":4265},{"_189":4260,"_227":4261,"_229":4262},{"_189":4257,"_227":4258,"_229":4259},{"_189":4254,"_227":4255,"_229":4256},{"_189":4251,"_227":4252,"_229":4253},{"_189":4248,"_227":4249,"_229":4250},"cms6ysa2w01db2us1h4h53eez","about-ego-cart-drawer-cart-upsell",[5884],{"_189":4287,"_191":4288,"_193":4289,"_195":4290,"_197":5885,"_199":484,"_201":4292,"_203":4293,"_204":348,"_206":207,"_208":5886},[5887,5888,5889,5890],[],{"_189":305,"_227":4309,"_229":307},{"_189":4306,"_227":4307,"_229":4308},{"_189":4303,"_227":4304,"_229":4305},{"_189":4300,"_227":4301,"_229":4302},"user","admin","appUrl","https://www.egohub.co"]

How can we help?

Browse by App

Ego Cart Drawer

Ego BOGO Free Gifts & Bundles

Ego Subscriptions

Ego Sticky Add to Cart

EG Facebook Pixel Tiktok Pixel

Ego Mobile App Builder

Ego Contact Form Builder Survey

Ego Bundles

Ego Preorder

Ego Order Tracking

Popular Articles